Merva ESA Operations Guide

MERVA for ESA
Operations Guide
Version 4 Release 1
SH12-6375-08
MERVA for ESA
Operations Guide
Version 4 Release 1
SH12-6375-08
Note!
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information under Appendix B,
Notices, on page 397.
Ninth Edition
This edition applies to Version 4 Release 1 of IBM MERVA for ESA (5648-B29) and to all subsequent releases and
modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.
This edition replaces SH12-6375-07. Changes to this edition are marked with a vertical bar.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1987, 2007. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Summary of Changes
. . . . . . . . xi
Part 1. MERVA ESA Operator

Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1. Introduction to the
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Entering Operator Commands . . . . . . .
Entering Commands at the System Console . .
Entering Commands at a Display Station . . .
The Command Format . . . . . . . . . .
Command Words . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help for Command Words . . . . . . . .
Program Function Keys . . . . . . . . . .
Authorized Users . . . . . . . . . . . .
MERVA System Control. . . . . . . . . .
MSC Main Menu and Local Help (ACMM) . .
MERVA Operator Command Response Display
(AC00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MERVA Link ASP List Display (AC01) . . . .
MERVA Link Specific ASP/MTP Display (AC02)
MERVA Link SCP List Display (AC03) . . . .
MERVA Link PT Header Information Display
(AC04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keeping the Command on the Command Line .
Partner MERVA System Control . . . . . . .
The MERVA Link System Control Process List .
Connecting to a Partner MERVA System . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
.
.
.
.
6
7
7
7
.
.
.
.
.
7
7
7
8
8
Chapter 2. Starting MERVA ESA . . . . 11

Starting
Starting
Starting
Starting
MERVA
MERVA
MERVA
MERVA
ESA under CICS/VSE . . . . .

ESA under CICS in z/OS . . . .
ESA under IMS/ESA in z/OS . .
ESA in a Multisystem Environment
11
12
13
13
Chapter 3. Stopping MERVA ESA . . . 15

Chapter 4. Operating the Base
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Stopping MERVA ESA (CANCEL and TERMINAT)
Changing Logical Terminal Names (CF) . . . .
Changing the Next Function (CFNEXT) . . . .
Changing the Routing Table (CFROUT) . . . .
Displaying the Message Counter Log (DCLOG) .
Displaying the Function Status (DF) . . . . .
Displaying the Functions from Transaction Table
(DFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Large Message Cluster Status
(DLMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copyright IBM Corp. 1987, 2007
.
.
.
.
.
17
19
21
22
23
24
. 27
. 30
Displaying the Large Message Cluster Statistics

(DLMCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Unsolicited Messages (DM) . . . . .
Displaying the Nucleus Servers (DNS) . . . . .
Displaying the Program Status (DP) . . . . . .
Displaying the Queue Status (DQ) . . . . . . .
Displaying the Queues Sorted (DQSORTED) . . .
Displaying the User Status (DU) . . . . . . .
Forcing Off Users (FORCE) . . . . . . . . .
Setting Functions to HOLD (HF) . . . . . . .
Set the Journal Switch Status (JSET) . . . . . .
Display the Status of the Journal Data Sets (JSTAT)
Switch the Journal Data Sets (JSWITCH) . . . . .
Replacing a Routing Module (NEWCOPY) . . . .
Setting Priorities for Programs Defined in DSLNPTT
(PRIORITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the Queue Trace (QSWITCH) . . . . .
Resetting Shutdown (RESHUT) . . . . . . . .
Switching the Routing Trace (RSWITCH) . . . .
Starting Functions (SF) . . . . . . . . . .
Shutting Down User Sessions (SHUTDOWN) . . .
Starting a Program Defined in DSLNPTT (START)
Stopping a Program Defined in DSLNPTT (STOP)
Stopping MERVA ESA (TERMINAT) . . . . . .
Chapter 5. Operating the SWIFT Link
58
61
64
65
68
70
72
74
76
77
Considerations when using WebSphere BI for FN

Extension for SWIFTNet . . . . . . . . .
Aborting the FIN Application (ABORTAP) . . .
Aborting Lines to the SWIFT Network (ABORTLI)
Aborting Master Logical Terminals (ABORTLT) .
Closing a Line (CLOSE) . . . . . . . . .
Displaying and Updating the Delivery Subset
Mnemonics (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying X.25 Interface Information (DIVA) . .
Displaying the Line and Link Status (DL) . . .
Displaying the Active Lines and Links (DLA) .
Starting the Connection to the SWIFT Network
(LOGIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending the Connection to the SWIFT Network
(LOGOUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quitting FIN Applications (QUIT) . . . . .
Selecting a FIN Application (SELECT) . . . .
Setting Parameters for a Master Logical Terminal
(SETLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing SWIFT Link Commands for Parallel
Processing (SWIFTII) . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of Session Keys for Login and Select
Chapter 6. Operating the Telex Link

Operating the Telex Link via a Fault-Tolerant
System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring the Telex Link Session (TXDISP) .
Example of the Display from a TXDISP
Command . . . . . . . . . . .
32
34
37
39
41
45
47
49
51
53
55
56
57
. 77
. 78
82
. 84
. 88
. 90
. 92
. 98
. 102
. 104
. 108
. 112
. 116
. 121
. 124
126
129
.
.
. 129
. 131
. 131
iii
Signing Off the Session with the Telex Interface

Program (TXOFF) . . . . . . . . . . .
Signing On the Session with the Telex Interface
Program (TXON) . . . . . . . . . . .
. 133
. 135
Reset Resource Characteristics .

Start ACC in Special Mode . .
Set Resource Characteristics .
Terminate the MERVA Link USS
. . .
. . .
. . .
Daemon
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
189
190
191
192
Chapter 7. Operating MERVA Link

ESA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Chapter 9. Operating Financial

Message Transfer/ESA (FMT/ESA) . . 193
Overview of the MERVA Link Control within MSC

Displaying the ASP List . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Specific ASP/MTP Parameters . . .
Displaying ASP/MTP Error Codes . . . . .
Interpreting ASP/MTP Error Codes . . . . .
Displaying the SCP List . . . . . . . . .
Displaying PT Header Information . . . . .
The MERVA Link Commands of the MERVA
System Control Facility . . . . . . . . . .
MERVA Link Command Considerations . . .
Setting the Status of an ASP to CLOSED
(ACLOSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Status of an ASP to OPEN (AOPEN)
Starting a Sending ASP (ASTART) . . . . .
Scrolling through a List of ASPs or SCPs
(BACKWARD and FORWARD) . . . . . .
Disabling a Receiving ASP (DISABLE) . . . .
Displaying an ASP (DISPLAY) . . . . . . .
Displaying PT Header Information (DPTH) . .
Displaying Information of a Specific ASP (DSA)
Enabling MERVA Link Resources (ENABLE) . .
Obtaining Help Information (EXPLAIN) . . .
Setting the Status of an ASP to HOLD (HOLD)
Recovering from a Delivery Error (IPRECOV)
Starting an ASP (KICKOFF) . . . . . . .
Resynchronizing Partner ASPs (LCRESET and
LRRESET) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the ASP Status Subset (LSTALL) . . .
Setting the ASP Status Subset (LSTINOP) . . .
Displaying the Next ASP or SCP Group
(NEXTGRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching to a Partner MERVA System (NODE
and PS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering In-Process Messages (RECOVER)
Refreshing ASP List in the IMS Environment
(REFRESH) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying the Processing Environment
Parameters (SET and RESET) . . . . . . .
137
137
140
143
145
146
148
Initializing an Input Sequence Number . . .

Displaying and Modifying a Sequence Number
Deleting a Sequence Number . . . . . .
Setting the Output Sequence Number . . .
150
150
Chapter 10. Running the MERVA

Message Processing Client/Server . . 201
152
153
154
Chapter 11. Sequential Data Set Input

(DSLSDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
165
166
167
168
169
170
172
173
174
Chapter 8. Operating MERVA Link

USS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Overview of the MERVA Link Control within ACC
ACC Execution Environment . . . . . . .
ACC Command Format . . . . . . . . .
ACC Command Groups . . . . . . . . .
The ACC Commands . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform an Error Analysis . . . . . . . .
Export MERVA Link USS Configuration . . .
Display Parameters and Resource Status
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explain Error Information . . . . . . . .
Show ACC Command Help Information . . .
List Resource Groups . . . . . . . . . .
iv
Operations Guide
177
177
178
178
178
178
179
180
182
186
187
.
.
.
.
Part 2. Running Batch Programs
DSLSDI - Input Program under z/OS .

DSLSDI - Input Program under VSE . .
DSLSDI - Parameters . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
194
196
196
197
199
.
.
.
. 204
. 204
. 205
Chapter 12. Sequential Data Set

Output (DSLSDO) . . . . . . . . . 207
DSLSDO - Output Program under z/OS .
DSLSDO - Output Program under VSE . .
DSLSDO - Parameters . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 208
. 208
. 209
Chapter 13. System Printer Output

(DSLSDY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
DSLSDY - Print Program under z/OS .
DSLSDY - Print Program under VSE . .
DSLSDY - Parameters . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 211
. 211
. 212
Chapter 14. Sequential Data Set Input

(DSLSDIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Invoke DSLSDIR via ISPF Panel (z/OS only) .
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Runtime Parameters . . . . . . . .
z/OS DD Statements . . . . . . . .
First-Time Users . . . . . . . . .
Invoke DSLSDIR via JCL . . . . . . .
Job Control Statements for z/OS . . . .
Job Control Statements for VSE . . . .
EDIFACT FINPAY Conversion . . . . .
Customization . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Printout . . . . . . . . .
Listing Fields . . . . . . . . . .
Messages and Codes . . . . . . . .
Comparison of DSLSDIR with DSLSDI . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
213
213
214
216
216
218
218
219
219
222
223
223
226
228
228
Chapter 15. Sequential Data Set Load

in REXX (DSLSDLR) . . . . . . . . 231
Input Data Set Layout . . . .
Job Control Statements for z/OS .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 231
. 231
Data Set Names . .

Job Control Statements for
Data Set Names . .
Runtime Parameters . .
Required Parameters .
Optional Parameters .
Customization . . . .
Sample Printout . . .
Listing Fields . . . .
Messages and Codes . .
. .
VSE
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
232
232
233
233
233
234
234
235
236
237

Output in REXX (DSLSDOR) . . . . . 239
Invoke DSLSDOR via ISPF Panel (z/OS only)
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
z/OS DD Statements . . . . . . . .
First-Time Users . . . . . . . . .
Invoke DSLSDOR via JCL . . . . . . .
Job Control Statements for z/OS . . . .
Job Control Statements for VSE . . . .
EDIFACT FINPAY Conversion . . . . .
Customization . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Printout . . . . . . . . .
Listing Fields . . . . . . . . . .
Messages and Codes . . . . . . . .
Comparison of DSLSDOR with DSLSDO . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
239
239
240
242
243
245
245
246
247
250
251
252
253
255
255
Part 3. Maintaining MERVA ESA
279
Chapter 19. Using the Queue Data Set

Utility DSLQDSUT . . . . . . . . . 281
Job Control Statements
z/OS . . . . . .
FORMAT . . . .
FORMATL . . .
COPY . . . . .
MODIFY . . . .
Job Control Statements
FORMAT . . . .
FORMATL . . .
COPY . . . . .
MODIFY . . . .
for
.
.
.
.
.
for
.
.
.
.
DSLQDSUT under
. . . . . . . . . 282
. . . . . . . . . 282
. . . . . . . . . 283
. . . . . . . . . 284
. . . . . . . . . 284
DSLQDSUT under VSE 286
. . . . . . . . . 286
. . . . . . . . . 287
. . . . . . . . . 288
. . . . . . . . . 288
Chapter 20. Using the Large Message

Cluster Maintenance Utility DSLQMNT. 291
Job Control Statements under z/OS . . . . . .
Reorganization of the Large Message Cluster
Copying the New LMC into the Old LMC . . .
Job Control Statements under VSE . . . . . .
Copying the New LMC into the Old LMC . . .
Statistics Report from DSLQMNT . . . . . .
Sample Statistics Report for Old and New Large
Message Cluster . . . . . . . . . . .
291
291
292
292
292
293
294
295

Unload in REXX (DSLSDUR) . . . . . 257
Chapter 21. Maintaining the Journal

Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Unload/Reload Data Set Layout

Job Control Statements for z/OS
Data Set Names . . . .
Job Control Statements for VSE
Runtime Parameters . . . .
Required Parameters . . .
Optional Parameters . . .
Customization . . . . . .
Sample Printout . . . . .
Listing Fields . . . . . .
Messages and Codes . . . .
Printing the Journal Data Sets . . . .

Job Control Statements under z/OS .
Job Control Statements under VSE .
DB2 Journal Batch Utility (DSLJRDUL) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
257
258
259
259
259
260
260
260
261
261
262
263
Chapter 18. Sequential Data Set Print

in REXX (DSLSDYR) . . . . . . . . 265
Runtime Parameters . . . .
Required Parameters . . .
Optional Parameters . . .
Other Parameters . . . .
Required Parameters for VSE
Customization . . . . . .
Sample Printout . . . . .
Listing Fields . . . . . .
Messages and Codes . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
265
266
267
267
267
268
268
270
271
272
273
276
277
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
299
299
300
300
Chapter 22. Using the SPA File

Initialization Program . . . . . . . . 305
Chapter 23. Using the General File
Utility DSLFLUT . . . . . . . . . . 307
Initializing a File . . . .
Listing Records of a File . .
Report Layout . . . . .
Coding Control Statements .
Environment . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
307
307
308
308
310
Chapter 24. Maintaining the

MERVA ESA Nicknames File . . . . . 313
Job Control Statements for z/OS . . . . . . .
Initializing the MERVA ESA Nicknames File
Listing Records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Control Statements for VSE . . . . . . .
Listing Records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
313
313
314
315
315
315
Chapter 25. Maintaining the Telex

Correspondents File . . . . . . . . 317
Job Control Statements for z/OS . . . . .
Initializing the Telex Correspondents File .
Listing Records of the Telex Correspondents
Job Control Statements for VSE . . . . .
Initializing the Telex Correspondents File .
Listing Records of the Telex Correspondents
. .
. .
File
. .
. .
File
317
317
318
319
319
319
Chapter 26. Maintaining the SWIFT

Correspondents File . . . . . . . . 321
Job Control Statements for z/OS . . . . . .
Initializing the SWIFT Correspondents File .
Listing Records of the SWIFT Correspondents
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Control Statements for VSE . . . . . .
Initializing the SWIFT Correspondents File .
Listing Records of the SWIFT Correspondents
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the SWIFT Correspondents File Utility
DWSCORUT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying the BIC Database Plus CD-ROM to
MERVA ESA running under z/OS . . . .
Copying the BIC Database Plus CD-ROM to
MERVA ESA running under VSE . . . . .
Using the BIC Update CD-ROM . . . . .
Report Layout . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding Control Statements . . . . . . .
Environment . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Tape Conversion Utility DWSBICCV .
. 321
. 321
. 322
. 323
. 323
. 323
. 324
. 325
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
325
327
327
327
329
329
331
332
332
332
Chapter 27. Maintaining the SWIFT

Currency Code File . . . . . . . . . 335
Job Control Statements for z/OS . . . . . .
Initializing the SWIFT Currency Code File . .
Listing Records of the SWIFT Currency Code
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Control Statements for VSE . . . . . .
Initializing the SWIFT Currency Code File . .
Listing Records of the SWIFT Currency Code
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the SWIFT Currency Code File Utility
DWSCURUT . . . . . . . . . . . .
Report Layout . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding Control Statements . . . . . . .
Environment . . . . . . . . . . .
. 335
. 335
. 336
. 337
. 337
. 337
.
.
.
.
.
.
338
338
338
340
340
342
Chapter 28. Maintaining the

Authenticator-Key File . . . . . . . 343
Calling the DWSAUTLD Program . . . .
Types of Input Record Used by DWSAUTLD .
FORMATx Records . . . . . . . .
ADDxx Records . . . . . . . . .
vi
Operations Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
343
344
345
346
REPxx Records . . . . . . . .
LIS0 Record . . . . . . . . .
DEL0 Record . . . . . . . .
EXC0 Record . . . . . . . .
UNL0 Record . . . . . . . .
CHG0 Record . . . . . . . .
Functions from Previous Versions .
Changing the STK Key . . . . . .
Job Control Statements for z/OS . . .
Loading the Authenticator-Key File .
Unloading the Authenticator-Key File
Reloading the Authenticator-Key File
Job Control Statements for VSE . . .
Loading the Authenticator-Key File .
MERVA USE Workstation programs .
Examples of Reports . . . . . . .
Using the REPORT function . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
to
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
347
347
349
350
350
351
351
351
351
352
352
353
354
354
354
356
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 357
. 358
. 360
Chapter 29. Using the Message

Counter Log Report Utility DSLCNTUT 363
Job Control Statements under z/OS .
Job Control Statements under VSE .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 363
. 363
Chapter 30. Using Queue Batch Utility

(DSLSQB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Starting the Queue Batch Utility
Controlling the Utility Program
The CONSTANTS Section .
The VARIABLES Section. .
The SELECTION Section .
The OPERATION Section .
Processing Details . . . .
JCL EXEC PARM parameters .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
365
366
367
368
370
371
372
373
Chapter 31. More Batch Utilities . . . 375

Queue Data Set Utilities . . .
Journal Utilities. . . . . .
User File Utilities . . . . .
Message Count Recovery Utility
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
375
375
375
375
Part 4. Reacting to Abnormal

Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Chapter 32. How to React to
MERVA ESA Problems . . . . . . . 379
General Problems . . . . . . . . .
Problems with Signing On to MERVA ESA
If a Transaction Is in a Wait State . . . .
If a Batch Program Is in a Wait State . .
If the Queue Data Set Is Full . . . . .
Queue Data Set Restart . . . . . . .
If the Journal Data Sets Are Full . . . .
MERVA ESA Restart in a Multisystem
Environment . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
379
379
379
380
380
380
380
. 380
Chapter 33. How to React to Problems

with the SWIFT Link . . . . . . . . 383
If the Queue Data Set Is Full . . . . . .
If You Have Problems with the Connection to
SWIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 383
. 383

with the Telex Link . . . . . . . . . 385
Telex Link via a Workstation . . . .
Telex Link via a Fault-Tolerant System .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 385
. 385

with MERVA Link . . . . . . . . . . 387
If Messages in the Send Queue Are Not Processed 387
If Receiving Process Errors Are Found . . . . . 388
The
The
The
The
The
Base Functions Operator Commands .

SWIFT Link Operator Commands . .
MERVA Link ESA Operator Commands
MERVA Link USS Operator Commands
Telex Link Operator Commands . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
391
393
394
395
396
Appendix B. Notices . . . . . . . . 397

Trademarks .
. 398
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
401
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
MERVA ESA Publications
MERVA ESA Components
Other IBM Publications .
S.W.I.F.T. Publications .
. . . . .
Publications .
. . . . .
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
413
413
413
413
Part 5. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 389
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Appendix A. MERVA ESA Operator

Command Reference . . . . . . . . 391
MERVA Requirement Request . . . . 421
Contents
vii
viii
Operations Guide
About This Book

This book is written for the operators of the IBM licensed program Message Entry
and Routing with Interfaces to Various Applications ESA Version 4 (abbreviated to
MERVA ESA in this book). The book describes the facilities available to you to
carry out the tasks of:
v Starting and stopping MERVA ESA and its components
v Controlling and monitoring MERVA ESA and its components
v Using the MERVA ESA utility programs
v Dealing with problems arising from the use of MERVA ESA and its components.
Before using this book you should be familiar with MERVA for ESA Concepts and
Components, which describes the functions, services, and utilities supplied. It is
aimed at readers who want to get a general idea of the message concept, queues,
routing, message handling, and the network links.
It is assumed that you are familiar with the operating system under which
MERVA ESA is run.
If the SWIFT Link is installed, you should be familiar with SWIFT terminology as
defined in the S.W.I.F.T. User Handbook, published by the Society for Worldwide
Interbank Financial Telecommunication s.c. in La Hulpe, Belgium.
If the Telex Link is installed, you should be familiar with telex terminology as
defined in the documentation provided by your local telecommunications
authority.
Notation conventions are described in Chapter 1, Introduction to the Commands,
on page 3. All responses to the commands of MERVA ESA and its components are
described in MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
Note: In this book the examples of job-control statements (JCLs) show only the
main components as seen from MERVA ESA. Adapt these examples to meet
the requirements of your installation.
The job control statements for VSE are based on the JCL specifications for
VSE/ESA Version 2.
The term CICS is used to refer to CICS/ESA, CICS TS, and CICS/VSE. The
term IMS is used to refer to IMS/ESA.
ix
Operations Guide
Summary of Changes
|
This edition reflects minor editorial changes.
xi
xii
Operations Guide
Part 1. MERVA ESA Operator Commands

The commands in these chapters are presented in alphabetical order.
Operations Guide
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Commands

In MERVA ESA, there are the following types of command:
v User commands, which are described in detail in the MERVA for ESA Users
Guide.
v Operator commands, which are described in this book.
Entering Operator Commands

You can enter operator commands at either the system console, or a 327x display
station. You can, however, enter the MERVA Link operator commands only at a
327x display station. The following explains how you enter commands at a console
or a display station.
Entering Commands at the System Console

Entering commands at the operating system console requires the MERVA ESA
console program DSLNMOP to be started automatically during the MERVA ESA
startup, or manually by an authorized MERVA ESA operator using a display
station.
The MERVA ESA console program issues the message DSL001A Enter a MERVA
command at the console, indicating that you can now enter MERVA ESA commands
at the system console:
v If you are working under VSE, enter the CICS transaction code defined for the
program DSLCMO in your installation, followed by the operator command.
The program DSLCMO always returns to an inactive state after an operator
command has been processed. Therefore, each MERVA ESA operator command
must be preceded by the transaction code.
v If you are working under z/OS, enter the MERVA ESA operator commands as
replies to the DSL001A Enter a MERVA command message. Use the z/OS reply
command, followed by the appropriate MERVA ESA operator command.
You cannot use the operating system console to enter MERVA Link operator
commands.
Entering Commands at a Display Station

You can enter operator commands at an IBM 327x display station when you are
authorized to use the MERVA ESA Operator Command function (CMD) or the
MERVA System Control function (MSC). To do so, you must sign on to
MERVA ESA at any display station connected to IMS or CICS that has been
authorized for signing on to MERVA ESA. See the MERVA for ESA Users Guide for
information on signing on to MERVA ESA. See MERVA System Control on page
6 for information on the MERVA System Control function.
The Command Format

A MERVA ESA command can consist of either a command word with one or more
parameters, or just a command word.
If a command contains any parameters, you must separate the command word and
each of its parameters with a blank or a comma (,). MERVA ESA supports only
positional parameters; keyword parameters are not supported. Therefore, when a
parameter is not specified in a command and one of the parameters that follows
the omitted parameter is specified, the omission must be indicated by specifying
all the necessary commas or blanks. For example, the omission of the first
parameter must be entered:
comword,,parm2
or
comword ,parm2
The following shows the possible formats that you can use to enter commands:
comword
comword
parm1 parm2 parm3 ...... parm20
comword
parm1,parm2,parm3,......,parm20
Command Words
A command word (comword) can have 1 to 8 characters. You can abbreviate the
command words with more than 4 characters to their first 4 characters. The format
description shows the shortest acceptable abbreviation. For example, the following
is the format of the reshut command:
reshut
This means that resh, reshu, and reshut are all acceptable forms of this command.
Some special abbreviations are defined for some of the command words of
MERVA ESA. These are given on a separate line in the command description. For
example, the abbreviation rs is defined for the command word reshut.
You can enter the command words and the abbreviations in either uppercase or
lowercase.
Parameters
A parameter (parm) can have 1 to 63 characters. If the parameter contains a blank,
comma, or any other special character, enclose the parameter in single quotation
marks. For example, if you use the parameter CH,ICE, enter it as 'CH,ICE'.
MERVA ESA uses the single quotation marks to identify the beginning and end of
the parameter.
If a parameter contains a single quotation mark, enter two single quotation marks
instead. For example, enter the parameter CH'ICE as 'CH''ICE', where two single
quotation marks replace the quotation mark that is part of the parameter. The
beginning and end of the parameter are marked by single quotation marks ('). Do
not use double quotation marks (").
Do not include the single quotation marks enclosing the parameter when
determining the length of a parameter. If parameters are shown in italics in the
format description, they can be substituted by an appropriate value. You can enter
parameters in either uppercase or lowercase.
Optional Parameters
Parameters for some of the commands are optional. You can enter one, a
combination, or none of the optional parameters. Brackets ([]) show that the
Operations Guide
parameter is optional. Braces ({}) show that you must select one option from
several. A bar (|) is used to separate a list of parameters of which one can be
selected. You must not enter the brackets, braces, or bars.
An underlined parameter in the format description shows a default option. If no
parameter is entered for the command, MERVA ESA assumes the underlined
default.
diva
line [,Buffers | States | Vtambnd]
Mandatory Parameters: You must enter a parameter for some of the commands.
Mandatory parameters are shown without brackets or braces.
force
userid
Help for Command Words

You can get help information for all MERVA ESA command codes when working
at a display station in a MERVA ESA end user session. The help panel is displayed
by entering the command:
help comword
The full command word must be specified as parameter, abbreviations or
synonyms will not work. For example,
help login
will display the page with the explanation of the login command. This page is
defined in the MCB for the SWIFT Link operator commands.
Program Function Keys

You can use the predefined program function (PF) keys instead of entering a
command. For details on the PF-key settings refer to the MERVA for ESA
Customization Guide.
Authorized Users
To use MERVA ESA operator commands you must be authorized to use the CMD
or the MSC function. To use the MERVA Link operator commands you must be
authorized to use the MSC function. The authorization to use a MERVA ESA
function is defined in the User File record of the user.
The use of some MERVA ESA operator commands is restricted to authorized users.
Such restrictions are indicated in the command description of this book. The
authorization for using restricted operator commands is determined as follows:
v By the OPID parameter in the MERVA ESA customization parameter module
DSLPRM.
v By the MQI parameter in the MERVA ESA function table DSLFNTT.
v By the User Type in the User File record.
v When using commands for the Telex Link via a fault-tolerant system the user ID
must start with one of the following:
The 3 characters MAS.
The 3 characters specified with the OPNAM parameter in the Telex Link
customization parameter module ENLPRM.
v By the restrictions set up during the customization of MERVA ESA in the user
exit DSLNCU01.
MERVA System Control

The MERVA System Control Facility (MSC) provides a user interface to enter both
MERVA ESA operator commands and MERVA Link operator commands. The MSC
function uses several panels. The name of a panel is displayed in the upper left
corner. All commands can be entered in any panel of the MSC function. Examples
of the panels are in Chapter 7, Operating MERVA Link ESA, on page 137. A
short description of each panel follows.
MSC Main Menu and Local Help (ACMM)

When you have selected the MSC function in the MERVA ESA Function Selection
menu, the MSC Main Menu (ACMM) is displayed. This panel contains a short
description of the MERVA System Control Facility, and offers local help for the
commands of all MERVA components.
The local help consists of several pages, and you can use the program function
keys (PF keys) 7 and 8 to page backward and forward. You can select a MERVA
component directly by positioning the cursor and pressing the ENTER key. You
can enter commands on any page of these help panels.
When you enter the first command, one of the other panels is displayed with the
command response. To redisplay the ACMM panel, press PF 9 (SWAP) once or
twice, depending on the panel currently displayed, or enter the command cmd or
cmdu.
If you enter the command explain or xpl on the ACMM panel, the abbreviations of
all MERVA Base, SWIFT Link commands, and Telex Link commands when using a
fault-tolerant system are displayed. You can enter any command on this panel.
Press the ENTER key to return to the ACMM panel.
MERVA Operator Command Response Display (AC00)

The responses to MERVA Base and SWIFT Link commands, or commands for Telex
Link are displayed on the panel AC00. The panel shows the command response
and the current time. The last command remains displayed on the command line.
If a command response is longer than one page, you can use the PF 7 and PF 8
keys to page backward and forward in the response. For example, when you use
the test command jrn (refer to the MERVA for ESA Installation Guide for details), the
response can be more than one page, depending on the journal record. A
maximum of five pages is supported by the AC00 panel. The continuation
indicator (three periods at the end of the last command response data line) tells
you that more data is available and that it can be displayed in the next page. Up to
89 command response lines can be displayed in these five pages. There is no
continuation indicator at the end of line 89.
If you enter the command explain or xpl on the AC00 panel, the abbreviations of
all MERVA Base and SWIFT Link commands and Telex Link commands are
displayed.
You can enter any command or press any PF key on this panel. If you press the
ENTER key, the ACMM panel is displayed. You cannot return to the AC00 panel
and redisplay the command response.
Operations Guide
MERVA Link ASP List Display (AC01)

The MSC panel AC01 shows a list of the application support process (ASP) entries
defined in the MERVA Link Partner Table (see Chapter 7, Operating MERVA Link
ESA, on page 137 for details). Each ASP is displayed in one line.
If you enter the command explain or xpl on the AC01 panel, a subset of the
MERVA Link commands is displayed. You can enter any command or press any PF
key on this panel. If you press the ENTER key, the AC01 panel is redisplayed.
MERVA Link Specific ASP/MTP Display (AC02)

The MSC panel AC02 shows detailed information of a specific ASP and its
associated message transfer process (MTP). See Chapter 7, Operating MERVA Link
ESA, on page 137 for details.
If you enter the command explain or xpl on the AC02 panel, an explanation of the
data displayed on the AC02 panel is shown. You can enter any command or press
any PF key on this panel. If you press the ENTER key, the AC02 panel is
redisplayed.
MERVA Link SCP List Display (AC03)

The MSC panel AC03 is used by the Partner MERVA System Control Function to
display the list of partner MERVA systems. For more information, refer to Partner
MERVA System Control.
MERVA Link PT Header Information Display (AC04)

The MSC panel AC04 is used to display information of a MERVA Link system:
v MERVA Link Partner Table Header information.
v The MERVA ESA identifier from DSLPRM.
v An indicator of the applicable data communication subsystem (CICS/MVS,
CICS/ESA, or CICS/VSE for MERVA ESA CICS, or APPC/MVS for
MERVA ESA IMS).
v In the MERVA ESA CICS environment, parameters and status information of the
ASP Monitor. The ASP Monitor is not supported in the MERVA ESA IMS
environment.
If you enter the command explain or xpl on the AC04 panel, an explanation of the
data displayed on the AC04 panel is shown. You can enter any command or press
any PF key on this panel. If you press the ENTER key, the AC04 panel is
redisplayed.
Keeping the Command on the Command Line

The MERVA System Control Facility keeps the command in the command line for
the majority of the commands. This is helpful if the same command is needed
again, or if the command was incorrect and needs correction.
Partner MERVA System Control

A Partner MERVA System Control function is part of the MERVA System Control
Facility. It provides the necessary functionality to operate a partner MERVA system
within the local MSC function. The partner MERVA system must be connected to
the local system through MERVA Link.
When the target MERVA system has been selected from a partner MERVA system
list (SCP list) or has been directly specified, the MSC main menu of the partner
MERVA system appears, and then all commands are executed in the partner
MERVA system. Note that the user must have a user ID on the remote system.
Some elements of the Partner MERVA System Control Function are described in
the following sections.
The MERVA Link System Control Process List

The panel AC03 is used by the Partner MERVA System Control Function to display
the list of the MERVA Link System Control Processes (SCPs). It is the set of partner
MERVA systems that can be operated from the local MSC function. Enter the
command node or ps (for partner system) to display this list.
If this list does not fit on one page of the panel, you can use the scrolling keys (PF
6, PF 7, and PF 8) to display any partner MERVA system defined in the MERVA
Link Partner Table (SCP entries). You can select a partner MERVA system in this
list and switch to it by placing the cursor at the required entry and pressing PF 4
(SELECT).
When the command explain (or xpl) is entered on the AC03 panel, an environment
explanation is displayed that contains a short description of the Partner MERVA
System Control Function. Enter any command or press any PF key on this
explanation panel to execute a function, or press the ENTER key to return to the
SCP List Display.
Connecting to a Partner MERVA System

MERVA ESA provides methods by which you can connect to other MERVA
systems, execute commands there, and switch back to the local system.
Direct Partner System Selection

You can directly switch from any panel in any partner MERVA system to a specific
other partner MERVA system using the node or ps commands together with a
valid partner MERVA system name. The MERVA Link node name of your local
MERVA system is always a valid partner MERVA system name. It can be used to
switch from a partner MERVA system back to the local MERVA system.
Switching to Another Partner MERVA System

The facilities to switch to a partner MERVA system are available at any time,
regardless of whether you operate the local MERVA system or whether you have
switched to a partner MERVA system. You can therefore directly switch from one
partner system to another partner system with the command node ps_name or
ps ps_name.
Partner System Indication

After a switch to a partner MERVA system, the MERVA Link node name of the
partner MERVA system is displayed in the upper right corner of all MSC panels
(as in the local MSC environment) in the color red to remind you that all
commands apply to a partner MERVA system. The name of your local MERVA
system is displayed in white.
Returning to the Local MERVA System

There are several ways of returning to the local MERVA system after a switch to a
partner MERVA system:
Operations Guide
v The commands ps or node without a parameter return to the local MERVA

system and display the SCP list.
v The commands ps * or node * return to the local MERVA system and display
the ASP list.
v The commands ps local_node_name or node local_node_name return to the
local MERVA system and display the MSC main menu.
v The PF 3 key (return command) returns to the Function Selection Menu in the
local MERVA system.
Commands Executed in the Local System

Some commands are always executed in the local system, that is, the partner
MERVA system is not involved. These commands are:
v node and ps. If a partner system switch was active, these commands switch
back to the local MERVA system.
v explain or xpl, and qhelp or hlp. The command is executed in the local system
and you get the explanations for your local system. The MSC switch to a partner
MERVA system is kept if a partner system switch was active.
v If you press the ENTER key on the panels ACMM and AC00 without a
command in the command line, no empty command is transferred to the partner
MERVA system. The current panel is redisplayed using information available in
the local MERVA system. However, if you press the ENTER key without a
command in one of the panels AC01, AC02, or AC04, an empty command is
transferred to the partner MERVA system to request an update of the current
display with the most recent information.
10
Operations Guide
Chapter 2. Starting MERVA ESA

This chapter describes the actions used to start and stop MERVA ESA under the
following operating systems:
v CICS/VSE
v z/OS and CICS
v z/OS and IMS
Note: Before starting MERVA ESA for the first time, you must have run all jobs
distributed with the JCL file and referenced in the program directory.
MERVA ESA needs the following VSAM data sets:
v Journal A
v Journal B
v User File
v Queue Data Set (formatted)
v Large message cluster (LMC)
v Message counter log
v Nicknames File (optional)
v Authenticator-Key File (formatted or loaded)
v SWIFT Correspondents File (optional, initialized)
v SWIFT Currency Code File (optional, initialized)
v Telex Correspondents File (optional, initialized).
In addition, MERVA ESA-IMS needs the SPA File (non-VSAM).
If you run MERVA ESA with queue management using DB2, MERVA ESA needs
DB2 tables for the queue data set on DB2.
Starting MERVA ESA under CICS/VSE

To start MERVA ESA under CICS/VSE, do the following:
1. Start CICS/VSE.
2. Sign on to CICS/VSE by entering the transaction code cssn. You can do this at:
v An IBM 327x Display Station
v A VSE system console, used as a CICS terminal.
The code cssn should be entered on a clear display panel.
3. Enter the MERVA ESA transaction code. Ask your system administrator for the
transaction code defined for your installation. The code is defined in the CICS
transaction definitions for the startup and command program DSLCMO.
If MERVA ESA is already running, a new start attempt is refused. If, because of an
error, the status information contained in the CICS common work area (CWA)
shows that MERVA ESA is starting but is not really active, an operator can start
MERVA ESA using the NEW parameter together with the transaction name (for
example DSL NEW). NEW must not be used if MERVA ESA is still active.
11
On successful completion of the MERVA ESA initialization, the message DSL000A

MERVA is ready is displayed at the terminal (if a terminal was used for entering the
transaction code) and at the VSE system console in either case.
Alternatively, the program DSLCAS is provided, which starts MERVA ESA
automatically when CICS is started. This saves having to sign on to CICS to enter
the DSL transaction. If you wish to use this program, it must be added to the CICS
member DFHPLTPI as follows:
DFHPLT TYPE=ENTRY,PROGRAM=DSLCAS
You must also:

v Make the following definition in CICS RDO:
DEFINE PROGRAM(DFHPLTPI) GROUP(....)
v Specify in the system initialization table (SIT):

PLTPI=PI
Note: The suffix PI may be replaced by a different suffix in both places.
Starting MERVA ESA under CICS in z/OS

To start MERVA ESA under CICS in z/OS, do the following:
1. Start CICS.
2. Sign on to CICS by entering the transaction code cesn. Only an IBM 327x
Display Station that has been defined as a CICS terminal can be used.
CICS/MVS does not support the z/OS system console as a CICS terminal.
The code cesn should be entered on a clear display screen.
3. Enter the MERVA ESA transaction code. Ask your system administrator for the
transaction code defined for your installation. The transaction code is defined
in the CICS transaction definitions for the startup and command program
DSLCMO.
If MERVA ESA is already running, a new start attempt is refused. If, because of an
error, the status information contained in the CICS common work area (CWA)
shows that MERVA ESA is starting but is not really active, an operator can start
MERVA ESA using the NEW parameter together with the transaction name (for
example DSL NEW). NEW must not be used if MERVA ESA is still active.
On successful completion of the MERVA ESA initialization, the message DSL000A
MERVA is ready is displayed at the screen terminal and at the z/OS system console.
Alternatively, the program DSLCAS is provided to start MERVA ESA automatically
when CICS is started. This saves having to sign on to CICS to enter the DSL
transaction.
If you wish to use this program, DSLCAS must be added to the CICS member
DFHPLTPI as follows:
DFHPLT TYPE=ENTRY,PROGRAM=DSLCAS
You must also:

v Make the following definition in CICS RDO:
DEFINE PROGRAM(DFHPLTPI) GROUP(....)
v Specify in the system initialization table (SIT):

PLTPI=PI
12
Operations Guide
Note: The suffix PI may be replaced by a different suffix in both places.

Alternatively, MERVA ESA can run as a native z/OS batch program or started task.
Starting MERVA ESA under IMS/ESA in z/OS

To start MERVA ESA under IMS/ESA, do the following:
1. Start the IMS control region.
2. Start the MERVA ESA batch message program (BMP) region by using either an
z/OS start command, or the z/OS job-control statements (via the z/OS reader).
The message DSL000A MERVA is ready is displayed at the z/OS system console,
when the initialization is successfully completed.
Alternatively, MERVA ESA can run as a native z/OS batch program or started
task.
Starting MERVA ESA in a Multisystem Environment

If your MERVA ESA is defined to run in a multisystem environment under
CICS/ESA or IMS/ESA where multiple MERVA ESA instances are distributed
among multiple systems with shared resources, you have to consider the following:
v MERVA ESA V4 can consist of multiple MERVA ESA instances, each running on
a different system or address space.
v There is only one primary MERVA ESA instance. Only the primary
MERVA ESA instance accepts operator commands and MERVA ESA commands.
v The primary MERVA ESA instance should be started before any secondary
MERVA ESA instance is started. To relief from starting secondary MERVA ESA
instance(s) via the operator interface, parameters can be defined in DSLPRM to
allow them to be started automatically by the primary MERVA ESA instance.
However, this requires definition of a procedure to be started as a started task.
It is recommended to run all MERVA ESA instances as native z/OS batch
programs or started tasks.
Chapter 2. Starting MERVA ESA
13
14
Operations Guide
Chapter 3. Stopping MERVA ESA

This chapter applies to all installations, irrespective of the operating system in use.
To avoid losing data and disrupting user sessions and network connections, ensure
that no session or connection is active before you stop MERVA ESA.
The commands used to stop MERVA ESA are:
v shutdown
v cancel or terminat
The normal sequence in which these commands are used is:
1. End the connections between MERVA ESA and the communication networks.
For example, to end the connection to the SWIFT network, you use the SWIFT
Link logout command.
2. Stop all the user sessions and hardcopy printer tasks. You use the MERVA ESA
shutdown command to do this.
The command automatically stops the printer tasks when they have finished
processing the current message. User sessions return to the Function Selection
menu. Users can then only select the Operator Command function (CMD), if
this function is on the users Function Selection menu.
3. When you have completed the first two steps, use the MERVA ESA cancel or
terminat command to stop MERVA ESA.
If you use the cancel or terminat command without completing the first two
steps, the users may have to enter some data again, or some messages may be
printed again on hardcopy printers.
If you have entered the shutdown command, but decide not to stop MERVA ESA,
enter the command reshut. The reshut command resets the SHUTDOWN status so
that users can sign on to MERVA ESA again or can select a function from the
Function Selection menu. Printer tasks can be started.
If your MERVA ESA is defined to run in a multisystem environment where
multiple MERVA ESA instances are distributed among multiple systems with
shared resources, the command to stop MERVA ESA must be entered on the
primary MERVA ESA instance. This command is propagated to all active
MERVA ESA instances.
15
16
Operations Guide
Chapter 4. Operating the Base Functions

The commands in this chapter are presented in alphabetical order.
Stopping MERVA ESA (CANCEL and TERMINAT)

Use the command cancel or terminat to stop MERVA ESA. These commands are
identical and therefore interchangeable. If your installation has added programs to
MERVA ESA via DSLNPTT that require special processing, you should ensure that
this special processing has been carried out before you enter the cancel or terminat
command. For example, when the SWIFT Link is running, you must log out all
master logical terminals before terminating MERVA ESA, as the SWIFT Link
cannot process logout during the termination.
You should also use the shutdown command before the cancel or terminat
command to allow the users and hardcopy printer tasks to complete the message
being processed.
Notes:
1. You must be authorized to use these commands.
2. Your system programmer will tell you when to use the parameters for these
commands.
3. Under CICS: After having entered the terminat command, you should verify
that the termination is complete before terminating CICS (for example, using
CEMT INQ), otherwise, you may have a restart of the MERVA ESA queue
management, or, when using the SWIFT network, you may have an abnormal
end of z/OS with system abend code A03, as a line subtask may still be
attached.
Command Formats
The formats of the terminat and cancel commands are:
cancel
c
[{DUMP | ABDUMP }]
terminat
t
[{DUMP | ABDUMP }]
Parameter Descriptions
The parameters for these commands have the following meanings:
DUMP
A dump is taken before MERVA ESA is stopped. This dump is useful, for
example, when an error message was issued but the program issuing the error
message did not take a dump. The dump is taken before the message
TERMINATE/CANCEL accepted is issued, and a normal end of MERVA ESA
takes place after the dump.
In MERVA ESA running under CICS, this is a CICS transaction dump with
dump code 0015. In MERVA ESA running under IMS, this is an z/OS SNAP
dump with ID=015.
17
CANCEL and TERMINAT Commands

ABDUMP
A dump is taken before MERVA ESA is stopped. MERVA ESA first removes
the CICS or z/OS abend exit and then causes a program check to happen. No
MERVA ESA termination is processed. When MERVA ESA is started the next
time, the MERVA ESA queue management processes a restart. In MERVA ESA
running under CICS, it may be necessary to restart CICS.
The ABDUMP parameter can provide a dump that may be more helpful than
the dump provided with the DUMP parameter, especially when problems of
accesses to the operating system have to be analyzed. In CICS, the kind of
dump depends on the abend recovery options used with CICS.
Command Example
You can use the abbreviation t instead of the terminat command:
t
Example of the Display from a CANCEL/TERMINAT Command

Figure 1 shows the display that would result if you entered the command shown
in the command example. Instead of the terminat command, the cancel command
can be entered. Message DSL051I returns the information resulting from the
execution of this command.
Operator Command Processing
> T
DSL051I TERMINAT accepted
115033
is the time of this display
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 1. Stopping MERVA ESA with TERMINAT
Figure 2 shows the unsolicited operator messages that are displayed only on the
operating system console during the stopping of MERVA ESA. Each active
program of the MERVA ESA program table is stopped individually. Message
DWS771I is issued by the Authenticator-Key File program when it is terminated by
the SWIFT Link program SWIFTAUT. Message DSL012I shows the MERVA ESA
termination.
18
Operations Guide
CF Command
DSL061I
DSL061I
DSL061I
DSL061I
DSL061I
DWS771I
DSL061I
DWS690I
DWS690I
DWS690I
DWS690I
DWS690I
DWS690I
DSL061I
DSL061I
ENL902I
DSL061I
DSL012I
RTCOMM 1 stop successful

CONSOLE 2 stop successful
BATCH 3 stop successful
TRANSACT 4 stop successful
MSGCOUNT 5 stop successful
Keys found: 00000000 in aging table, 000000 on
SWIFTAUT 6 stop successful
VNDEBET2A GPA SN=0515, ISN=000002, OSN=000000,
VNDEBET2A FIN SN=0511, ISN=009932, OSN=014264,
VNDEBET3A GPA SN=0000, ISN=000000, OSN=000000,
VNDEBET3A FIN SN=0000, ISN=000000, OSN=000000,
VNDPBET2A GPA SN=0000, ISN=000000, OSN=000000,
VNDPBET2A FIN SN=0000, ISN=000000, OSN=000000,
SWIFTII 7 stop successful
SWLOADSK 8 stop successful
Telex Link has been terminated
TELEX 9 stop successful
MERVA has been terminated
disk
SESS=0437
SESS=0437
SESS=0000
SESS=0000
SESS=0000
SESS=0000
Figure 2. Termination of MERVA ESA
Changing Logical Terminal Names (CF)

Some message-processing functions can be associated with a transaction and a
logical terminal (LT) name. The transaction processes the messages written to the
queue of the message-processing function, for example, prints them on a terminal
printer with the logical terminal name defined for the function.
Use the cf command to change the logical terminal name to another logical
terminal name. For example, if a function normally uses a specific printer, but this
printer is out of order, you can assign another printer to the function by the logical
terminal name.
Note: If you enter the cf command while the function is in ACTIVTD status,
MERVA ESA sets the function in HOLD status to prevent processing of the
rest of the queue with the old logical terminal name.
In MERVA IMS, remember that the IMS message queue may still contain start
records for the old logical terminal name.
You must enter an sf command with the function to resume processing with the
new logical terminal name. If related functions are defined, they all get the new
logical terminal name when the cf command is used for one of them.
Note: You must be authorized to enter the cf command for a function which is
defined in the MERVA ESA function table DSLFNTT using the parameter
MQI=YES.
The transaction code can be a logical name pointing to an entry in the MERVA
ESA transaction table DSLTXTT. In this case, the specification of a logical terminal
in the transaction table entry gains precedence over the value in the function table
entry and the logical terminal cannot be changed with the cf command.
Command Format
The format of the cf command is:
cf
function,ltname
19
CF Command
The parameters for this command have the following meanings:
function
The name of the message-processing function for which you want to change
the logical terminal name.
ltname
The logical terminal name of the new device.
Note: ltname is checked against all the logical terminal names generated within
the MERVA ESA Function Table, in the CICS terminal definitions, or in
the IMS nucleus. The change is carried out if a match is found. If no
match is found, a check is made against the DC system. When the
terminal name is defined to the DC system, the change is carried out,
otherwise the error message DSL114I is shown.
Command Example
This example shows the command you use to change the logical terminal used for
the function L1PR0:
cf,l1pr0,l86a
Example of the Display from a CF Command

in the command example. Message DSL115I confirms the change of the terminal
name, for more information refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
> CF L1PR0 L86A
DSL115I L1PR0
115343
CHANGED, TRAN=DSLH
, LT1=L86A
, LT2=L84A
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 3. Changing the Logical Terminal Name
This message shows the following information:

v The name of the function: L1PR0
v The confirmation that the command was accepted: CHANGED
v The name of the transaction: DSLH
v The logical terminal name to be used from now on for the transaction: L86A
20
Operations Guide
CF Command
v The original logical terminal name: L84A.
Changing the Next Function (CFNEXT)

Use the cfnext command to change the next function assigned to a
message-processing function.
Command Format
The format of the cfnext command is:
cfnext
function,nextfunction
Restrictions
The use of the CFNEXT command does not have any effect on programs which
use their own function table, for example, programs that use direct DB2 queue
management.
function
the next function.
nextfunction
The new name of the next function.
Note: nextfunction must be defined in the function table. Otherwise, the error
message DSL110I is shown.
Command Example
This example shows the command you use to change the next function for the
message-processing function L1DE0. For example, when you use the EOM
command, the next function will now be L1VE0.
cfnext L1DE0,L1VE0
Example of the Display from a CFNEXT Command

Figure 4 on page 22 shows the display that would result if you entered the
command shown in the command example.
21
cfrout Command

> CFNEXT L2DE0 L2VE0
DSL115I L2DE0
CHANGED, TRAN=
Next=L2VE0
145953
, LT1=
, LT2=
, Rout=DWSL2DE0
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 4. Changing the Next Function
Changing the Routing Table (CFROUT)

Use the cfrout command to change the routing table assigned to a function.
Command Format
The format of the cfrout command is:
cfrout
function,routingtable
Restrictions
The use of the CFROUT command does not have any effect on programs which
use their own function table, for example, programs that use direct DB2 queue
management.
function
the routing table.
routingtable
The name of the new routing table.
Note: The name of the new routing table is stored in the function table entry
of the dedicated function, and the routing table is loaded. If the loading
fails, the error message DSL111I is shown.
Command Example
This example shows the command you use to change the routing table for the
message processing function L2AI0. The assigned routing table is now DWSL2AI0.
cfrout L2AI0,DWSL2AI0
22
Operations Guide
cfrout Command
Example of the Display from a CFROUT Command
in the command example.
> CFROUT LA2I0 DWSL2AI0
DSL115I L2AI0
CHANGED, TRAN=
, LT1=
, LT2=
Next=L2ERROR , Rout=DWSL2AI0
150128
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 5. Changing the Routing Table
Displaying the Message Counter Log (DCLOG)

Use the dclog command to see online information about the current status of the
MERVA ESA message counter data set.
Command Format
The format of the dclog command is:
dclog
[{ LAST | DETAIL }]
LAST
Displays the status of the current month. A detailed report for message
counters is given. When the parameter is not specified, the message counter
log status for the last 12 months is shown.
DETAIL
Displays the status of all individual counters for the last 12 months. When the
parameter is not specified, only the total number of messages is shown, but
not the status of the individual counters.
Please note, that the numbers shown are rounded values, because they are
calculated as the average of the last 12 months. This may lead to small
differences when adding up the values to calculate total numbers.
Example of the Display from a DCLOG Command
23
DCLOG Command
Figure 6 shows an example of the information displayed when you enter the dclog
command.
> DCLOG
DSL170I
DSL175I
DSL171I
DSL180I
142411
Message counter LOG status from 19980401 to 19990401 (12 months)

Licensed message usage
1000
Average monthly usage
14742
Usage exceeds the licensed tier, 14742 is required
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 6. Displaying the Message Counter Log Status
When you enter the dclog command the following information is displayed on the
command panel to inform you about the current MERVA ESA usage. The
messages are explained in MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
DSL170I
Shows the reporting period. If MERVA ESA has been used for
more than 12 months, only the last 12 months are taken into
account.
DSL175I
Shows the current licensed messages of the installation.
DSL171I
Shows the average monthly usage during the reporting period.
DSL180I
This message is shown only when the average monthly usage of

MERVA ESA exceeds the licensed messages. In this case, contact
your IBM marketing representative to license the additional
messages.
Displaying the Function Status (DF)

Use the df command to monitor the status of either one message-processing
function, or all message-processing functions for which a transaction name is
defined.
Command Format
The format of the df command is:
df
[{ FIRST | function [,FIRST ]}]
The first time you enter the df command without parameters, the status of the first
13 message-processing functions is displayed. If you enter the same command
again, the status of the next 13 functions is displayed.
24
Operations Guide
DF Command
FIRST
Displays the status of the first 13 message-processing functions for which
transaction codes are specified in the MERVA ESA Function Table.
function
Is the name, or part of the name, of a message-processing function defined in
the MERVA ESA Function Table. There are two methods of entering part of a
function name:
v You can enter 1 to 7 characters without using the substitution characters
asterisk (*) or percent (%). This method displays the status of the first 13
functions beginning with these characters.
v You can enter 1 to 8 characters, including the substitution characters asterisk
(*) and percent (%).
The substitution character * represents any number of characters. As
many asterisks as required can appear anywhere in the function name.
The substitution character % is a place-holding character, representing any
single character. As many percent symbols as necessary may appear
anywhere in a function name.
If you enter the same command again, and there are more than 13 functions
matching these characters, the next 13 functions are displayed. If you then
want to see again the first 13 functions matching these characters, you must
enter the df command with the function parameter followed by the FIRST
parameter.
Command Examples
The following section shows some examples of how to enter the df command.
Example 1: To display a function enter the df command with a function name for
the function parameter:
df,l1pr0
Example 2: To display the functions starting with the same characters, such as L1P,
enter the following command:
df,l1p
Example 3: Use the FIRST parameter to display the first 13 functions:

df,first
Example 4: Use the substitution character * to display the first 13 functions whose
names contain the characters sw anywhere in the name:
df,*sw*
Example 5: Use the substitution character % to display the first 13 functions whose
names contain the characters pr in positions 3 and 4 of the function name:
df,%%pr*
25
DF Command
Example of the Display from a DF Command
Figure 7 shows an example of the information that is returned when you enter the
df command without parameters.
> DF
DSL118I Display Functions
Function Status Transact
DMPR0
HOLD
DSLH
DMPR1
HOLD
DSLH
DMPR2
HOLD
DSLH
DMPR3
HOLD
DSLH
DMPR4
HOLD
DSLH
DMPR89
HOLD
DSLH
L1PR0
NOHOLD DSLH
L1PR1
NOHOLD DSLH
L2PR0
NOHOLD DSLH
L2PR1
NOHOLD DSLH
L2PR1S
NOHOLD DSLH
L3PR0
NOHOLD DSLH
L3PR1
NOHOLD DSLH
124642
LTERM1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
PRT1
LTERM2
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 7. Displaying the Status of Message-Processing Functions
Message DSL118I is displayed in response to the command, for details refer to

MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes. The message contains the following
information:
Function
The name of the function, such as DMPR0.
Status
The status of the message-processing function, such as HOLD.
Transact
The transaction code associated with the function, such as DSLH.

Note: Transaction codes have 4 characters in CICS and up to 8
characters in IMS.
When the transaction table DSLTXTT is installed, the transaction
code refers to an entry in the transaction table.
LTERM1
The logical terminal name currently used by the transaction, such

as PRT1. This is either the logical terminal originally defined for
the transaction, or the logical terminal name assigned with a cf
command.
Note: Logical terminal names have 4 characters in CICS and up to
8 characters in IMS.
LTERM2
26
Operations Guide
The logical terminal name as originally defined for the transaction,

after a cf command has changed the currently-used terminal name.
DFT Command
Displaying the Functions from Transaction Table (DFT)

This command shows the status of functions which are qualified by specifications
in the transaction table, DSLTXTT. Parameters from the transaction table are shown
together with information on the current state of the transaction.
For example, for a delayed transaction you can see at what time the transaction
will be started, or how many start function events (messages) are needed to trigger
the transaction immediately.
For transactions defined with a suspension period the time when the first message
entered the queue is shown, and also the time when the suspension period ends.
Command Format
The format of the DFT command is:
dft
[ffffffff], [tttttttt]
Parameter Description
ffffffff A specific or, if substitution characters are used, a generic function name.
All matching functions in the MERVA function table for which a
transaction table entry also exists are displayed. If the parameter is
omitted, all function names match.
Substitution character % represents any one character, and * represents any
number of characters.
Note that if a specific function is named and the name has less than eight
characters, the parameter is treated as generic, that is an asterisk is
appended to the name. This behavior matches that of the DF and DQ
commands.
tttttttt A specific or, if substitution characters are used, a generic transaction
name. Only those functions are displayed which match the first parameter
and which also specify a transaction in the DSLFNT TRAN parameter
which matches this parameter. If the parameter is not specified, all
functions matching the first parameter are displayed.
If not all matching functions fit on one output page, you can repeat the command
with the same parameters to display the next page. This is the same behavior as
with the DF and DQ commands.
Examples of the Display from the DFT Command
The following message is displayed if no functions with the specified name exist or
none of them name transactions specified in the transaction table, DSLTXTT.
DFT XYZ
DSL121I No matching functions or transactions in Transaction Table
An example of the DFT output is shown in the following screen.
27
DFT Command
DFT F*
DSL120I Display Functions from Transaction Table
Function Transact Method and Parameters Sta Time1
FUNC01
DSLX
APPC NETNAME TPDSLX
NOH
FUNC02
DSLX
CICS
NOH
FUNC03
DSLX
CICS
TIM
FUNC04
DSLX
CICS
DLY 150001
FUNC05
DSLH
CICS
TRAN
HLD
FUNC06
DSLX
IMS
SUS 223000
FUNC07
DSLX
CBAT SYSID
NOH
FUNC08
DSLX
---NOH
Time2
Events
0000/0002
180000 0000/0004
160000 0009/0010
050300
The columns in the display have the following meanings:

Function
This shows the function name.
Transact
This shows the transaction name as defined in the function table.
Method and Parameters
The transaction start method as defined in the transaction table.
Additionally, some method-specific parameters are shown.
APPC The transaction is started using the APPCMVS method; the
LUNAME and the TPNAME are shown. If no LUNAME is
specified the SYMDEST specification is shown instead.
CICS The transaction is started in a CICS region by a MERVA nucleus
running as a CICS transaction. If specified, the target CICS system
(DSLTXT SYSID parameter) and the name of the transaction which
will be started (DSLTXT TPNAME parameter) are shown. This
method is only available when the MERVA nucleus runs as a CICS
transaction.
CICA The transaction is started indirectly by transaction DSLT in a CICS
region. The parameter ASYNCH=YES or ASYNCH=LTERM are
specified in the corresponding DSLTXT entry.
CBAT The transaction is started in a CICS region by a batch nucleus. If
specified, the target CICS system (SYSID parameter) and the name
of the transaction which will be started (TPNAME parameter) are
shown. This method is only available when the MERVA nucleus
runs as a batch program or started task.
IMS
The transaction is started in an IMS MPP region. This method is
only available when the MERVA nucleus runs as an IMS BMP.
---This indicates that the transaction cannot be started in the current
environment because the start method is not available.
|
|
|
Note that the example command output above was artificially

constructed to show various types of entry. Normally, other entries
would also have this method designation.
Indicates the transaction status.
Sta
ACT The transaction is active.
HLD The function is in hold.
DLY
Not held, but currently delayed because a DELAY specification has
not yet been satisfied.
SUS
Not held, but transactions are not being started because a
SUSPEND period has been defined.
TIM
Not held, but DELAY with a specific time-of-day was specified.
NOH Not held, and no time related parameters are in effect.
Time1 For a delayed transaction the time of day when the oldest message entered
the queue. For an entry with the SUSPEND parameter it shows the time of
day when the suspension period starts.
28
Operations Guide
DFT Command
Time2 For a delayed transaction the time of day when the transaction is due to
start. This is either Time1 plus the number of seconds specified in
sub-parameter two of the DELAY parameter, or the specific time of day if
DELAY sub-parameter three was specified. For an entry with the
SUSPEND parameter, it shows the time when the suspension period ends.
Events
For transactions with a DELAY parameter specifying an events count
greater than 1, two numbers separated by a slash are shown. The first is
the current number of start function events (messages) which have
occurred. The second shows the total number of start events needed to
start the transaction. If one of the values is greater than 9999, it is shown
as a three digit number with the letter K appended for numbers between
10000 (10K) and 999999 (999K), or with the letter M appended for
numbers between 1000000 (1M) and 999999999 (999M).
Note that Time1, Time2, and Events show data from the internal delay control
block. If MERVA is terminated the data is lost, and following a restart only events
which occur after MERVA start will be available. Note too, that if STATUS=AUTO
is specified in a DSLFNT entry, the transaction is started at MERVA start-up
regardless of any DSLTXTT specifications.
29
DLMC Command
Displaying the Large Message Cluster Status (DLMC)

Use the dlmc command to monitor the status of the large message cluster (LMC)
and see information about the usage of space. The information helps you maintain
the large message cluster with respect to size and performance.
Command Format
The format of the dlmc command is:
dlmc
The dlmc command has no parameters.

Example of the Display from a DLMC Command
Figure 8 shows an example of the information displayed when you enter the dlmc
command.
>DLMC
DSL414I Statistics for Large Message Cluster - Maintenance
Lower limit for a large message
10.000 Bytes
Number of large messages
198
Current average message length
105.162 Bytes
Historical minimum message length
27.000 Bytes
Historical maximum message length
498.196 Bytes
Space allocated
25.927.424 Bytes
Space used
73 %
Reorganization recommended, processing continues
142411
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 8. Displaying Status of Large Message Cluster for Maintenance
When you enter the dlmc command the following information is displayed:
Lower limit for a large message
The value entered in DSLPRM or the default value of 31900 bytes, which is
the maximum value of a small message.
Number of large messages
The number of large messages in the LMC at the time the dlmc command
was entered.
The current average length of TOF data of all large messages in the LMC
at the time the dlmc command was entered.
Historical minimum message length
The minimum TOF data length historically observed for all large messages
in the LMC since its last reorganization or definition.
30
Operations Guide
DLMC Command
Historical maximum message length
The maximum TOF data length historically observed for all large messages
in the LMC since its last reorganization or definition.
Space allocated
The high allocated relative byte address (RBA) value for the LMC, that is,
the maximum number of bytes available as disk space for the large
message cluster.
Space used
The filling status of the LMC, that is, the percentage calculated from stored
bytes divided by high allocated RBA at the time the dlmc command was
entered.
This text is displayed when the LMC is processed in insert mode and the
LMC is more than 70% filled.
Reorganization recommended, LMC is full
LMC is considered full, that is, the maximum number of put retries has
been reached for inserting a record.
LMC not closed since date/time
This text is displayed when MERVA ESA terminated abnormally and no
large message cluster reorganization was done before MERVA ESA restart.
LMC processing is done in insert mode.
LMC not closed since date/time, LMC is full
Also, the LMC is considered full, that is, the maximum number of put
retries has been reached for inserting a record.
Blank line
This appears when none of the above conditions apply.
31
DLMCT Command
Displaying the Large Message Cluster Statistics (DLMCT)

Use the dlmct command to monitor statistics of the large message cluster (LMC),
in order to tune large message processing and thereby improve LMC input/output
(I/O) performance and space usage.
For information on how to interpret the information displayed refer to the MERVA
for ESA Installation Guide.
Command Format
The format of the dlmct command is:
dlmct
The dlmct command has no parameters.

Example of the Display from a DLMCT Command
Figure 9 shows an example of the information displayed when you enter the dlmct
command.
>DLMCT
DSL410I Statistics for Large Message Cluster - Tuning
105.162
Maximum record length
114.000
Control interval size
16.384
Avg. number of segments per message
1,47
Number of allocated extents
1
Processing mode
insert
Space used
71
142442
Bytes
Bytes
Bytes
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 9. Displaying Statistics of Large Message Cluster for Tuning
When you enter the dlmct command the following information is displayed:
The current average message length of all large messages in the LMC at
the time the dlmct command was entered.
Maximum record length
The maximum logical record length defined for the LMC.
Control interval size
The control interval size specified for the LMC.
Avg. number of segments per message
The ratio of number of records to number of large messages. This field
32
Operations Guide
DLMCT Command
contains the average number of records (or segments) per large message,
which is an indication of the degree of segmentation.
A '1' in this field means no segmentation.
Number of allocated extents
The number of extents allocated for the large message cluster at the time
the dlmct command was entered.
Processing mode
The text load means records are loaded with a growing key into the LMC,
which is a VSAM KSDS cluster.
The text insert means records are inserted into the LMC with a
randomly-selected key.
Space used
The percentage calculated from stored bytes divided by high allocated
relative byte address (RBA).
LMC is more than 70% filled. (Space used > 70%.)
Reorganization recommended, LMC is full
LMC is considered full, that is, the maximum number of put retries has
been reached for inserting a record.
LMC not closed since date/time
LMC processing will be done in insert mode.
LMC not closed since date/time, LMC is full
Also, the LMC is considered full, that is, the maximum number of put
retries has been reached for inserting a record.
Blank line
This appears when none of the above conditions apply.
33
DM Command
Displaying Unsolicited Messages (DM)

Use the dm (display messages) command to display messages that are not solicited
by the operator. These messages are written to the operating system console and to
the MERVA ESA Journal.
Command Format
The format of the dm command is:
[{
[{
[{
[{
[{
dm
prefix }]
date [,prefix ] }]
date ,time [,prefix ]}]
FIRST [,prefix ]}]
LAST [,prefix ]}]
When you enter the dm command without parameters, the first 14 messages are
displayed. If you enter the FIRST, date or time parameter, 14 messages are
displayed according to the specified parameter. If you then enter the dm command
again without a parameter, the display continues with the next 14 messages.
prefix
A 1- to 8-character prefix. Only messages starting with the prefix appear in the
display.
date
The date in the format yymmmdd, where:
yy
Are the lower two digits of the year, for example, 00 to indicate the
year 2000.
mmm
Is the month. It must be one of the following: JAN, FEB, MAR, APR,
MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, or DEC.
dd
Is the day.
The display starts with the first message for that specified date. If this date is
not found, no messages are displayed.
Note: It is possible to enter invalid dates (for example, 99FEB31) as a
parameter for this command. This date will not be found.
time
The time of day in the format hhmmss, where:
hh
Is the hour
mm
Is the minute
ss
Is the second.
You can specify the time parameter without seconds or minutes, such as
hhmms, hhmm, hhm, or hh. If you enter a time of 121, all messages with a time
indication of 12:10:00 or later are displayed. The display starts with the
message containing this time or the next available time.
34
Operations Guide
DM Command
FIRST
The display starts with the first available message and displays up to the next
13 messages.
LAST
The last message and up to 13 preceding messages are displayed.
Command Examples
The following section shows some examples of how to enter the dm command.
Example 1: Use the dm command to display the first messages issued on or after
the specified date and time:
dm,99jul01,1030
This displays the first 14 messages created on the first of July 1999 at 10.30 a.m. or
later.
Example 2: Use the dm command to display the first messages issued at, or after,
the specified time. The commas show the omission of the date parameter:
dm,,1030
This displays the first 14 messages created today at 10.30 a.m. or later.
Example 3: Use the FIRST parameter to display the first 14 messages that are
available:
dm,first
Example 4: Use the prefix parameter to limit the type of messages displayed. The
following command shows the last 14 messages issued by the SWIFT Link
modules:
dm,last,dws
Example of the Display from a DM Command

Displaying Unsolicited Messages (DM) shows an example of the information
displayed when you enter the dm command.
35
DM Command

> DM
DSL075I Display Message 1999JUN07
113845 DSL045I Journal data set A open, 1820 records, 38% used in 1 ex
113846 DSL360I Status of QDS DSLQDS
is NORMAL
at 19990607/102651
113846 DSL151I Last UMR is MERVAESA 00012345 at 19990607/102517
113847 DSL060I RTCOMM 1 start successful
113847 DSL060I CONSOLE 2 start successful
113848 DSL060I BATCH 3 start successful
113848 DSL060I TRANSACT 4 start successful
113848 DSL060I MSGCOUNT 5 start successful
113848 DSL060I SWIFTAUT 6 start successful
113849 DSL060I SWIFTII 7 start successful
113849 DSL060I SWLOADSK 8 start successful
113849 ENL900I Telex Link startup successful
113849 DSL060I TELEX 9 start successful
113849 DSL000A MERVA is ready
114232
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
Figure 10. Displaying Unsolicited Operator Messages
36
Operations Guide
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
DNS Command
Displaying the Nucleus Servers (DNS)

Use the dns (display nucleus servers) command to monitor the status either of one
particular nucleus server or of all nucleus servers defined in the DSLNSVT.
Command Format
The format of the dns command is:
dns
[{ TASK | ALL | FIRST | servername }]
When you enter the dns command without parameters, the status of the first 26
nucleus servers running as subtasks is displayed. If you enter the same command
again, the status of the next 26 nucleus servers is displayed.
none
Displays the next 26 nucleus servers of the group displayed before. If there
was no previous display, this command is equivalent to a dns task command.
FIRST
Displays, in two columns, the status of the first 26 nucleus servers of the group
displayed before. If there was no previous display, this command is equivalent
to a dns task command.
TASK
Displays, in two columns, the status of the nucleus servers defined in
DSLNSVT, which are running as subtasks.
ALL
Displays, in two columns, the status of all nucleus servers defined in MERVA
ESA. These nucleus servers are defined in the DSLNSVT, or in one of the other
nucleus tables DSLNPTT, DSLNTRT, or DSLNCMT. The nucleus servers can
run under direct control of DSLNUC or running as subtasks.
servername
The name of the nucleus server (up to 8 characters) of which the status is to be
displayed. The name of this nucleus server must be defined in DSLNSVT, or in
one of the other tables DSLNPTT, DSLNTRT, or DSLNCMT.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the dns command.
Example 1: Use the TASK parameter to display the status of the nucleus servers
running as subtasks:
dns,task
Example 2: You can also specify a nucleus server to display the status of this
specific server:
dns SWIFTII
Example of the Display from a DNS Command
37
DNS Command
Displaying the Nucleus Servers (DNS) on page 37 shows an example of the
information displayed when you enter the dns command.
> DNS ALL
DSL160I Display Nucleus Servers
Server
Type
Status
DSLNUC
NUCT
DSLNMOP NUCT NTR
DSLNDM
SUBR NCM
DSLNMOP
RTCOMM
NUCT NPT A
TRANSACT NUCT NPT A
CICSSRV NUCT NPT A 0000.000
SWIFTII NUCT NPT A 5695.566
TELEX
NUCT NPT I
DSLJRNP CICS NTR
00000436
DSLNUSR NUCT NTR
DWSAUTP NUCT NTR
DSLNDU
NUCT NCM
DSLRTRSW NUCT NCM
122412
Server
DSLNCMD
CONSOLE
APPCSRV1
BATCH
MSGCOUNT
SWIFTAUT
SWLOADSK
DSLQMGT
DSLNCS
DSLNRTCP
DSLNSHU
DSLQMGTR
DSLQLRGC
Type
SUBR
SUBR
MVS
NUCT
NUCT
NUCT
NUCT
CICS
NUCT
NUCT
NUCT
NUCT
NUCT
NCM
NPT
NPT
NPT
NPT
NPT
NPT
NTR
NTR
NTR
NCM
NCM
NCM
Status
DSLNUC
DSLNMOP
I
A
A 0296.322
A
A 5695.566
00000432
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 11. Displaying the Nucleus Server Status
Message DSL160I shows the following information, for details refer to MERVA for
ESA Messages and Codes.
Server The name of the nucleus server as defined in the DSLNSVT. If a nucleus
server is defined in the DSLNPTT only, it is the descriptive name defined
by DSLNPT. If a nucleus server is defined in the DSLNTRT only, it is the
name of the central service defined by DSLNTR. If a nucleus server is
defined in the DSLNCMT only, it is the name of the command execution
routine.
Type
The nucleus server type consists of two components. The first item
indicates the mode in which the program is executing:
CICS
The nucleus server runs as a CICS task, the transaction code is

defined in the DSLNSVT.
z/OS
The nucleus server runs as an z/OS task.
NUCT The nucleus server runs under direct control of DSLNUC.

SUBR The program runs as a subroutine of a main nucleus server.
The second item indicates the type of the program:
NCM
The nucleus server is a command execution routine.
NPT
The nucleus server is a nucleus (NPT) program.
NTR
The nucleus server is a central service.
Status The status information is dependent on the type of program. The letter A
indicates an active NPT program. The letter I indicates an inactive NPT
program. The letter W indicates a nucleus server waiting on some other
service. For a CICS task, the task number is displayed for diagnosis
purposes. For active NPT programs running under direct control of
DSLNUC, the elapsed time in seconds since the last scheduling is
displayed.
38
Operations Guide
DP Command
Displaying the Program Status (DP)

Use the dp (display program) command to monitor the status either of one
particular program or of all programs defined in DSLNPTT.
Command Format
The format of the dp command is:
[{ FIRST | progname | pid }]
dp
When you enter the dp command without parameters, the status of the first 26
programs is displayed. If you enter the same command again, the status of the
next 26 programs is displayed.
FIRST
Displays, in two columns, the status of the first 26 programs defined in
DSLNPTT.
progname
The descriptive name of the program (up to 8 characters) of which the status is
to be displayed. The name of this program must be defined in DSLNPTT.
pid
The program identification (up to 3 characters) of the program. This program
identification is generated in DSLNPTT, and is used instead of the program
name.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the dp command.
Example 1: Use the FIRST parameter to display the status of the first 26 programs
defined in DSLNPTT:
dp,first
Example 2: You can also specify the program identification (here: 3) to display the
status of a program:
dp,3
Example of the Display from a DP Command

Displaying the Program Status (DP) shows an example of the information
displayed when you enter the dp command.
39
DP Command

> DP
DSL102I Display
PROGNAME PID Y
RTCOMM
1
9
BATCH
3
4
MSGCOUNT 5
6
CICSSRV 7 5
SWIFTII 9 8
TELEX
11 7
115235
Programs
S P A STATUS LRC
N N Y ACTIVE 00
N N Y ACTIVE 00
N N Y ACTIVE 00
Y Y Y ACTIVE 00
Y Y Y ACTIVE 00
Y Y N INACTV 00
PROGNAME
CONSOLE
TRANSACT
APPCSRV1
SWIFTAUT
SWLOADSK
PID
2
4
6
8
10
Y
9
5
5
5
2
S
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
P
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
A
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
STATUS
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
INACTV
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
LRC
00
00
00
00
00
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 12. Displaying the Program Status
Message DSL102I shows the following information, for details refer to MERVA for
ESA Messages and Codes.
PROGNAME
The descriptive name of the program in DSLNPTT.
PID
The program identification contained in DSLNPTT.
The priority of the program with a value of A (lowest) to Z and 0 to 9

(highest).
Shows whether the start command is allowed for this program (Y), or not
(N).
Shows whether the stop command is allowed for this program (Y), or not
(N).
Shows whether the program is started automatically during the

MERVA ESA startup (Y), or not (N).
STATUS
Shows the status of the program as described in MERVA for ESA Messages
and Codes.
LRC
40
Operations Guide
The last return code issued by the program when called for a start or stop
command, or after one of its event control blocks (ECBs) was posted.
DQ Command
Displaying the Queue Status (DQ)

Use the dq command to display the status of MERVA ESA queues.
Command Format
The format of the dq command is:
dq
[function],[FIRST][,FILLED]
STATUS
SQLERROR
The first time you enter the dq command without parameters, the status is
displayed for the first 26 queues that are associated with message-processing
functions. If you enter the same command again, the next 26 queues are displayed.
function
Is the name, or part of the name, of a message-processing function defined in
the MERVA ESA Function Table. There are two methods for entering part of a
function name:
asterisk (*) or percent (%). This method displays the status of the first 26
function queues whose names begin with these characters.
v You can enter 1 to 8 characters including the substitution characters asterisk
many asterisks as required can appear anywhere in the function name.
single character. As many percent symbols as are necessary may appear
anywhere in a function name.
If you enter the same command again, and there are more than 26 function
queues matching these characters, the next 26 function queues are displayed.
If you want to see the first 26 function queues again, you must enter the dq
command with the function parameter followed by the FIRST parameter.
You can also use the FILLED parameter to display only those queues
matching these characters and containing messages.
Note: The FIRST and FILLED parameters can be used in any order.
However, if the function parameter is used, it must be the first in the
sequence.
FIRST
Displays the status of the first 26 queues. You can enter the parameter FILLED
as a second parameter if you want to display the status of the first 26 queues
that contain messages.
FILLED
Displays the status of the queues that contain messages. However, queues that
have been defined with DQFILL=NO in DSLFNTT are not displayed. Such
queues can be displayed with a dq command without a parameter or dq
function command.
41
DQ Command
You can enter the parameter FIRST as a second parameter if you want to
display the status of the first 26 queues that contain messages.
STATUS
The status of the MERVA ESA queue data set is displayed. The response
shows the number of available and used entries in the Queue Key Table, the
number of DSLQDS system and data blocks, and how they are used.
Furthermore, it shows the number of large messages and the last UMR.
If MERVA ESA is customized for queue management using DB2, the response
shows the number of messages, the I/O module used, and the last UMR.
SQLERROR
If MERVA ESA is customized for queue management using DB2, error
information for the last SQL error is displayed.
Command Examples
The following section shows some examples of how to enter the dq command.
Example 1: You can use the FIRST parameter to display the status of the first 26
queues associated with message-processing functions:
dq,first
Example 2: To display the status of a certain function you can use the function
parameter so that only the status of the specified function is displayed:
dq,l1ai0
Example 3: Enter the following command to display the first 26 queues whose
names start with the characters L1A:
dq,l1a
If you enter this command again, the next 26 queues whose names start with L1A
are displayed. If you wish to display again the first 26 queues whose names start
with the characters L1A, you enter the following command:
dq,l1a,first
Example 4: You can use the substitution character * to display the first 26 queues
whose names contain the characters sw anywhere in the name:
dq,*sw*
Example 5: You can use the substitution character % to display the first 26 queues
whose names contain the characters pr in positions 3 and 4 of the function name:
dq,%%pr*
Example 6: Use the following command to display the status of the queue data set:
dq,status
Example of the Display from a DQ Command

Displaying the Queue Status (DQ) on page 41 shows an example of the display
resulting from a dq command without parameters. Message DSL143I shows the
information for up to 26 queues.
42
Operations Guide
DQ Command

> DQ
DSL143I Display Queues
Function
K USR WAIT
DMPR0
H 0 00 000036
DMPR2
H 0 00 000000
DMPR4
H 0 00 000000
DMSDI
0 00 000000
DMSO1
0 00 000000
DMSY0
0 00 000000
DMSY2
0 00 000000
DMSY4
0 00 000000
DMTST
3 00 000000
L1AI0
1 00 000049
L1PR0
N 0 00 000000
L1SWN
0 00 000000
L1ERROR
0 00 000000
115237
THRSH
00020 T
00020
00020
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00030
00050
00100
00030
00100
Function
DMPR1
DMPR3
DMPR89
DMSO0
DMERR
DMSY1
DMSY3
DUMMY
L1DE0
L1VE0
L1SWU
L1ACK
L1FREE
K USR WAIT
H 0 00 000000
H 0 00 000000
H 0 00 000098
0 00 000000
0 00 000000
0 00 000000
0 00 000000
0 00 000000
1 00 000017
3 00 000000
0 00 000004
3 00 000023
0 00 000000
THRSH
00020
00020
00020 T
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00050
00020
00030
00100
00100
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 13. Displaying the Queue Status
Message DSL143I is described in MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes. Here is a
short explanation of the queue-status displayed:
Function
The name of the MERVA ESA queue. The column after the queue name
shows the status of the MERVA ESA function queue:
H
Hold
Nohold
Activated
NOTIFY=YES is specified in the function-table entry.
Otherwise it is left blank.

K
The keys that are defined for this queue. As an operator, you do not need
this information, but, if you are interested, the queue keys are explained in
the book MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
USR
The number of users who are currently processing this queue.
WAIT The number of messages stored in this queue.

THRSH
The threshold number of messages defined in the MERVA ESA
function-table entry. T indicates that the threshold number has been
reached. If the threshold number is exceeded, you should notify the user
responsible for that queue.
Figure 14 on page 44 shows an example of the information that results when you
enter the STATUS parameter of the dq command. Message DSL146I shows the
status of the queue data set.
43
DQ Command

> DQ,STATUS
DSL146I Queue status
Key tables: Maximum=
Used
=
QDS blocks: System =
Data
=
# of large messages=
Last UMR : ID
=
Number =
Date
=
Time
=
I/O Module -Method =
Active Data Sets
=
115333
00003000
00002999
000007
000323 (43% used)
00000052
MERVAESA
00005876
19990419
192311
DSLQMCNV -VSB
QDS1
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 14. Displaying the Status of the Queue Data Set
Message DSL146I is explained in MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes. The above
example shows that, with 2999 used of 3000 available entries in the Queue Key
Table, the queue data set is only filled by 43 percent. As there are no free entries in
the Queue Key Table, the remaining space in the queue data set cannot be used.
Therefore the number of entries in the Queue Key Table should be increased to
6000 or 7000. This can be done by your system programmer in the MERVA ESA
customizing parameter module DSLPRM by the NQE parameter of the DSLPARM
macro.
44
Operations Guide
DQSORTED Command
Displaying the Queues Sorted (DQSORTED)

Use the dqsorted command to display the status of MERVA ESA queues sorted
according to the number of messages. The queues with the highest number of
messages are shown first. Only filled queues are shown. The command may be
abbreviated to dqso. The display is very similar to the display of the dq command.
The numbers are shown without leading zeros to improve the readability.
Command Format
The format of the dqsorted command is:
dqsorted
[function][,FIRST]
The first time you enter the dqsorted command without parameters, the status is
displayed for the first 26 queues with the highest message count. If you enter the
same command again, the next 26 queues are displayed.
function
This parameter is identical to the respective parameter of the dq command.
FIRST
Displays the status of the first 26 queues, the queues with the highest message
count.
Command Examples
The following section shows an example of how to enter the dqsorted command.
Example 1
You can use the FIRST parameter to display the status of the 26 queues with the
highest message count associated with message processing functions:
dqso first
Example 2
Enter the following command to display up to 26 queues whose names start with
the characters L1A and sorted according to the message count:
dqso l1a
If you enter this command again, the next 26 queues whose names start with L1A
are displayed. If you wish to display again the first 26 queues whose names start
with the characters L1A, you enter the following command:
dqso l1a,first
Example of the Display from a DQSORTED Command

Figure 15 on page 46 shows an example of the display resulting from a dqsorted
command without parameters. Message DSL143I shows the information for up to
26 queues.
45
DQSORTED Command

> DQSO
DSL143I Display Queues
Function
K USR WAIT THRSH
L1SDO
432
100 T
L3PR0
N
124
100 T
L2VE0
3
108
20 T
L2DE0
1
100
50 T
L3ACKF
3
100
100 T
SLPT1SDO
100
SLPT2SDO
100
L1PR0
N
50
100
L3PR1
N
10
100
L2PR0
N
7
100
SLPT2SYS
4
L2DO0
3
1
100
LRGDE0
3
1
150312
Function
K USR WAIT THRSH
L1PR1
N
142
100 T
L2PR1
N
113
100 T
L1ACK
3
100
100 T
L2ACK
3
100
100 T
SLPT1ACK
3
100
SLPT2ACK
3
100
L1DO0
1
51
100
L2SDO
10
100
SLPT1SYS
10
L3VE0
3
5
20
L1VE0
3
2
20
L3DO0
3
1
100
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 15. Displaying the Queue Status
Message DSL143I is described in MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes. A short
explanation can be found in the chapter for the dq command.
46
Operations Guide
DU Command
Displaying the User Status (DU)

Use the du command to display the status of a single user or all active
MERVA ESA users who are signed on.
Command Format
The format of the du command is:
[{ FIRST | userid [,FIRST]}]
du
If you enter the du command without parameters, the status of the first 26 users is
displayed. If you enter the command a second time without parameters, the status
of the next 26 users is displayed.
FIRST
Displays the sign-on status of the first 26 users.
userid
The name, or part of a name, of a user. The two methods for entering part of a
user name are:
asterisk (*) or percent (%). This method displays the first 26 user
identifications beginning with these characters.
v You can enter 1 to 8 characters including the substitution characters asterisk
many asterisks as are required can appear anywhere in the user
identification name.
single character. As many percent symbols as are necessary may appear
anywhere in the user identification name.
If you enter the same command again and there are more than 26 users
matching these characters, the next 26 users are displayed. If you want to
see the first 26 users again, you must enter the du command with the userid
followed by the FIRST parameter.
If you want to display the status of a single user, you must enter the complete
user identification, or enough characters to make the user identification unique.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the du command.
Example 1: Use the du command without any parameters to display the status of
the first 26 users. If you repeat this command, the next 26 users are displayed:
du
Example 2: Enter the following command to display the status of users with user
identifications that start with the same characters, such as MIL:
du,mil
47
DU Command
Example 3: Use the following command to redisplay the status of the first 26 users,
if you have already used the du command without parameters more than once:
du,first
Example 4: You can use the substitution character * to display the first 26 users
whose names contain the characters ab anywhere in the name:
du,*ab*
Example 5: You can use the substitution character % to display the first 26 users
whose names contain the characters cd in positions 3 and 4 of the user name:
du,%%cd*
Example of the Display from a DU Command

Displaying the User Status (DU) on page 47 shows the information that is
displayed when you enter the du command. Message DSL132I is explained in
MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
> DU
DSL132I Display Users
User-ID Function Origin-ID
MAS
CMD
TIBMBEAAAX00
USER2
L1VE0
TIBMBEAAAX00
USER4
L1VE9
TIBMBEAAAX01
USER6
L1DA0
TIBMBEAAAX00
115431
User-ID
USER1
USER3
USER5
USER7
Function
L1DE0
L1AI0
L1AK0
L1AO0
Origin-ID
TIBMBEAAAX00
TIBMBEAAAX02
TIBMBEAAAX00
TIBMBEAAAX02
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 16. Displaying the User Status
The message in Displaying the User Status (DU) on page 47 contains user-status
information under the following headings:
48
Operations Guide
User-ID
The identification of the user who is signed on
Function
The name of the function being used
Origin-ID
The origin identifier of the user.
FORCE Command
Forcing Off Users (FORCE)

Use the force command to remove a user from the system (that is, to force a
sign-off). The force command should only be used when the task of the user has
ended abnormally, without signing him off. Using the force command allows the
user to sign on again.
If this user was processing a MERVA ESA User File record, other users cannot
access this record. The force command also allows this User File record to be
accessed by other users or by the forced user.
Notes:
1. You must be authorized to use the force command.
2. When the force command is used on an active user, the user is signed off only
when returning to the Function Selection menu.
Command Format
The format of the force command is:
force
userid
userid
Is the user identification of the user who is to be forced off.
Command Example
To force off a user with the user identification of TEST06 enter the following
command:
force,test06
Example of the Display from a FORCE Command

Figure 17 on page 50 shows the display resulting from the command shown in the
command example. Message DSL133I returns the information resulting from the
execution of this command.
49
FORCE Command

> FORCE,TEST06
DSL133I TEST06 has been forced
115135
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
Figure 17. Forcing a User Off
50
Operations Guide
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
HF Command
Setting Functions to HOLD (HF)

Some message-processing functions can be associated with a transaction. The
transaction processes the messages written to the queue of the message-processing
function.
Use the hf command to set a message-processing function to HOLD status or to
stop an active transaction after completion of the message currently being
processed. HOLD status means that the associated transaction is not started
automatically when a message is written to the function queue. This status can be
reset with the sf command. If related functions are defined, they are all set to
HOLD status when the hf command is used for one of them.
Note: You must be authorized to enter the hf command for a function which is
MQI=YES.
Command Format
The format of the hf command is:
{function | ALL}
hf
function
The name of the message-processing function that you want to set to HOLD
status.
ALL
Specifies that you want to set all queues that are associated with a transaction
to HOLD status.
Note: You must be authorized to use the hf command with the ALL
parameter.
Command Example
This example shows the command you use to set function L1PR0 to HOLD status:
hf,l1pr0
Example of the Display from an HF Command

command shown in the command example. Message DSL115I confirms that the
function is in HOLD status, for details refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
51
HF Command

> HF,L1PR0
DSL115I L1PR0
115345
HELD
, TRAN=DSLH
, LT1=L84A
, LT2=
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 18. Setting a Function to HOLD Status

v The confirmation that the function is in HOLD status: HELD
A transaction associated with this function is not started automatically when a
message is written to the queue of this message-processing function. Users
cannot process the queue; messages cannot be retrieved from a held queue.
v The name of the transaction associated with the function: DSLH
v The logical terminal name defined for the function: L84A.
Transaction codes and logical terminal names have 4 characters in CICS and up to
Note: If the associated transaction is running, the HOLD status will take effect
when the program requests the next message from the queue.
52
Operations Guide
JSET Command
Set the Journal Switch Status (JSET)

Use the jset command to display the current switch status of the journal or to
modify the current switch status. There are three possible values for the switch
status:
ONCE The switch is performed only once. The journal data set A is switched to B
when A becomes full. This is the method used in previous MERVA ESA
versions.
MANUAL
The switch is performed only when the jswitch command is issued by an
operator. No automatic switching is performed; when the current journal
data set becomes full MERVA ESA cannot continue processing.
CYCLE
The switch is performed automatically each time a journal data set
becomes unavailable, for example, because it is full.
Notes:
1. You must be authorized to use the jswitch command to modify the journal
switch status.
2. With the journal in DB2 there is no concept of switching. Using the JSET
command with the DB2 journal will result in message DSL057I Command not
supported by DB2 journal.
Command Format
The format of the jset command is:
jset
[{ ONCE | MANUAL | CYCLE } ]
ONCE
Set the journal switch status to ONCE.
MANUAL
Set the journal switch status to MANUAL.
CYCLE
Set the journal switch status to CYCLE.
Example of the Display from a JSET Command
Figure 19 on page 54 shows the display resulting from the command jset.
Messages DSL055I or DSL056I return the information resulting from the execution
of this command.
53
JSET Command

> JSET MANUAL
DSL056I Journal switch status is changed from CYCLE to MANUAL
173648
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 19. Setting the Journal Switch Status
The message DSL056I shows the previous journal switch status and the new switch
status. Entering the command without parameter shows the message DSL055I with
the current journal switch status.
54
Operations Guide
JSTAT Command
Display the Status of the Journal Data Sets (JSTAT)

Use the jstat command to display the current status of the journal data set and a
list of the journal switch activities which occurred since MERVA ESA was started.
The list is limited to the most recent 12 entries.
Note: With the journal in DB2 there is no journal switch activity which can be
displayed. Instead message DSL058I is displayed showing the number of
rows in the DB2 journal table as well as the date and time of the oldest row.
Command Format
The format of the jstat command is:
jstat
Example of the Display from a JSTAT Command

Figure 20 shows the display resulting from the command jstat. Message DSL045I
returns the information resulting from the execution of this command.
> JSTAT
DSL045I Journal data set A open, 19669 records, 14% used in 7 extent(s
A>
B>
A>
Open Time and Status

19990303 170309 used
19990303 151409 used
19990303 145944 used
173620
Added
1
1407
20
Fill
Journal Switch Log
14% /007
4% /001 SWITCH MAS
VNDEBET2
14% /007 SWITCH MAS
VNDEBET2
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 20. Switching the Journal Data Set
The message DSL045I shows the status of the currently active journal data set. This
is followed by a table showing one row for each journal switch event. The first
character in each row, A or B, indicates the journal data set.
The open time gives the date and time when the journal data set was opened or
switched to. The format of the timestamp is YYYYMMDD HHMMDD. The status
can be either used or reset. The indication used means that records were found
in the data set when it was opened; new records are added after the existing
records. The Added column indicates the number of journal records added since
the data set was opened. The Fill status shows the same information as in the
message DSL045I. Journal Switch Log shows the reason for the switching;
normally either an operator entered the jswitch command as in the example above,
or the switch happens just because the first data set is full.
55
JSWITCH Command
Switch the Journal Data Sets (JSWITCH)

Use the jswitch command to switch from using the journal data set A to journal
data set B or vice versa. After the jswitch command has been used, the records in
the first data set can be processed by a utility program, for example REPRO to
copy the records to an archive file. After the records have been saved, the data set
can be reset to an initial state (empty) and the jswitch command can be used to
switch back to the first data set.
The jswitch allows to specify reset to indicate that the new data set is cleared
before being used. This reset parameter works only when the VSAM cluster is
defined with the option REUSE.
Be aware that having specified the REUSE option on the cluster definition, there is
a risk of losing the journal records. If the data set is reset by the operator without a
preceding backup, the records in the data set are lost.
Notes:
1. You must be authorized to use the jswitch command.
2. With the journal in DB2 there is no concept of switching. Using the JSWITCH
command with the DB2 journal will result in message DSL057I Command not
supported by DB2 journal.
Command Format
The format of the jswitch command is:
jswitch
[TO] [{A | B }] [AND] [RESET]
TO
For documentation purposes only.
A or B
The journal data set which is to be used next. If this data set is already the
active data set, the switch is not performed.
AND
For documentation purposes only.
RESET
The journal data set which will be used next is to be reset to an initial state.
This works only when the cluster definition used the option REUSE. When the
cluster was not defined with the option REUSE, the parameter RESET is
ignored. When RESET is used, the parameter A or B must be specified also for
security reasons.
Command Examples
Example 1
To switch the journal from the current data set to the other:
jswitch
Example 2
56
Operations Guide
JSWITCH Command
To switch the journal from using data set B to using data set A and reset data set A
to the initial (empty) state. It is assumed that the current journal data set is B:
jswitch A reset
Example of the Display from a JSWITCH Command

Figure 21 shows the display resulting from the command shown in the command
example 1. Message DSL045I returns the information resulting from the execution
of this command.
> JSWITCH
DSL045I Journal data set B open, 1409 records, 4% used in 1 extent(s)
173620
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 21. Switching the Journal Data Set
Replacing a Routing Module (NEWCOPY)

Use the newcopy command to get a new copy of a routing module without
terminating MERVA. The use of the newcopy command is restricted to routing
modules defined for functions in the function table.
Command Format
The format of the newcopy command is:
newcopy
nc
routingtable
The parameter for this command has the following meaning:
routingtable
The name of the routing table that is to be replaced by a new copy.
Command Example
This example shows the command you use to get a new copy of the routing table
DWSL1AI0 into the MERVA routing process.
57
newcopy Command
You can use the abbreviation nc instead of the newcopy command.
nc DWSL2AI0
Example of the Display from a NEWCOPY Command

in the command example.
> NC DWSL1AI0
DSL078I NEWCOPY accepted
145901
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 22. Replacing a Routing Module
Setting Priorities for Programs Defined in DSLNPTT (PRIORITY)

Use the priority command to set the priority of a program that has been defined in
DSLNPTT. As the priority command shows only an acceptance or rejection
message, use the dp (Display Program) command to see the new priorities of the
programs.
Only programs running under direct control of DSLNUC are affected by the
priority settings. The priority of NPT programs running as subtasks is determined
by the specification in the nucleus server table entry DSLNSV.
Note: You must be authorized to use the priority command.
Command Format
The format of the priority command is:
priority
y
{ progname1,priority1, ... ,progname8,priority8 }

{ pid1,priority1, ... ,pid8,priority8 }
progname1 - progname8
The descriptive names of up to eight programs that are defined in the
DSLNPTT. The priority command can be used for any of the defined programs
whether they are running or stopped.
58
Operations Guide
PRIORITY Command
pid1 - pid8
Instead of the program name, the program identification, generated by
DSLNPTT, can be used. It is a 1- to 3-digit identifier.
priority1 - priority8
The 1-character priority value. The priority value must be in the range A to Z,
or 0 to 9:
A
Is the lowest priority
Is the highest priority.
If the same priority is defined for several programs, the dispatching order
within this priority is determined in a way that all programs get an equal
amount of service. A program in the group is not called again until all the
programs in the group that need to be called have been called.
Note: The parameters progname and priority, or pid and priority, must always be
specified in pairs. The priority of up to eight programs can be set with
one priority command.
Note: The dynamic dispatching group DYN does no longer exist in MERVA ESA.
This concept is not needed, because the scheduling order for all NPT
programs of equal priority works the same way as the dynamic dispatching
group worked in the past. If a program was serviced once, it is serviced a
second time only if no other program of the group needs to be serviced. The
order in which the programs are defined in the DSLNPTT is irrelevant. The
number of priority values has been increased from 10 to 36 to allow for
more granularity in defining the priorities of programs.
59
PRIORITY Command
Command Examples
The following section shows some examples of how to enter the priority
command.
Example 1: You can enter the priority command with three sets of progname and
priority parameters:
priority,batch,8,transact,7,cicssrv,5
Example 2: This example is the same as example 1, but the abbreviation for the
priority command is used:
y,batch,8,transact,7,cicssrv,5
Example of a Display from a PRIORITY Command

Figure 23 shows an example of the priority command. Message DSL070I confirms
that the command has successfully completed.
> PRIORITY CONSOLE 9 BATCH 8 TRANSACT 5
DSL070I Priority values accepted
115133
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
Figure 23. Setting the Priorities of Programs
60
Operations Guide
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
QSWITCH Command
Switching the Queue Trace (QSWITCH)

Use the qswitch command to define whether or not the Queue trace is written to
the MERVA ESA Journal. You use it to change or query the mode of the queue
trace facility in general or for up to 20 individual queues. MERVA for ESA Concepts
and Components contains an explanation of the queue-trace entries.
Each response to a correct qswitch command shows always the states of the
general queue trace and of the individual queues independent of the parameters
used.
Notes:
1. You must be authorized to use the qswitch command.
2. You should only use this command when your system administrator has
instructed you to do so.
Command Format
The format of the qswitch command is:
qswitch
qw
[{state}]
[{queue-name[,state]}]
[{[state],queue-name}]
If you enter the qswitch command without parameters, the actual setting is
displayed.
state
Is the state of the queue trace. If the queue-name parameter is not specified, the
state applies to the general queue trace. state can have the following values:
LARGE
The large queue trace is active, that is, the queue parameter list and the
complete queue element are traced. You can abbreviate this parameter to L.
If MERVA ESA is customized for queue management using DB2, the queue
parameter list, DB2 return information, queue descriptors, and the message
are traced.
SMALL
The small queue trace is active, that is, the queue parameter list and the
queue element prefix are traced. You can abbreviate this parameter to S.
If MERVA ESA is customized for queue management using DB2, only the
queue parameter list is traced.
OFF
The queue trace is not active. You can abbreviate this parameter to O.
queue-name
Is the name of a queue for which you want to define an individual queue trace
state. Any 1 to 8 characters that are different from the state parameters and
that are a queue or dummy queue defined in the MERVA ESA function table
are considered to be the name of a queue.
61
QSWITCH Command
If you do not specify the state parameter with the queue-name parameter, the
state LARGE is assumed as default.
If you specify the state OFF for a queue, an individual state is not used for this
queue anymore.
If the general queue trace and an individual queue have a different trace state, the
higher state is taken, LARGE being the highest state and SMALL being the lowest
state.
If, after a queue management multiple put or route operation, a queue element is
written to more than one and up to 12 queues, and one or more of these queues
have an individual queue trace state, also the highest state is taken.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the qswitch command.
Example 1: Enter the following command to request the large queue trace:
qswitch,large
Example 2: Use the SMALL parameter to not trace the data of the queue elements:
qw,small
Example 3: If you specify the command without any parameters the actual setting
of the queue trace facility is displayed:
qw
Example 4: Specify the name of a queue to request that the queue facility traces all
activities of this queue. The following formats of the command can be used:
qw,l1ve0
qw,l1ve0,large
qw,large,l1ve0
qw,,l1ve0
Example of the Display from a QSWITCH Command

Figure 24 on page 63 shows an example of the message returned when you enter
the qswitch,l2ve0,small command.
62
Operations Guide
QSWITCH Command

> QSWITCH,L2VE0,SMALL
DSL038I Queue trace status is OFF
Queue Name
Status
L1DE0
LARGE
L2VE0
SMALL
115033
Queue Name
L1VE0
Status
LARGE
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 24. Using the QSWITCH Command
After the general trace state, the following information is shown:

Queue Name
The name of the queue for which an individual trace state is displayed
Status
Indicates the queue trace state of the queue.
This example shows that the general queue trace state is OFF, and three queues
have an individual queue trace state.
63
RESHUT Command
Resetting Shutdown (RESHUT)

The reshut command allows the reactivation of the user sessions and Hardcopy
Printer functions after shutdown has been entered. This command can be entered
at any time before the cancel or terminat command is entered.
Note: You must be authorized to use the reshut command.
Command Format
The format of the reshut command is:
reshut
rs
The reshut command has no parameters.

Command Example
You can use the abbreviation rs instead of the reshut command:
rs
Example of the Display from a RESHUT Command

Figure 25 shows the display resulting from the command shown in the command
example. Message DSL052I returns the information resulting from the execution of
this command.
> RS
DSL052I SHUTDOWN reset, MERVA end users can sign on again
115236
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
Figure 25. Resetting SHUTDOWN with RESHUT
64
Operations Guide
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
RSWITCH command
Switching the Routing Trace (RSWITCH)

Use the rswitch command to define whether or not the routing trace is written to
the MERVA ESA Journal. You use it to change or query the mode of the routing
trace facility in general or for up to 20 individual routing tables. MERVA for ESA
Concepts and Components contains an explanation of the routing-trace table entries.
Each response to a correct rswitch command shows always the states of the
general routing trace and of the individual routing tables independent of the
parameters used.
Notes:
1. You must be authorized to use the rswitch command.
2. You should only use this command when your system administrator has
instructed you to do so.
Command Format
The format of the rswitch command is:
rswitch
rw
[{state }] [{rt-name[,state]}] [{[state],rt-name}]
If you enter the rswitch command without parameters, the actual setting is
displayed.
state
Is the state of the routing trace. If the rt-name parameter is not specified, the
state applies to the general routing trace. state can have the following values:
ALL
All routing activities based on a routing table are traced.
WARNING
Only warnings and severe errors detected by the routing are traced.
Successful routing operations are not traced. You can abbreviate this
parameter to W.
SEVERE
Only severe errors detected by the routing are traced. Routing operations
that are completed successfully or with a warning are not traced. You can
abbreviate this parameter to S.
OFF
No routing activities are traced. You can abbreviate this parameter to O.
rt-name
Is the name of a routing table for which you want to define an individual
routing trace state. Any 1 to 8 characters that are different from the state
parameters are considered to be the name of a routing table.
If you do not specify the state parameter with the rt-name parameter, the state
ALL is assumed as default.
65
RSWITCH command
If you specify the state OFF for a routing table, an individual state is not used
for this routing table anymore.
If the general routing trace and an individual routing table have a different trace
state, the higher state is taken, ALL being the highest state and SEVERE being the
lowest state.
Note: If enhanced DB2 queue management is in use and the routing trace has
been activated for a particular routing table, or for all routing tables, then
transactions for functions specifying those routing tables are initiated by
MERVA with the DSLFNT DIRDB2 parameter set to NO. In this case
transactions which condition the use of direct DB2 access on this parameter
(for example DSLX), will use central service queue management even
though DIRDB2=YES is specified in the DSLFNTT.
Routing is not traced for transactions using direct DB2 access.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the rswitch command.
Example 1: Enter the following command to request that the routing facility traces
all activities:
rswitch,all
Example 2: Use the SEVERE parameter to trace only severe routing errors:
rw,severe
Example 3: If you specify the command without any parameters the actual setting
of the mode of the routing trace facility is displayed:
rw
Example 4: Specify the name of a routing table to request that the routing facility
traces all activities of this routing table. The following formats of the command can
be used:
rw,dwsl2out
rw,dwsl2out,all
rw,all,dwsl2out
rw,,dwsl2out
Example of the Display from a RSWITCH Command

Figure 26 on page 67 shows an example of the message returned when you enter
the rswitch,dwsl2out,severe command.
66
Operations Guide
RSWITCH command

> RSWITCH,DWSL2OUT,S
DSL030I Routing trace status is OFF
R-Table Location
Status
DWSL2AO0 DSLFNTT OK ALL
DWSL2OUT DWSLTT
OK SEVERE
115033
R-Table Location
Status
DWSL2DO0 DSLFNTT OK ALL
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 26. Confirming the RSWITCH Command
After the general trace state, the following information is shown:

R-Table
The name of the routing table for which an individual trace state is displayed
Location
The name of the MERVA ESA function table or the SWIFT Link logical terminal
table where the routing table was found. This name is followed by the
availability indicator:
OK
Indicates that the routing table could be loaded during the MERVA ESA or
SWIFT Link initialization
NA
(Not available) indicates that the routing table could not be loaded during
the MERVA ESA or SWIFT Link initialization.
If the routing table was not found, NOTFOUND is shown as location, and the
availability indicator is not used. Even in this case, MERVA ESA considers the
trace state when this routing table is used in a routing operation.
Status
Indicates the routing trace state of the routing table.
This example shows that the general routing trace state is OFF, and three routing
tables, that were found in DSLFNTT or DWSLTT, have an individual routing trace
state.
67
SF Command
Starting Functions (SF)

Some message-processing functions can be associated with a transaction. The
transaction processes the messages written to the queue of the message-processing
function.
Use the sf command to set a message-processing function to NOHOLD status and
start the transaction associated with the function. The sf command can be used
with any function status (see description of the df command in Topic Displaying
the Function Status (DF) on page 24). Starting the transaction is requested from
CICS or IMS. When the function cannot be started because CICS or IMS did not
accept the start, the function is set to HOLD status. If related functions are defined,
the transaction is started once for the two or three related functions, and they are
all set to the ACTIVTD status.
Note: You must be authorized to enter the sf command for a function which is
MQI=YES.
Command Format
The format of the sf command is:
function
sf
function
The name of the MERVA ESA message-processing function whose transaction
is to be started.
The transaction name and the (optional) logical terminal name must have been
specified in the function-table entry during MERVA ESA generation.
Command Example
This example shows the command you use to start the function L1PR0:
sf,l1pr0
Example of the Display from an SF Command

Starting Functions (SF) shows the display that would result if you entered the
command shown in the command example. Message DSL115I confirms the start of
the transaction, for details refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
68
Operations Guide
SF Command

> SF,L1PR0
DSL115I L1PR0
115353
STARTED, TRAN=DSLH
, LT1=L84A
, LT2=
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 27. Starting a Message-Processing Function

v Confirmation that the function is started: STARTED
v The transaction associated with the function: DSLH
v The logical terminal name defined for the function: L84A.
Transaction codes and logical terminal names have 4 characters in CICS and up to
69
SHUTDOWN Command
Shutting Down User Sessions (SHUTDOWN)

The shutdown command causes user sessions and MERVA ESA hardcopy-printer
tasks to stop when the current message processing has finished.
The shutdown command has no effect on:
v The MERVA ESA batch programs, or on MERVA ESA users working under the
CMD function (operator command processing).
v The MERVA ESA users working under the MSC function (MERVA ESA System
Control).
You can sign on for both functions after a shutdown command has been issued.
Note: You must be authorized to use the shutdown command.
Command Format
The format of the shutdown command is:
shutdown
sh
The shutdown command has no parameters.

Command Example
You can use the abbreviation sh instead of the shutdown command:
sh
Example of the Display from a SHUTDOWN Command

command shown in the command example. Message DSL050I confirms that the
command has been accepted.
70
Operations Guide
SHUTDOWN Command

> SH
DSL050I SHUTDOWN accepted
115438
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 28. Shutting Down MERVA ESA
71
START Command
Starting a Program Defined in DSLNPTT (START)

Use the start command to start a program that has been defined in DSLNPTT.
Note: You must be authorized to use the start command.
Command Format
The format of the start command is:
start
s
{ progname | pid } [,parameter]
progname
The descriptive name of the program to be started. The name must be defined
in DSLNPTT, and a start command must be allowed for it.
The program must not have already been started.
pid
A 1-to-3 character identification of the program you want to start. This
program identification is generated in DSLNPTT. This parameter can be used
instead of the progname parameter.
parameter
A 1- to 8-byte parameter value for the program to be started. This parameter
value is moved to the field NPTPARM for use by the started program. For
example, the program DSLISYNP (descriptive name SYNPOINT) used under
IMS uses a start parameter: a 1- or 2-digit time interval in minutes.
Command Examples
The following section shows some examples of how to enter the start command.
Example 1: To start a program, such as the CONSOLE program, you can enter the
start command with the progname parameter:
start,console
Example 2: You can also specify a program identification (pid parameter) to start a
program. In this example the abbreviation of the start command is used:
s,1
Example 3: Use a start parameter for the syncpoint program SYNPOINT to write
an IMS syncpoint every 5 minutes:
s,synpoint,5
Example of the Display for a START Command

Figure 29 on page 73 shows an example of the start console command as it
appears on the panel after it has been entered. Message DSL060I confirms the start
of the program.
72
Operations Guide
START Command

> START,CONSOLE
DSL060I CONSOLE
115135
start successful
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 29. Starting a Program
73
STOP Command
Stopping a Program Defined in DSLNPTT (STOP)

Use the stop command to stop a program defined in DSLNPTT.
Note: You must be authorized to use the stop command.
Command Format
The format of the stop command is:
stop
p
{ progname | pid }
progname
The descriptive name of the program to be stopped. This name must be
defined in DSLNPTT and a stop command must be allowed for it. The
program must have been started.
pid
An identification, 1 to 3 characters in length, of the program you want to stop.
This program identification is generated in DSLNPTT. It can be used instead of
the program name.
Command Examples
The following section shows some examples of how to enter the stop command.
Example 1: You can specify the program name in the stop command:
stop,console
Example 2: You can also enter a program identification. In this example the
abbreviation of the stop command is used:
p,1
Example of the Display from a STOP Command

Figure 30 on page 75 shows an example of the stop console command. Message
DSL061I confirms that the program has stopped.
74
Operations Guide
STOP Command

> STOP,CONSOLE
DSL061I CONSOLE
115233
stop successful
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 30. Stopping a Program
75
TERMINAT Command
Stopping MERVA ESA (TERMINAT)

The terminat command is described in Stopping MERVA ESA (CANCEL and
TERMINAT) on page 17.
76
Operations Guide

Before reading this chapter, you should be familiar with the SWIFT network, as
described in S.W.I.F.T. User Handbook. The SWIFT link communicates with the
S.W.I.F.T. II network.
The SWIFT link can be started automatically when MERVA ESA is started, or it
can be started using the MERVA ESA operator command start swiftii.
The SWIFT link can be stopped using the MERVA ESA operator command stop
swiftii. During the MERVA ESA termination, the SWIFT link is stopped
automatically.
The SWIFT Link commands described in this chapter cause the generation of the
SWIFT LOGIN, SELECT, QUIT, LOGOUT and ABORT messages, and enable you to
monitor and control the status of the connection to the SWIFT network.
The synonym command codes with the prefix '2' are no longer defined. If required,
you can add the required definitions in the DWSNCMTC copy book.
Considerations when using WebSphere BI for FN Extension for

SWIFTNet
When WebSphere BI for FN Extension for SWIFTNet is connected to MERVA ESA
and uses its services, Extension for SWIFTNet uses the MERVA ESA SWIFT Link
resources, namely the logical terminal table DWSLTT and its logical terminal
definitions.
If Extension for SWIFTNet uses a logical terminal, this logical terminal cannot be
used in a MERVA ESA SWIFT Link command at the same time. The commands
that use the logical terminal exclusively are abort, login, select, quit, and logout.
When you enter one of these commands for a logical terminal that Extension for
SWIFTNet is using, the command is not executed, and an error message is
displayed. The dl command response indicates this in the status column by the
string **SNF**.
To use the logical terminal in MERVA ESA, you must either log out the logical
terminal in Extension for SWIFTNet, or you must stop and restart the MERVA ESA
SWIFT Link. You must first use the stop swiftii command and then the start
swiftii command.
When MERVA ESA SWIFT Link uses a logical terminal with the login command,
this logical terminal cannot be used by Extension for SWIFTNet as long as MERVA
ESA is still running. You must stop and restart the SWIFT link as described above
to make the logical terminal available to Extension for SWIFTNet.
You can use the dds command to modify the delivery subsets used for select
commands issued by SWIFTNet FIN operators in Extension for SWIFTNet. You can
overwrite the delivery subsets using the MERVA ESA dds command, even when
77
the logical terminal is in use by Extension for SWIFTNet. The specified delivery
subsets become active as the default delivery subsets when the select command is
issued.
You can use the setlt command to overwrite the ICC parameters for SLS and the
USE workstation name for both MERVA ESA and Extension for SWIFTNet. The
other parameters of the setlt command have no effect on the processing of
Extension for SWIFTNet.
Aborting the FIN Application (ABORTAP)

Use the command abortap to abort the connection of the FIN applications (which
must have been defined in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT) with the SWIFT
network. The abortap command is accepted in any case, no matter which status
the FIN application has. However, if the FIN application is in CLOSED status, the
abortap command has no effect.
You should use the abortap command only in cases where the quit command does
not work, for example, when the SWIFT network does not send the ISN
acknowledgments, and you want to select the FIN application again to resume its
processing.
If necessary, the abortap command generates an abort AP message (APDU 33) and
sends it to the SWIFT network.
When the abort process is complete:
v The association of the FIN application is released (disassociation of the AI layer)
if it exists.
v The transport connection of the FIN application is released (T-disconnect of the
transport layer) if it exists.
Use the command to abort:
v One FIN application
v All FIN applications on one line to the SWIFT network (if you are authorized by
your installation)
v All FIN applications on all lines to the SWIFT network (if you are authorized by
your installation).
When one line of the SWIFT link is shared by several financial institutions with
several FIN applications, an abortap command must be entered for each FIN
application that wants to abort the communication with the SWIFT network.
Alternatively, you can use the abortlt command to abort the master logical
terminals or the abortli command to abort the line.
Command Format
The format of the abortap command is:
abortap
aap
{[ltname|ALL] [,line|ALL]}
78
Operations Guide
ABORTAP Command
Note: You must be authorized to use the abortap command with an ALL
parameter.
ltname|ALL
Is the 9-character name of the master logical terminal (LT) whose FIN
application is to be aborted.
This name must be:
v A valid logical terminal name that has been given to the financial institution
by S.W.I.F.T.
v Defined in the Logical Terminal Table (DWSLTT) as a master LT.
v A FIN application must be defined for this logical terminal in DWSLTT.
If you have the appropriate authorization level, you can use any master logical
terminal; otherwise you can use only the master logical terminal that matches
the first 9 characters of the origin identification in your User File record.
The default for this parameter depends on whether you use the system console
to enter the abortap command:
v If you use the system console, the first master logical terminal in the Logical
Terminal Table DWSLTT is taken.
v If you do not use the system console, the first 9 characters of the origin
identification of your User File record are taken.
If you use the parameter ALL in the place of the ltname parameter, the FIN
applications of all master logical terminals of all lines or of the specified line
are treated depending on their status as follows (the parentheses show the
status in response to the dl command):
Session key pending (SK PND)
The FIN application is immediately set to CLOSED status.
Session key proceeding (SK PRC)
Select pending (SEL PND)
Select proceeding (SEL PRC)
The FIN application is set to ABORT PENDING status.
Open (OPEN)
Quit pending (QUI PND)
Quit proceeding (QUI PRC)
For any other status, there is no change for the FIN application.
If the ABORT PENDING status was set, the abort AP message (APDU 33) is
eventually generated and sent to the SWIFT network.
79
ABORTAP Command
are treated according to their status (the parentheses show the status in
response to the dl command):
Select proceeding (SEL PRC)
Open (OPEN)
Quit pending (QUI PND)
Quit proceeding (QUI PRC)
If the ABORT PENDING status was set, the abort AP message (APDU 33) is
line|ALL
If you use the line parameter, you must also use the ALL parameter in place of
the ltname. All FIN applications of the specified line are then treated according
to their status. If you specify ALL in place of the line parameter, the FIN
applications of all lines are treated according to their status. If the second
parameter is not specified, all lines are processed as default.
Command Examples
This section shows examples of how to enter the abortap command.
Example 1: This example shows the abortap command for the FIN application of a
specific master logical terminal:
abortap,vndebet2a
Example 2: This example shows the abortap command for the FIN application of
all master logical terminals on line 1:
abortap,all,1
Example 3: Enter one of the following commands to abort all FIN applications on
all lines:
aap,all
aap,all,all
Example of the Display from an ABORTAP Command

Figure 31 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to the abortap
command for all FIN applications on all lines. Figure 32 shows how the FIN
80
Operations Guide
ABORTAP Command
applications are aborted with a dm last command.
> AAP,ALL
DWS554I ABORTAP ALL FIN accepted for all lines
115032
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 31. Abort of All FIN Applications on All Lines

> DM LAST
DSL075I Display Message 1999MAY28
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
092915 DWS621I VNDEBET2A FIN ABORT
092916 DWS621I VNDEBET2B FIN ABORT
092930 DWS622I VNDEBET2A FIN ABORT
092932 DWS622I VNDEBET2B FIN ABORT
115034
proceeding
proceeding
successful
successful
on
on
on
on
line
line
line
line
1
2
1
2
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 32. Completion of Abort of All FIN Applications on All Lines
81
ABORTLI Command
Aborting Lines to the SWIFT Network (ABORTLI)

Use the command abortli to abort lines to the SWIFT network, that is, to abort the
computer based terminal (CBT).
The abortli command is accepted in any case, no matter which status the master
logical terminals and FIN applications of this line have.
You should use the abortli command only in cases where the quit, logout,
abortap, and abortlt commands do not work, for example, when the SWIFT
network does not send the acknowledgments and you do not want to wait for the
time-out on these acknowledgments as you want to resume processing using login
and select.
The abortli command performs the same functions as the close,line,imm command.
The abortli command does not generate any message for sending to the SWIFT
network. Instead:
v The traffic on the line stops.
v On an X.25 line, the session to MERVA Extended Connectivity is closed.
v The line subtask is detached.
v All storage allocated for the line is freed.
v The line definition module is deleted.
Note: You must be authorized to use the abortli command, and you can use it to
abort one line or all lines to the SWIFT network.
Command Format
The format of the abortli command is:
abortli
ali
{line|ALL}
The parameter of this command has the following meaning:
line|ALL
Specifies the number of the line you want to abort, or ALL, if you want to
abort all lines.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the abortli command.
Example 1: Enter the following command to abort line 2:
abortli,2
Example 2: This example shows the abbreviation of the abortli command with the
ALL parameter:
ali,all
Example of the Display from an ABORTLI Command
82
Operations Guide
ABORTLI Command
Figure 33 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to the abortli
command for line 2.
> ALI 2
DWS561I ABORTLI accepted for line 2
115036
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 33. Aborting Line 2 to the SWIFT Network
83
ABORTLT Command
Aborting Master Logical Terminals (ABORTLT)

Use the command abortlt to abort the connection of SWIFT master logical
terminals (which must have been defined in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT)
with the SWIFT network. The abortlt command is accepted in any case, no matter
which status the master logical terminals have. However, if a master logical
terminal is in LOGOUT status, the abortlt command has no effect. Aborting a
master logical terminal also aborts the FIN application of this master logical
terminal.
You should use the abortlt command only in cases where the logout command
does not work, for example, when the SWIFT network does not send the ISN
acknowledgments, and you want to log in the master logical terminal again for
resuming its processing.
If necessary, the abortlt command generates an abort LT message (APDU 35) and
sends it to the SWIFT network. If FIN applications are also aborted, the abort LT
message is sent only after the abort process of these FIN applications is complete
and these applications are closed.
When the abort process is complete, the following is done for this master logical
terminal:
v The association of the application control (APC) is released (disassociation of the
AI layer), if it exists.
v The transport connection of the APC is released (T-disconnect of the transport
layer), if it exists.
In addition, when the abort process for the last master logical terminal is complete:
v The association of the logical terminal control (LTC) is released (disassociation of
the AI layer).
v The transport connection of the LTC is released (T-disconnect of the transport
layer).
v The network connection is released (N-disconnect of the link layer). For a
switched line, the physical connection to the SWIFT network is released.
Use the command to abort one master logical terminal. If you are authorized by
your installation, you can use the command to abort all master logical terminals on
one line or on all lines to the SWIFT network.
several master logical terminals, an abortlt command must be entered for each
master logical terminal that wants to abort the communication with the SWIFT
network. Alternatively, you can use the abortli command to abort the line.
Command Format
The format of the abortlt command is:
abortlt
alt
84
Operations Guide
ABORTLT Command
Note: You must be authorized to use the abortlt command with an ALL
parameter.
ltname
Is the 9-character name of a master logical terminal (LT).
This name must be:
by S.W.I.F.T.
v Defined in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT as a master LT.
to enter the abortlt command:
The master logical terminal is treated depending on its status (the parentheses
show the status in response to the dl command):
The master logical terminal is immediately set to LOGOUT status.
Login pending (LIN PND)
Login proceeding (LIN PRC)
The master logical terminal is set to ABORT PENDING status.
Logged in (LOGIN)
Logout pending (OUT PND)
Logout proceeding (OUT PRC)
For any other status, there is no change for the master logical terminal.
If the ABORT PENDING status was set, the abort LT message (APDU 35) is
ALL[,line|ALL]
If you use the parameter ALL,line, all master logical terminals assigned to the
specified line are treated according to their status. If you specify ALL,ALL, all
master logical terminals of all lines are treated according to their status as
listed below. If the second parameter is not specified, all lines are used as
default (the parentheses show the status in response to the dl command):
85
ABORTLT Command
Login proceeding (LIN PRC)
Logged in (LOGIN)
Logout pending (OUT PND)
Logout proceeding (OUT PRC)
If the ABORT PENDING status was set, the abort LT message (APDU 35) is
If a master logical terminal is set to ABORT PENDING status, its FIN
applications that are not in CLOSED status are treated as described in
Aborting the FIN Application (ABORTAP) on page 78.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the abortlt command.
Example 1: This example shows the abortlt command for a specific master logical
terminal:
abortlt,vndebet2a
Example 2: Enter the following command to set the status of all master logical
terminals assigned to line 2 to LOGOUT or ABORT PENDING, depending on their
current settings. The FIN applications of these master logical terminals are also set
to status CLOSED or ABORT PENDING, depending on their current settings:
alt,all,2
Example of the Display from an ABORTLT Command

Figure 34 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to the abortlt
command with the ALL parameter for all lines. Figure 35 shows, by a dm last
command, how the master logical terminals and their FIN applications are aborted.
86
Operations Guide
ABORTLT Command

> ALT ALL,ALL
DWS544I ABORTLT ALL accepted for all lines
115133
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 34. Abort of All Master Logical Terminals on All Lines

> DM LAST
...
...
091915 DWS621I VNDEBET2A FIN ABORT proceeding on line
091916 DWS621I VNDEBET2B FIN ABORT proceeding on line
091930 DWS622I VNDEBET2A FIN ABORT successful on line
091931 DWS621I VNDEBET2A ABORT proceeding on line 1
091932 DWS622I VNDEBET2B FIN ABORT successful on line
091933 DWS621I VNDEBET2B ABORT proceeding on line 2
091940 DWS622I VNDEBET2A ABORT successful on line 1
091942 DWS622I VNDEBET2B ABORT successful on line 2
091955 DWS651I CBT disconnect is complete on line 1
092001 DWS643I Network connection terminated (T,0) on
092002 DWS643I Network connection terminated (T,0) on
115043
1
2
1
2
line 1
line 2
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 35. Completion of Abort of All Master Logical Terminals on All Lines
87
CLOSE Command
Closing a Line (CLOSE)

Use the command close to close a line to the SWIFT network. Closing a line:
v Detaches the line subtask
v Closes the session to MERVA Extended Connectivity on the 37xx
Communications Controller (X.25 line)
v Frees all storage allocated for the line
v Deletes the line definition module.
The command is useful if you want to use the storage of an unused line for other
purposes.
Under normal circumstances, you use the close command only if the line is not
active, that is, all master logical terminals assigned to this line are logged out and
all their FIN applications are closed. However, after errors on the line, you may
want to close the line and open it for a new login. In this case, you can use the
close command with the IMM or DUMP parameter.
Note: You must be authorized to use the close command.
Command Format
The format of the close command is:
close
cl
line[,{IMM|DUMP}]
The parameters for this command have the following meaning:
line
Is the number of the line to be closed. It must be a number from 1 to 30. This
number refers to the name of a line definition module, for example, DWSLIN1
for line 1 or DWSLIN15 for line 15. If the number you enter is wrong (that is,
there exists no line definition module for the number), the command is
rejected.
There is no default for the line parameter.
IMM|DUMP
The IMM or DUMP parameters close the line whether the line is active or not.
This can be helpful after errors on this line that prevent the line from becoming
inactive. The DUMP parameter provides also a dump of the line subtask with
the dump code U102.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the close command.
Example 1: Enter the following command to close line 2:
close,2
Example 2: Enter the following command abbreviation to close line 3 even if line 3
is active:
88
Operations Guide
CLOSE Command
cl,3,imm
Example of the Display from a CLOSE Command

Closing a Line (CLOSE) shows an example of the display in response to the close
command in Example 1.
> CLOSE,2
DWS581I CLOSE command accepted for line 2
115038
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 36. Close a Line to the SWIFT Network
89
DDS Command
Displaying and Updating the Delivery Subset Mnemonics (DDS)

You use the dds command:
v To display the delivery subset mnemonics of a FIN application
v To update the delivery subset mnemonics of a FIN application before you use
the select command for this FIN application.
The display shows:
v The status of the FIN application
v The actual delivery subset mnemonics contained in the pertinent entry of the
Logical Terminal Table (DWSLTT)
v Instructions on how to update the delivery subset mnemonics if the status of the
FIN application is CLOSED.
If you use the system console to enter the dds command, you cannot update the
delivery subset mnemonics.
Command Format
The format of the dds command is:
dds
[ltname]
ltname
Is the 9-character name of the master logical terminal for whose FIN
application you want to display or update the delivery subset mnemonics.
This name must be:
by S.W.I.F.T.
v Defined in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT as a master LT. A FIN
application must be defined for this logical terminal in DWSLTT.
to enter the login command:
The display shows up to 30 delivery subset mnemonics of the FIN application.
If the status is CLOSED, you can add, delete, and change the delivery subset
mnemonics, and you can sort them in a different order by means of a sequence
field. The sequence fields are renumbered in ascending order in the next
display.
90
Operations Guide
DDS Command
After having determined the new delivery subset mnemonics, you update the
DWSLTT entry by entering the dds command again.
Command Example
This section shows an example of how to enter the dds command.
Enter the following command to display the delivery subset mnemonics of the FIN
application of a master logical terminal.
dds,vndebet2a
Example of the Display from A DDS Command

Displaying and Updating the Delivery Subset Mnemonics (DDS) shows an
example of a panel displayed in response to a dds command.
> DDS VNDEBET2A
DWS575I VNDEBET2A
SQ subset
SQ
01 SYSTEM
02
__ ______
__
__ ______
__
__ ______
__
__ ______
__
__ ______
__
FIN delivery
subset
SQ
URGENT
03
______
__
______
__
______
__
______
__
______
__
subsets
subset
NORMAL
______
______
______
______
______
SQ
__
__
__
__
__
__
Status=CLOSED
subset
SQ subset
______
__ ______
______
__ ______
______
__ ______
______
__ ______
______
__ ______
______
__ ______
To update the delivery subset mnemonics:

Change one by overtyping, delete one by overtyping with blanks
Add one in a free field with a sequence number
Change the sequence using the SQ fields
Redisplay by pressing ENTER
Update DWSLTT by using the DDS command again
115433
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 37. Displaying the Delivery Subset Mnemonics
In this example, the input areas for the sequence fields and the delivery subset
mnemonics are indicated by underline characters (_). Underlining input areas
depends on the type of display station used and the setting of the ul command
(see the MERVA for ESA Users Guide for details).
91
DIVA Command
Displaying X.25 Interface Information (DIVA)

You use the diva command:
v To monitor the status of the MERVA ESA X.25 send and receive buffers
v To monitor the status of the SWIFT connection via X.25
v To list the values of your VTAM bind customization (DWSVLINE macro).
The display shows only:
v Lines that have been successfully initialized
v Lines that are assigned to a master logical terminal in the Logical Terminal Table
(DWSLTT)
v Lines that are used for connection to SWIFT via X.25.
Command Format
The format of the diva command is:
diva
line [,Buffers | States | Vtambnd]
line
Denotes the number of the line whose X.25 interface information you want to
display. The value entered must be a number from 1 to 30. The number refers
to the name of a line definition module, for example, DWSLIN1 for line 1,
DWSLIN15 for line 15. If the line is not initialized or is not an X.25 line, the
command is rejected.
BUFFERS
Displays the status of the MERVA ESA X.25 send and receive buffers. There are
four send buffers and three receive buffers defined for each line. You can
abbreviate BUFFERS with any of B, BU, BUF, BUFF, BUFFE, and BUFFER.
STATES
Displays the status of the SWIFT connection via X.25, such as:
v VTAM Bind information, such as the PLU and SLU name, and used
telephone numbers
v Current state of the network layer and the VTAM interface layer
v Last request to MERVA Extended Connectivity
v Last disconnect (disco) reason and last reset reason from MERVA Extended
Connectivity
v Last messages from the MERVA ESA VTAM interface program
You can abbreviate STATES with any of S, ST, STA, STAT, and STATE, or omit
it because it is the default.
VTAMBND
Displays most VTAM bind values. These values are either hard-coded or you
have customized them via the DWSVLINE macro. You can abbreviate
VTAMBND with any of V, VT, VTA, VTAM, VTAMB, and VTAMBN.
Command Examples
92
Operations Guide
DIVA Command
This section shows some examples of how to enter the diva command.
Example 1: Enter the following command to display the status of the send and
receive buffers of line 3:
diva 3,buffers
Example 2: Enter the following command to display the status of the MERVA ESA
VTAM interface program for line 7:
diva 7,states
Example 3: Enter the following command to display most values of the VTAM
bind customization for line 9:
diva 9,vtambnd
Example of the Command from a DIVA Command

Figure 38 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to a
divaline,BUFFERS command.
> DIVA 3,BUFFERS
DWS460I Line 3. Display BUFFERS of VTAM
o SEND (Network Layer to VTAM)
|
|
total sent: 23,456
|
|
Status 0 - free send buffer: 2
|
Status 2 - to be sent
: 1
|
Status 3 - VTAM accepted
: 0
|
Status 4 - send scheduled : 1
|
Status 5 - send complete
: 0
|
Status 9 - send error
: 0
|
115031
X.25 interface
o RECEIVE (VTAM to Network L.)
total received: 13,579
Status
Status
Status
Status
Status
0
6
7
8
9
free recv buffer:

waiting for data:
receive complete:
recv in process :
receive error
:
1
1
0
1
0
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 38. Displaying the Status of X.25 Send and Receive Buffers
When you enter the diva command with the BUFFERS parameter the following
information is shown:
total sent
Number of elements sent since the session was established
Status 0 - free send buffer

Number of send buffer elements with status 0 = free
Status 2 - to be sent
Number of send buffer elements with status 2 = data to be sent
Status 3 - VTAM accepted
Number of send buffer elements with status 3 = send started
Status 4 - send scheduled
Number of send buffer elements with status 4 = send scheduled
93
DIVA Command
Status 5 - send complete
Number of send buffer elements with status 5 = send complete
Status 9 - send error
Number of send buffer elements with status 9 = send error
total received Number of elements received since the session was established
Status 0 - free recv buffer
Number of receive buffer elements with status 0 = free
Status 6 - waiting for data
Number of receive buffer elements with status 6 = receive initiated
Status 7 - receive complete
Number of receive buffer elements with status 7 = receive complete
Status 8 - recv in process
Number of receive buffer elements with status 8 = receive in
process
Status 9 - receive error
Number of receive buffer elements with status 9 = receive error
Figure 39 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to a divaline,STATES
command.
> DIVA 7,STATES
DWS461I Line 7. Display STATES of VTAM X.25 interface
Network link state : 1
Last disco reason: X00 00 00
Last Connection req.: X00
Last reset reason: X00 00 00
VTAM interface state: 1
PLU-name .......... : ID0AC384
SLU-name: F39VU21
Last VTAM message
: DWS423I Line=7 Session established, PLU=ID0AC384
SLU=F39VU21
Phone number used
: 00497111234567890
Local DTE address
: 1234567890123
Remote DTE address :
115037
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 39. Displaying the Status of MERVA ESA VTAM Interface
When you enter the diva command with the STATES parameter the following
Network link state
The Network link state is set by the network layer program DWSNLNKV to
one of:
94
Operations Guide
Not initialized
Initialized, no network connection
Outgoing connection pending
Incoming connection pending
DIVA Command
4
Data transfer ready
Provider initiated RESET pending.
Last disco reason

Last disconnect reason. The format is origin - cause - diagnostic. You can find
a detailed description of these fields in MERVA Extended Connectivity Installation
and Users Guide. You can use the command SHOW X25REAS to get an
explanation of the reason code.
Last Connection req.
Last Extended Connectivity request. It can be one of the following:
X'00'
Data request
X'01'
Data indication
X'02'
Connect request
X'03'
Connect indication
X'04'
Connect response
X'05'
Connect confirm
X'08'
Reset request
X'09'
Reset indication
X'0A'
Reset response
X'0B'
Reset confirm
X'10'
Disconnect request
X'11'
Disconnect indication.
Last reset reason

Last reset reason. The format is origin - cause - diagnostic. You can find a
detailed description of these fields in MERVA Extended Connectivity Installation
and Users Guide.
VTAM interface state
The VTAM interface state is set by the MERVA ESA VTAM interface program
DWSVTMLC to one of:
0
VTAM ACB closed / no session
Session is between brackets
Session can receive data
Session can send data
Session is waiting for a definite response (DR)
BID rejected, awaiting data from SLU
Error.
PLU-name
Primary logical unit name.
SLU-name
Secondary logical unit name.
Last VTAM message
Last VTAM message. It is displayed in up to two lines.
95
DIVA Command
Phone number used
Telephone number used for dial to SWIFT (switched line).
Local DTE address
The local data terminal equipment (DTE) address. Can be null, a two-digit
subaddress, or a telephone number.
Remote DTE address
The remote data terminal equipment (DTE) address. This represents the
address an X.25 connection is established to, the called DTE address. Must not
have been specified for a leased line nor for a switched line.
Figure 40 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to a
divaline,VTAMBND command.
> DIVA 9,VTAMBND
DWS462I Line 9. Display VTAM BIND parameters of VTAM X.25 interface
VTAM logon mode name ..... :
VTAM bind parameters ..... : X0103 03B1 B030 8000 0085 85
X0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
RU size receiving / sending: 256 / 256
Local NSAP name ......... : BANKUSAA01000
Remote NSAP name ......... : FIN
Line type (Leased/Switched): L
Call user data (CUD) ..... : X4D45525645333230
Phone number for call back : (n/a for leased line)
115039
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 40. Displaying the VTAM Bind Values of a Line
When you enter the diva command with the VTAMBND parameter the following
VTAM logon mode name
VTAM logon mode name. Customizable via DWSVLINE macro. If specified,
the bind parameter of this logon mode name will overwrite the bind parameter
generated via the DWSVLINE macro, which are shown below.
VTAM bind parameters
VTAM bind parameter byte 1 to 25. Byte 1 to 9 and 12 to 25 are hard-coded in
the DWSVLINE macro. Via the DWSVLINE macro you can customize byte 10
(RU size receiving) and byte 11 (RU size sending). If a VTAM logon mode
name is specified, those bind parameter will overwrite the bind parameter
listed here.
RU size receiving / sending
Request unit size for receiving and sending. Customizable via DWSVLINE
macro. The RU sizes are coded in bytes 10 and 11 of the bind parameter.
Local NSAP name
Local network service access point name. Customizable via DWSVLINE macro.
96
Operations Guide
DIVA Command
Remote NSAP name
Remote network service access point name - always FIN. Hard-coded in the
DWSVLINE macro.
Line type (Leased/Switched)
Line type (Leased or Switched). Customizable via DWSVLINE macro.
Call user data (CUD)
The Call user data consists of two parts. The first part is fixed as defined by
SWIFT. It is MERVE320 in ASCII format, which is X'4D45525645333230'.
The second part defines additional Call user data and is customizable via
DWSVLINE macro in hexadecimal notation. Must not have been specified for a
leased line nor for a switched line.
Phone number for call back
The local telephone number for call back. Customizable via DWSVLINE macro.
Applicable only for switched lines (see Line type).
97
DL Command
Displaying the Line and Link Status (DL)

You use the dl command:
v To monitor the status of the lines to the SWIFT network
v To monitor the status of the links of the master logical terminals and their FIN
applications with:
Login sequence numbers (LSN) or Select sequence numbers (SSN)
Session numbers (SN)
Input sequence numbers (ISN)
Output sequence numbers (OSN)
Status.
The display shows only:
v Lines that have been successfully initialized
v Lines that are assigned to a master logical terminal in the Logical Terminal Table
(DWSLTT).
Command Format
The format of the dl command is:
dl
[ALL[,FIRST]]
FIRST
LINES
line[,FIRST]
ltname
ALL
If you enter the dl all command (or just dl, as ALL is the default if you do not
enter a parameter) the status of all lines and their master logical terminals and
their FIN applications is displayed:
v The status of the line is displayed first.
v The first master logical terminal (that is assigned to this line) is displayed
next with its ISN, OSN, LSN, and LOGIN status.
v The FIN application defined for this logical terminal with its status.
v The second master logical terminal that is assigned to this line and its FIN
application follows, then the third one and so on.
If all LTs and applications of this line are displayed, the status of the next line
with its LTs and FIN applications are displayed.
The following information is displayed for each line:
v Line number
v Line status.
If the display does not fit on one panel, you can request the continuation of the
display by entering the same command again (dl or dl all). If you want to see
the first part of the display again, enter dl first.
98
Operations Guide
DL Command
FIRST
Starts the display with the first available line, for example, after a dl or dl all
command.
LINES
Displays only the status of the lines, but not the status of the master logical
terminals and the FIN applications.
ltname
Is the name of a master logical terminal whose link status you want to display.
It must consist of 1 to 9 characters.
If less than 9 characters are specified, the parameter is used as a generic name
and all master logical terminals starting with the specified characters are
displayed.
The display shows the status of the line that is currently assigned to this
master logical terminal, followed by the status of this master logical terminal
and its FIN application.
If 9 characters are specified, the display shows the same information as in the
response to the setlt command shown in Setting Parameters for a Master
Logical Terminal (SETLT) on page 121.
line[,FIRST]
Is a number from 1 to 30 that specifies the line whose status and master logical
terminals and FIN applications you want to display.
If there is more information to display for this line than fits into one response,
you can request the continuation of the display by entering the same command
again. If you want to see the first display again, enter:
dl,line,first
You can also use the line[,FIRST] parameter after the ltname parameter to
display only the status of these master logical terminals of one line.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the dl command.
Example 1: Enter the following command to display the status of a specific master
logical terminal. The status of the line currently assigned to this master logical
terminal and of its FIN application is also displayed:
dl,vndebet2a
Example 2: Enter the following command to display the status of all lines followed
by their master logical terminals and FIN applications:
dl
Example 3: Enter the following command to display the status of all lines without
the status of their master logical terminals and FIN applications:
dl,lines
Example of the Display from a DL Command

Figure 41 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to a dl command.
99
DL Command

> DL
DWS570I LT and AP display
Line=1 Line is initialized (X.25)
LT name
AP
LSN SESS ISN
VNDEBET2A GPA
0013 0012 000002
VNDEBET2A FIN
0006 0004 000044
VNDEBET2B GPA
0000 0000 000000
VNDEBET2B FIN
0000 0000 000000
OSN
000001
000023
000000
000000
MXW
001
010
000
000
ISW
000
000
000
000
OSW
000
001
000
000
status SS Q AS
LOGIN
AC
OPEN
YY Y AC
LOGOUT
DC
CLOSED
DC
Line=3 Line is initialized (X.25)

LT name
AP
LSN SESS ISN
OSN
MXW ISW OSW status
VNDEBET2C GPA
0013 0012 000002 000001 001 000 000 LOGIN
VNDEBET2C FIN
0006 0004 000044 000023 010 000 001 OPEN
SS Q AS
AC
YY Y AC
Line=4 Line not initialized
115433
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 41. Displaying the Line Status
Line 1 and line 3 are connections to the

LT name
Name of the master logical terminal whose link status is displayed
AP
Name of the application whose status is displayed
LSN
Last login sequence number (LSN) for the master logical terminal or the last
select sequence number (SSN) for the FIN application. If secure login/select
(SLS) is used and the session key for this LSN or SSN is available, an asterisk
(*) precedes the LSN or SSN.
SESS
Session number
ISN
Last input sequence number
OSN
Last output sequence number
MXW
Maximum window
ISW
Actual ISN window
OSW
Actual OSN window
status
Login or select status. If automatic repetition of login or select is active, an
asterisk (*) precedes the login or select status.
The string **SNF** indicates that Extension for SWIFTNet is using this logical
terminal. MERVA ESA SWIFT Link commands are inhibited.
SS Application select state
100
Operations Guide
DL Command
Q LT-directed queue specification
AS
Association status.
This example shows that line 2 is not initialized, nor is there any master logical
terminal assigned to it in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT. This example also
shows that line 4 could be closed (using the close command), as there is no master
logical terminal assigned to it.
101
DLA Command
Displaying the Active Lines and Links (DLA)

You use the dla command in a similar way as the dl command; only the logical
terminals which are not logged out are displayed. The line number is displayed
together with the status of the GPA application rather than using a separate
display line. This results usually in a compacter display when a multitude of lines
and links are active.
Refer to the description of the dl command for details about the usage of the
command and its parameters.
Command Format
The format of the dla command is:
ltname[,FIRST]
dla
ltname
Is the name of a master logical terminal whose link status you want to display.
It must consist of 1 to 9 characters.
If less than 9 characters are specified, the parameter is used as a generic name
and all master logical terminals starting with the specified characters are
displayed.
The display shows the status of a master logical terminal and its FIN
application, if it is not logged out.
FIRST
If there is more information to display than fits into one response, you can
request the continuation of the display by entering the same command again.
If you want to see the first display again, enter:
dla ltname,first
Command Example
Enter the following command to display the status of all active master logical
terminals.
dla
Example of the Display from a DLA Command

Figure 42 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to a dla command.
102
Operations Guide
DLA Command

> DLA
DWS570I LT and AP display
LT name
AP
LSN SESS
VNDEBET2A GPA
1 0241 1488
VNDEBET2A FIN
0188 1358
VNDEBET2C GPA
3 0352 1514
VNDEBET2C FIN
0141 1219
154913
ISN
000001
163143
000002
065447
OSN
000005
183576
000001
071475
MXW
001
012
010
000
ISW
000
012
000
000
OSW
000
000
000
000
status SS Q AS
LOGIN
SC
OPEN
YY Y AC
LIN PRC
DC
CLOSED
DC
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 42. Displaying the Line Status for Active Logical Terminals
The information shown for both applications of the master logical terminal, GPA
and FIN, is identical to the display shown in response to the dl command. The
number on the right of the indication GPA shows the line number used by this
logical terminal.
103
LOGIN Command
Starting the Connection to the SWIFT Network (LOGIN)

Use the login command to start the connection of a SWIFT master logical terminal
(which must be defined in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT) to the SWIFT
network.
The login command for a master logical terminal is only accepted if this master
logical terminal is in LOGOUT status.
If
v
v
v
the line is not initialized when the login command is entered:

The line definition module is loaded.
The subtask for processing this line is attached.
The line is initialized.
The login command generates a SWIFT login message (APDU 02) and sends it
to the SWIFT network. If it is the first login message of this CBT, the following
actions are also performed:
1. The network connection is established (link layer). For a switched line that
means also connecting physically to the SWIFT network.
2. The transport connection of the logical terminal control (LTC) is established
(transport layer).
3. The association of the LTC is established (AI layer).
If the login is accepted by the SWIFT network, the transport connection and the
association of the application control (APC) of this master logical terminal are
established.
When this line of the SWIFT link is shared by several financial institutions with
several master logical terminals, a login command must be entered for each master
logical terminal that wants to communicate with the SWIFT network.
Note: You must be authorized to use the login command.
Command Format
The format of the login command is:
login
li
[ltname],[lsn],[sk1],[sk2][,window]
Note: When one of the parameters shown in the command format is omitted, but
one of them to the right of it is specified, all the commas must be specified
up to the last parameter used.
ltname
Is the 9-character name of the master logical terminal that you want to log in
to the SWIFT network.
This name must be:
by S.W.I.F.T.
104
Operations Guide
LOGIN Command
to enter the login command:
lsn Is the login sequence number (LSN) required by the SWIFT network for the
login message. The number you use must be in the range from 0 to 9999. The
current login sequence number is used as the default for this parameter.
It is only necessary to enter a value for this parameter after the first
MERVA ESA startup or when the SWIFT network has reset the number. The
default can be used at all other times.
If SLS is used and you enter the lsn parameter, and there is a session key
available in the DWSLTT entry for this master logical terminal, this session key
is erased even if you enter the same LSN as already contained in the DWSLTT
entry. This forces the SWIFT Link to get a new session key, for example, after a
change of the ICC parameters.
sk1
Is one of the following:
v If paper tables are used for login, this parameter is the first 4 digits of the
session key required for the login sequence number. It is used to calculate
the user authentication field (field 501) for the login message.
You need only enter this parameter if the Login Authorization Table
(DWSLOG2) is not used in your installation of the SWIFT link. If DWSLOG2
is included, and you enter a value for this parameter, it overrides the value
supplied by DWSLOG2. This parameter is mandatory, if you do not have
DWSLOG2 or the actual LSN is not defined in DWSLOG2.
v If secure login/select (SLS) is used, this parameter is the 32 characters
session key from the card reader when you use unconnected mode. If
connected mode or preloaded session keys are used, you need not enter the
session key here. Refer to Maintenance of Session Keys for Login and
Select on page 126 for details on preloading session keys.
v You can specify AUTO for this parameter if you want an automatic
repetition of login after failures. This requires preloaded session keys or a
connection to the workstation for USE (User Security Enhancements) when
SLS is used, or DWSLOG2 containing the session keys when paper tables are
used.
sk2
v If paper tables are used for login, this parameter is the second 4 digits of the
session key required for the login sequence number. It is used to calculate
the user authentication field (field 501) for the login message. The same rules
apply as for the sk1 parameter for using paper tables.
105
LOGIN Command
v If secure login/select (SLS) is used, this parameter is the 4 characters check
value for the session key specified with the sk1 parameter from the card
reader when you use unconnected mode.
v If you have specified AUTO for the sk1 parameter, you can specify a retry
count from 1 to 9 for the automatic repetition of login after failures with the
sk2 parameter. If you enter a value greater than 9, only the first digit is used.
If you do not specify this parameter or you specify an incorrect value, the
default of 3 is used.
window
Is the window for this session of the master logical terminal for the field 110 of
the login message. The number entered must be in the range from 1 to 999.
The default for this parameter is the window size specified in the Logical
Terminal Table DWSLTT.
Usually the SWIFT network accepts only a value of 1 for the window in the
login acknowledgment (APDU 22).
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the login command.
Example 1: This example shows the login command with the following
parameters:
v ltname - VNDEBET2A
v lsn - 111
v sk1 - is omitted
v sk2 - is omitted
v window - 1
The format of the command is:
login,vndebet2a,111,,,1
The three commas after the lsn parameter (111) indicate that the parameters sk1
and sk2 are not entered in the command.
Example 2: This example shows the abbreviation for the login command (li) with
the following parameters when using paper tables:
v lsn - 44
v sk1 - 0555
v sk2 - 0666
v window - is omitted
li,vndebet2a,44,0555,0666
Example 3: If you enter the command without any parameters, the default values
are assumed:
li
Example 4: This example shows the abbreviation for the login command with the
window parameter only:
li,,,,,1
106
Operations Guide
LOGIN Command
The five commas after the command show that the ltname, the lsn, the sk1, and the
sk2 parameters have not been entered, and the defaults are used.
Example 5: This example shows, when SLS unconnected mode is used, how to
enter the login command with the 32 character session key in the sk1 parameter
and the 4 character check value in the sk2 parameter:
li,,,967532247e7cd4d3b815844002ec262f,1668
The three commas after the command show that the ltname and the lsn parameters
have not been entered, and the defaults are used.
Example of the Display from a LOGIN Command
Starting the Connection to the SWIFT Network (LOGIN) shows an example of a
panel displayed in response to the login command.
> LOGIN,VNDEBET2A
DWS501I VNDEBET2A LOGIN accepted for line 1, login pending
115531
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 43. Login of a Master Logical Terminal
107
LOGOUT Command
Ending the Connection to the SWIFT Network (LOGOUT)

Use the command logout to end the connection of a SWIFT master logical terminal
(which must have been defined in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT) with the
SWIFT network. The master logical terminal must be successfully logged in to the
SWIFT network after a login command. The functions of the quit command are
executed for the FIN application of this master logical terminal together with the
logout command (see Quitting FIN Applications (QUIT) on page 112 for details).
The logout command generates a SWIFT logout message (APDU 06) and sends it
to the SWIFT network, when there are no acknowledgment messages outstanding
for messages sent to the SWIFT network for this master logical terminal (ISN
acknowledgments), and the FIN application of this master logical terminal is in
closed status.
When the logout process is complete:
v The association of the application control (APC) is released (disassociation of the
AI layer).
v The transport connection of the APC is released (T-disconnect of the transport
layer).
In addition, when the logout process for the last master logical terminal is
complete:
v The association of the logical terminal control (LTC) is released (disassociation of
the AI layer).
v The transport connection of the LTC is released (T-disconnect of the transport
layer).
v The network connection is released (N-disconnect of the link layer). For a
switched line, the physical connection to the SWIFT network is released.
Use the command to log out one master logical terminal, or, if you are authorized
by your installation, all master logical terminals on one line or on all lines to the
SWIFT network.
several master logical terminals, a logout command must be entered for each
master logical terminal that wants to end the communication with the SWIFT
network.
Note: You must be authorized to use the logout command.
Command Format
The format of the logout command is:
logout
lo
{[ltname|ALL], [line|ALL] [,timeday]}
ltname
Is the 9-character name of a master logical terminal.
This name must be:
108
Operations Guide
LOGOUT Command
by S.W.I.F.T.
to enter the logout command:
The master logical terminals status must be one of the following (the
parentheses show the status in response to the dl command):
Logged in (LOGIN)
The master logical terminal is set to LOGOUT PENDING status, and
the logout message (APDU 06) is eventually generated and sent to the
SWIFT network.
For any other status, the logout command is rejected.
ALL,[line|ALL]
If you use the parameter ALL,line or ALL,ALL (ALL is used as default if the
second parameter is not specified), all master logical terminal assigned to all
lines or to the specified line are treated according to their status (the
parentheses show the status in response to the dl command):
Logged in (LOGIN)
The master logical terminal is set to LOGOUT PENDING status, and
the logout message (APDU 06) is eventually generated and sent to the
SWIFT network.
timeday
Specifies the timeday value for the field 173 of the logout message in the format
ddhhmm:
dd
Day from 1 to 31
109
LOGOUT Command
hh
Hour from 0 to 23
mm
Minute from 0 to 59.
If you do not specify the timeday parameter, the logout message is sent without
the text block (that contains field 173 as the only field). If you specify the
timeday parameter, the logout message is sent with the text block and field 173.
If the FIN application of a master logical terminal is processed as for a quit
command, the timeday parameter of the logout command is also used for the
quit.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the logout command.
Example 1: This example shows the logout command for a specific master logical
terminal:
logout,vndebet2a
Example 2: Enter the following command to set the status of all master logical
terminals assigned to line 2 to LOGOUT or LOGOUT PENDING, depending on
their current settings:
lo,all,2
Example 3: This example shows the abbreviation of the command, where all master
logical terminals of all lines (the default is used) are set to LOGOUT or LOGOUT
PENDING status, and with the timeday parameter to allow the next login only after
the day 12, 8 oclock in the morning:
lo,all,,120800
Example of the Display from a LOGOUT Command

Ending the Connection to the SWIFT Network (LOGOUT) shows an example of a
panel displayed in response to a logout command with the ALL parameter for all
lines. Use the dm last command to display how the master logical terminals are
logged out (refer to Figure 45).
110
Operations Guide
LOGOUT Command

> LO ALL
DWS516I LOGOUT ALL accepted for all lines
115131
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 44. Logout of All Master Logical Terminals on All Lines

> DM LAST
...
...
...
...
...
...
082015 DWS606I VNDEBET2A LOGOUT proceeding on line 1
082016 DWS606I VNDEBET2B LOGOUT proceeding on line 2
082030 DWS607I VNDEBET2A LOGOUT successful on line 1
082031 DWS607I VNDEBET2B LOGOUT successful on line 2
082041 DWS643I Network connection terminated (T,0) on line 1
082042 DWS643I Network connection terminated (T,0) on line 2
115333
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 45. Completion of Logout of All Master Logical Terminals on All Lines
111
QUIT Command
Quitting FIN Applications (QUIT)

Use the command quit to quit SWIFT FIN applications (which must have been
defined in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT). When the FIN application is
successfully selected after a select command, and there are no acknowledgment
messages outstanding for messages sent to the SWIFT network for this FIN
application (ISN acknowledgments), the quit command generates a SWIFT quit
message (APDU 05) and sends it to the SWIFT network.
When the quit process is complete, the following is done for this FIN application:
v The association of the FIN application is released (disassociation of the AI layer).
v The transport connection of the FIN application is released (T-disconnect of the
transport layer).
You use the command to quit one FIN application, or, if you are authorized by
your installation, all FIN applications on one line or on all lines to the SWIFT
network.
several FIN applications, a quit command must be entered for each FIN
application that wants to end the communication with the SWIFT network.
The functions of the quit command are included in the functions of a logout
command.
Note: You must be authorized to use the quit command.
Command Format
The format of the quit command is:
quit
q
ltname|ALL
Is the 9-character name of the master logical terminal whose FIN application is
to be quit.
This name must be:
by S.W.I.F.T.
to enter the quit command:
112
Operations Guide
QUIT Command
The FIN applications status must be one of the following (the parentheses
show the status in response to the dl command):
Open (OPEN)
The FIN application is set to QUIT PENDING status, and the quit
message (APDU 05) is eventually generated and sent to the SWIFT
network.
For any other status, the quit command is rejected.
are treated depending on their status (the parentheses show the status in
response to the dl command):
Open (OPEN)
The FIN application is set to QUIT PENDING status, and the quit
message (APDU 05) is eventually generated and sent to the SWIFT
network.
line|ALL
If you use the parameter ALL,line or ALL,ALL, all FIN applications of the
master logical terminals assigned to all lines or to the specified line are treated
according to their status. If the second parameter is not specified, all lines are
processed as default.
timeday
Specifies the timeday value for the field 173 of the quit message in the format
ddhhmm:
dd
Day from 1 to 31
hh
Hour from 0 to 23
mm
Minute from 0 to 59.
113
QUIT Command
If you do not specify the timeday parameter, the quit message is sent without
the text block (that contains field 173 as the only field). If you specify the
timeday parameter, the quit message is sent with the text block and field 173.
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the quit command.
Example 1: This example shows the quit command for the FIN application of a
specific master logical terminal:
quit,vndebet2a
Example 2: This example shows the quit command for the FIN applications of all
master logical terminals on line 1:
quit,all,1
Example 3: This example shows the abbreviation of the quit command and how to
quit all FIN applications on all lines:
q,all
Example 4: This example shows the abbreviation of the command without the
ltname, the line parameters, but with the timeday parameter to allow the next select
only after the day 12, 8 oclock in the morning:
q,,,120800
Example of the Display from a QUIT Command

Figure 46 shows an example of a panel displayed in response to the quit
command. Figure 47 displays the response of a dm last command to show how the
FIN applications are closed.
> Q,ALL
DWS534I QUIT ALL FIN accepted for all lines
115738
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
Figure 46. Quit All FIN Applications on All Lines
114
Operations Guide
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
QUIT Command

> DM LAST
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
081915 DWS616I VNDEBET2A FIN QUIT
081916 DWS616I VNDEBET2B FIN QUIT
081930 DWS617I VNDEBET2A FIN QUIT
081937 DWS617I VNDEBET2B FIN QUIT
115733
proceeding
proceeding
successful
successful
on
on
on
on
line
line
line
line
1
2
1
2
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 47. Completion of Quit of All FIN Applications on All Lines
115
SELECT Command
Selecting a FIN Application (SELECT)

Use the select command to select the FIN application for a master logical terminal.
Both the master logical terminal and the FIN application must be defined in the
Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT.
The select command for a FIN application is only accepted if its master logical
terminal is in session key pending; in session key proceeding; in LOGIN pending;
in LOGIN proceeding; or in LOGIN status, and the FIN application must be in
CLOSED status.
The select command generates a SWIFT select message (APDU 03) and sends it to
the SWIFT network.
If the select message is accepted by the SWIFT network, the transport connection
and the association of the FIN application of this master logical terminal are
established.
When this line of the SWIFT link is shared by several financial institutions with
several master logical terminals, a select command must be entered for each FIN
application that wants to communicate with the SWIFT network.
Note: You must be authorized to use the select command.
Command Format
The format of the select command is:
select
se
[ltname],[ssn],[sk1], [sk2],[window],[state][,delivery]
Note: If one of the above parameters is omitted, but one of them to the right of it
is specified, all the commas must be specified up to the last parameter used.
ltname
Is the 9-character name of a master logical terminal whose FIN application you
want to select.
This name must be:
by S.W.I.F.T.
to enter the select command:
116
Operations Guide
SELECT Command
ssn
Is the select sequence number (SSN) required by the SWIFT network for the
select message. The number you use must be in the range from 0 to 9999. The
current select sequence number is used as the default for this parameter.
It is only necessary to enter a value for this parameter after the first
MERVA ESA startup or when S.W.I.F.T. has reset the number. The default can
be used at all other times.
If SLS is used and you enter the ssn parameter, and there is a session key
available in the DWSLTT entry for this FIN application, this session key is
erased even if you enter the same SSN as already contained in the DWSLTT
entry. This forces the SWIFT Link to get a new session key, for example, after a
change of the ICC parameters.
sk1
v If paper tables are used for select, this parameter is the first 4 digits of the
session key required for the select sequence number. It is used to calculate
the user authentication field (field 501) for the select message.
You need only enter this parameter if the Login Authorization Table
(DWSLOG2) is not used in your installation of the SWIFT link. If DWSLOG2
is included, and you enter a value for this parameter, it overrides the value
supplied by DWSLOG2. This parameter is mandatory, if you do not have
DWSLOG2 or the actual SSN is not defined in DWSLOG2.
v If secure login/select (SLS) is used, this parameter is the 32 characters
session key from the card reader when you use unconnected mode. If
connected mode or preloaded session keys are used, you need not enter the
session key here. Refer to Maintenance of Session Keys for Login and
Select on page 126 for details on preloading session keys.
v You can specify AUTO for this parameter if you want an automatic
repetition of select after failures. This requires preloaded session keys or a
connection to the USE workstation when SLS is used, or DWSLOG2
containing the session keys when paper tables are used.
sk2
v If paper tables are used for select, this parameter is the second 4 digits of the
session key required for the select sequence number. It is used to calculate
the user authentication field (field 501) for the select message. The same
rules apply as for the sk1 parameter for using paper tables.
v If secure login/select (SLS) is used, this parameter is the 4-character check
value for the session key specified with the sk1 parameter from the card
reader when you use unconnected mode.
v If you have specified AUTO for the sk1 parameter, you can specify a retry
count from 1 to 9 for the automatic repetition of select after failures with the
sk2 parameter. If you enter a value greater than 9, only the first digit is used.
If you do not specify this parameter or you specify an incorrect value, the
default of 3 is used.
window
Is the window for this session of the FIN application for the field 110 of the
117
SELECT Command
select message. The number entered must be in the range from 1 to 999. The
default for this parameter is the window size specified in the Logical Terminal
Table DWSLTT.
Usually the SWIFT network accepts only a value of 10 for the window in the
select acknowledgment (APDU 23).
state
Specifies the select state and the LT-directed queue value. You can specify 3
characters, each of them being either N or Y:
v The first 2 characters indicate the select state for field 204 as defined by
S.W.I.F.T.
v The third character indicates the LT-directed queue value for field 208.
The default for the parameter is YYY.
A specification of YNY is incorrect for this parameter (input only and Yes for
LT-directed queue, see the S.W.I.F.T. User Handbook), it is changed to YNN by
MERVA ESA.
delivery
Specifies the delivery subset lines for field 338. Each delivery subset
specification must be 6 characters long, and you can specify up to 10 delivery
subset mnemonics separated by commas (like the other parameters). If you
need more than 10 delivery subset mnemonics or more than fit into the
command line, you must use the dds command to set the delivery subset
mnemonics before you use the select command.
Each delivery subset must have been specified by a message type 047 before
you can use it in a select command. The SWIFT link cannot check that you
have defined the delivery subsets properly.
The delivery subset mnemonics specified in the select command replace the
specification done in DWSLTT for this FIN application, or replace the
specifications done in an earlier dds or select command and saved in DWSLTT.
Replacing means that the specification of only one delivery subset mnemonic
removes all saved (that is, up to 30) delivery subset mnemonics in DWSLTT
and saves only the one (or more) specified in this select command.
This technique allows for:
v Generating the delivery subset mnemonics in DWSLTT if you use the same
mnemonics every day. Then you need not specify the mnemonics in the
select command.
v Changing them in a dds or select command if necessary, and using the
changed mnemonics in subsequent select commands, without specifying
them again until another change is necessary.
After a change, the delivery subset mnemonics generated in DWSLTT are
available again after restarting CICS, or MERVA ESA in IMS.
The field 338 of the select message is generated with the delivery subset
mnemonics available in DWSLTT (either generated or saved from a dds
command, or from an earlier or from this select command). If no delivery
subset mnemonics are found, the select message is generated without field 338.
Note: You must not specify two consecutive commas between two delivery
subset names. If you do so, the evaluation of these parameters stops at
the second comma, and all delivery subset names after the second
comma are ignored.
118
Operations Guide
SELECT Command
Command Examples
This section shows some examples of how to enter the select command.
Example 1: This example shows the select command with the following
parameters:
v ssn - 111
v
v
v
v
v
sk1 - is omitted
sk2 - is omitted
window - 10
state - YYY
delivery - URGENT,SYSTEM,NORMAL

select,vndebet2a,111,,,10,yyy,urgent,system,normal
The tree commas after the ssn parameter (111) mean that the parameters sk1 and
sk2 are not entered in the command.
Example 2: This example shows the abbreviation for the select command (se) with
the following parameters when using paper tables:
v ssn - 44
v sk1 - 0555
v
v
v
v
sk2 - 0666
window - is omitted
state - is omitted
delivery - is omitted

se,vndebet2a,44,0555,0666
The parameters after sk2 are omitted. As they are all at the end of the parameter
list, no commas are needed. The defaults are taken.
Example 3: This example shows the abbreviation for the command without any
parameters. The defaults for all the parameters are taken for this command:
se
Example 4: This example shows the abbreviation for the command with only the
delivery parameter specified. The 7 commas show the omission of all the other
parameters, and that the defaults are to be used:
se,,,,,,,urgent
Example 5: This example shows, when SLS unconnected mode is used, how to
enter the select command with the 32 character session key in the sk1 parameter
and the 4 character check value in the sk2 parameter:
se,,,967532247e7cd4d3b815844002ec262f,1668
The three commas after the command show that the ltname and the ssn parameters
have not been entered, and the defaults are used.
119
SELECT Command
Example of the Display from a SELECT Command
Selecting a FIN Application (SELECT) shows an example of a panel displayed in
response to the select command.
> SELECT VNDEBET2A
DWS521I SELECT VNDEBET2A FIN accepted, select pending
115932
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
Figure 48. Select the FIN Application of a Master Logical Terminal
120
Operations Guide
6=DM Last
12=DL
SETLT Command
Setting Parameters for a Master Logical Terminal (SETLT)

Use the command setlt to display or set the following for a master logical terminal
and its FIN application:
v The line number
v The technology flag for using paper tables or secure login/select (SLS)
v The integrated circuit card (ICC) parameters whitelist flag, kernel version, and
ICC set number
v The name of the USE workstation used for SLS.
Notes:
1. You must be authorized to use the setlt command.
2. This command can be used to set the above parameters only if the master
logical terminal is in LOGOUT status.
Command Format
The format of the setlt command is:
setlt
slt
ltname[,line[,tflag[,iccparm[,usename]]]]
ltname
Is the 9-character name of a master logical terminal. This name must be
defined in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT as a master logical terminal.
line
Defines the number of the line to be used for the next login of the specified
master logical terminal to the SWIFT network. The value entered is used
instead of the line originally specified in the Logical Terminal Table DWSLTT
for this master logical terminal.
The value entered must be a number from 1 to 30. The number refers to the
name of a line definition module, for example, DWSLIN1 for line 1,
DWSLIN15 for line 15. If the number you enter is wrong (that is, no line
definition module for the number exists), the command is rejected.
tflag
Defines the technology flag for the login and select.
PT
specifies to use paper tables.
SLS
specifies to use secure login/select.
You must have agreed the change of the technology with S.W.I.F.T.
iccparm
Sets the ICC parameters when SLS is used. You must always specify 10 digits
in the following order:
v 2 digits for the whitelist flag
v 2 digits for the kernel version
v 4 digits padding zeros ('0000')
v 2 digits for the ICC set number.
121
SETLT Command
This is the same format as received from SWIFT in the field 502 of the login
acknowledgment (LAK or LNK) or select acknowledgment (SAK or SNK).
The ICC parameters are set automatically when you use SLS connected mode
for the first time, or when the session keys are pregenerated in the USE
workstation and sent to MERVA ESA for loading into the session key queues
defined in DWSLTT.
You change the ICC parameters after having received a negative login
acknowledgment (APDU 42) with the reason code L34 (incorrect MAC), and
after having agreed with S.W.I.F.T. which parameters to use.
usename
Defines the name of the USE workstation when SLS is used. You specify 1 to 9
characters that follow the rules defined for S.W.I.F.T. addresses. If you specify
less than 9 characters, the name is padded with characters X.
This name is used when using SLS connected mode for the routing of a single
session key request to a MERVA Link send queue for sending to the USE
workstation. A single session key request is a SWIFT message type 999 with a
special format handled by the SWIFT Link programs. The name of the USE
workstation is used in the application header as destination address and can be
evaluated during the routing of this message.
The parameters line, tflag, iccparm and usename can be specified in any order in the
parameter positions 2 to 5 of the setlt command. They are evaluated according to
the following rules:
v One or two digits from 1 to 30 is a line number of the line parameter.
v The characters PT or SLS are the technology flag of the tflag parameter.
v Ten digits are the ICC parameters of the iccparm parameter.
v Up to nine characters that follow the rules of a SWIFT address are the usename
parameter.
v Anything else is a parameter error which causes rejection of the whole
command.
If a parameter is not specified, the value in DWSLTT is not changed.
If the technology flag PT is set, the parameters referring to SLS are not used during
the login and select process.
A change of the technology flag, the ICC parameters and the USE workstation
name is maintained until it is changed again with a setlt command, even when the
SWIFT Link is stopped and started again.
Command Examples
This section shows examples of how to enter the setlt command.
Example 1: The command is entered with its abbreviation and sets the line 2 for
the master logical terminal VNDEBET2A:
slt,vndebet2a,2
Example 2: The command is entered with the following parameters:

v line - 3
v tflag - SLS
122
Operations Guide
SETLT Command
v iccparm - 0101000001
v usename - USEMERVA2
The following formats of the command can be used (or any other order of the last
4 parameters):
slt,vndebet2a,3,SLS,0101000001,usemerva2
slt,vndebet2a,usemerva2,0101000001,sls,3
Example 3: The command is entered to set the technology flag:

v line - is omitted
v tflag - SLS
v iccparm - is omitted
v usename - is omitted
slt,vndebet2a,SLS
Example of the Display from a SETLT Command

Setting Parameters for a Master Logical Terminal (SETLT) shows an example of a
panel displayed in response to a setlt command.
> SLT VNDEBET2A,SLS
DWS572 SETLT VNDEBET2A accepted
Line=1 Line not initialized
LT name
AP name LSN SESS ISN
OSN
MXW ISW OSW status SS Q AS
VNDEBET2A GPA
0000 0000 000000 000000 000 000 000 LOGOUT
DC
VNDEBET2A FIN
0000 0000 000000 000000 000 000 000 CLOSED
DC
Technology flag
:
USE WorkstationName:
actual
SLS
USEMERVA2
in login/select
Whitelist flag
: 01
ICC kernel version : 01
ICC set number
: 000001
115133
original
PT
USEMERVA2
from SWIFT
01
01
000001
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 49. Setting or Displaying Parameters for a Master Logical Terminal
Note: If the setlt command is entered at the operating system console, the
response does not show the lines starting with LT name and VNDEBET2A.
To see the information contained in these lines, you must enter the dl
command.
123
SWIFTII Command
Routing SWIFT Link Commands for Parallel Processing (SWIFTII)

Use the command swiftii only when parallel processing is used for the MERVA
ESA SWIFT Link. Parallel processing allows the use of multiple SWIFT Link
servers under a single MERVA ESA nucleus. The alternative SWIFT Link servers
are identified in the nucleus program table as SWIFTIIx, where the x stands for a
letter from A to Z. Each SWIFT Link server runs separately from the other servers.
Each server has its own logical terminal table (DWSLTTx); its name is specified as
the program start parameter.
For details, refer to the MERVA for ESA Customization Guide.
The operator commands issued to control the other servers must be routed to the
appropriate subtask. The command swiftii or its alias sw is used to enter a
command that is directed to another SWIFT Link server.
The first parameter is a letter indicating the requested server. Alternatively,
MERVA ESA defines several alias commands to address the servers directly. The
command code swa directs a SWIFT Link command to the SWIFTIIA server, the
command code swb uses the SWIFTIIB server.
Note:
You must be authorized to use the authorized SWIFT Link commands.
Command Format
The format of the swiftii command is:
swiftii
sw
x,SWIFT Link command string
x
The letter indicates the descriptive name of the requested server. The
descriptive name is SWIFTIIx, where the suffix x stands for the letter entered
as the first parameter. This descriptive name must be defined in the nucleus
program table (DSLNPTT) and in the nucleus server table (DSLNSVT). The
program must be active.
SWIFT Link command string

The command code and the command parameters that should be executed by
the indicated SWIFT Link server. All SWIFT Link operator commands can be
routed using this command, except the diva and the xtrace command. The
commands diva and xtrace are not dependent on a specific SWIFT Link server,
they process information about X.25 line numbers.
Command Examples
This section shows examples of how to enter the swiftii command.
Example 1:
124
Operations Guide
SWIFTII Command
The command is used to control the SWIFT Link server with the descriptive name
SWIFTIIA. In this example the logical terminal parameters are set. The line number
to be used for this LT is 11.
sw a,slt,vndebet2a,11,SLS,0101000001,usemerva2
Alternatively, the command can be entered as

swa slt,vndebet2a,11,SLS,0101000001,usemerva2
The command code swa is used to indicate the SWIFT Link server with the
descriptive name SWIFTIIA.
Example 2:
A login command for the master logical terminal VNDEBET2A is executed. The
command code swa is used to indicate the SWIFT Link server with the descriptive
name SWIFTIIA.
sw a,li,vndebet2a
Alternatively, the command can be entered as:

swa li,vndebet2a
Example 3:
To display the line and logical terminal status for a specific SWIFT Link server, the
appropriate command parameter must be used. All active logical terminals of this
SWIFT Link server are displayed.
sw a,dla
Alternatively, the command can be entered as:

swa dla
Examples of the display from the swiftii command are not provided, because the
display is identical to the display of the executed command.
125
Maintenance of Session Keys for Login and Select

When secure login/select (SLS) is used, you can pregenerate session keys at the
USE workstation and send them to MERVA ESA for preloading into session key
queues. The session key queues are defined in the Logical Terminal Table
(DWSLTT) and in the MERVA ESA Function Table (DSLFNTT). Refer to the
MERVA for ESA Macro Reference for details on these definitions.
You can pregenerate as many session keys at the USE workstation at one time as
you want. For example, you pregenerate as many as you need for one week, one
month, or one year, or you pregenerate the 10000 that are available for one set of
whitelist flag, kernel version, and set number of the integrated circuit cards (ICCs)
used for SLS.
After the pregeneration is finished, you can send the session keys from the USE
workstation to MERVA ESA with MERVA Link. If necessary, you can send the
same session keys more than once as MERVA ESA ensures that the same session
key is stored once only.
Refer to the MERVA USE Administration Guide for details on how to pregenerate
session keys and send them to MERVA ESA.
The session keys are received in MERVA ESA and routed to the queue defined
with the LSKQUE parameter of the DWSPARM macro (see MERVA for ESA Macro
Reference for details). The program DWSDLSK gets the session keys from this
queue and puts them into the session key queues defined in DWSLTT.
During the transmission and the storage in the queues, the session keys are
encrypted with the SWIFT ST-1 algorithm.
The session keys in the session key queues cannot be displayed as they are not
stored in the MERVA ESA TOF format. Instead, the maintenance of the session
keys is done using the queue keys and the queue key list.
The queue keys of the session keys contain the following information:
v Key 1:
9 characters for the logical terminal name
1 character for the application name (G for GPA and F for FIN)
1 blank for separator
2 digits for the whitelist flag
2 digits for the ICC kernel version
2 digits for the ICC set number. The 4 padding zeros left of the ICC set
number are not used.
4 digits for the LSN or SSN.
v Key 2 contains the same information in a different order to allow for the
retrieval of session keys when the ICC parameters whitelist flag, kernel version,
and set number are not known to the SWIFT Link (these parameters are not
specified during the retrieval but are nevertheless part of key 2):
9 characters for the logical terminal name
1 character for the application name (G for GPA and F for FIN)
126
Operations Guide
4 digits for the LSN or SSN

2 digits for the whitelist flag
2 digits for the ICC kernel version
2 digits for the ICC set number. The four padding zeros to the left of the ICC
set number are not used.
With this information in the queue keys, you can maintain the session keys by
selecting the session key queue from the MERVA ESA function selection panel and
using the MERVA ESA queue list (refer to the MERVA for ESA Users Guide for
details). You can:
v Display the keys to see for which LSNs and SSNs the session keys are available,
and you can pregenerate more session keys at the USE workstation and send
them to MERVA ESA in time.
v Delete session keys that are no longer needed using the user command delete
described in the MERVA for ESA Users Guide. Under normal circumstances,
session keys are deleted automatically after login or select is successful, as the
session key for this LSN/SSN and the previous ones are never used again. If this
automatic deletion does not work for any reason, you must delete them.
You can delete one session key with the delete qsn command, where qsn is the
queue sequence number (QSN) of the session key that you want to delete. The
QSN is shown in the queue list.
You can delete a range of session keys with the delete qsn1,qsn2 command,
where qsn1 is the QSN of the first session key of the range you want to delete,
and qsn2 is the QSN of the last session key of the range you want to delete.
After the deletion, you are informed how many session keys have been deleted.
Note: Session keys used by Extension for SWIFTNet are not deleted
automatically. You must delete the session keys manually when they are
no longer needed.
Figure 50 shows an example of a queue key list of the session key queue SLSFIN
for the FIN application of the master logical terminal VNDEBET2A.
127
Queue Key List
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Key 1:
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
VNDEBET2AF
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
Key 2:
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
VNDEBET2A
0031
0032
0033
0034
0035
0036
0037
0038
0039
0040
Func SLSFIN
Wait 00000200
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
010101
QSN
0000000166
0000000167
0000000168
0000000169
0000000170
0000000171
0000000172
0000000173
0000000174
0000000175
RBN
00015
00015
00015
00015
00015
00015
00015
00015
00015
00015
To select a message, move cursor to > and press PF4 (Get QSN)
Select only
KEY 1: ________________________ KEY 2: ________________________
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve 3=Return
PF 7=List Back 8=List Fwd 9=Hardcopy
4=Get QSN
5=Get Next
6=Get First
10=List Last 11=List First 12=List Off
Figure 50. Displaying the Queue Keys of Preloaded Session Keys
This example shows under the heading Key 1:

v The 9-character logical terminal name VNDEBET2A
v The 1-character application name F indicating that the session keys are for the
select sequence numbers (SSNs) of the FIN application
v After the separating blank, 6 digits 010101 for the ICC parameters: 01 for the
whitelist flag, 01 for the ICC kernel version, and 01 for the ICC set number
v After the separating blank, 4 digits for the select sequence numbers 0031 to 0040
that are stored in this queue.
Under the heading Key 2, you see the same information with the select sequence
numbers shown before the ICC parameters.
In the second line on the right, Wait 00000200 indicates that there are 200 session
keys stored in this queue, and you can page forward and backward in the queue
list to see for which SSNs they are.
128
Operations Guide

In MERVA ESA there are two ways to communicate with the public telex network:
v The Telex Link via a fault-tolerant system (for example, the Series/1) using the
Telex Interface Program.
v The Telex Link via a workstation using the Telex Link attachment of
MERVA ESA components.
The Telex Link via a workstation is controlled by the MERVA Link in order to
transfer the telex messages from MERVA ESA to the MERVA ESA components.
The commands available for managing the Telex Link via a fault-tolerant system
described in this chapter do not apply to the Workstation Based Telex Functions.
The following similar functions are provided:
Telex Link via a Fault-Tolerant System
workstation based telex functions Alternative
TXDISP
The MERVA System Control (MSC) function provides information

on the state of the MERVA Link connection to the workstation.
TXON
Initiating the TelexBox connection can be done only from the

workstation.
In MERVA ESA, the MERVA Link AOPEN and ASTART
commands can be used to initiate the transfer of messages to a
workstation.
TXOFF
Terminating the TelexBox connection can be done only from the

workstation.
In MERVA ESA, the MERVA Link HOLD command can be used to
suspend transfer of messages to a workstation.
The MERVA Link RECOVER command can recover Telexes from a
stalled MERVA Link application.
The rest of this chapter applies only to the operation of the Telex Link via a
fault-tolerant system.
Operating the Telex Link via a Fault-Tolerant System

The Telex Link always runs under the control of, and together with, MERVA ESA.
There are two ways to start the Telex Link:
v Automatically, during the startup of MERVA ESA
v Using the MERVA ESA command start telex (telex is the descriptive name of
ENLSTP, the main program of the Telex Link).
After successful startup, the Telex Link issues the message:
ENL900I Telex Link startup successful.
In case of a startup failure, an error message is issued.

There are also two ways to stop the Telex Link:
v Using the MERVA ESA command stop telex
129
v Automatically, during the termination of MERVA ESA.

To find out whether the Telex Link is active, enter the MERVA ESA command dp
(refer to Displaying the Program Status (DP) on page 39).
The transmission of telex messages between the Telex Link and the Telex Interface
Program requires the establishment of a session between them. For this purpose,
the Telex Link provides the following operator commands:
txon
To sign on a session between the Telex Link and the Telex Interface
Program
txdisp [recover]
To monitor the status of the session and to request that the last outgoing
telex message to the Telex Interface Program be resent if this message is
not acknowledged by the Telex Interface Program within the time specified
by the RTIM parameter of the ENLPARM macro
txoff
To sign off the current session.
The Telex Link operator commands can be used only if the Telex Link is active.
130
Operations Guide
TXDISP Command
Monitoring the Telex Link Session (TXDISP)

Use the command txdisp to display the status of the session between the Telex
Link and the Telex Interface Program.
Command Format
The format of the txdisp command is:
txdisp
[RECOVER]
RECOVER
If the response to the command txdisp shows that the Telex Link has already
waited too long for the logical acknowledgment of a telex message sent to the
Telex Interface Program, you can use the command txdisp recover to make the
Telex Link send the message to the Telex Interface Program again. The Telex
Link does so only if the waiting time for the logical acknowledgment is greater
than the time specified in the RTIM parameter of the ENLPARM macro.
Resending can help to resume normal message traffic in the current session
with the Telex Interface Program.
Example of the Display from a TXDISP Command

Figure 51 shows an example of the response to the txdisp command.
> TXDISP
ENL944I Session Status Information
Name
SESS SENT RCVD Pending Status
TELEX
0329 0001 0020
ACTIVE
TXIP
0329 0021 0001 00:00:39 0320 CHECKING OUTGOING TELEX
115033
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 51. Displaying the Session Status
Message ENL944I provides the following information (for details refer to MERVA
for ESA Messages and Codes):
Name
The response line starting with TELEX shows the status of the
session as seen by the Telex Link. The response line starting with
TXIP shows the latest status of the session as seen by the Telex
131
TXDISP Command
Interface Program, and reported to the Telex Link. The Telex
Interface Program sends a status report to the Telex Link every two
minutes.
132
Operations Guide
SESS
Gives the 4-digit session number of the current session.
SENT
The number of telex messages that have been sent from the Telex
Link to the Telex Interface Program (in the TELEX line), or that
have been sent from the Telex Interface Program to the Telex Link
(in the TXIP line) during the current session.
RCVD
In the TELEX line, the number of messages sent from the Telex
Interface Program to the Telex Link. Usually this number is equal
to the number under the heading SENT in the TXIP line.
Differences in these numbers are caused by the delayed status of
the Telex Interface Program or because a message is still on the
line. In the TXIP line, the number of messages sent from the Telex
Link to the Telex Interface Program.
Pending
Is the time in hhmmss format when one of the following is pending:

v In the TELEX line, if the time is present, it shows how long the
Telex Link has been waiting for a logical acknowledgment from
the Telex Interface Program.
v In the TXIP line, it shows how much time has passed since this
status report was received from the Telex Interface Program.
Status
Refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes for details on the
status. The Telex Link status is described in message ENL944I, the
Telex Interface Program status is described in the MERVA for ESA
Installation Guide.
TXOFF Command
Signing Off the Session with the Telex Interface Program (TXOFF)
Signing off the session with the Telex Interface Program can be done in one of the
following ways:
v Automatic sign-off when the Telex Link is stopped.
v Sign-off by the command txoff.
Command Format
txoff
There are no parameters for this command.

After you have entered the txoff command, the Telex Link:
v Stops sending messages (outgoing telex messages or acknowledgments) to the
Telex Interface Program.
v Processes a message received before the sign-off acknowledgment, but does not
acknowledge it. The Telex Interface Program sends this message again at the
beginning of the next session, but the Telex Link recognizes it as being a
duplicate.
v Does not process a received transmission acknowledgment. This
acknowledgment is sent again by the Telex Interface Program in the next session.
v Processes any invalid data received as described in the MERVA for ESA Users
Guide.
The Telex Link session status first changes to SIGNOFF PENDING and, upon
receiving the sign-off acknowledgment from the Telex Interface Program, then
changes to NOT ACTIVE.
The Telex Link issues the following message to the operators informing them of
the sign-off:
ENL905I TELEX
signoff, sess=0329, sent=00011, rcvd=00012
Example of the Display from a TXOFF Command

Figure 52 on page 134 shows an example of the display in response to a txoff
command.
133
TXOFF Command

> TXOFF
ENL941I TELEX
115033
signoff accepted
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ
Figure 52. Signing Off the Session with the Telex Interface Program
134
Operations Guide
6=DM Last
12=DL
TXON Command
Signing On the Session with the Telex Interface Program (TXON)

Signing on the session with the Telex Interface Program can be done in one of the
following ways:
v Automatic sign-on when the Telex Link has been started, if the AUTO=YES
parameter is specified in the ENLPARM macro.
v Sign-on by the command txon.
Command Format
The format of the txon command is:
txon

Signing on the session with the Telex Interface Program is only successful when:
v The Telex Substation on which the Telex Interface Program operates is switched
on.
v The communication line to this Telex Substation is active.
v The Telex Link has been started.
Example of the Display from a TXON Command
Figure 53 shows the panel after the Telex Link has accepted your sign-on request.
The message ENL940I confirms that the Telex Link has accepted the command.
> TXON
ENL940I TELEX
115033
signon accepted
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Repeat
PF 7=
8=
3=Return
9=Hardcopy
4=DF
10=DP
5=DU
11=DQ filled
6=DM Last
12=DL
Figure 53. Signing On the Session with the Telex Interface Program
To check whether the sign-on to the Telex Interface Program is successful:

v Enter the MERVA ESA command dm or dm last to find out if the following
message has been issued by the Telex Link:
ENL903I TELEX
signon successful, session=0329
v Enter the command txdisp to display the session status.

135
TXON Command
136
Operations Guide
Chapter 7. Operating MERVA Link ESA

The MERVA System Control Facility (MSC) provides commands to operate MERVA
Link ESA.
How to operate MERVA Link USS and the corresponding commands is described
in Chapter 8, Operating MERVA Link USS, on page 177.
You can use the unrestricted MSC operator commands if you are authorized to use
the MERVA System Control Facility function. You can use the restricted MERVA
Link operator commands if you are authorized to use the function MSC and the
restricted MERVA ESA operator commands.
Overview of the MERVA Link Control within MSC

To monitor and operate the MERVA Link, select the MERVA System Control
function (MSC) on the Function Selection menu, and switch to the MERVA Link
environment by pressing the PF 9 key. You can use the MSC function, for example,
to display the parameters and status of the MERVA Link Application Support
Processes (ASPs) defined in the MERVA Link Partner Table (EKAPT), also referred
to as PT. You can also use it to display the parameters and the status of the partner
MERVA systems which can be operated at the local MERVA system, and to display
information in the PT header.
Displaying the ASP List

Figure 54 shows a sample display of the MERVA Link message transfer
applications (ASP list).
AC01
MERVA Link List of Message Transfer Applications
N1
==============================================================================
ASP Name
Partner
Date
Time
LR MSN LC MSN
Status Diag
AI
==============================================================================
A1I
BTB
1999/05/21 17:47:02
1603
1603
ON 04 SUB RQ SR
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------A2A
CA02
1999/05/21 17:47:10
0016
ON 00 CNFRMD
==============================================================================
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve
PF 7=Backward 8=Forward
3=Return
9=SWAP
4=SELECT
10=Kickoff
5=START
11=Lstinop
6=Nextgrp
12=Lstall
Figure 54. ASP List Sample
In this example only two ASPs are defined in the MERVA Link Partner Table. The
ASPs are displayed in the sequence they are defined in the Partner Table. They are
not displayed in alphabetical order.
137
Panel AC01 Contents

AC01
Is the panel identifier. This panel shows up to 16 ASP entries or

ASP group separators defined in the PT.
N1
Is the node name of the applicable MERVA Link system. It is either

the node name of the local MERVA Link system or the node name
of a partner MERVA Link system.
ASP Name
ASP name.
Partner
Identifier of the partner system.
Date
Date when the status information became applicable.
Time
Time when the status information became applicable.
LR MSN
Sequence number of the last received message.
LC MSN
Sequence number of the last confirmed message.
Status
Status information consists of two elements:

v The Application Support status identifier that can be:
ON
ASP in OPEN-NOHOLD status
OH
ASP in OPEN-HOLD status
CN
ASP in CLOSED-NOHOLD status
CH
ASP in CLOSED-HOLD status.
v One of the following:
The Message Transfer status code that applies to a sending
ASP. It can be 00, 04, 08, 09, 12, or 13.
The receiving process error diagnostic information type that
can be:
MT
Receiving process error detected at the MERVA Link

MT layer (MTSP or MTP).
AS
Receiving process error associated with a specific ASP.
The character string '--', indicating that MERVA System
Control Facility command processing error information is
displayed in the diagnostic code field.
Diag
The diagnostic code provides additional information regarding the
sending ASP status. For receiving process errors it is always RP
ERR. Use the PF key defined for the display command (PF 4,
described as SELECT in the PF-key lines) to display the receiving
process error diagnostic information.
If receiving process error information is available and the
applicable resource (ASP or MTP) is unknown, all ASP list lines
indicate the receiving process error. The error information is
deleted as soon as any receiving process is successful.
For details about these codes refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and
Codes.
AI
138
Operations Guide
The ASP activity indicators can be:

S
For sending ASP active
For receiving ASP active
SR
For sending and receiving ASP active.
The ASP activity indicators do not apply in an IMS environment

because only one task can be active in an IMS Message Processing
Region (MPR) at a time. The ASP activity indicator is displayed
when the MERVA ESA End-User Driver task is active, the MERVA
Link processing task in this MPR cannot be active then.
---
Shows the ASP group structure defined in the PT.
===
Shows the beginning and end of the ASP list.
Displaying the Latest Status Information

If an ASP list is displayed and you press ENTER without any command data, the
list is redisplayed with the most up-to-date information that is available in the PT.
In an IMS environment, the automatic PT-status update is performed only by tasks
that run in the IMS MPR that owns this PT. It is the IMS MPR in which the
MERVA ESA End User Driver (DSLEUD) is scheduled. If MERVA Link does not
always run in the same IMS MPR as DSLEUD, you must use the PF key defined
for the display command (PF 4, described as SELECT in the PF-key lines) to get
the status updates resulting from tasks in other IMS MPRs.
ASP Groups
The ASP entries in the PT can be divided into ASP groups. An ASP group
boundary is defined in the PT by an EKAPT TYPE=DUMMY macro. The PT
dummy entry generated from this macro is represented in the ASP list as a line of
dashes or any other character defined in the EKAPT TYPE=DUMMY macro. This
line is displayed to show the group structure of the PT.
ASP group definitions are optional and have no effect on MERVA Link processing.
ASP List Subsets

When there are more than 16 ASPs or ASP group separators defined in the PT, the
ASP list is displayed on more than one page with adjacent pages overlapping by
one line. The last display line is followed by a row of equal signs in the color
specified during customization (see the MERVA for ESA Customization Guide).
Use the display command to specify a generic ASP name subset. Only ASPs
starting with the name of this subset are displayed. To reset the ASP name subset
to the full set of ASPs, enter the display command without a parameter on the
command line or press PF 4 (SELECT) with the cursor on the command line. If you
press PF 4 with the cursor on an ASP list line, more details are displayed for the
ASP and its associated MTP.
Use the lstinop command to specify the ASP status subset. Only inoperable ASPs
are displayed. To reset the ASP status subset to the full set of ASPs, enter the lstall
command.
Special Usage of PF Keys

The MERVA Link commands that have an ASP name as parameter can be entered
as follows:
v You can enter the command and the ASP name in the command line.
v You can move the cursor to the ASP entry you want use and press the related
PF key instead of entering the command and the ASP name.
For example, if your cursor is on the line for A2A and you press PF 10, the ASP
A2A is kicked off.
139
Displaying Specific ASP/MTP Parameters

To display the details of a specific ASP entry and its associated MTP entry:
v Place the cursor at the ASP list line in panel AC01 describing that ASP, and press
the PF key defined for the display command (PF 4, described as SELECT in the
PF-key lines).
v Enter the command dsa with a full or a generic ASP name.
A sample display of specific ASP and Message Transfer Process (MTP) parameters
is shown in Figure 55.
AC02
MERVA Link Display Specific ASP / MTP Information
N1
==============================================================================
ASP Name
MTP Name
Date
Time
LR MSN LC MSN
Status Diag
AI
==============================================================================
A2A
T2A
1999/05/21 17:47:10
0018
0016
ON 00 CNFRMD
==============================================================================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Free Form Name : APPC CONNECTION FROM N1 TO N2
Recov .: M0
Partner ASP Name
Partner Node : A1A
N2
Format.: N*
Queue Names of Send Queue Cluster : EKA2AS1
-------- -------- Start .: AE
AS Filter Names, User Exit Number : -------- -------- 7010
Secur .: E
Control Queue Name
Window Size : EKA2ACQ
010
Journal : N N N
Local Routing Control Information : EKA2ACQ
EKAAWQ
EKA2ACQ
R C R
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Local System Information . . . . .: EKATS10
EKAS
X12A
Connect: QA
Partner System Information . . . .: CA02
EKAR
X21A
APPC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Status Note in MERVA Link LC Control Message . . . . :
EKA714I Confirmation received for message with MSN = 0016
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve
3=Return
4=SELECT
5=START
9=SWAP
10=Kickoff
11=Lstinop
6=Nextgrp
12=Lstall
Figure 55. Specific ASP/MTP Display Sample
Panel AC02 Contents

Refer to Figure 54 on page 137 for more information on the lines starting with the
panel identifier AC02 and ASP Name. This panel displays the name of the MTP
(MTP Name) instead of the name of the partner system.
Free Form Name
Shows the first 40 characters of the free form name specified in the NAME
parameter of the EKAPT.
Recov
Shows the values of the IPRECOV and ACCEPT parameters defined in the PT.
It can be:
M0
For IPRECOV=MANUAL and ACCEPT=OK
A0
For IPRECOV=AUTO and ACCEPT=OK
M4
For IPRECOV=MANUAL and ACCEPT=WARNING
A4
For IPRECOV=AUTO and ACCEPT=WARNING
Partner ASP Name at Partner Node

Shows the address of the partner ASP, consisting of its ASP name and its node
name.
Format
Shows the message format defined in the PT. It can be:
Q
140
Operations Guide
For MERVA ESA queue format.
For line (network) format. If the message format is N, the line-format

identifier is also specified, it can be:
*
Indicates that the first character of the message type must be

used as line-format identifier. For example, S is the line-format
identifier for a SWIFT message S100.
Identifies a specific line format, such as T for telex.
Indicates that the message type defined in MERVA Link control

field EKANETID must be used.
Queue Names of Send Queue Cluster

Shows the queue names of the send-queue cluster. Three send-queue names
can be specified as sub-parameters of the SENDQC parameter of an ASP
definition. An omitted sub-parameter is indicated by eight minus signs in the
display of a specific ASP.
Start
Shows the ASP start indicator and the receiving ASP status.
The ASP start indicator can be:
A
For automatic start
For operator start
For automatic start with retry.
The receiving ASP status can be:

E
For receiving ASP enabled
For receiving ASP disabled.
AS Filter Names, User Exit Number

Shows the names of the first two Application Support Filters and the number
of the MFS User Exit associated with this ASP. All three filter names are
displayed if an MFS User Exit is not associated with this ASP, or if the User
Exit number does not begin with 7. The range of 7000 to 7999 is reserved by
MERVA ESA for MERVA Link MFS User Exit numbers. The title of this
information reads Application Support Filter Names if an MFS User Exit
Number is not shown.
Up to three filter names can be specified as subparameters of the FILTER
parameter of an ASP definition. is displayed if a subparameter is
omitted.
Secur
Shows the message security defined for this ASP:
A
For message authentication
For message authentication and encryption.
Control Queue Name Window Size

Shows the application control queue name and the MIP window size. The
window size in an ISC-based message transfer is 1, regardless of the window
size specified in the PT ASP entry.
Journal
Consists of 3 characters that specify whether messages of the corresponding
category are journaled or not. Each of these characters is Y for YES, or N for
NO:
v The first character refers to the outgoing messages.
141
v The second character refers to the incoming reports.

v The third character refers to the incoming application messages.
Local Routing Control Information
Consists of three MERVA ESA queue names and three routing type identifiers.
The first queue name and the first routing type identifier apply to local
outgoing message routing when the message has been delivered to the partner
ASP.
There are the following routing types:
P
Specifies the MERVA ESA queue that stores the outgoing message.
Specifies that an outgoing message must be routed according to the

MERVA ESA Routing Table associated with the specified MERVA ESA
queue.
Specifies that an outgoing message must be discarded.
The second queue name and the second routing type identifier apply to local
incoming report routing.
There are the following routing types:
R
Indicates that an incoming report must be routed according to the

MERVA ESA Routing Table associated with the specified MERVA ESA
queue.
Indicates that an incoming report must be correlated with a message in

the specified MERVA ESA queue, and the reported message must be
routed according to the MERVA ESA Routing Table associated with the
specified MERVA ESA queue.
Indicates that an incoming report must be correlated with a message in

the specified MERVA ESA queue, and the reported message must be
routed according to the MERVA ESA Routing Table associated with the
application control queue.
The third queue name and the third routing type identifier apply to local
incoming application message routing.
There is only one routing type:
R
Indicates that an incoming application message must be routed

according to the MERVA ESA Routing Table associated with the
specified MERVA ESA queue.
Local System Information

Consists of the:
v Sending Message Transfer Processor name, here: EKATS10
v Sending ASP transaction identifier, here: EKAS
v External MTP name, here: X12A
Connect
Shows the partner system connection requirements for this MTP.
142
Operations Guide
CONNECT=ACQ has been specified for this MTP. The MTP must try
to acquire an APPC connection to the partner system before the
process ends if an ALLOCATE session command was not successful.
CONNECT=QUEUE has been specified for this MTP. The MTP must
issue ALLOCATE requests without the NOQUEUE option. If

CONNECT=ACQ is also specified, the MTP must try to acquire an
APPC connection at the begin of the process, if a session could not be
allocated successfully.
R
CONNECT=REL has been specified for this MTP. The MTP must
release the APPC connection to the partner system at the end of the
conversation.
ACQ, QUEUE, and REL may be specified in the CONNECT parameter.

Connect: QA is shown in this case. Connect: QA, QR, or AR is shown if only
two subparameters are specified.
The partner system connection requirements may be specified for any MTP,
and shown in this panel. They are, however, honored only by an APPC-type
MTP in the CICS environment.
Partner System Information
Consists of the:
v Partner system identifier, here CA02
v Partner receiving process identifier, here EKAR
v Partners external MTP name, here X21A
v Partner system type, here APPC. It can be BTB or APPC.
The partner system identifier (the first item of the partner system information)
is specified by the second subparameter of the LINK parameter or the first
subparameter of the DEST parameter. These parameters are part of the MTP
definition in the Partner Table. Its meaning depends on the local system
environment.
v The keyword BTB is used as the partner system identifier of a Back-to-Back
MTP.
v In the MERVA CICS environment it is the identifier of the APPC connection
to the partner system as defined in CICS.
v In the MERVA IMS environment it is either the partner LU name (specified
in the LINK parameter), or the APPC/MVS Symbolic Destination Name of
the partner system (specified in the DEST parameter).
If external MTP names are not used by this MTP, the Profile or Logmode
Name (specified in the LINK or DEST parameter) is shown as the third partner
system information item.
Status Note in MERVA Link LC Control Message
The last confirmed control message (LC MSG) gives the status of the sending
ASP. In this example message EKA714I is displayed.
The control queue of a specific ASP contains the LR and LC control messages. It
can also contain in-process (IP) messages. In this example, the IP messages have
been submitted to the partner. If the number of IP messages in the control queue is
not zero, the number is displayed above the Free Form Name field as part of the
sentence Number of In Process messages in the application control queue is nnn.
Displaying ASP/MTP Error Codes

Figure 56 on page 144 displays specific ASP and MTP parameters with sending and
receiving process error diagnostic information. The errors in this example were
generated by disabling the MCB for the transmitted message in the local and in the
143
partner system (in two separate steps).

AC02
MERVA Link Display Specific ASP / MTP Information
N1
==============================================================================
ASP Name
MTP Name
Date
Time
LR MSN LC MSN
Status Diag
AI
==============================================================================
A2A
T2A
1999/05/21 17:51:25
0018
0016
ON 09 MP ERR
==============================================================================
Receiving process error diagnostic information type AS : 001A 001C 0004 008E
Free Form Name : APPC CONNECTION FROM N1 TO N2
Recov .: M0
Partner ASP Name
Partner Node : A1A
N2
Format.: N*
Queue Names of Send Queue Cluster : EKA2AS1
-------- -------- Start .: AE
AS Filter Names, User Exit Number : -------- -------- 7010
Secur .: E
Control Queue Name
Window Size : EKA2ACQ
010
Journal : N N N
Local Routing Control Information : EKA2ACQ
EKAAWQ
EKA2ACQ
R C R
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Local System Information . . . . .: EKATS10
EKAS
X12A
Connect: QA
Partner System Information . . . .: CA02
EKAR
X21A
APPC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Error Code Vector and Status Note in LC Ctrl Message :
EKA721E Error reported for message with MSN = 0017
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve
3=Return
9=SWAP
4=SELECT
10=Kickoff
0008
0020
5=START
11=Lstinop
0004
0889
6=Nextgrp
12=Lstall
Figure 56. ASP Error Diagnostic Information Display Sample
The line starting with A2A displays the error information '09 MP ERR' (Message
Processing ERRor). This information has been provided by the partner system. It
indicates that the partner system could not successfully process the incoming
message. This error was generated by disabling the MCB for the transmitted
message in the partner system.
The Error Code Vector in line 19 of this panel shows the corresponding error codes
of the local MTP.
The receiving process error diagnostic information indicates that the local system
could not successfully process an incoming message. This error was generated by
disabling the MCB for the incoming message in the local system.
Note: Line 5 (ASP list line), line 7 (receiving process error diagnostic information),
and line 20 (status note EKA721E) are displayed in red on the panel. The
color of these lines is defined by the sample color customization.
Refer to Figure 55 on page 140 for more information on the panel fields displayed.
This panel shows an additional field in the line above the Free Form Name field.
Receiving process error diagnostic information type AS
Refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes for details on MERVA Link
receiving process error diagnostic information (type AS, MT, US).
Error Code Vector and Status Note in LC Ctrl Message
The error code vector consists of four hexadecimal codes that apply to the local
sending MTP. It shows the MTSP return code, the MTP return code, the MTP
reason code, and an additional code which may have been provided by the
data communication subsystem. In this example, the error code vector tells that
an error has been reported by the sending MTP EKATS10 (0008), that a request
or data was not accepted by the partner process (0020), that a MERVA Link
error report was received from the partner process (0004). 0889 is the VTAM
sense code for an APPC Send_Error verb issued by the partner MTP.
144
Operations Guide
If the local DC system is APPC/MVS, the error code vector reads:

000A
0020
0004 0889
000A indicates that an error has been reported by the sending MTP EKATPO1.
All other codes are the same.
The ASP status note in the last confirmed control message (LC MSG) explains
the status of the sending ASP. In this example message EKA721E is displayed.
Interpreting ASP/MTP Error Codes

MERVA Link USS provides an application that can interpret error information
shown in panel AC02. This application is called the MERVA Link USS Application
Control Command application EKAACC, abbreviated to ACC. It can be used, for
example, in an interactive z/OS USS shell if MERVA Link USS is installed in the
z/OS USS environment. The ACC commands that interpret the error information
shown in Figure 56 on page 144 are explained in the following. The ACC
command entered by the operator is shown in boldface, the command response
follows in normal face.
For more information about the MERVA Link USS control command application
ACC, refer to Overview of the MERVA Link Control within ACC on page 177.
Explain a Diagnostic Code

Use the ACC command dxd to explain a MERVA Link ESA diagnostic code, for
example:
-------------------------------------ekaacc dxd mp err
EKAACC dxd mp err
EKAACC_xdc MP ERR is reported by MERVA ESA or MERVA OS/2
EKAACC_xdc Application message processing error
--------------------------------------
Explain Receiving Process Error Type AS

Use the ACC command dxra to explain a MERVA Link ESA receiving process error
code vector of the type AS, for example:
-------------------------------------ekaacc dxra 1a1c048e
EKAACC dxra 1a1c048e
EKAACC_xrn The normalized error code vector is 0008 0008 001A 001C 0004 008E
EKAACC_xrn Error reported by the MERVA Link ESA Inbound AS Program
EKAACC_xrn 001A: Error found while handling an Application Message
EKAACC_xrn 001C: Copy message from net buffer to TOF failed
EKAACC_xrn 0004: DSLMFS request completed with restrictions
EKAACC_xrn 008E: Format NET to TOF failed, message type 0DSL is used
--------------------------------------
Explain Receiving Process Error Type MT

The receiving process error diagnostic information shown in panel AC02 is of the
type MT if an error was found in the lower MERVA Link layers. Use the ACC
command dxrm to explain a MERVA Link ESA receiving process error code vector
of the type MT, for example:
-------------------------------------ekaacc dxrm 00080070E7F1F2C1
ekaacc dxrm 00080070E7F1F2C1
EKAACC_xrn The normalized error code vector is 0008 0070 E7F1 F2E7 0000 0000
145
EKAACC_xrn Error reported by the MERVA Link ESA Inbound MTSP

EKAACC_xrn 0070: Sending MTP name is invalid
--------------------------------------
The first four characters of the invalid MTP name are shown in error codes 3 and 4
in hexadecimal representation. The beginning of the invalid MTP name is X12X.
The correct name in this example is X12A.
Explain Error Code Vector in LC Control Message

The error code vector that is stored in the LC Control Message is a MERVA Link
ESA sending process error code vector of the type MT. Use the ACC command
dxsm to explain this type of a MERVA Link ESA error code vector, for example:
-------------------------------------ekaacc dxsm 08200489
EKAACC dxsm 08200489
EKAACC_xsm Error reported by the MERVA Link ESA Outbound TP EKATS10
EKAACC_xsm 0020: Request or data not accepted by the partner process
EKAACC_xsm 0004: MERVA Link error report received from the partner system
EKAACC_xsm 0089: 0889 The APPC transaction program has detected an error
--------------------------------------
or
-------------------------------------ekaacc dxsm 000A002000040889
EKAACC dxsm 000A002000040889
EKAACC_xsm Error reported by the MERVA Link ESA Outbound TP EKATPO1
EKAACC_xsm 0020: Request or data not accepted by the partner process
EKAACC_xsm 0004: MERVA Link error report received from the partner system
EKAACC_xsm 0889: 0889 The APPC transaction program has detected an error
--------------------------------------
Displaying the SCP List

Enter the command node or ps without a parameter in the command line of any
MSC panel to display the list of System Control Processes (SCPs) in panel AC03.
Figure 57 on page 147 shows a sample display of a MERVA Link System Control
Process (SCP) list.
146
Operations Guide
AC03
MERVA Link List of Partner MERVA Systems
N1
==============================================================================
Partner
Node Name System ID
L-Date
L-Time
P-Time
Status Diag
==============================================================================
LONDON
N2
CL01
1999/03/15 14:46:19 13:46:52
00 CMD SUCC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PARIS
N3
CP01
1999/03/15 14:48:59 14:48:23
09 DSL CONN
==============================================================================
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve
3=Return
9=SWAP
4=SELECT
10=Kickoff
5=START
11=Lstinop
6=Nextgrp
12=Lstall
Figure 57. SCP List Sample
Two partner MERVA systems are defined in this example. The partner MERVA
systems are located in London and in Paris. A command has successfully been sent
to the MERVA system in London. The MERVA system in Paris is not active.
Panel AC03 Contents

Partner
Shows the local nickname for the partner MERVA system. You can use this
name as the parameter of the node or ps command to switch to that partner
MERVA system.
Node Name
Shows the MERVA Link Node Name of the partner MERVA system. You can
use this name as the parameter of the node or ps command to switch to that
partner MERVA system.
System ID
Shows the local identifier of the partner data communication (DC) subsystem
(CICS or APPC/MVS). If your local DC system is CICS, it is either the
identifier of a CICS Connection (1-4 characters) or a CICS Partner name (5-8
characters) defined in your local CICS system. If your local DC system is
APPC/MVS, it is either the VTAM application name of the partner LU, or the
APPC/MVS Symbolic Destination Name of the partner system.
L-Date
Shows the local date when a command has been sent to the partner system.
L-Time
Shows the local time when a command has been sent to the partner system.
P-Time
Shows the partner system time when a command response has been returned
from the partner system.
Status
Shows the partner system status when a command has been sent to the partner
system. The status code has the following meanings:
00
Command request successfully processed

147
08
Error detected in the local system
09
Error reported by the partner system
Diag
Shows an eight-character diagnostic code which provides additional
information if an error is found by either, the local system or the partner
system. For details refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
Switch to a Partner MERVA System

The request to switch to a partner MERVA system can be entered as follows:
v You can enter the command node or ps with the nickname or the MERVA Link
node name of the partner MERVA system as parameter in the command line of
any MSC panel.
v You can move the cursor to the SCP list line in AC03 describing the partner
MERVA system, and press the PF key defined for the display command (PF 4,
described as SELECT in the PF-key lines).
Displaying PT Header Information

Enter the command dpth in the command line of any MSC panel to display PT
header information in panel AC04. You get this display also if you enter the
command backward or bw (or press PF 7) when the first ASP is displayed in panel
AC02.
Figure 58 shows a sample display of MERVA Link Partner Table Header
information.
AC04
MERVA Link Display Partner Table Header Information
N1
==============================================================================
PT Hdr ID Version
Date
Time
#ASP #MTP #SCP
DC System MERVA ID
==============================================================================
* EKAPT *
4.1.0
1999/03/03 17:00
002 002
002
C520/MVS
DSL1
Test Environment . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
(ON, OFF, EXCEPTION)
Conversation Trace ID, Ctrc Type . . EKAT
FULL
(N/A,
FULL, WEAK)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ASP Monitor Transaction Identifier . EKAM
(N/A : AM disabled)
AM Execution Count, ASP Start Count . 00005
00001
(AM Tasks
SF Cmds)
AM Start Time, Restart Time Interval . 03307432 01:00
(Interval in mm:ss)
Current Time, Wait for Restart . . . 03307440 00:52
(Wait Time in mm:ss)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve
3=Return
9=SWAP
4=SELECT
10=Kickoff
5=START
11=Lstinop
6=Nextgrp
12=Lstall
Figure 58. PT Header Display Sample
Panel AC04 Contents

PT Hdr ID
Shows the mandatory PT header identifier.
Version
Shows the version of the Partner Table. In this example, it is Version 4, Release
1, Modification Level 0.
148
Operations Guide
Date Time
Shows the date and time when the Partner Table was generated.
#ASP #MTP #SCP
Shows the numbers of ASP, MTP, and SCP entries in the PT. There are two
entries of each type in this sample.
DC System
Shows an identifier for the type and version of the local data communication
subsystem. It can be, for example, C410/MVS, C520/MVS, C220/VSE, or
APPC/MVS.
MERVA ID
Shows the MERVA system identifier defined in the MERVA Parameter Table
(DSLPARM).
Test Environment
Shows the MERVA Link test environment status as it is generated in the PT
header (EKAPT TYPE=INITIAL,TEST=...), or as it is set by a set or reset
command. It can be ON, OFF, or EXCEPTION.
Conversation Trace ID
Shows the four-character identifier of the conversation trace destination in the
CICS environment, if the conversation trace is enabled. If it is disabled in the
CICS environment or if MERVA Link executes in the IMS environment, N/A is
displayed instead of a conversation trace identifier. This indicates that the
conversation trace is not applicable.
Conversation Trace Type
Shows whether a weak or a full conversation trace is written if the
conversation trace is enabled. If the conversation trace is disabled, blanks are
displayed instead of a conversation trace type.
ASP Monitor Transaction Identifier
Shows the four-character transaction identifier of the ASP Monitor in the CICS
environment, if the ASP Monitor is enabled. If it is disabled in the CICS
environment or if MERVA Link executes in the IMS environment, N/A is
displayed instead of a transaction identifier. This indicates that the ASP
Monitor is not applicable. All follow-on information of the ASP Monitor group
is missing in that case.
AM Execution Count
Shows the number of ASP Monitor task instances within the current CICS
session. Re-loading the PT from the program library during a CICS session
resets this counter.
ASP Start Count
Shows the number of sf commands (MERVA Start Function commands) issued
by the ASP Monitor when it was recently active.
AM Start Time Stamp
Shows a relative number in seconds with an undefined origin representing the
time when the ASP Monitor task was recently started. This number is zero if
the ASP Monitor has not yet been started in this CICS session. The dummy
time stamp '00000255' indicates that an ASP Monitor start request has been
issued by a sending or receiving ASP, or by an MSC operator via the set am
command. The ASP Monitor task will be started by CICS in the latter case,
when the applicable restart time interval has elapsed.
Restart Time Interval
Shows the ASP Monitor restart time interval in minutes and seconds. The
149
seconds are always zero. The restart time interval can be set to multiples of
one minute up to 59 minutes. A restart time interval of 00:00 means that the
ASP Monitor must not be restarted.
Current Time
Shows a relative number in seconds which represents the current time. This
number corresponds to the AM Start Time Stamp.
Wait for Restart
Shows the time interval until the ASP Monitor will execute the next time. This
time interval may be blank or invalid if the ASP Monitor was not yet active, or
if the restart time interval was modified by a terminal operator.
The MERVA Link Commands of the MERVA System Control Facility

The commands for operating MERVA Link are explained in the following sections
in alphabetical order. These explanations are preceded by some general
considerations concerning the MERVA Link commands.
MERVA Link Command Considerations

ASP Operating Commands
The lstall and lstinop commands provide for displaying a list of all ASPs defined
in the partner table and the subset of inoperable ASPs, respectively. Detailed
information of a specific ASP and its associated MTP can be displayed using a PF
key or using the command dsa.
A sending ASP that is in HOLD status can be opened and closed using the
commands aopen and aclose. These commands require an ASP name as parameter.
A sending ASP can be started, kicked off, or put in HOLD status using the
commands astart, kickoff, and hold. These commands require an ASP name as
parameter.
The kickoff * command kicks off all ASPs defined in the Partner Table.
The hold * command holds all messages of all ASPs defined in the Partner Table in
their send queue cluster. ASPs must be started individually.
The commands lcreset and lrreset resynchronize cooperating ASPs when an MIP
violation has been encountered. These commands, however, should not be used
without investigating the reason for the MIP violation.
The recover (or ipcopy) command provides a means to copy in-process messages
of an inoperable or permanently waiting ASP in CLOSED status to a send queue of
another transmission medium.
The iprecov (or ipmove) command provides a means to route a specific in-process
message, which was not successfully delivered, to an error queue, to delete it from
the set of in-process messages, and to resume message transmission. The
functionality of this command corresponds to the functionality of the automatic IP
message recovery function which can be requested by the PT parameter
IPRECOV=AUTO.
In the CICS environment, the commands set and reset allow you to modify
temporarily the TRACE, TEST, ACCEPT, and IPRECOV parameters defined in the
Partner Table.
150
Operations Guide
Note: The commands set and reset are not (fully) supported in the IMS
environment. They are therefore disabled by default in the IMS
environment. If you want to use the SNAP, PSNAP, and WSZ options, which
are supported in the IMS environment, you can enable the set and reset
commands with the command enable set. You must, however, be aware of
the fact, that the other set or reset command options may not have the
desired effect.
In the CICS environment, the commands enable and disable allow you to
temporarily modify the status of a specific receiving ASP or all receiving ASPs.
These commands may not have the desired effect in the IMS environment.
Privileged Commands
The MSC commands which modify or manipulate the MERVA Link processing
environment are characterized as privileged commands.
If the OPID parameter in the DSLPARM defines a master operator prefix, a
privileged command can be issued only by operators with an operator identifier
starting with that master operator prefix. Message EKA779E is issued when an
unauthorized operator issues a privileged command.
A privileged command can be issued by all operators if the OPID parameter in the
DSLPARM is defined as '***'.
Command Processing Errors

An error can be encountered by the MERVA System Control Facility while:
v Processing the IP messages in the control queue of an ASP
v Processing the LC control message in the control queue of an ASP
v Entering a MERVA ESA command.
MERVA ESA command and message handling errors are reported in the applicable
ASP list line. These error codes are explained in MERVA for ESA Messages and
Codes.
151
ACLOSE Command
Setting the Status of an ASP to CLOSED (ACLOSE)

The aclose command sets the status of an ASP to CLOSED, which means that the
ASP cannot transmit messages to its partner ASP. This command updates the AS
status information in the last confirmed control message (LC MSG) in the ASP
Control queue.
The aclose command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
authorized operator.
Command Format
The format of the aclose command is:
aclose
aspname
aspname
The name of the ASP.
Note: The ASP specified must be in HOLD status. An aclose command for an
ASP in NOHOLD status is not accepted.
Command Example
If the sending ASP named AS1 is in HOLD status, enter the following command to
close this ASP.
aclose as1
152
Operations Guide
AOPEN Command
Setting the Status of an ASP to OPEN (AOPEN)

The aopen command sets the status of a specific ASP to OPEN so that it can
transmit messages to its partner ASP. This command updates the AS status
information in the last confirmed control message (LC MSG) in the ASP control
queue.
The aopen command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
Command Format
The format of the aopen command is:
aopen
aspname
aspname
The name of a specific ASP.
Note: The ASP specified must be in HOLD status. An aopen command for an
ASP in NOHOLD status is not accepted.
Command Example
To open an ASP, named A1I, enter:
aopen a1i
153
ASTART Command
Starting a Sending ASP (ASTART)

This command starts a sending ASP and sets it to NOHOLD status if it is currently
in HOLD status.
The astart command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
The astart command sets all members of a send queue cluster to NOHOLD status
if they are related via the RELATED parameter of the DSLFNT macro. If this
parameter was not specified, the astart command applies only to the queue that is
specified as the first send queue in the SENDQC parameter of the EKAPT
TYPE=ASP macro. The other queues of the send queue cluster are not changed to
NOHOLD status. However, all send queues in NOHOLD status are processed in
response to the astart command, regardless of the RELATED parameter.
If you position the cursor on an ASP line displayed in the MERVA Link Display
Specific Message Transfer Application panel, and press the PF key defined for
astart (PF 5), you can set the send queue cluster of this ASP and the ASP itself to
NOHOLD status, start the ASP, and display the ASP list.
Command Format
The format of the astart command is:
astart
sa
aspname
aspname
Note: You can also move the cursor to the ASP to be started and press PF 5.
Command Example
To start a specific ASP, named A1, enter:
astart a1
154
Operations Guide
BACKWARD and FORWARD Commands
Scrolling through a List of ASPs or SCPs (BACKWARD and

FORWARD)
Use these commands to scroll backward (backward) and forward (forward) if there
are more than 15 elements in the current ASP or SCP list. There is an overlap of
one line from one page to the next.
The backward command has no effect if the first part of the list is already
displayed. The forward command has no effect if the last part of the list is already
displayed.
If you press the PF key defined for the backward command (PF 7):
v On the MERVA Link Display Specific ASP/MTP panel (AC02), you can display
the parameters of the previous ASP in the current ASP subset list.
v When the parameters of the first ASP in the current ASP subset list are
displayed, PT header information is displayed in panel AC04.
v In panel AC04, the ASP subset list is displayed again.
If you press the PF key defined for the forward command (PF 8):
v On the MERVA Link Display Specific ASP/MTP panel, you can display the
parameters of the next ASP in the current ASP subset list.
v When the parameters of the last ASP in the current ASP subset list are
displayed, that ASP subset list is displayed again.
v In panel AC04, the details of the first ASP/MTP are displayed in panel AC02.
Command Format
The format of the forward and backward commands is:
backward
bw
forward
fw
There are no parameters for these commands.
155
DISABLE Command
Disabling a Receiving ASP (DISABLE)

This command disables a specific ASP or all ASPs for receiving messages in the
CICS environment. It may not have the desired effect in the IMS environment.
The disable command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
When an incoming message is rejected because the receiving ASP is disabled, the
sender gets an error indication. This error indication consists of the Return Code 08
(shown as 09 in MSC screens AC01 and AC02) and the diagnostic code RA DIS for
Receiving Application DISabled.
Command Format
The format of the disable command is:
disable
{aspname | *}
aspname
The name of a specific ASP that must be disabled for receiving messages.
*
Specifies that all ASPs defined in the PT must be disabled for receiving
messages.
Command Example
To disable all receiving ASPs enter:
disable *
156
Operations Guide
DISPLAY Command
Displaying an ASP (DISPLAY)

This command allows you to specify a generic ASP name subset and to list only
the ASPs of this subset. Only ASPs starting with the name of this subset, and all
ASP group separators, are displayed.
Note: To reset the ASP name subset to the full set of ASPs, enter the display
command without a parameter, or position the cursor on the command line
and press the PF key defined for the display command (PF 4, described as
SELECT in the PF-key lines).
To obtain more detailed information on a particular ASP, position the cursor on the
line for that ASP and press the PF key defined for the display command (PF 4,
described as SELECT in the PF-key lines).
Command Format
The format of the display command is:
display
da
[aspname | generic aspname]
aspname | generic aspname
To display an ASP list, you must specify a particular ASP or a generic ASP
name subset as a parameter. Press ENTER to redisplay the list with the latest
information in the PT.
157
DPTH Command
Displaying PT Header Information (DPTH)

This command allows you to display data contained in the header of the MERVA
Link Partner Table in panel AC04. This data displayed in panel AC04 includes
information about the status of the MERVA Link CICS ASP Monitor.
Command Format
The format of the dpth command is:
dpth
158
Operations Guide
DSA Command
Displaying Information of a Specific ASP (DSA)

This command allows you to specify a full ASP name or a generic ASP name
subset and to display detailed information of the ASPs of this subset in panel
AC02. The ASPs starting with the name of this subset are displayed in
wrap-around mode when the dsa command is entered repeatedly.
Command Format
The format of the dsa command is:
dsa
[ aspname | generic aspname]
aspname | generic aspname
To display detailed information of an ASP or a set of ASPs, you must specify a
particular ASP or a generic ASP name subset as a parameter. Press ENTER
with the dsa command in the AC02 command line to display information of
the next ASP of the applicable ASP subset.
Command Examples
To display detailed information of an ASP, named A2A, enter:
dsa a2a
To display detailed information of all ASPs with names starting with A, enter:
dsa a
and press ENTER in panel AC02 to display the next ASP of that subset.
159
ENABLE Command
Enabling MERVA Link Resources (ENABLE)

This command allows you to enable the set command in the IMS environment for
specific purposes. The set command is disabled by default in the IMS environment.
This command allows you also to enable a specific ASP or all ASPs for receiving
messages in the CICS environment. The enable command for receiving ASPs may
not have the desired effect in the IMS environment.
The enable command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
Command Format
The format of the enable command is:
enable
{aspname | * | set}
aspname
The name of a specific ASP that must be enabled for receiving messages.
*
Specifies that all ASPs defined in the PT must be enabled for receiving
messages.
set
Specifies that the set command must be enabled in the IMS environment for
specific purposes.
Command Example
To enable the set command in the IMS environment enter:
enable set
160
Operations Guide
EXPLAIN Command
Obtaining Help Information (EXPLAIN)

You can display MERVA ESA help information by pressing the PF key defined for
the help command.
MERVA Link provides the explain command to display environment dependent
explanations. Explanations are available for:
v MERVA Base, SWIFT Link, and Telex Link commands when you enter the
explain command in the MSC Main Menu (panel ACMM) or in the MSC
MERVA Operator Command panel (AC00).
v MERVA Link commands, when you enter the explain command in the Display
List of Message Transfer Applications panel AC01 (Figure 54 on page 137).
v Specific ASP/MTP control information, when you enter the explain command in
the Display Specific ASP/MTP panel AC02 (Figure 56 on page 144).
v The Partner MERVA System Control Facility when you enter the explain
command in the List of Partner MERVA Systems panel AC03 (Figure 57 on page
147).
v The PT Header information, when you enter the explain command in the
Display Partner Table Header Information panel AC04 (Figure 58 on page 148).
To return from an explanation panel to the previous display, press the ENTER key,
or enter any other command. Pressing the ENTER key in the AC00 panel without a
command, however, results in the display of the MSC main menu. You cannot
redisplay a MERVA command response in the CMD environment.
The explain command is always executed in your local MERVA system. This
means, you get the explanation in the language of your local MERVA system. If
you are in a partner MERVA system control session, the follow-on commands are
again executed in the partner MERVA system.
Command Format
The format of the explain command is:
explain
xpl
161
HOLD Command
Setting the Status of an ASP to HOLD (HOLD)

This command sets the AS status of an ASP and its send queue cluster to HOLD.
Message processing is completed, and no new message in the send queue cluster is
processed.
The hold command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
The hold command sets all members of a send queue cluster to HOLD status if
they are related via the RELATED parameter of the DSLFNT macro. If this
parameter is not specified, this command applies only to the queue that is
specified as the first send queue in the SENDQC parameter of the EKAPT
TYPE=ASP macro.
The hold command is rejected and the operator message EKA771E is issued if the
MERVA Link LC Control Message is currently being updated by a MERVA Link
sending or receiving process. Enter the hold command again to set the ASP into
HOLD status in this situation.
Command Format
The format of the hold command is:
hold
ha
{aspname | *}
aspname
*
Specifies that all ASPs defined in the PT must be set to HOLD status.
Command Example
To set the status of all ASPs to HOLD enter:
hold *
162
Operations Guide
IPRECOV Command
Recovering from a Delivery Error (IPRECOV)

The iprecov (or ipmove) command can be used to recover an inoperable ASP from
an IP message that cannot be delivered to the receiving application. It can also be
used to recover an inoperable ASP from a local MIP violation.
The iprecov command includes the functions of the kickoff command. This means,
message transmission is automatically resumed as soon as the ASP has been
successfully recovered. Message transmission is resumed with the first IP message
in the control queue. This message may have already been delivered to the
receiving application.
The iprecov command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
Automatic recovery of an ASP from an undeliverable message can be requested by
an ASP customization option (IPRECOV=AUTO). If you specify
IPRECOV=MANUAL, an ASP must be recovered manually from that message
using the iprecov command specifying the MIP message sequence number of that
message.
The iprecov nnnn command is accepted only if you specify it in the AC02 panel
(Display Specific ASP / MTP) displaying an inoperable ASP. This ensures that the
applicable ASP and the control queue which contains the subject IP message are
clearly identified. This panel may show an LC control message note which contains
the MIP message sequence number of the IP message which is undeliverable
(operator message EKA721E or EKA732E). You must specify the MIP message
sequence number of the IP message which is undeliverable as a parameter of the
iprecov command with four digits. Specify leading zeros, if applicable.
The MIP message sequence number must be entered with great care in the iprecov
command. If you enter the MSN of an existing IP message that is not the one that
is reported as undeliverable, you may duplicate a message and loose another
message.
When MERVA Link executes the iprecov nnnn command, it assigns message class
RI to the identified IP message, and moves the message out of the control queue
using the MERVA ESA routing table associated with that control queue. If you use
the iprecov nnnn command, this routing table must be able to handle messages of
the class RI.
The recovery of an ASP from an undeliverable message may be unsuccessful and
may cause a local MIP violation in a subsequent sending process. Use the iprecov *
command to recover an ASP from any type of local MIP violation.
The iprecov * command is accepted only if you specify it in the AC02 panel
(Display Specific ASP / MTP) displaying an inoperable ASP. This ensures that the
applicable ASP and the control queue that contains the IP messages which must be
resequenced are clearly identified.
Command Format
The format of the iprecov command is:
iprecov
ipmove
{mip msn | *}
163
IPRECOV Command
mip msn
The MIP sequence number of an IP message in the control queue of the
identified ASP.
*
Checks the message sequence numbers of all IP messages in the applicable

control queue, and corrects the message sequence numbers if they are not in
ascending order.
Note: This command can be specified only in the AC02 panel which identifies the
applicable ASP.
Command Example
To recover an ASP from the undeliverable message with MIP message sequence
number 385, enter:
iprecov 0385
in the AC02 panel.
164
Operations Guide
KICKOFF Command
Starting an ASP (KICKOFF)

Similar to the start command the kickoff command starts an ASP. However, the
kickoff command does not change the HOLD or NOHOLD status of an ASP; for
this reason, a kickoff command for an ASP whose status is HOLD only starts the
processing of unconfirmed messages in the control queue.
The kickoff command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
If you position the cursor on an ASP line and press the PF key defined for the
kickoff command (PF 10), you set the send queue cluster of this ASP to NOHOLD
status, request the start of the ASP, and return to the ASP list display (shown in
Figure 54 on page 137).
Command Format
The format of the kickoff command is:
kickoff
ka
{aspname | *}
aspname
Note: You can also move the cursor to a specific ASP you want to kick off, and
press PF 10.
*
Starts all ASPs defined in the PT.
Command Example
To kick off all ASPs defined in the PT, enter:
kickoff *
165
LCRESET and LRRESET Command
Resynchronizing Partner ASPs (LCRESET and LRRESET)

The lcreset command resynchronizes partner ASPs at the sending side after a
MERVA Link message integrity protocol (MIP) violation.
If the ASP status is inoperable, the lcreset command resets the last confirmed
message sequence number (LC MSN) in the LC control message of the control
queue to 0. The command has no effect on an ASP that is in operable status.
The lcreset command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
When the message sequence number (MSN) in the LC control message is 0, an
MIP reset indicator is transmitted with the next message. The MSN of this message
is 1.
The lrreset command resynchronizes partner ASPs at the receiving side after a
MERVA Link MIP violation.
The lrreset command deletes the last received control message (LR MSG) in the
applicable control queue.
The lrreset command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
If an LR MSG is missing in the application control queue, the MSN of a received
message is not checked. Any message is accepted, and the LR MSN is set to the
MSN in the received message. The MSN of a received message is then checked
again, as any received message is saved as LR MSG in the application control
queue.
Command Format
The format of the lcreset command is:
lcreset
lcrs
aspname
lrreset
lrrs
aspname
aspname
Command Example
If you want to reset the MIP of a specific sending ASP, named A2A, enter:
lcrs a2a
166
Operations Guide
LSTALL Command
Resetting the ASP Status Subset (LSTALL)

The lstall command resets the ASP status subset so that all ASPs of the current
ASP name subset are listed.
Command Format
The format of the lstall command is:
lstall
la
167
LSTINOP Command
Setting the ASP Status Subset (LSTINOP)

The lstinop command sets the ASP status subset so that the list contains only those
inoperable ASPs that are members of the current ASP name subset. ASP group
separators are also listed.
Command Format
The format of the lstinop command is:
lstinop
168
Operations Guide
NEXTGRP Command
Displaying the Next ASP or SCP Group (NEXTGRP)

The nextgrp command sets the ASP or SCP list position to the first entry of the
next ASP group if the command is entered in panel AC01, and to the first entry of
the next SCP group if the command is entered in panel AC03. The beginning of an
ASP group is defined by the beginning of the PT or by an EKAPT TYP=ASPGS (or
TYPE=DUMMY) macro. The beginning of an SCP group is defined by the
beginning of the PT or by an EKAPT TYP=SCPGS macro.
If you enter the nextgrp command when the last ASP or SCP group is listed, the
first ASP or SCP group is listed. This command does not affect the ASP name
subset, or the ASP status subset.
Command Format
The format of the nextgrp command is:
nextgrp
ng
169
NODE Command
Switching to a Partner MERVA System (NODE and PS)

You can use the node and ps commands to select a partner MERVA Link system
for Partner MERVA System Control (PMSC), and to switch to a specific partner
MERVA system. The PMSC function is fully supported by all MERVA ESA partner
systems. A subset of the MSC functions is supported by the PMSC function of
MERVA AIX. The PMSC function is not supported by the MERVA Link
implementations in the z/OS USS, OS/2, and Windows NT environments.
You can switch directly to a partner MERVA system if you enter a valid partner
MERVA system name as parameter of the node command. If you enter the node
command without a parameter or with an incorrect partner MERVA system name,
a list of valid partner MERVA systems is displayed.
If the list of partner MERVA systems does not fit into one display panel, you can
scroll through it using the scrolling commands. To select a specific partner MERVA
system place the cursor at the required entry in the partner MERVA system list and
press PF 4 (SELECT).
A connection to the applicable partner system must be available for a successful
switch to the partner MERVA system. In the CICS environment, the connection
status is checked as part of each PMSC interaction (PMSC command). If the
connection is released, the PMSC client in the local system acquires the connection,
and waits two seconds before it tries to allocate a session. In the IMS environment,
intersystem connections are dynamically established by APPC/MVS.
The node command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
authorized operator. The switch to a specific partner MERVA system may be
further restricted to a subset of these operators. This is done in the respective
EKAPT TYPE=SCP entries of the local and the partner MERVA Link systems.
The MSC user in the local MERVA system must have an entry in the User File of
the partner MERVA system. This User File Entry can authorize the (remote) MSC
user to issue restricted MSC commands, for example, kickoff ASP.
In the CICS environment, CICS System Programming Interface (SPI) commands
are used by the PMSC client program. CICS command security checking applies as
specified by the CICS XCMD and CMDSEC system initialization parameters. For
more information, refer to the CICS documentation.
When the node or ps command is entered, all information about the position in a
command sequence (for example, the sequence of JRN or DF commands) is reset.
The response to a command will be the same as if the MSC function was entered
from the MERVA Function Selection menu. This rule applies in any case, whether
you switch to a partner MERVA system or whether you stay in the local MERVA
system after the node command.
The node or ps command is always executed in your local MERVA system. This
means, you cannot display the SCP list of a partner MERVA system, and you
cannot switch from one of your partner MERVA systems to one of its partner
MERVA systems.
170
Operations Guide
NODE Command
Command Format
The format of the node command is:
node
ps
[local_partner_system_name |
partner_system_node_name |
local_system_node_name | * ]
local_partner_system_name
A local nickname for the partner MERVA system defined in an SCP entry of
the partner table. This parameter switches to the specified partner MERVA
system.
partner_system_node_name
The MERVA Link node name of the partner MERVA system. This parameter
switches to the specified partner MERVA system.
local_system_node_name
The name of the local MERVA system. This parameter switches back to the
local MERVA system and displays the MSC main menu (ACMM).
*
This parameter switches back to the local MERVA system and displays the
beginning of the local MERVA Link ASP list.
The set of partner systems which can be operated from a MERVA system is defined
in the MERVA Link Partner Table of that MERVA system.
171
RECOVER Command
Recovering In-Process Messages (RECOVER)

The recover (or ipcopy) command is used to copy in-process (IP) messages of a
specific inoperable or permanently waiting ASP to a send queue of another
message transmission medium (for example, for the telex or the SWIFT network).
The command is not accepted for an ASP in OPEN status.
The recover command is a privileged command. It can be issued only by an
The recover command modifies information in the IP messages in the applicable
control queue (set PDM indicator), and processes a copy of each IP message:
v Set message class to RC
v Reset MERVA Link control fields
v Route message as specified by the MERVA ESA Routing Table associated with
the applicable control queue.
Any error in this process is reported in the ASP list line.
Successful processing of a recover command is indicated by an information
message that contains the number of IP messages that were recovered. If the
command was not successful, command error diagnostic information can be
contained in the applicable ASP list line (MT status code -- and error codes in
the format xx-yyy in the diagnostic code field). This command error diagnostic
information is explained in MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
When the ASP has become operational again, the recovered IP messages are
processed by MERVA Link. They are delivered to the receiving application with the
MERVA Link PDM indicator. This means, the MERVA Link control field
EKAPDUPM contains the characters PDM. This indicator can be checked in a
routing table to handle recovered messages (that may be duplicate) differently
from other messages.
Command Format
The format of the recover command is:
recover
ipcopy
aspname
aspname
Command Example
To recover an ASP, named AP3, enter:
recover ap3
172
Operations Guide
REFRESH Command
Refreshing ASP List in the IMS Environment (REFRESH)

This command allows you to refresh the data displayed in panel AC01 with the
most up to date information in the Last Confirmed Control Messages of all ASPs.
In the CICS environment, this update is performed automatically. In the IMS
environment this update is not performed automatically if MERVA Link send tasks
and the DSLEUD are scheduled in different IMS Message Processing Regions
(MPRs).
The MSN of the last received message is not updated as response to this
command. It is updated when information of the specific ASP is displayed in panel
AC02.
Command Format
The format of the refresh command is:
refresh
ra
The refresh command has no parameter.
173
SET and RESET Commands
Modifying the Processing Environment Parameters (SET and

RESET)
Use set and reset commands to modify temporarily a subset of the MERVA Link
processing environment parameters specified in the EKAPT TYPE=INITIAL macro
in the CICS environment. This command is also used to modify temporarily a
subset of the MERVA Link ASP definition parameters specified in an EKAPT
TYPE=ASP macro in the CICS environment.
Note: As the default, these commands are not supported in the IMS environment.
The command enable set enables the set command in the IMS environment
for specific purposes only.
The set and reset commands are privileged commands. They can be issued only by
an authorized operator.
The set and reset commands can be entered in any panel of the MERVA System
Control Facility. The command response is an updated display of the current panel
(AC01, AC02, AC03, or AC04), or an unchanged redisplay of the current panel
(ACMM, AC00).
An incorrect command option or other set or reset command processing errors
result in the display of an error message in the current panel. The error message is
displayed in panel AC01, in spite of the panel in which the command was entered,
if the command applies to an ASP.
Command Format
The format of the set and reset commands is:
set
{am | test | xc | ctrcf | ctrcw} |

{snap | psnap | accept | iprecov | wsz}
reset
{test | ctrc | accept | iprecov | am}
Both commands have a keyword as a mandatory parameter. You can enter the
following commands:
set test
Corresponds to the parameter TEST=ON in the EKAPT TYPE=INITIAL
macro.
set xc
Corresponds to the parameter TEST=EXCEPTION in the EKAPT

TYPE=INITIAL macro.
set ctrcf
Corresponds to the parameter TRACE=(,FULL) in the EKAPT
TYPE=INITIAL macro, and enables the conversation trace identifier
specified in the TRACE parameter of the EKAPT TYPE=INITIAL macro.
set ctrcw
Corresponds to the parameter TRACE=(,WEAK) in the EKAPT
TYPE=INITIAL macro, and enables the conversation trace identifier
specified in the TRACE parameter of the EKAPT TYPE=INITIAL macro.
set snap
Asks for a SNAP dump of the MSC task in your local MERVA system
174
Operations Guide

when the following MSC command has been processed. Only one SNAP
dump is written as response to a set snap command.
When this command is entered after an MSC switch to a partner MERVA
system, the SNAP dump still applies to the local MERVA system.
This command is supported in the CICS and IMS environments. Issue the
command enable set to enable the set snap command in the IMS
environment.
set psnap
Asks for a SNAP dump of the MSC task in the currently applicable partner
MERVA system when the following MSC command has been processed. It
has no effect if MSC has not switched to a partner MERVA system. Only
one SNAP dump is written as response to a set psnap command.
command enable set to enable the set psnap command in the IMS
environment.
set accept
Corresponds to the parameter ACCEPT=WARNING in the EKAPT
TYPE=ASP macro. This command applies to the first ASP displayed in an
ASP list (if entered in panel AC01) or to the identified ASP (if entered in
panel AC02).
set iprecov
Corresponds to the parameter IPRECOV=AUTOMATIC in the EKAPT
panel AC02).
set am Starts the ASP Monitor if the ASP Monitor transaction ID and a nonzero
restart time interval are contained in the PT header.
The ASP Monitor restart time interval (00 .. 59) can be added to the
command parameter am. The command set am05 means, for example, that
the ASP Monitor restart time interval is set to five minutes and the ASP
Monitor must be started. The command set am00 means that the ASP
Monitor restart time interval is set to zero and the ASP Monitor must be
stopped.
set wsz
Scans through all ASPs defined in the PT. For all ASPs in HOLD status, the
window size in the LC control message and the window size specified in
the PT ASP entry are compared. If the window sizes do not match, the LC
control message is updated to match the window size in the PT ASP entry.
An ASP in NOHOLD status is not affected by this command. The same
applies if no LC control message is found in the control queue of an ASP.
command enable set to enable the set wsz command in the IMS
environment.
reset test
Corresponds to the parameter TEST=OFF in the EKAPT TYPE=INITIAL
macro.
reset ctrc
Corresponds to a missing TRACE parameter in the EKAPT TYPE=INITIAL
175

macro, and disables the conversation trace identifier specified in the
TRACE parameter of the EKAPT TYPE=INITIAL macro.
Note: You cannot disable the conversation trace identifier that is specified
in an EKAPT TYPE=MTP macro and therefore associated with a
specific sending MTP only. The conversation trace types FULL and
WEAK, however, also apply to that specific sending MTP trace.
reset accept
Corresponds to the parameter ACCEPT=OK in the EKAPT TYPE=ASP
macro. This command applies to the first ASP displayed in an ASP list (if
entered in panel AC01) or to the identified ASP (if entered in panel AC02).
reset iprecov
Corresponds to the parameter IPRECOV=MANUAL in the EKAPT
panel AC02).
reset am
Sets the ASP Monitor restart time interval to zero and stops the ASP
Monitor.
176
Operations Guide
Chapter 8. Operating MERVA Link USS

The MERVA Link USS Application Control Command (ACC) application provides
commands to operate MERVA Link USS in an z/OS USS shell environment. A
subset of these commands can also be used in an USS or z/OS batch environment.
Overview of the MERVA Link Control within ACC

The MERVA Link USS Application Control Command application can be used by
any authorized user to display MERVA Link resources and to modify MERVA Link
processing parameters in a USS command shell environment. The ACC functions
are, for example:
Display ACC help information
Display ACT header information
Display a list of the partner nodes (ISC parameter sets) defined in the ACT
Display static and dynamic information of an intersystem connection to a
specific partner node
v Analyze and explain error information in the ACT
v Explain MERVA Link ESA error information
v Request ACD termination.
v
v
v
v
The requested ACC function is entered as the first parameter of the USS shell
command ekaacc. This parameter is called the ACC command name. Additional
command parameters may be applicable.
ACC provides more than 75 commands. Only the subset of the most important
ACC commands is described in the following. Enter ekaacc without a parameter to
get a list of the full set of ACC commands.
ACC Execution Environment

The MERVA Link USS Application Control Command (ACC) application can be
used in an z/OS USS interactive command shell environment, in an USS batch
environment (BPXBATCH), and in an z/OS batch environment. The command or
program ekaacc calls ACC in the z/OS USS environments. Program EKAACC calls
ACC in the z/OS environment.
An ACC interactive command begins with an ACC command name that must be
entered in lowercase letters. A subset of the ACC command names is followed by a
resource name. Resource names can be, for example, an ASP name, a partner
system node name, a keyword, or a MERVA Link diagnostic code. MERVA Link
resource names are normally made of uppercase characters. They can, however, be
entered with lowercase letters. An uppercase translation is performed automatically
(where applicable). Help information is displayed as response to an invalid ACC
command.
A conversation mode is supported by ACC. The USS command ekaacc sc starts the
ACC conversation mode in a window. All data entered in a window in ACC
conversation mode is interpreted as an ACC command. The command prompt
ekaacc is a reminder of the fact that the window is in ACC conversation mode.
177
A batch input mode is supported by ACC. The program calls ekaacc si

(BPXBATCH) and EKAACC si (z/OS) start ACC in batch input mode. The ACC
commands are retrieved from stdin, and the command output is written to stdout.
ACC cannot be used when the MERVA Link USS Daemon EKAACD is not active.
EKAACD generates and owns the MERVA Link Application Control Table
(EKAACT) which is the main resource of the MERVA Link USS Control Facility.
The ACC commands and other subjects related to the MERVA Link USS
Application Control Command application are described in the following.
Note: The support of ASP related functions has not been removed from the ACC
implementation in the z/OS USS environment. ASPs are, however,
supported by the MERVA Link USS Gateway for installation verification and
test purposes only. All functions related to ASPs are therefore not applicable
in a production environment.
ACC Command Format

An ACC command consists of a command name and a resource name. The
resource name is empty in a subset of the ACC commands. An ACC command
name consists of up to four characters.
The majority of the ACC command names is structured according to the following
rules:
v The first letter identifies a command activity, for example, analyze, change,
display, help, list, send probe, reset, set, start, and terminate.
v A command activity can also be identified by two characters of a command
name, for example, cx (configuration export) and dx (display explanation).
v The character behind the activity indicator identifies a data class (if it is not the
last character of the command name). Data classes are, for example, error code
vector, parameter, receiving process, routing process, sending process, status
information, and trace information.
v The last character of the command name often identifies an object or an object
class, for example, a (ACT ASP entry), c (ACT ISC entry), h (ACT header), d
(diagnostic code), and e (error information or error class).
ACC Command Groups

The set of ACC commands is divided into ACC command groups for
documentation purposes. The commands of a command group are functionally
related. There is an ACC help command for each command group that describes
the commands in that group at medium detail level.
The ACC commands are listed and explained in the following in alphabetic
sequence of the ACC command group names.
The ACC Commands

Perform an Error Analysis
The analyze commands provide a means to get an explanation of error information
stored in the ACT. This explanation is supposed to be related to the application
process rather than to the MERVA Link internal processing structure.
178
Operations Guide
Analyze Commands
Analyze MERVA Link Process Error Information (a)

The ACC command a scans the ACT for error information that is associated with a
v MERVA Link unidentified receiving process
v MERVA Link sending process
v MERVA Link receiving process
v MERVA Link routing process.
It displays a list of the processes that have failed. Each line of that list applies to a
MERVA Link process and contains the ACC command that can be used to analyze
that specific MERVA Link process error.
Analyze Unidentified Receiving Process (aih)

The ACC command aih analyzes MERVA Link receiving process error information
in the ACT header. The error information is associated with an inbound
conversation that failed before the identity of the originator or the recipient could
be determined.
Analyze Receiving Process (ara asp_name)

The ACC command ara asp_name, with the name of a local MERVA Link ASP as
the ACC resource name, analyzes a MERVA Link receiving process error. It
displays the explanation of a number of receiving process error codes contained in
the specified ACT ASP entry and in the ACT ISC entry that is associated with the
specified ASP entry.
Analyze Routing Process (arc pnode_name)

The ACC command arc pnode_name, with the name of a partner MERVA Link
node as the ACC resource name, analyzes a MERVA Link routing process error.
The partner node name specifies the destination of the routing process. The arc
command displays the explanation of a number of routing process error codes
contained in the specified ACT ISC entry.
Analyze Sending Process (asa asp_name)

The ACC command asa asp_name, with the name of a local MERVA Link ASP as
the ACC resource name, analyzes a MERVA Link sending process error. It displays
the explanation of a number of sending process error codes contained in the
specified ACT ASP entry, and its associated ACT ISC entry (if applicable).
Export MERVA Link USS Configuration

The ACC commands cxf path_name (ACT configuration export to a single file) and
cxs path_name (ACT configuration export to separate files) export the
customization parameters that are currently contained in the ACT to one or more
HFS files. The exported data has a format that is accepted by the configuration
import functions used by the ACD.
The fully qualified path name (beginning with '/') of the output file can be
specified as a command parameter. A relative path name specified as output file
name is based on the configuration subdirectory of the MERVA instance directory,
for example, /u/merva1/cfg/. If a file name is not specified as a command
parameter, the file ekaact.cfg is the default. The default name for the sample
output file is /u/merva1/cfg/ekaact.cfg.
You must be the ACD process owner or a root user with uid=0 to execute the
configuration export commands. Read and write permissions are granted for the
file owner. Members of the owning group and other USS users are authorized to
read that file.
179
Configuration Export Commands

A configuration export command is rejected if this configuration exists already. To
replace an existing configuration file, you must use the replace versions cxfr and
cxfs of the configuration export command.
Export Configuration to a Single File (cxf cfg_file_path)

The ACT configuration is exported to a single file that contains the parameters of
the ACT header and all ACT entries. The default file name is ekaact.cfg in the
subdirectory /cfg of the applicable MERVA USS instance directory. The sample
configuration export file name is /u/merva1/cfg/ekaact.cfg.
Export Configuration to Separate Files (cxs cfg_file_path)

The ACT configuration is exported to a main file and to a set of configuration
include files, one for each ACT entry. The main file contains the parameters of the
ACT header and includes statements for all ACT entry parameter files. A
configuration include file is generated for each ACT entry. It contains the
parameters of one ACT ASP or one ACT ISC entry.
The default main file name is ekaact.cfg in the subdirectory /cfg of the applicable
MERVA USS instance directory. The sample main configuration export file name is
/u/merva1/cfg/ekaact.cfg.
The configuration include files are written to the same directory as the main
configuration file, for example, /u/merva1/cfg/.
v The name of an include file for an ACT ASP entry consists of cfga. followed by
the ASP name, for example, /u/merva1/cfg/cfga.ASP1.
v The name of an include file for an ACT ISC entry consists of cfgc. followed by
the partner node name, for example, /u/merva1/cfg/cfgc.PNODE1.
Display Export Configuration Help Information

An invalid ACC command starting with cx causes Configuration Export Help
information to be displayed. The ACC command hcx displays the same help
information.
Display Parameters and Resource Status Information

The display commands provide a means to display parameters of a resource and
to display status information associated with a resource.
Display ASP Parameters (dpa asp_name)

The ACC command dpa asp_name, with the name of a local MERVA Link ASP as
the ACC resource name, displays a set of customization parameters associated with
the specified ASP. This parameter set includes the following ASP parameters:
v
v
v
v
Local ASP name

Partner ASP name
Partner node name
Send queue name(s).
The ACC command dpa * displays the customization parameters of all ASPs
defined in the ACT.
Display ISC Parameters (dpc partner_node_name)

The ACC command dpc partner_node_name, with the name of a partner MERVA
Link node as the ACC resource name, displays the set of inter-system
communication (ISC) parameters that is used to connect to the specified partner
MERVA Link node. This parameter set can include the following parameters:
180
Operations Guide
Display Commands
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Partner MERVA Link node name

Partner SNA APPC symbolic destination name
Partner SNA APPC TP name
Partner TCP/IP host name
Partner TCP/IP port number
Conversation security user ID
Conversation security user password information.
The ACC command dpc * displays the customization parameters of all partner
nodes defined in the ACT.
Display ACT Header Parameters (dph)

The ACC command dph displays static information that is contained in the header
of the MERVA Link Application Control Table (ACT). This information includes:
v The local MERVA Link node name
v The ACT generation date/time stamp
v The number of ASP entries in this ACT
v The number of ISC entries in this ACT.
Display ASP Status Information (dsa asp_name)

The ACC command dsa asp_name, with the name of a local MERVA Link ASP as
the ACC resource name, displays status information that applies to the specified
ASP. Error codes are shown and explained.
Display ISC Status Information (dsc partner_node_name)

The ACC command dsc partner_node_name, with the name of a partner MERVA
Link node as the ACC resource name, displays information related to the
intersystem communication with the specified partner MERVA Link node. This
information is divided in four groups that are associated with the four MERVA
Link USS TPs EKATPO, EKATCO, EKATPI, and EKATCI.
The ISC status information for each TP can include:
v The TPs last activity date/time stamp
v The TP return code
v The TP reason code
v The USS or SNA error number.
Error codes are shown and explained.
Display MERVA Link Daemon Status and Activity Trace (dsd)

The ACC command dsd displays information related to the MERVA Link daemon
EKAACD. This information is contained in the header of the MERVA Link
Application Control Table (ACT). This information includes:
v The EKAACD process identifier
v The time of the daemons latest activity
v The EKAACD activity trace.
The EKAACD activity trace consists of up to 16 operator messages. Each of these
operator messages is preceded by the applicable time stamp in the format
HH:MM:SS. The message text explains a specific activity performed by the
daemon.
181
Display Commands
The EKAACD activity trace area in the ACT header is used in wrap-around mode.
This means, you can see 16 of the most recent EKAACD activity messages if the
last message issued by EKAACD is stored at the end of the EKAACD activity trace
area. If the last message issued by EKAACD is not stored at the end of the
EKAACD activity trace area, you can see up to 19 activity messages. A trace area
wrap is indicated by a separator line (<>).
Display ACT Header Status Information (dsh)

The ACC command dsh displays status information that is contained in the header
of the MERVA Link Application Control Table (ACT). This information can include:
v The local MERVA Link node name
v The ACT generation date and time stamp
v The unidentified EKATPI error information
v The unidentified EKATCI error information
v The unidentified EKAP1I error information.
Error codes are shown and explained.
Unidentified error information is stored by a MERVA Link receiving process in the
ACT header when an error is found before the identity of the partner could be
determined. As soon as the originators identity is known and the corresponding
ACT ISC entry is identified, receiving process error information is stored in that
ACT ISC entry.
Explain Error Information

The display explanation commands (dx..) provide a means to display an
explanation for error information. These commands can be grouped as follows:
v The dxc and dxd commands that try to explain error information in an ACT ISC
entry and a diagnostic code, respectively
v The dxm commands that can explain a subset of the return and reason codes of
MERVA ESA V4 services
v The dxr and dxs commands that try to explain MERVA Link error code vectors
for sending and receiving processes at the MT and AS layers.
Note: The display explanation commands can explain all MERVA Link ESA error
codes, but only a subset of the MERVA ESA V4 service return and reason
codes. Refer to the MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes manual for an
interpretation of the full set of codes.
Display Error Code Vector Explanation (dxc partner_node_name)

The ACC command dxc partner_node_name explains an internal MERVA Link
ESA error code vector that may be stored in the ACT ISC entry for the specified
partner node. It can explain a major subset of the error code vectors that can be
included by MERVA Link ESA receiving processes in an error report.
A MERVA Link ESA inbound process error code vector consists of a sequence of
six halfword (unsigned short int) error codes EC1 - EC6:
1. If EC1 is not 0008, the error was found in the MERVA Link inbound TP
(EKATR10 or EKATPI1). EC1 is the return code of program EKATR10 or
EKATPI1. The meaning of EC2 to EC4 is specified by the latter programs. EC1
= 0008 means that the error is reported by the MTSP.
2. If EC1 is 0008 and EC2 is not 0008, the error was found in the MERVA Link
inbound MTSP (EKASP10). EC2 is the return code of program EKASP10. The
182
Operations Guide
Display Explanation Commands

meaning of EC3 to EC5 is specified by the latter program. EC1 = 0008 and EC2
= 0008 means that the error is reported by the inbound AS program
(EKAAR10).
3. If both EC1 and EC2 are 0008, the error was found in the MERVA Link inbound
AS Program (EKAAR10). EC3 is the return code of program EKAAR10. The
meaning of EC4 to EC6 is specified by the latter program.
There are always four possible error codes associated with the MERVA Link
programs at the three layers TP, MT, and AS. A subset of these error codes may,
however, be zero.
The dxc command cannot explain all possible error code vectors. The complete set
of MERVA ESA and MERVA Link ESA error codes is explained in the MERVA for
ESA Messages and Codes manual.
Display Diagnostic Code Explanation (dxd diag_code)

The ACC command dxd diag_code tries to explain the specified MERVA Link
diagnostic code. It can explain all diagnostic codes generated by the MERVA Link
USS programs, and a major subset of the diagnostic codes generated by MERVA
Link AIX and MERVA Link NT. These diagnostic codes start with an origin
identifier of two alphabetic characters. The diagnostic information follows in two
codes of two hexadecimal characters each. A MERVA Link USS diagnostic code
entered with less than 6 characters is automatically padded with zeros up to the
length of 6 characters.
The dxd command can also explain all alphabetic diagnostic codes generated by
MERVA Link ESA sending and receiving processes, parts of all other MERVA Link
ESA sending process diagnostic codes, and some alphabetic MERVA USE
Workstation programs diagnostic codes. It cannot explain MERVA Link ESA
receiving process diagnostic codes originating from the MTP and MTSP.
A large set of diagnostic codes generated by MERVA Link AIX and MERVA Link
NT matches the MERVA Link USS diagnostic codes.
Operating system error numbers may, however, be incorrectly interpreted by the
MERVA Link USS dxd command.
A MERVA Link USS diagnostic code consists of:
1. Two letters identifying the MERVA Link USS program that generated the
diagnostic code (DC origin).
2. Two hexadecimal characters (0 .. 9, A .. F) identifying the MERVA Link program
return code.
3. Two hexadecimal characters (0 .. 9, A .. F) identifying the MERVA Link program
reason code.
The meaning of the return code is determined by the first two letters of the
diagnostic code (MERVA Link USS error class). The meaning of the reason code
depends on the value of the return code.
A diagnostic code generated by MERVA Link ESA or by MERVA USE Workstation
programs consists of six alphanumeric characters. It can be a mnemonic for a
processing failure (for example, DSL IN if MERVA ESA is not operational in the
partner system), or a sequence of three hexadecimal error codes in character
representation (for example, 0872E4 if the recipient node name in the PROBE
envelope does not match the local node name of the MERVA ESA system).
183

The diagnostic code that is entered as the parameter of the dxd command can
contain one blank. It can consist of four characters if the last two characters have
no effect on the explanation. The diagnostic codes 0872E4 and 0872, for example,
have the same explanation.
The explanation of a diagnostic code consists of one line explaining the source of
the diagnostic code, and one or two lines explaining the meaning of the diagnostic
code. The source of a diagnostic code can be one of the following:
v One of the MERVA Link USS, AIX, or NT message processing programs
v MERVA Link of MERVA ESA or MERVA USE Workstation programs
v MERVA Link of MERVA ESA
v MERVA Link of MERVA USE Workstation programs
The diagnostic codes that are defined in MERVA Link USS, and MERVA USE
Workstation programs, are explained as diagnostic codes from a MERVA Link
program EKAxxx. The diagnostic codes that are defined in both MERVA Link ESA
and MERVA Link OS/2, are explained as diagnostic codes from MERVA ESA or
MERVA USE Workstation programs.
Display Explanation of DSLMMFS RC and RS (dxmm rcrs)

The ACC command dxmm explains return and reason codes of the MERVA ESA
MFS (DSLMMFS RC and RS). The RC and RS must be specified as the command
parameter in one token.
If the command parameter starts with the characters 00, its format must be the
sequence of one or two codes, each consisting of four hexadecimal digits (0 - F).
Otherwise, the codes must consist of two hexadecimal digits each.
Display Explanation of DSLNICP or DSLNICT RC (dxmn rc)

The ACC command dxmn explains return codes of the MERVA ESA NICP or
NICT Services (DSLNICP and DSLNICT RC) and associated DSLRTNSC reason
codes. The DSLNIC RC must be specified as two or four hexadecimal digits.
Display Explanation of DSLQMGT RC (dxmq rcrs)

The ACC command dxmq explains return codes of the MERVA ESA QMGT
Services (DSLQMGT RC) and associated DSLRTNSC reason codes. The RC and RS
must be specified as the command parameter in one token.
Display Explanation of DSLRTNSC RC and RS (dxmr rcrs)

The ACC command dxmr explains return and reason codes of the MERVA ESA
Routing Scanner (DSLRTNSC RC and RS). The RC and RS must be specified as the
command parameter in one token.
Display Explanation of DSLTOFSV RC and RS (dxmt rcrs)

The ACC command dxmt explains return and reason codes of the MERVA ESA
TOF Supervisor Services (DSLTOFSV RC and RS). The RC and RS must be
specified as the command parameter in one token.
184
Operations Guide

Display Explanation of RP ECV Type AS (dxra ar_ecv)

The ACC command dxra explains an Error Code Vector (ECV) that is associated
with a MERVA Link ESA receiving process error of the type AS. The ECV must be
If the command parameter starts with the characters 00, the format of the ECV
must be the sequence of up to four error codes each consisting of four hexadecimal
digits (0 - F). Otherwise, all error codes in the ECV must consist of two
hexadecimal digits.
For more information about MERVA Link ESA receiving process ECVs, refer to the
description of the ACC command dxc.
Display Explanation of RP ECV Type MT (dxrm mt_ecv)

The ACC command dxrm explains an Error Code Vector (ECV) that is associated
with a MERVA Link ESA receiving process error of the type MT. The ECV must be
must be the sequence of up to six error codes each consisting of four hexadecimal
hexadecimal digits.
For more information about MERVA Link ESA receiving process ECVs, refer to the
description of the ACC command dxc.
Display Explanation of SP ECV Type AS (dxsa as_ecv)

The ACC command dxsa explains an Error Code Vector (ECV) that is associated
with a MERVA Link ESA sending process at the AS layer. This type of ECV can, for
example, be displayed as the sending ASP diagnostic code in the MERVA Link ESA
MSC screens AC01 and AC02. It can also be part of the MERVA Link operator
message EKA701E. The ECV must be specified as the command parameter in one
token.
hexadecimal digits.
Display Explanation of SP ECV Type MT (dxsm mt_ecv)

The ACC command dxsm explains an Error Code Vector (ECV) that is associated
with a MERVA Link ESA sending process at the MT layer. This type of ECV can,
for example, be displayed as Error Code Vector ... in LC Ctrl Message in a
MERVA Link ESA MSC screen AC02. The ECV must be specified as the command
parameter in one token.
hexadecimal digits.
185

An ECV that contains the first two bytes of a CICS EIBRCODE, for example, D008,
must be entered as a sequence of 4-character error codes. ECV 00080022D008, for
example, means that the partner system is not available. The CICS EIBRCODE
cannot be interpreted in the short form of this ECV (082208).
An ECV that contains APPC/MVS return and reason codes that are identified by
AC.. and AE.., respectively, can, however, be entered as 2-character error codes.
The APPC/MVS return and reason code indicators are not required for the
interpretation of these codes. An ECV that contains an SNA sense code starting
with 08 can also be entered as a sequence of 2-byte error codes. The two
hexadecimal digits 08 are added in this case before the SNA sense code is
interpreted. ECV 000A0010AC020857, for example, means that all available sessions
to the partner system are in use and the allocation of a new session failed because
the required SSCP-LU session is not active. The short form of this ECV (0A100257)
is also valid and has the same explanation.
The dxsm command can explain only a subset of all possible MERVA Link ESA
sending MTP error code vectors. Sending MTP error code vectors are considered as
MERVA Link ESA internal information for problem determination, and not
described in MERVA Link documentation.
Display Explanation Help Information

An invalid ACC command starting with dx causes Display Explanation Help
information to be displayed. The ACC command hdx displays the same help
information.
Show ACC Command Help Information

The help commands provide a means to display information regarding the ACC
commands. One of the help screens is displayed when an invalid ACC command
is entered.
Show ACC Command Summary Help Screen (h)

The ACC command h displays a summary of ACC commands. This help
information is automatically displayed if you enter an invalid ACC command, and
no specific help screen is associated with that invalid ACC command.
Show Analyze Command Help Screen (ha)

The ACC command ha displays an explanation of the ACC analyze commands.
This help information is automatically displayed if you enter an invalid ACC
command that starts with a.
Show Change Command Help Screen (hc)

The ACC command hc displays an explanation of the ACC change commands.
command that starts with c.
Show Configuration Export Command Help Screen (hcx)

The ACC command hcx displays an explanation of the ACC configuration export
commands. This help information is automatically displayed if you enter an
invalid ACC command that starts with cx.
Show Display Command Help Screen (hd)

The ACC command hd displays an explanation of the ACC display commands.
command that starts with d.
186
Operations Guide
Help Commands
Show Display Explanation Command Help Screen (hdx)

The ACC command hdx displays an explanation of the ACC display explanation
invalid ACC command that starts with dx.
Show List Command Help Screen (hl)

The ACC command hl displays an explanation of the ACC list commands. This
help information is automatically displayed if you enter an invalid ACC command
that starts with l.
Show ASP Operating Command Help Screen (hm)

The ACC command hm displays an explanation of the local and partner ASP
operating commands. This help information is automatically displayed if you enter
an incomplete partner ASP operating command, for example, pda without the ASP
name, or an invalid ACC command that starts with m or k.
Show Send Probe Command Help Screen (hp)

The ACC command hp displays an explanation of the ACC send probe
invalid ACC command that starts with p.
Show Reset Command Help Screen (hr)

The ACC command hr displays an explanation of the ACC reset commands. This
help information is automatically displayed if you enter an invalid ACC command
that starts with r.
Show Set Command Help Screen (hs)

The ACC command hs displays an explanation of the ACC set and start
invalid ACC command that starts with s.
Show Extended ACC Command Help Screen (hx)

The ACC command hx displays an explanation of all ACC commands in a list. The
size of this list is most probably larger than the size of the display window. You
cannot see the beginning of that list if you enter the hx command in ACC
conversation mode. To get the complete list displayed in separate pages, issue the
command ekaacc hx | pg in the USS command shell environment.
List Resource Groups

The list commands provide a means to display lists of resource groups in the ACT.
Resource groups are, for example, all ACT resources, the ACT ASP entries, the
ACT ISC entries, and the message transfer rates of sending ASPs.
The size of an ASP or Partner Node list can be limited by specifying a resource
name subset as list command parameter. An ASP list is, for example, limited to the
set of ASPs that start with the characters specified as list command parameter. The
same applies for a list of partner nodes (ACT ISC entries).
The resource name subset can be specified in lowercase characters as the list
command parameter. It is automatically translated to uppercase characters before it
is interpreted as an ASP or Partner Node name subset. A list command parameter
is reset after handling a list command in ACC conversation mode. It is not used as
default parameter of a following ACC command.
187
List Commands
List ACT Entries (l)

The ACC command l displays the ACT name and the local MERVA Link node
name from the ACT header, and lists all ASP and ISC entries defined in the ACT.
If a listed ACT resource (ACT header or ACT entry) does not contain error
information, the ACC command that displays the parameters of that ACT is added
at the end of the list line. If an ACT resource contains error information, the ACC
command that explains the error information is added at the end of the list line.
An alert indicator ( ==>) is contained in the list line of each ASP or ISC entry that
contains error information.
List ASP Entries (la)

The ACC command la lists all ASP entries defined in the ACT. This list is a subset
of the list obtained via the ACC command l.
List Active ASPs (laa)

The ACC command laa lists all sending and receiving ASPs defined in the ACT
that are currently active as specified by the ASP active flag in the ACT.
List ISC Entries (lc)

The ACC command lc lists all ISC entries defined in the ACT. This list is a subset
of the list obtained via the ACC command l.
List Routing Processes (lr)

The ACC command lr lists all ISC entries defined in the ACT, and tells whether a
routing process is active with the subject destination node.
List Active Routing Processes (lra)

The ACC command lra lists all ISC entries defined in the ACT that are associated
with an active routing process. A list line shows the partner node name, the total
number of routing processes to the subject destination node, and the numbers of
routing processes that use SNA and TCP/IP for outbound communication,
respectively.
List MERVA Link Error Classes (le)

The ACC command le lists all MERVA Link USS internal error classes. Each error
class is associated with a MERVA Link program or a subsystem that provides error
codes of that class. The meaning of an error code can be determined only if its
error class is known.
An error code that cannot be explained in any of the ACC display status and
analyze commands, is identified in the command response with its error class. You
can then refer to documentation of the applicable subsystem (for example,
Communications Server or USS Kernel services) for an explanation of the error
code.
List Message Transfer Rates (lx)

The ACC command lx displays the average message transfer rates of all three
MERVA Link message transfer process subgroups:
v Receive message process
v Send message process
v Route message process.
The commands lxi, lxo, and lxr are provided to display a list concerning one of
these groups only. These commands and the information in each sublist are
described in the following sections.
188
Operations Guide
List Commands
All information in the ACT concerning message transfer rates can be reset to zero
by the ACC command rxi. The time frame that applies to information concerning
message transfer rates starts either when the current ACD process has started, or
when the last rxi command has been entered.
List Receiving ASP Transfer Rates (lxi)

The ACC command lxi lists the inbound message transfer rates for all ASPs
defined in the ACT. The indicator no message received appears in the list line of
any ASP that has not received messages since the last startup of the ACD.
The calculation of the message transfer rate displayed for a particular ASP is based
on the total number of messages received and the accumulated duration of the
receiving processes since the last start of the ACD. The transfer rate is shown in
units of messages per hour. The total number of messages received since the last
ACD start is displayed as part of the ASP status information (see command dsa).
List Sending ASP Transfer Rates (lxo)

The ACC command lxo lists the outbound message transfer rates for all ASPs
defined in the ACT. The indicator no message sent appears in the list line of any
ASP that has not sent messages since the last startup of the ACD.
The calculation of the message transfer rate displayed for a particular ASP is based
on the total number of messages sent and the accumulated duration of the sending
processes since the last start of the ACD. The transfer rate is shown in units of
messages per hour. The total number of messages sent since the last ACD start is
displayed as part of the ASP status information (see command dsa).
List Routing Process Transfer Rates (lxr)

The ACC command lxr lists the message transfer rates of the MERVA Link
processes that route messages (from all source nodes) to the partner nodes defined
in the ACT ISC entries. The indicator no message routed appears in the list line of
any ISC entry (partner node) that has not received messages in a routing process
since the last startup of the ACD.
The calculation of the message transfer rate displayed for a particular partner node
is based on the total number of messages routed and the accumulated duration of
the routing processes since the last start of the ACD. The transfer rate is shown in
units of messages per hour. The total number of messages routed since the last
ACD start is displayed as part of the ISC status information (see command dsc).
Reset Resource Characteristics

The reset commands provide a means to reset information in the ACT or to stop
MERVA Link facilities. A subset of these commands has the opposite effect as the
corresponding set commands.
Reset Error Information (re)

The ACC command re sets the error information in the ACT header and in all ACT
ASP and ISC entries to zero. This command resets also the sending and receiving
ASP active flags in all ASP entries, as well as the routing process active flags in all
ISC entries.
Reset Sending ASP Trace (rta)

The ACC command rta asp_name requests that no processing trace is written by
the sending MERVA Link processes that are associated with the specified ASP. The
ASP name can be entered in lowercase characters.
189
Reset Commands
Reset Receiving TCP/IP Process Trace (rtc)

The ACC command rtc requests that no processing trace is written by the receiving
MERVA Link processes that are associated with an inbound TCP/IP conversation.
This command has no command parameter.
Reset Trace Directory Path Name (rtd)

The ACC command rtd erases the trace directory path name in the ACT header. It
provides a means to disable all MERVA Link processing traces in one place. This
command has no command parameter. The ACC command std must be used to
enable the MERVA Link trace facility again.
Reset Receiving SNA APPC Process Trace (rtp)

The ACC command rtp requests that no processing trace is written by the
receiving MERVA Link processes that are associated with an inbound SNA APPC
conversation. This command has no command parameter.
Reset Message Transfer Rate Information (rxi)

The ACC command rxi requests that all information in the ACT that is related to
the message transfer statistics is erased. This command has no command
parameter.
When this command has been entered, message transfer information (number of
messages and duration of the corresponding MERVA Link processes) is collected
and accumulated from zero values. Zero values apply also when the ACD has been
started and a new ACT has been created by the ACD.
Start ACC in Special Mode

The start commands provide a means to start ACC in specific modes.
Start EKAACC Conversation Mode (sc)

The USS command ekaacc sc places the terminal in ACC conversation mode. In
ACC conversation mode you are prompted by ekaacc to enter an ACC command
(without typing the name of the command processor ekaacc). The ACC commands
x and end end the ACC conversation mode. The Ctrl_C key that generates an
interrupt signal (SIGINT) for the ACC process can be used in an rlogin shell to end
ACC. The sc and si commands are invalid in the ACC conversation mode.
Command sc terminates the ACC conversation mode. Command si starts and
terminates the ACC batch input mode.
ACC supports up to three periods (.) in its conversation mode to refer to the
command name and two parameters of the previous command. If the last
command was cmd1 p1 p2, you can enter ..x2 to issue the command cmd1 p1 x2
or enter .x1 . to issue the command cmd1 x1 p2. Enter cmd2 . to issue the
command cmd2 p1 p2. The last command is repeated if you press the Enter key
without data.
Start EKAACC Batch Input Mode (si)

The USS command ekaacc si starts an ekaacc process in ACC batch input mode. In
batch input mode, the ACC commands are read from stdin without prompting.
EOF on stdin and the ACC commands x and end end the ACC batch input mode.
The sc and si commands are invalid in ACC batch input mode. Help information
for the set commands is displayed as response to these commands if they were
entered in batch input mode.
190
Operations Guide
Set Commands
Set Resource Characteristics

The set commands provide a means to set information in the ACT. A subset of
these commands has the opposite effect as the corresponding reset commands.
Set EKAACD Retry Time Interval (srt)

The ACC command srt time_iv sets the retry time interval of the MERVA Link
daemon to the value specified in the command parameter time_iv. Retry time
interval values of one second to 3600 seconds (one hour) are accepted. A zero retry
time interval means that the ACD must not kick off inoperable sending ASPs
automatically.
Set EKAACD Sleep Time Interval (sst)

The ACC command sst time_iv sets the sleep time interval of the MERVA Link
daemon to the value specified in the command parameter time_iv, and sends an
alarm to the MERVA Link daemon. Sleep time interval values of one second to
3600 seconds (one hour) are accepted.
Set Sending ASP Trace Level (sta)

The ACC commands sta asp_name, sta1 asp_name, sta2 asp_name, sta3
asp_name, and sta9 asp_name request that a processing trace is written by the
sending MERVA Link processes that are associated with the specified ASP. The ASP
name can be entered in lowercase characters.
The trace level that can be specified as the fourth character of the command name
can be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 9. The default trace level is 1. With trace level 3, all information
that can be written to a trace file is actually included in the trace file (general
control information, message envelopes, message headings, status reports, and
message text). With trace level 2, all level-3 information except the message text is
included in the trace file. With trace level 1, all level-2 information except the
message envelopes, message headings, and status reports is included in the trace
file.
Trace level 9 requests a trace for performance analysis. A level-9 trace contains the
initial and final process information that is also contained in a level-1 trace. The
process activity information consists only of service primitive and processing time
information at the P2 layer.
The ACC command sta0 asp_name requests that no processing trace is written by
the specified sending ASP.
Set Receiving TCP/IP Process Trace Level (stc)

The ACC command stc requests that a processing trace is written by the receiving
MERVA Link processes that are associated with an inbound TCP/IP conversation.
This command has no command parameter.
can be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 9. The default trace level is 1. For more information about the
trace level refer to the description of the ACC command sta asp_name.
The ACC command stc0 requests that no processing trace is written by a receiving
TCP/IP process.
Set Trace Directory Path Name (std)

The ACC command std dir_path_name specifies the trace directory path name that
is stored in the ACT header. The trace directory path name must start and end
with a forward slash (/), and must not exceed 20 characters.
191
Set Commands
Trace files generated by MERVA Link programs are filed in the USS directory that
is named in the ACT header. No trace files are generated if this directory path
name is empty.
Set Receiving SNA APPC Process Trace Level (stp)

The ACC command stp requests that a processing trace is written by the receiving
MERVA Link processes that are associated with an inbound SNA APPC
conversation. This command has no command parameter.
can be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 9. The default trace level is 1. For more information about the
trace level refer to the description of the ACC command sta asp_name.
The ACC command stp0 requests that no processing trace is written by a receiving
SNA APPC process.
Set External EKAACD Trace Level (stx)

The ACC command stx controls the external trace written by the MERVA Link
daemon EKAACD. It has no effect if the MERVA Link daemon is started without
the external trace option.
The ACC command stx0 requests that the external ACD trace is temporarily
disabled. The ACC command stx with a fourth character different from 0 requests
that the external ACD trace is reactivated.
The ACC command stx has no effect on the internal trace written by the MERVA
Link daemon EKAACD. A trace level switch is, however, recorded in the internal
ACD trace.
Set Trace File Wrap Limit (swa swc swp)

The ACC commands swa, swc, and swp set the processing trace-file wrap limit for
an ASP, for inbound TCP/IP processes, and for inbound SNA APPC processes. The
value of the wrap limit is specified like the trace level in the stx commands. It can
be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 9.
The trace file names contain date and time information if the wrap limit is zero.
Trace files written by MERVA Link processes are saved without limits in MERVA
Link in this case.
If the wrap limit is 1 or greater than 1, trace file names are generated in
wrap-around mode. Trace file names contain a wrap index rather than date and
time information. The maximum number of trace files for a trace class (a, c, p)
matches the trace file wrap limit. Trace files written by MERVA Link processes are
overwritten when the trace file wrap index exceeds the specified limit.
Terminate the MERVA Link USS Daemon

The ACC commands trm EKAACD and trm daemon request the termination of
the MERVA Link USS Daemon. Only the owner of the ACT, the ACD process
owner, or a root user can issue these commands and terminate the ACD.
192
Operations Guide
Chapter 9. Operating Financial Message Transfer/ESA

(FMT/ESA)
MERVA-to-MERVA Financial Message Transfer/ESA (FMT/ESA) uses the
capabilities of MERVA Link or MERVA-MQI Attachment to transfer SWIFT
messages between two MERVA ESA systems in a way similar to the way MERVA
ESA transfers messages via the SWIFT network.
According to the SWIFT message protocol, sent messages contain an input
sequence number (ISN), and received messages contain an output sequence
number (OSN). The FMT/ESA automatically assigns an ISN or an OSN to a
message.
ISNs and OSNs for the FMT/ESA function are maintained by means of two
dedicated queues:
ISN control queue
This queue has the name EKAISNCQ (for MERVA Link) or DSLISNCQ (for
MERVA-MQI Attachment), and contains one or more ISNs. A separate ISN
is counted for each:
v MERVA Link ASP in which FMT/ESA processes SWIFT input messages
(when using FMT/ESA with MERVA Link)
v MERVA-MQI Attachment send process in which FMT/ESA processes
SWIFT input messages (when using FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI
Attachment)
OSN control queue
This queue has the name EKAOSNCQ (for MERVA Link) or DSLOSNCQ
(for MERVA-MQI Attachment), and contains one OSN. The OSN is counted
globally across all:
v MERVA Link ASPs in which the FMT/ESA generates SWIFT output
messages (when using FMT/ESA with MERVA Link)
v MERVA-MQI Attachment receive processes in which the FMT/ESA
generates SWIFT output messages (when using FMT/ESA with
MERVA-MQI Attachment)
FMT/ESA handles both ISNs and OSNs:
v If a sequence number does not yet exist, it initializes it with '000001'.
v It increments a sequence number up to '999999'.
v When an overflow occurs, it continues counting with '000001'.
You can do the following things with or to the sequence numbers used:
v You can initialize each ISN.
v For existing ISNs and the OSN, you can perform the following actions:
Display the sequence number
Modify the sequence number
Print the sequence number
Delete the sequence number
193
Note: Do not modify or delete a sequence number while FMT/ESA is running, as

this can cause unpredictable results.
The following examples show the panels you use when operating FMT/ESA with
MERVA Link. The panels used when operating FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI
Attachment are not shown, but they are similar.
Initializing an Input Sequence Number

To initialize an ISN:
1. Assign the ISN Control Message function EKAISNCQ (for FMT/ESA with
MERVA Link) or DSLISNCQ (for FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment) to
a MERVA ESA user using the MERVA ESA user file maintenance. Sign on to
MERVA ESA with this user identification.
2. From the MERVA ESA Function Selection menu, select the ISN Control
Message function EKAISNCQ (for FMT/ESA with MERVA Link) or DSLISNCQ
(for FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment). The Message Selection panel is
displayed.
3. Enter the message type of the ISN control message:
v For FMT/ESA with MERVA Link: mt isnsim
v For FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment: mt kisn
Figure 59 shows how the message type is entered on the Message Selection
panel for FMT/ESA with MERVA Link.
Message Selection
Func EKAISNCQ
Message Selection Commands

Create
Select
Select
Select
Select
New Message (Message Type)

Next Message
First Message
Message by Key 1 EKAASP
Message by Key 2 EKAAMSID
MT nxxxxxxx
GET NEXT or GET N
GET FIRST or GET F
GET <K1> x...x
GET K2 x...x
Message Processing Commands (for use on message panels)

Escape From Current Message
Requeue Current Message
Complete and Store Message
Delete Current Message
Command =====> mt isnsim

PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve 3=Return
PF 7=
8=
9=Hardcopy
ESCAPE
REQUEUE
EOM
DELETE
4=
10=
5=Get Next 6=Get First

11=List
12=
Figure 59. Entering Message Type for ISN Control Message
4. Press the ENTER key. Figure 60 on page 195 shows the ISN Control Message
panel that is displayed for FMT/ESA with MERVA Link.
194
Operations Guide
MT ISNSIM
ISN Control Message for Financial Message Transfer
Page 00001
Func EKAISNCQ
ASP Name: ________
MERVA Link Application Support Process
ISN . . : ______
Input Sequence Number
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve
PF 7=Page -1
8=Page +1
3=EOM
9=Hardcopy
4=Repeat
10=Pro Line
5=Get Next 6=Requeue

11=Prompt
12=Escape
Figure 60. Input Sequence Number Data Entry Panel
5. For FMT/ESA with MERVA Link, enter in the ASP Name field the name of the
ASP. The name of the ASP must be the same as the name specified for this ASP
in the MERVA Link partner table. In this example, the name of the ASP is asp1.
For FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment, enter the name of the send
process in the Process Name field. The name of the process must be the same
as the name specified in the send and receive process table.
6. Enter a value that is one less than the ISN you want to use. In this example,
you want the initial ISN to be 1000, so enter 999 in the ISN field (you do not
need to enter leading zeros).
7. Press the ENTER key. Figure 61 shows the ISN Control Message panel that is
redisplayed for FMT/ESA with MERVA Link.
MT ISNSIM
ISN Control Message for Financial Message Transfer
Page 00001
Func EKAISNCQ
ASP Name: ASP1____
MERVA Link Application Support Process
ISN . . : 000999
Input Sequence Number
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve
PF 7=Page -1
8=Page +1
3=EOM
9=Hardcopy
4=Repeat
10=Pro Line

11=Prompt
12=Escape
Figure 61. Display of Input Sequence Number after Data Entry
Chapter 9. Operating Financial Message Transfer/ESA (FMT/ESA)
195
You initialized the ISN to a value of '000999'. For the next SWIFT input message
that is transmitted on the ASP named 'ASP1', the FMT/ESA increments the ISN
and inserts '001000' into the message.
Displaying and Modifying a Sequence Number

You can display and modify the OSN after it is created by FMT/ESA. To do this:
1. Assign the OSN Control Message function EKAOSNCQ (for FMT/ESA with
MERVA Link) or DSLOSNCQ (for FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment) to
a MERVA ESA user using the MERVA ESA user file maintenance. Sign on to
MERVA ESA with this user identification.
2. From the MERVA ESA Function Selection menu, select the OSN Control
Message function EKAOSNCQ (for FMT/ESA with MERVA Link) or
DSLOSNCQ (for FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment). The Message
Selection panel is displayed.
3. Press the PF key defined for the get first command (PF6).
Figure 62 shows how the OSN is displayed. The last used OSN is shown and
can be modified.
MT OSNSIM
OSN Control Message for Financial Message Transfer
OSN: 000128
Page 00001
Func EKAOSNCQ
Output Sequence Number
Command =====>
PF 1=Help
2=Retrieve
PF 7=Page -1
8=Page +1
3=EOM
9=Hardcopy
4=Repeat
10=Pro Line

11=Prompt
12=Escape
Figure 62. Display of Output Sequence Number
Deleting a Sequence Number

To delete a specific ISN or the OSN:
1. Display the ISN (as shown in Figure 61 on page 195) or OSN (as shown in
Figure 62) to be deleted.
2. Enter:
del
3. Press the ENTER key.

The message is deleted from its control queue.
196
Operations Guide
Setting the Output Sequence Number

The OSN is intended to be initialized by the FMT/ESA only. However, you can set
the OSN to an initial value.
As preparation, you must customize definitions made for the FMT/ESA in two
MERVA ESA tables:
1. Change the parameter MTGEN in the message type table entry by specifying
one of the following:
v For FMT/ESA with MERVA Link:
DSLMTT MTYPE=OSNSIM,MTGEN=YES,...
v For FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment:
DSLMTT MTYPE=KOSN,MTGEN=YES,...
2. Assemble and link-edit table DSLMTTT.
3. Change the parameter DE in the function table entry by specifying one of the
following:
DSLFNT NAME=EKAOSNCQ,DE=YES,...
DSLFNT NAME=DSLOSNCQ,DE=YES,...
4. Assemble and link-edit table DSLFNTT.
5. Restart MERVA ESA to activate the modified tables.
To initialize the OSN:
1. From the MERVA ESA Function Selection menu, select the OSN Control
Message function EKAOSNCQ (for FMT/ESA with MERVA Link) or
DSLOSNCQ (for FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment). The Message
Selection panel is displayed.
2. Enter the message type of the OSN control message by specifying one of the
following:
mt osnsim
mt kosn
The OSN Control Message panel is displayed (see Figure 62 on page 196).
3. Enter the initial value for the OSN.
Note: After changing in the Message Type Table and Function Table, it is your
responsibility to ensure that you do not create a second control message in
queue EKAOSNCQ (for FMT/ESA with MERVA Link) or DSLOSNCQ (for
FMT/ESA with MERVA-MQI Attachment). The FMT/ESA always processes
the first message in the queue.
Chapter 9. Operating Financial Message Transfer/ESA (FMT/ESA)
197
198
Operations Guide
Part 2. Running Batch Programs

This part describes the batch programs provided to allow the transfer of data
between MERVA ESA queues and sequential data sets.
199
200
Operations Guide
Chapter 10. Running the MERVA Message Processing

Client/Server
MERVA ESA supports MERVA Message Processing Client workstations using either
APPC or TCP/IP. The MERVA Message Processing Client/Server programs are
implemented as batch programs, except when using APPC under CICS, in which
case the CICS APPC server is implemented as a CICS transaction. This section
describes the JCL required to run the batch servers.
The JCL must include the MERVA ESA base load module library and the data sets
defined in the MERVA ESA File Table. These are standardly the SWIFT and Telex
correspondents files, the nickname file, and the currency file. In the figures, the
lowercase parameters have the following meaning:
loadlib
The library containing the MERVA ESA base load modules
nickname
Your data set of correspondents nicknames
swift-corr
Your data set of SWIFT correspondents
telex-corr
Your data set of Telex correspondents
currency
Your data set of currency codes.
Figure 63 shows the JCL required to run the APPC/MVS workstation server.
//.......
//RUN
//STEPLIB
//DSLCORN
//DWSCOR
//ENLCOR
//DWSCUR
//SYSPRINT
//DSLSNAP
//SYSUDUMP
JOB .........
EXEC PGM=DSLAFA01,REGION=2M
DD DSN=loadlib,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=nickname,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=swift-corr,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=telex-corr,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=currency,DISP=SHR
DD SYSOUT=*
DD SYSOUT=*
DD SYSOUT=*
Figure 63. Running the MERVA ESA APPC/z/OS Workstation Server
Figure 64 on page 202 shows the JCL required to run the TCP/IP workstation
server under z/OS.
201
//.......
//RUN
//STEPLIB
//PROFILE
//DSLCORN
//DWSCOR
//ENLCOR
//DWSCUR
//SYSPRINT
//DSLSNAP
//SYSUDUMP
JOB .........
EXEC PGM=DSLAFATM,REGION=2M
DD DSN=SYS1.TCPPARMS(PROFILE),DISP=SHR
DD DSN=nickname,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=swift-corr,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=telex-corr,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=currency,DISP=SHR
DD SYSOUT=*
DD SYSOUT=*
DD SYSOUT=*
TCP/IP
Figure 64. Running the TCP/IP MERVA Message Processing Client/Server under z/OS
Figure 65 shows an example of JCL to run the TCP/IP workstation server under
VSE.
// JOB .........
// DLBL PRODL,MERVA410.PRODLIB.BASE,99/365,SD
// EXTENT ,DOSRES
LIBDEF *,SEARCH=(PRODL.MCUST,PRODL.MBASE)
// DLBL IJSYSUC,VSESP.USER.CATALOG,,VSAM
// DLBL DSLCORN,MERVA410.NAMES,,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC
// DLBL DWSAUTD,MERVA410.AUTHKF,,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC
// DLBL DWSCOR,MERVA410.SCOR,,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC
// DLBL DWSCUR,MERVA410.SCUR,,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC
// DLBL ENLCOR,MERVA410.TCOR,,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC DSLAFA04,SIZE=600K
// EXEC LISTLOG
/&
Figure 65. Running the TCP/IP MERVA Message Processing Client/Server under VSE
202
Operations Guide
Chapter 11. Sequential Data Set Input (DSLSDI)

DSLSDI reads a batch of messages from a sequential data set and writes them to
MERVA ESA queues. In one run of DSLSDI, you can process only one sequential
data set containing messages of the same format. These formats can be:
v SWIFT messages, either in S.W.I.F.T. I or in S.W.I.F.T. II format
v
v
v
v
v
Free-format telex messages

SWIFT messages prepared for telex transmission
Messages in MERVA ESA queue format including all internal fields
EDIFACT messages to be converted to SWIFT message types 105 and 106
User-defined messages.
The record format must be VB (blocked variable-length) or VBS (spanned blocked

variable-length). When VBS is used a logical record can be larger than 32KB.
Usually, one logical record of the MERVA ESA sequential data set contains one
message. In addition to this standard format, MERVA ESA supports a segmentation
scheme for messages. One message may span more than one logical record of the
sequential data set. The first byte of each record is a segment indicator showing
which logical records belong together. This byte may contain one of the following
four values:
0 (X'F0')
Only segment of a message
1 (X'F1')
First segment of a message
2 (X'F2')
Last segment of a message
3 (X'F3')
Middle segment of a message.
DSLSDI assembles the logical records belonging to one message internally and
stores the complete message in MERVA ESA queues. This technique allows
messages larger than 32KB to be processed, using record format VB.
For MERVA ESA messages up to 2MB are supported.
VBS record format and the MERVA ESA segmentation scheme are mutually
exclusive. If both are specified, MERVA ESA segmentation is assumed.
When the segmentation scheme is used it applies to all records in a sequential data
set.
DSLSDI requires at least 2048KB of virtual storage for execution. When a batch of
messages contains one or more messages larger than 32KB, the region size must be
increased by at least twice the size of the largest message in the batch of messages.
When the parameter SDDB2 is set to YES in your MERVA ESA
customization-parameter module DSLPRM, DSLSDI runs with direct queue
management (DB2 z/OS only).
203
DSLSDI - Input Program under z/OS

MERVA ESA operates in one region; DSLSDI is executed in another region. The
input data set DSLSDSI is assigned to the region where DSLSDI is executed.
Figure 66 shows the JCL to run the batch program DSLSDI under z/OS.
//.......
//RUN
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DSLSNAP
//DSLSDSI
JOB .........
EXEC PGM=DSLSDI,PARM=parm1,parm2,parm3,parm4,parm5
DD SYSOUT=L
DD SYSOUT=L
DD DISP=OLD,DSN=dsname
Figure 66. Writing Messages from a Data Set to MERVA ESA Queues in z/OS
In the JCL, the lowercase parameters have the following meanings:

loadlib
The library containing the MERVA ESA load modules
dsname
The name of the cataloged data set containing the messages (input
data set).
DSLSDI - Input Program under VSE

MERVA ESA operates in one partition; DSLSDI is executed in another partition.
The sequential file DSLxxxx (residing on disk or tape) must be assigned to SYS025
in the partition where DSLSDI is executed. The values xxxx in the file name must
have the same value as parm0.
Figure 67 shows the JCL to run the batch input program DSLSDI under VSE.
// JOB .........
// ASSGN SYS025,DISK,VOL=volid,SHR
// DLBL DSLxxxx,infile,0,SD,BLKSIZE=blksize
// EXTENT SYS025
// DLBL library,program library,99/365,SD
// EXTENT ,volid
LIBDEF *,SEARCH=(library.sublib, ....)
// OPTION PARTDUMP
// EXEC DSLSDI,SIZE=300K,PARM=parm0,parm1,parm2,parm3,parm4,parm5
/*
/&
Figure 67. Writing Messages from a Data Set to MERVA ESA Queues in VSE

volid
The volume identification of the volume containing the input file

or the program library.
infile
The data set name of the input file.
blksize
The block size of the input file. It must be at least the length of the
longest logical record in the input file plus 8.
program library
The name of the library containing the MERVA ESA programs.
library.sublib The names of the program libraries containing the MERVA ESA
programs and JCL procedures. You can code a list of sublibraries.
204
Operations Guide
DSLSDI - Parameters
The following parameters can be specified in the PARM field of the EXEC
statement:
parm0 For VSE only, the parameter is the input device, which is:
DISK For a DASD as input device, using record format VB
TAPN For input from an unlabeled tape, using record format VB
TAPL
For input from a labeled tape, using record format VB
SPDI
For a DASD as input device, using record format VBS
SPTN For input from an unlabeled tape, using record format VBS
SPTL
For input from a labeled tape, using record format VBS.
parm1 If only 1 character is specified, it represents the format of the message.

These formats can be:
W
For S.W.I.F.T. II messages
For S.W.I.F.T. I messages
For free-format telex messages
For EDIFACT messages
For messages in MERVA ESA queue format
User-defined format; it is required that for the specified character

there is a DSLLDEV TYPE=NET section in all MCBs used for
mapping the messages.
The message type is determined by a message type determination exit

individually for each message in the sequential data set.
If 2 to 8 characters are specified, the name represents a message
identification. If a message identification is specified representing an MCB,
all messages are processed with this MCB. For example, telex messages can
be processed with the message identification TCOV.
The parameter can also be coded as follows:
(parm11,parm12)
parm11
Specifies the message identification
parm12
Specifies the line-format identification.
If the message identification is omitted, the default value S applies, and the
message type is determined automatically.
If the line-format identification is omitted, the network identification (the
first character of parm11) is used as the default.
Note: In one batch run, DSLSDI can process only messages for the same
value of parm1 or parm11/parm12.
parm2 Specifies what happens when an incorrect message is encountered:
ACCEPT
The incorrect message is queued if possible. When a

routing table is used for the SDI function, incorrect
Chapter 11. Sequential Data Set Input (DSLSDI)
205
messages can be routed to different function queues from

those used for correct messages. Processing is continued
with the next message.
DROP
The incorrect message is dropped. Processing is continued

with the next message.
CANCEL
The job is terminated.
Messages in the queue format are not checked for correctness. In this case,
parm2 is ignored.
parm3 The name (up to 8 characters) of the intermediate queue that holds the
messages before they are routed to the target queues. This queue must
never be the target of a routing operation, and must be reserved for
exclusive use by one DSLSDI job.
parm4 Reserved. Do not specify this parameter.
parm5 When specified the value must be SEGMENT or SEG. This parameter
indicates that the input data set contains logical records which represent
segmented messages. You can generate a data set with this format by using
the DSLSDO program and specifying SEGMENT as an EXEC PARM
parameter.
When the parameter is not specified no segmentation is done; each logical
record of the input file represents one message.
206
Operations Guide
Chapter 12. Sequential Data Set Output (DSLSDO)

DSLSDO reads a batch of messages from a MERVA ESA queue and writes them to
a sequential data set.
In one run of DSLSDO, the input queue must contain only messages that can be
formatted to the same line format. You can create an output data set containing:
v SWIFT messages, either in S.W.I.F.T. I or in S.W.I.F.T. II format.
v Free-format telex messages. You can process a mixture of SWIFT messages and
free-format telex messages, provided that you have defined a common line
format for both types of message. If you have not defined a common line
format, the result in the sequential data set is unpredictable. This is also true if
you use this data set as input for DSLSDI.
v SWIFT messages prepared for telex transmission.
v Messages in MERVA ESA queue format including all internal fields.
v EDIFACT messages converted from SWIFT message types 105 and 106.
v User-defined messages.
The record format must be VB (blocked variable-length) or VBS (spanned blocked
variable-length). When VBS is used a logical record can be larger than 32KB.
Usually, one logical record of the MERVA ESA sequential data set contains one
message. In addition to this standard format MERVA ESA supports a segmentation
scheme for messages. One message may span more than one logical record of the
sequential data set. The first byte of each record is a segment indicator showing
which logical records belong together. This byte may contain one of the following
four values:
0 (X'F0')
Only segment of a message
1 (X'F1')
First segment of a message
2 (X'F2')
Last segment of a message
3 (X'F3')
Middle segment of a message.
DSLSDO disassembles each message into one or more logical records and stores
the records together with the segment indicator prefix in the output data set. This
technique allows messages larger than 32KB to be processed, using record format
VB.
For MERVA ESA messages up to 2MB are supported.
VBS record format and the MERVA ESA segmentation scheme are mutually
exclusive. If both are specified, MERVA ESA segmentation is assumed.
When the segmentation scheme is used it applies to all records in a sequential data
set.
DSLSDO requires at least 2048KB of virtual storage for execution. When a batch of
messages contains one or more messages larger than 32KB, the region size must be
increased by at least twice the size of the largest message in the batch of messages.
207

customization-parameter module DSLPRM, DSLSDO runs with direct queue
If you are unloading messages from a queue for which message checking has been
specified (DSLFNT macro CHECK=YES parameter) and you have specified use of
a currency file (DSLPARM macro CURCODE=(FILE,...) parameter) you must
provide a DD-statement for your currency file using DD-name DWSCUR.
DSLSDO - Output Program under z/OS

MERVA ESA operates in one region; DSLSDO is executed in another region. The
output data set DSLSDSO is assigned to the region where DSLSDO is executed.
When neither segmentation nor VBS is used, the record length must be defined so
that the largest message (including a 4-byte prefix) fits in the record. Usually,
LRECL=11000 is enough for SWIFT messages.
Figure 68 shows the JCL to run the batch output program DSLSDO under z/OS.
//.......
//RUN
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DSLSNAP
//DSLSDSO
JOB ...........
EXEC PGM=DSLSDO,PARM=parm1,parm2,parm3,parm4,parm5,parm6
DD SYSOUT=L
DD SYSOUT=L
DD DISP=OLD,DSN=dsname
Figure 68. Writing Messages from a MERVA ESA Queue to a Data Set in z/OS

loadlib
The library containing the MERVA ESA load modules.
dsname
The name of the data set to which the messages are written
(output data set). If you create a new data set or if you use a tape,
then you must complete the JCL parameters as required.
DSLSDO - Output Program under VSE

MERVA ESA operates in one partition; DSLSDO is executed in another partition.
The sequential file DSLxxxx (residing on disk or tape) must be assigned to SYS025
in the partition where DSLSDO is executed. The values xxxx in the file name must
have the same value as parm0.
Figure 69 shows the JCL to run the batch output program DSLSDO under VSE.
// JOB ............
// DLBL DSLxxxx,outfile,0,SD,BLKSIZE=blksize
// EXTENT SYS025,volid,extent information
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION PARTDUMP
// EXEC DSLSDO,SIZE=300K,PARM=parm0,parm1,parm2,parm3,parm4,parm5,parm6
/*
/&
Figure 69. Writing Messages from a MERVA ESA Queue to a Data Set in VSE
208
Operations Guide
volid
The volume identification of the volume containing the output file

outfile
The data set name of the output file.
blksize
The block size of the output file. When neither segmentation nor
VBS is used, the block size must be at least the length of the
longest message in the output file plus 8. For SWIFT messages, a
block size of 11000 is usually enough.
extent information
The extent information of the output file, when it is created with
this job and is a disk file.
program library
The name of the library containing the MERVA ESA product.
library names The names of the program libraries containing the MERVA ESA
DSLSDO - Parameters
The following parameters can be specified in the PARM field of the EXEC
statement:
parm0 For VSE only, this parameter is the output device, which is:
DISK For a DASD as output device, using record format VB
TAPN For output to an unlabeled tape, using record format VB
TAPL
For output to a labeled tape, using record format VB
SPDI
For a DASD as output device, using record format VBS
SPTN For output to an unlabeled tape, using record format VBS

SPTL
For output to a labeled tape, using record format VBS.
parm1 Specifies a 1-character line-format identification. These formats can be:

W
For SWIFT messages in S.W.I.F.T. II format.
For SWIFT messages in S.W.I.F.T. I format.
For free-format telex messages.
For EDIFACT messages.
For messages in MERVA ESA queue format.
MERVA ESA base format, for example, to be used for the external
line format (ELF).
User-defined format; it is required that for the specified character

there is a DSLLDEV TYPE=NET section in all MCBs used for
mapping the messages.
If the line-format identification is omitted, the default value of S is used.

Note: During the DSLSDO processing, the actual message identification of
each message is used by MERVA ESA to format the message.
Therefore, the message identifications can be different in the input
queue for DSLSDO. However, the line format identification, which is
used for the formatting for the sequential output file, is the same for
all messages in one run of DSLSDO.
Chapter 12. Sequential Data Set Output (DSLSDO)
209
parm2 Specifies what happens when an incorrect message is encountered:

ACCEPT
The incorrect message is written to the sequential data set

if, despite the error, formatting was possible. If the
formatting for the sequential data set is not possible, the
message is routed (see ROUTE parameter). Processing is
continued with the next message.
ROUTE
The incorrect message is routed to the designated error

queue, and processing is continued with the next message.
CANCEL
A dump of the message is taken and the job is terminated.
Messages in the queue format are not checked for correctness. In this case,
ROUTE is not applicable.
parm3 The name (up to 8 characters) of the queue from which messages are to be
retrieved. This queue must not be used by another program. In particular,
a hardcopy queue must not be specified here.
parm4 The msgid (up to 8 characters), which defines the formatting of the
messages. If this parameter is used, all messages of the queue are
formatted according to the same msgid. If this parameter is omitted, the
messages are formatted according to the msgid stored in the DSLEXIT field
in the TOF. For SWIFT messages prepared for telex transmission and for
free-format telex messages, the msgid parameter TCOV is mandatory.
parm5 Reserved. Do not specify this parameter.
parm6 When specified the value must be SEGMENT or SEG. This parameter
indicates that the output data set should contain logical records which
represent segmented messages. Each of these logical records start with a
one-byte segment indicator prefix. You can process a data set created in
this format by using the DSLSDI program and specifying SEGMENT as an
EXEC PARM parameter. When the parameter is not specified no
segmentation is done; each logical record of the output file represents one
message.
210
Operations Guide
Chapter 13. System Printer Output (DSLSDY)

DSLSDY reads a batch of messages from a MERVA ESA queue and prints them on
a line (SYSOUT) printer. In one run of DSLSDY, the input queue can contain any
mixture of messages. The messages are printed according to the msgid definition of
the function-table entry for the input queue. For example, the msgid defined for the
function can cover only the telex part of a message, or only the SWIFT part, or
both.
DSLSDY requires at least 2048KB of virtual storage for execution.
customization-parameter module DSLPRM, DSLSDY runs with direct queue
DSLSDY - Print Program under z/OS

MERVA ESA operates in one region; DSLSDY is executed in another region. The
print data set DSLSDSY is assigned to a user-defined SYSOUT class.
Figure 70 shows the JCL to run the batch print program DSLSDY under z/OS.
//.......
//RUN
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DSLSNAP
//DSLSDSY
JOB ............
EXEC PGM=DSLSDY,PARM=parm1,parm2,parm3,parm4,parm5
DD SYSOUT=L
DD SYSOUT=L
DD SYSOUT=L,DCB=(LRECL=125,BLKSIZE=1254)
LINE PRINTER
Figure 70. Printing Messages on a Line Printer in z/OS
In the JCL, the lowercase parameter has the following meaning:

loadlib
The library containing the MERVA ESA load modules.
DSLSDY - Print Program under VSE

MERVA ESA operates in one partition; DSLSDY is executed in another partition.
The print file DSLSDSY is assigned to SYSLST.
Figure 71 shows the JCL to run the batch print program DSLSDY under VSE.
// JOB .........
// ASSGN SYSLST,00E
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION PARTDUMP
// EXEC DSLSDY,SIZE=300K,PARM=parm1,parm2,parm3,parm4,parm5
/*
/&
Figure 71. Printing Messages on a Line Printer in VSE
211
The volume identification of the volume containing the program

library.
volid
program library
DSLSDY - Parameters
Five parameters must be specified in the PARM field of the EXEC statement:
parm1 The name (up to 8 characters long) of the queue from which the messages
are to be printed.
parm2 If parm3 is 0 to 3, this parameter is used as a 1-character language
identification for the printer MCB. If parm3 is 4, this parameter is used as a
1-character line-format identifier for the printer MCB.
This parameter can also be coded as xU, where x specifies the language or
line format, and U specifies that lowercase characters in the printout are
converted to uppercase characters.
Note: If this parameter is omitted, the value specified in the function-table
entry for the specified input queue is taken.
parm3 The 1-character compression format. It must be a value from 0 to 4. See the
PRFORM parameter of the DSLFNT macro described in MERVA for ESA
Macro Reference.
Messages in external line format should be printed with compression
format 4.
Note: If this parameter is omitted, the value specified in the function-table
entry for the specified input queue is taken.
parm4 Specifies whether the messages in the input queue are to be deleted or
kept after printing. The permitted values are:
KEEP
Keeps the message
DELETE
Deletes the message.
If this parameter is not specified, the value of the KEEPMSG parameter of

the DSLFNT macro is taken. See MERVA for ESA Macro Reference.
parm5 The name (up to 8 characters long) of a message identification or a
Message Control Block (MCB) name to be printed off-line. The message
identification must be contained in the MERVA ESA Message Type table.
This facility can be used to print MCBs without data, for example, for
testing purposes. Only one message identification or MCB can be printed
in one invocation of DSLSDY. MERVA ESA need not be active at that time,
and the queue name in parm1 is ignored.
212
Operations Guide
Chapter 14. Sequential Data Set Input (DSLSDIR)

DSLSDIR reads as DSLSDI a batch of messages from a sequential data set and
writes them to MERVA ESA queues. For restart and recovery reasons the messages
are first written to an intermediate queue, before they are put or routed to the
target queue(s).
You can invoke DSLSDIR either by:
v The front-end exec DSLSDIRF, which displays an ISPF panel where you can
enter the runtime parameters and data set names (z/OS only)
v Creating and submitting a batch job yourself.
Invoke DSLSDIR via ISPF Panel (z/OS only)

Menu
To invoke DSLSDIR via an ISPF panel, enter on an ISPF command line TSO
%DSLSDIRF, or on ISPF option 6 %DSLSDIRF. You will see the following panel.
---------------------------- MERVA ESA V4.1 DSLSDIR --------------------------COMMAND
===>
Action
===> _
Function
Msg Form
Queue 1
Queue 2
Fld Name
Fld Value
Inco. Msg
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
Log Level ===>

Perf Info ===>
Segmented ===>
( C = create JCL, D = DD statements, H = print Help )

( J = Jobcard, L = edit List, S = create and Submit )
_
( B = ROUTB, C = CHECK, D = ROUTD, P = PUT )
_
( Q = MERVA queue format, S = SWIFT I, W = SWIFT II )
________ ( Intermediate queue name, may be blank with CHECK )
________ ( Target queue name for PUT )
_
( 0 = none, 1 = MSGDST, 2 = MSGNET, 3 = SWBHLT )
____________ ( Field value that must be matched for Fld Name )
___
( ACC = accept incorrect msgs, CAN = cancel DSLSDIR )
( DRO = drop incorr. msgs, INC = incorr. msgs only )
_
( Log level 1 .. 4 , use 4 only in case of problems )
_
( N = do not measure performance, Y = do measure )
_
( A = auto, N = input not segmented, Y = segmented )
Input DS
List DS
===> ____________________________________________ ( Input data set )

===> ____________________________________________ ( Listing data set)
JCL DS
===> ____________________________________________ ( JCL data set )
PF1 = HELP
(C) IBM Corp. 1999
Figure 72. DSLSDIR (Sequential Data Set Input) Menu
To exit press PF3.

Note: The installation of the ISPF panel is described in the MERVA for ESA
Installation Guide.
213
Runtime Parameters
The following parameters can be specified:
No.
1
Field
Action
Description
C
Create JCL in data set JCL DS, member DSLSDIR
Open pop-up window to enter DD statements
Print help information to data set List DS
Open pop-up window to enter JCL cards
Edit listing data set List DS
Create JCL in data set JCL DS, member DSLSDIR, and

submit it.
This parameter is required.

2
Function
Route the messages in the input data set Input DS via the
routing (table) of the queue Queue 1. The used API function
is ROUB - route with back reference.
Check the messages in the input data set Input DS.
Route the messages in the input data set Input DS via the
routing (table) of the queue Queue 1. The used API function
is ROUN - route directly. ROUN is faster than ROUB. It
requires MERVA ESA V4 (or higher).
Put the messages in the input data set Input DS to the queue
Queue 2.

3
Msg Form
Message format:
Q
MERVA ESA queue format
S
SWIFT I
W
SWIFT II.
Queue 1
Name of the intermediate queue.

This parameter is required with Function PUT, ROUTB, and ROUTD.
It is ignored with Function CHECK.
Queue 2
Name of the target queue.

This parameter is required with Function PUT. It is ignored with
Function CHECK, ROUTB, and ROUTD.
Fld Name
The identifier for a MERVA field:

0
All messages should be processed
Only messages with the SWIFT master destination

(MSGDST) specified in Fld Value will be processed
Only messages with the message type (MSGNET) specified

in Fld Value will be processed
Only messages with the SWIFT basic header logical terminal

address (SWBHLT) specified in Fld Value will be processed.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is 0.
214
Operations Guide
No.
7
Field
Description
Fld Value
Value that must be matched for the field specified in Fld Name:
v If Fld Name is 1, an up to 9 character SWIFT master destination, for
example, VNDEBET2A.
v If Fld Name is 2, an up to 8 character MERVA message type. Should
start with the letter S, for example, S100.
v If Fld Name is 3, an up to 12 character S.W.I.F.T. basic header logical
terminal address, for example, VNDEBET2AXXX.
The wildcard * can be specified as last (or only) character.
This parameter is required when Fld Name is 1, 2, or 3.
Inco. Msg
Specifies what happens when an incorrect message is encountered:

ACC
Incorrect messages are accepted
CAN
DSLSDIR is terminated
DRO
Incorrect messages are dropped
INC
Only incorrect messages are processed, the correct messages

are dropped.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is ACC.

9
Log Level
Only overview data is shown in the listing
Detailed data for each message is shown
Checking errors are more detailed. Fields SW20 (TRN) and

SW108 (Msg. user ref.) are shown.
Should be used in case of problems only.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is 2.

10
Performance
Information
No MERVA ESA API performance information is gathered
The time spent in the MERVA ESA API functions GETU,

MSGP, PUT, PUTB, ROUB, and ROUN is gathered.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is N.

11
Segmented
Indicates whether the input data set Input DS contains segmented

messages:
A
DSLSDIR determines whether the input messages are

segmented or not segmented (auto)
The input messages are not segmented
The input messages are segmented.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is A.

12
Input DS
Input data set

This parameter is required with Action C and S.
13
List DS
Listing data set

This parameter is required with Action C, H, L, and S.
14
JCL DS
JCL data set. The created (and submitted) JCL is written as member
DSLSDIR to this data set.
This parameter is required with Action C, H, and S.
215
z/OS DD Statements
DSLSDIR requires the following DD statements to be defined:
STEPLIB
The load library containing the MERVA ESA programs
DWSCUR
The currency code file. DWSCUR is required only when you

specify runtime parameter Msg Form S or W and CURCODE=FILE
is specified in your DSLPRM.
SYSEXEC
The library containing the program DSLSDIR
DSLSDSI
The input data set
SYSTSPRT
The listing data set. Must be preallocated, record format VB, logical
record length 136 is recommended, or SYSOUT=*.
SYSTSIN
The specified DSLSDIR runtime parameters.
v Enter STEPLIB, DWSCUR, and SYSEXEC with Action D.
v DSLSDSI, the input data set, and SYSTSPRT, the listing data set, can be specified
on the panel.
v SYSTSIN, the DSLSDIR runtime parameters, is generated by DSLSDIRF.
First-Time Users
If you are a first-time user, you must allocate two data sets in TSO, provide with
Action D the required DD statements for DWSCUR, STEPLIB, and SYSEXEC, and
with Action J the required job statement information.
Allocate two data sets in TSO:
v The data set to which DSLSDIRF writes the generated JCL: Should be PO, FB80.
Name, for example, uid.MERVA.JCL
v The data set to which DSLSDIR writes the listing: Should be PS, VB136. Name,
for example, uid.MERVA.LIST or use SYSOUT=*.
Note: You can also use existing data sets.
The job statement information could look like this:
Edit Jobcards in the window below, PF3 to end

//HEGSDIR JOB (DE05020),S. HEGENAUER,MSGLEVEL=(1,1),MSGCLASS=X,
//
CLASS=A,NOTIFY=HEG,USER=HEG
//*
//*
Figure 73. DSLSDIR (Sequential Data Set Input) Job Statement Window
216
Operations Guide
The DD statements could look like this:
Edit DD statements in the window below, PF3 to end

//*
//*
.. MERVA ESA LOAD LIBRARY
//STEPLIB DD DSN=MERVA.SDSLLODB,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=MERVA.SDSLLODC,DISP=SHR
//*
//*
.. IF CURCODE=FILE SPECIFIED IN DSLPRM
//DWSCUR
DD DSN=MERVA.SCUR,DISP=SHR
//*
//*
.. ON THIS PDS: DSLSDIR
//SYSEXEC DD DSN=MERVA.SDSLSAM0,DISP=SHR
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Figure 74. DSLSDIR (Sequential Data Set Input) DD Statements Window
All entered values will be remembered in ISPF profile variables.
217
Invoke DSLSDIR via JCL

You can invoke DSLSDIR also via JCL. If you are running MERVA ESA under VSE
you have to do so.

The following figure shows the z/OS JCL to run DSLSDIR.
//....... JOB ............
//REXXB
EXEC PGM=DSLAREXX,REGION=0K,PARM=DSLSDIR
//*
//*
.. RUNTIME PARAMETERS
//SYSTSIN DD *
* Comments start with * and ;
* HELP
* -- Required parameters -FUNCTION = ccccc
; (Queue management) Function
MSGFORMAT = c
; Message format, Q, S, or W
QUEUE1
= cccccccc
; Intermediate queue name
QUEUE2
= cccccccc
; Target queue name for PUT
* -- Optional parameters -FLDNAME1 = cccccc
; MERVA field name
FLDVALUE1 = ccccccccc
; MERVA field value
INCORRECT = cccccccccc
; Incorrect message disposition
LOGLEVEL = n
; Log level 1 .. 4
PERFORM
= ccc
; Performance info, YES or No
SEGMENT
= cccc
; Are input messages segmented?
USERPARM = ccccccccc.. ; User specific parameter
/*
//*
//*
//STEPLIB DD DSN=loadlib,DISP=SHR
//*
//*
//DWSCUR
DD DSN=curds,DISP=SHR
//*
//*
.. INPUT DATASET
//DSLSDSI DD DSN=inputds,DISP=SHR
//*
//*
.. ON THIS PDS: DSLSDIR
//SYSEXEC DD DSN=samplib,DISP=SHR
//*
//*
.. LISTING DATASET
//SYSTSPRT DD DSN=listds,DISP=OLD
//
//
Figure 75. DSLSDIR (Sequential Data Set Input) Sample JCL (z/OS)
Data Set Names

In the JCL, the lowercase data set names have the following meanings:
218
Operations Guide
loadlib
The name of the load library containing the MERVA ESA

programs.
curds
The name of the currency code file. curds is required only when
you specify runtime parameter MSGFORMAT = S or W and
CURCODE=FILE is specified in your DSLPRM.
inputds
The name of the input data set.
samplib
The name of the library containing the program DSLSDIR.
listds
The name of the listing data set. Must be preallocated, record

format VB, logical record length 136 recommended.

The following figure shows the VSE JCL to run DSLSDIR.
// JOB DSLSDIR ...
// DLBL DSLSDSI,infile,0,SD
// EXTENT SYS025
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION NODUMP
// EXEC DSLAREXX,SIZE=300K,PARM=DSLSDIR
* HELP
* -- Required parameters -FUNCTION = ccccc
; Queue management function
MSGFORMAT = c
QUEUE1
= cccccccc
; Intermediate queue name
QUEUE2
= cccccccc
; Target queue name for PUT
* -- Optional parameters -FLDNAME1 = cccccc
; MERVA field name
FLDVALUE1 = ccccccccc
; MERVA field value
LOGLEVEL = n
; Log level 1 .. 4
PERFORM
= ccc
SEGMENT
= cccc
; Are input messages segmented?
/*
/&
Figure 76. DSLSDIR (Sequential Data Set Input) Sample JCL (VSE)
Data Set Names

volid

or the program library
infile
The data set name of the input file
program library
The name of the library containing the MERVA ESA programs
Runtime Parameters
The runtime parameters are passed to DSLSDIR via SYSTSIN under z/OS and via
SYSIPT under VSE. They have the form KEYWORD = VALUE. Each pair must be
coded on a separate line. The input is folded to uppercase and leading and trailing
blanks are stripped off from the specified keyword value. Lines starting with an
asterisk '*' are treated as comments, a semicolon ';' starts a line comment.
HELP as the only parameter prints a description of the runtime parameters.
Required Parameters
FUNCTION
Specifies the (queue management) function performed:
CHECK
Check the messages in the input data set. Do not write any
message to a MERVA ESA queue.
219
PUT
Put the messages in the input data set to the target queue
QUEUE2.
ROUTB
Route the messages in the input data set via the routing (table)
of the queue QUEUE1. The used API function is ROUB - route
with automatic delete.
ROUTD
Route the messages in the input data set via the routing (table)
of the queue QUEUE1. The used API function is ROUN - route
directly. ROUN is faster than ROUB. It requires MERVA ESA
V4 (or higher).

MSGFORMAT
Specifies the format code used to format the messages:
Q
SWIFT I
SWIFT II.

QUEUE1
Intermediate queue name. The name of the intermediate queue that holds the
messages before they are put or routed. The routing (table) of this queue also
determines the routing for FUNCTION = ROUTB and ROUTD.
Can be checked in a user exit of DSLSDIR. This parameter is required with
FUNCTION = PUT, ROUTB, and ROUTD. It is ignored with FUNCTION =
CHECK.
QUEUE2
Target queue name. The name of the target queue for PUT. Can be checked in
a user exit of DSLSDIR.
This parameter is required with FUNCTION = PUT. It is ignored with
FUNCTION = CHECK, ROUTB, and ROUTD.
Optional Parameters
FLDNAME1
MERVA field name:
NONE
Specifies that no field should be used to select messages, all

messages are processed.
MSGDST
Specifies that only messages with the SWIFT master

destination specified in parameter FLDVALUE1 should be
processed.
MSGNET
Specifies that only messages with the message type specified in

parameter FLDVALUE1 should be processed.
SWBHLT
Specifies that only messages with the SWIFT basic header

logical terminal address specified in parameter FLDVALUE1
should be processed.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is FLDNAME1 = NONE.

FLDVALUE1
MERVA field value:
220
Operations Guide
v If parameter FLDNAME1 = MSGDST, an up to 9 character SWIFT master

destination
v If parameter FLDNAME1 = MSGNET, an up to 8 character MERVA message
type. Should start with S, for example, S100 or S1*.
v If parameter FLDNAME1 = SWBHLT, an up to 12 character SWIFT basic
header logical terminal address.
The wildcard * is allowed as last (or only) character.
This parameter is required when FLDNAME1 = MSGDST, MSGNET, or
SWBHLT.
INCORRECT
Incorrect message disposition. Specifies what happens when an incorrect
message is encountered. If specified, the keyword value must be one of:
ACCept
CANcel
DSLSDIR is terminated
DROp
INCorronly
Only incorrect messages are processed, correct messages are

dropped.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is INCORRECT = ACCEPT.

Note: If the parameters FLDNAME1 and FLDVALUE1 are specified so that
only selected messages should be processed, the parameter INCORRECT
applies only to messages that passed this filter. If, for example, the
parameter FLDNAME1 = MSGNET, the parameter FLDVALUE = S1*,
and parameter INCORRECT = CANCEL, an erroneous S200 message
will not cancel DSLSDIR, as only S1* messages are processed.
LOGLEVEL
Log level:
1
Only overview data is shown in the listing.
Detailed data for each message is shown.
Checking errors are more detailed. Fields SW20 (TRN) and SW108
(Msg. user ref.) are shown.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is LOGLEVEL = 2.

PERFORM
Performance information. Indicates whether performance information about the
API commands GETU, MSGP, PUT, PUTB, and ROUB should be gathered. If
specified, the keyword value must be Yes or No.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is PERFORM = NO.
SEGMENT
Segmented input messages. Indicates whether the input data set contains
segmented messages. If specified, the keyword value must be one of:
Auto
DSLSDIR determines itself whether the messages in the input data set
are segmented or not segmented
No
The messages in the input data set are not segmented
221
Yes
The messages in the input data set are segmented.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is SEGMENT = AUTO.

With the following parameter you can pass a user-specific parameter to DSLSDIR:
USERPARM
User-specific parameter. The specified data is accepted by DSLSDIR and
available in the variable parm_userparm.
This parameter is optional.

VSEBLKSIZE
DSLSDSI BLKSIZE. BLKSIZE of input SAM file DSLSDSI, maximum 32761.
This parameter is required under VSE.
VSERECFORM
DSLSDSI RECFORM. RECFORM of input SAM file DSLSDSI: FIXUNB,
FIXBLK, VARUNB, or VARBLK.
VSERECSIZE
DSLSDSI RECSIZE. RECSIZE of input SAM file DSLSDSI, maximum. 32761.
This parameter is required under VSE when VSERECFORM = FIXUNB or
FIXBLK.
EDIFACT FINPAY Conversion

DSLSDIR supports basic conversion of EDIFACT FINPAY messages to SWIFT
MT121 messages. It can process input FINPAY messages, created, for example, by a
bank application, and append the necessary SWIFT headers and tags to make them
SWIFT MT121 input messages. DSLSDIR FINPAY conversion assumes that the
input FINPAY message is for one single recipient.
Runtime Parameters
Specify the runtime parameter USERPARM = XFINPAY. The parameter
MSGFORMAT must be W, and FLDNAME1 and FLDVALUE1 must not be
specified.
Customization
For the DSLSDIR FINPAY conversion you must customize some settings in the
DSLSDIR FINPAY CUSTOMIZATION SECTION:
1. Variable yourlt
Your 12-character SWIFT LT address, for example, VNDEBET2AXXX. If set, the
value is used as Logical Terminal address in the SWIFT Basic Header (swbhlt)
and overwrites the senders address found in the FINPAY message. If blank,
the senders address found in the FINPAY message is used to look up the
Logical Terminal address in list lta.
2. Stem variable (array) lta
The bank address in FINPAY can be different from the SWIFT LT address.
Therefore it is necessary to specify pairs of:
name
The banks address as used in the FINPAY message.
lta.name
The banks SWIFT LT address.
The number of pairs that you can specify is unlimited.
222
Operations Guide
Example: The FINPAY address used for the Bluebank is BLUEBANK-ED. To

assign the LT address BLUEDEFFAXXX, you would specify the following pair:
name = BLUEBANK-ED ; lta.name = BLUEDEFFAXXX
When DSLSDIR, then it finds the bank address BLUEBANK-ED in the FINPAY
message, it uses BLUEDEFFAXXX in the generated MT121 message. When
DSLSDIR finds an undefined bank address, it issues a message and sets the LT
field (SWBHLT or SWAHILT) to FPUNKNOWNADR. This can be used for
routing purposes.
MT121 Fields
v The field SWBHLT (senders LT address) is set in DSLSDIR routine
XFinpay_set_SWBHLT.
v The field SWAHILT (recipients LT address) is set in DSLSDIR routine
XFinpay_set_SWAHILT.
v The field SW108 (message user reference) is set in DSLSDIR routine
XFinpay_set_SW108. To omit the User Header, specify sw108 = .
Customization
The following DSLPRM parameters affect DSLSDIR:
PRTNAME
Your institution name as it is to appear in the printout of (most)

REXX batch utilities.
SDDB2
When this parameter is set to YES, direct queue management is

enabled (DB2 z/OS only).
You can use the following routines in DSLSDIR to reject entered runtime
parameters:
1. USEREXIT_Q1 can be used to reject the entered value for runtime parameter
QUEUE1, intermediate queue.
QUEUE2, target queue.
Sample Printout
The following figure shows the information printed after the execution of the
DSLSDIR program.
223
MERVA ESA V4.1 DSLSDIR

(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
21. Apr. 1999
18:00:15
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
|
S A M P L E B A N K
B o e b l i n g e n
|
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLLLLL
LLLLLL
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
REXX version of DSLSDI - Sequential Data Set Input.

HELP as the only parameter prints a description.
DSLSDIR_001I : DSLSDIR started by user HEG at 21. Apr. 1999 18:00:15
DSLSDIR_003I : Runtime parameters:
1. FUNCTION
- Queue mgmt function
2. MSGFORMAT - Message format .....
3. QUEUE1
- Intermed. queue name
4. QUEUE2
- Target queue name ..
5. FLDNAME1
- MERVA field name ...
6. FLDVALUE1 - MERVA field value ..
7. INCORRECT - Incorrect msg disp.
8. LOGLEVEL
- Log level ..........
9. PERFORM
- Performance info ...
10. SEGMENT
- Segmentation ind.
11. USERPARM
- User specific data
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
PUT
W
DMSDI
L1DE0
NONE
ACCEPT
3
YES
AUTO
MYPARM
DSLSDIR_005I : MERVA ID is MHEG, MERVA name is MERVAESA.

DSLSDIR_006I : Queue management module ..... : DSLQMCNV
Access method / features used : VXBD
DSLSDIR_009I : Check for DSLSDIR restart situation.
DSLSDIR_053I : MERVA API command QLL ended with INTRC 09.
INTQUEUE: DMSDI
The intermediate queue is empty (OK).
DSLSDIR_013I : Now at start of STAGE 1 processing.
Figure 77. DSLSDIR (Sequential Data Set Input) Sample Printout (Part 1 of 3)
224
Operations Guide
DSLSDIR_014I : The input dataset used is HEG.DSLSDI.FILE4.

Note: This info was obtained by using internal control
blocks.
DSLSDIR_015I : Read the input dataset.
DSLSDIR_016I : Read of input dataset DSLSDSI with EXECIO was ok.
Number of read input lines: 5
DSLSDIR_018I : AUTO determined segmentation indicator: NOSEGMENT
DSLSDIR_112W : MERVA API command MSGP for input message 4
ended with INTRC 00.
MFS has detected checking errors.
INTERMF1: DWS3529 Field SW32A DATE must have format YYMMDD
INTERMF2: DWS3513 Field SW57 option must be A B D
DSLSDIR_027I : Now at start of STAGE 2 processing.
DSLSDIR_028I : The DSLSDIR restart message has been deleted successfully.
Queue DMSDI, QSN 1026.
DSLSDIR_032I : Detailed statistical data for stage 1
(Input dataset to intermediate queue DMSDI):
E
R
R
O
R
-
M
A
T
C
H
-
>
Record
number
-----1
2
3
4
5
MSGP
rc
-ok
ok
ok
00
ok
PUT
rc
-ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
MT
----S100
S100
S100
S100
S100
SW20
SW108
---------------- ---------------100
100
100
100
100
DSLSDIR_033I : Performance info for stage 1

(Input dataset to intermediate queue DMSDI):
E
R
R
O
R
-
>
Sum:
Record
number
-----1
2
3
4
5
+rc
-ok
ok
ok
00
ok
MSGP -+
time
-----0.8141
0.0363
0.0304
0.0344
0.0298
0.9450
+rc
-ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
PUT --+
time
-----0.0041
0.0039
0.0033
0.0037
0.0192
MT
----S100
S100
S100
S100
S100
0.0342
225
DSLSDIR_034I : Detailed statistical data for stage 2

(Intermediate queue DMSDI to final queue L1DE0):
Err
---
Queue- Record
element number
------ -----1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
Sum:
+rc
-ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
GETU -+
time
-----0.0194
0.0043
0.0044
0.0039
0.0198
+rc
-ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
PUTB -+
time
-----0.0053
0.0044
0.0044
0.0053
0.0059
0.0518
QSN
---------0000002078
0000002079
0000002080
0000002081
0000002082
0.0253
Note: The restart message is not contained in this list.

DSLSDIR_035I : Overview statistical data
GETU
MSGP
PUT
PUTB
ROUB
ROUN
=
=
=
=
=
=
Read next message from a MERVA queue

Map a message from external format to internal buffer
Copy a message to another MERVA queue
Move a message to another MERVA queue
Route a message to a MERVA queue with automatic delete
Route next message directly to a MERVA queue
---
Stage 1
---
No. of input records ...... : 5

No. of input messages ..... : 5
No. of messages MSGP ok ... : 4
No. of MSGPs with intrc 00 : 1
No. of messages MSGP failed : 0
No. of messages PUT ok .... : 5
No. of messages PUT failed : 0
---
Stage 2
---
No. of messages GETU ok ... : 5

No. of messages GETU failed : 0
No. of messages PUTB ok ... : 5
No. of messages PUTB failed : 0
DSLSDIR_036I : Number of input messages ................... : 5
Number of input messages in error .......... : 1
The messages have been ACCEPTed.
Number of messages PUT to queue L1DE0 ...... : 5
DSLSDIR_030I : DSLSDIR ended with return code 4 - Warning.
DSLSDIR_037I : DSLSDIR ended at 21. Apr. 1999 18:00:17
Listing Fields
The Detailed statistical data of the listing contains the following information:
For stage 1:
ERROR
226
Operations Guide
A > indicates an error with the message, for example, a

checking error, or the PUT to the intermediate queue failed
MATCH
N indicates that this message does not match a specified

MSGDST, MSGNET, or SWBHLT value
Record number
Running record number
MSGP rc
Return code of API function MSGP - ok indicates that the

message was successfully translated from the external
format to the internal MERVA ESA format
PUT rc
Return code of API function PUT - ok indicates that the

message was successfully put to the intermediate queue
MT
Message type (MSGNET)
MSGDST
SWIFT master destination. Is printed only when specified

as selection criterion
SWBHLT
SWIFT basic header logical terminal address. Is printed

only when specified as selection criterion
SW20
Transaction reference number (TRN). Is printed only with

log level 3
SW108
Message user reference. Is printed only with log level 3
QSN
QSN of the intermediate queue. Is printed only with

function PUT, ROUTB, and ROUTD, and log level 4
For performance information of stage 1:

ERROR
As above
Record Number
As above
MSGP rc
As above
MSGP time
Time in seconds spent in API function MSGP
PUT rc
As above
PUT time
Time in seconds spent in API function PUT.
For stage 2:
Err
A > indicates an error with the message, for example, the

PUT to the MERVA target queue failed.
Queue Element
Running queue element number
Record Number
Running record number
GETU rc
Return code of API function GETU, read a message from

the intermediate queue
GETU time
Time in seconds spent in API function GETU
PUTB rc
Return code of API function PUTB - move a message from

the intermediate queue to the target queue
PUTB time
Time in seconds spent in API function PUTB
ROUB rc
Return code of API function ROUB, route a message via

the routing (table) of the intermediate queue
ROUB time
Time in seconds spent in API function ROUB

227
ROUN rc
Return code of API function ROUN, route a message via

the routing (table) of the intermediate queue
ROUN time
Time in seconds spent in API function ROUB
QSN
PUT and ROUTB: QSN of the target queue. ROUTD: QSN

of the intermediate queue
Notes:
1. With function CHECK there is no stage-2 processing.
2. rc <= -2 indicates an error in DSLSDIR or the REXX host command
environment. Refer to the MERVA for ESA Application Programming Interface
Guide for a description of the return code.
Messages and Codes

DSLSDIR ends with the return codes:
0
Successful
Warning
Error
12
Severe error.
The messages have the following structure:

DSLSDIR_nnnl Message text
Where:
DSLSDIR
Identifies the message as a message of the DSLSDIR utility.
Underscore
nnn
Is a 3-digit number used to identify the message.
Is a single character used to show the type of message. The

following characters are used:
I
An information message
A warning message
An error message
A severe error message.
The messages are not further documented. Note that the message numbers are
subject of change at any time.
Comparison of DSLSDIR with DSLSDI

v Capabilities provided by both, DSLSDI and DSLSDIR
DSLSDI and DSLSDIR both provide:
1. Capable of restart (same mechanism as DSLSDI).
2. Input data set can be segmented or unsegmented.
3. ENQ and DEQ have the same resource name as DSLSDI.
4. Add own MSGTRACE entry to the message.
5. Write WTO messages about processing.
228
Operations Guide
Note: WTO messages are also written to the journal.

v Advantages of DSLSDIR
DSLSDIR has the following advantages over DSLSDI:
1. The input messages can either be:
Routed via the routing (table) of the intermediate queue (this does
DSLSDI)
Put to the target queue
Checked only.
2. You can specify that only input messages are to be processed that match a
specified:
MSGDST (SWIFT master destination)
MSGNET (message type)
SWBHLT (SWIFT basic header logical terminal address).
3. Additional Incorrect message disposition INCORRONLY - process incorrect
messages only.
4. Segmentation indicator can be auto determined.
5. Detailed error message for each input message.
6. Overview and detailed statistical data.
7. The message type (MT), SW20 (TRN), and SW108 (Msg. user ref.) of each
input message can be shown.
8. Performance information can be gathered.
9. User exits to check intermediate and target queue name.
10. Tells the name of input data set (by using internal control blocks, z/OS
only).
11. ISPF front-end panel DSLSDIRP (z/OS only).
v Restrictions of DSLSDIR
DSLSDIR has the following restrictions compared with DSLSDI:
1. The input data set must be on disk (not on tape).
2. Does not support VBS records.
3. Supports only message format Q, S, and W.
4. UMR is also written for the restart message.
5. User exit DSLMU020 is not supported.
229
230
Operations Guide
Chapter 15. Sequential Data Set Load in REXX (DSLSDLR)

DSLSDLR loads the messages unloaded with the DSLSDUR utilities back to their
MERVA queues preserving the queue name, QSN, key values, and the write back
indicator.
It is checked that on the MERVA ESA queue no queue elements with the same or a
higher QSN exist.
Dependencies: MERVA ESA must be active.
With enhanced DB2 queue management the DB2 commit frequency is reduced as
specified in DSLPRM.
Input Data Set Layout

See Unload/Reload Data Set Layout on page 257 for the expected layout of the
input data set. The input data set must have record format FB and logical record
length 1024.

The following figure shows the z/OS JCL to load MERVA queues in batch.
231
//....... JOB ............

//REXXB
EXEC PGM=DSLAREXX,REGION=8M,PARM=DSLSDLR
//*
//SYSTSIN DD *
* HELP
* -- Required parameters -MSGFORMAT
= c
QUEUE
= cccccccc
; Queue pattern (mult.)
QUEUE
= cccccccc
QUEUE
= cccccccc
* -- Optional parameters -ACTIVEUSERS = ccccccc
; Active users allowed?
LOGLEVEL
= n
; Log level 1 .. 4
QSNERROR
= cccccccc
; QSN errors, CONTINUE or STOP
/*
//*
//*
//*
//*
.. IF MSGFORMAT=S/W AND CURCODE=FILE SPEC. IN DSLPRM
//DWSCUR
//*
//*
.. INPUT DATA SET (FB1024)
//DSLSDSL DD DSN=inputds,DISP=OLD
//*
//*
.. ON THIS PDS: DSLSDLR
//*
//*
.. LISTING DATASET (VB136)
//
Figure 78. DSLSDLR (Sequential Data Set Load) Sample JCL (z/OS)
Data Set Names

loadlib

programs.
curds
inputds
The name of the input data set. Must be record format FB, logical
record length 1024, and must have DISP=OLD.
samplib
The name of the library containing the program DSLSDLR.
listds


The following figure shows the VSE JCL to run DSLSDLR.
232
Operations Guide
// JOB DSLSDLR ...

// DLBL DSLSDSL,infile,0,SD
// EXTENT SYS025
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION NODUMP
// EXEC DSLAREXX,SIZE=300K,PARM=DSLSDLR
* HELP
= c
QUEUE
= cccccccc
QUEUE
= cccccccc
QUEUE
= cccccccc
LOGLEVEL
= n
; Log level 1 .. 4
QSNERROR
= cccccccc
; QSN errors, CONTINUE or STOP
/*
/&
Figure 79. DSLSDLR (Sequential Data Set Load) Sample JCL (VSE)
Data Set Names

volid

infile
The data set name of the input file.
program library
Runtime Parameters
The runtime parameters are passed to DSLSDLR via SYSTSIN under z/OS and via
coded on a separate line. The input is folded to uppercase and leading and trailing
blanks are stripped off from the specified keyword value. Lines starting with * are
treated as comments, a ; starts a line comment.
Required Parameters
MSGFORMAT
Specifies the format code used to format the input messages:
Q
MERVA ESA queue format (was recommended)
S.W.I.F.T. I
S.W.I.F.T. II.

233
QUEUE
Queue name or queue name pattern. The messages of these queues will be
processed. To reload all queues, specify *. The entered queue names can be
checked in a user exit of DSLSDLR.
This parameter can be specified multiple times. It must be specified at least
once.
Optional Parameters
ACTIVEUSERS
Active users. Indicates whether active users are allowed:
CMDONLY
Active users in function CMD, FLM, MSC, and USRx are

allowed
NO
Active users are not allowed
YES
Active users are allowed.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value used is NO.

LOGLEVEL
Log level:
1
Detailed statistical data of the API calls MSGP and PUTR are shown.
A WTO message Processing .. is issued for each queue. The first and
the last loaded QSN are printed in the listing. When a checking error is
found, the MERVA messages are printed.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value used is 2.

QSNERROR
Specifies how DSLSDLR should proceed when a QSN to be inserted is already
there or a higher QSN exists:
CONTinue
DSLSDLR continues.
STOP
DSLSDLR stops processing.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value used is STOP.

CONTINUE should be used when a DSLSDLR must be performed.
Customization
The following DSLPRM parameters affect DSLSDLR:
DB2COMMIT
If QIO=(DSLQMDIO,2) is specified the commit frequency is the first
subparameter of the DB2COMMIT=(n,m) parameter.
PRTNAME
Your institution name as it should appear in the printout of (most) REXX
batch utilities.
QIO
234
Operations Guide
If this parameter is set to QIO=(DSLQMDIO,2) then the DB2 commit

frequency depends on the DB2COMMIT parameter.
SDDB2
When this parameter is set to YES, direct queue management is enabled
(DB2 z/OS only).
You can use the following routine in DSLSDLR to reject entered runtime
parameters:
USEREXIT_Q1 can be used to reject the entered value for runtime parameter
QUEUE, queue pattern.
Sample Printout
DSLSDLR program.
MERVA ESA V4.1 DSLSDLR
1. Apr. 1999
15:17:23
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
|
S A M P L E
B A N K
B o e b l i n g e n
|
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLLLLL
LLLLLL
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LLLLLL
LLLLLL
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
Figure 80. DSLSDLR (Sequential Data Set Load) Sample Printout (Part 1 of 2)
235
Load the messages unloaded with DSLSDUR back to MERVA queues.

DSLSDLR_001I : DSLSDLR started by user HEG at 1. Apr. 1999 15:17:23
DSLSDLR_003I : Runtime parameters:
1. MSGFORMAT
- Message format .....
2. QUEUE
- Queue pattern ......
3. ACTIVEUSERS - Active users allowed
4. LOGLEVEL
- Log level ..........
5. QSNERROR
- QSN error ..........
:
:
:
:
:
Q
*
CMDONLY
1
STOP
DSLSDLR_005I : MERVA ID is MHEG, MERVA name is MERVAESA.

DSLSDLR_009I : The input dataset used is HEG.DSLSDU.FILE.
blocks.
DSLSDLR_013I : EOF of input data set reached (OK).
DSLSDLR_024I : Overview statistical data of the load.
E
R
R
O
R
-
C
H
Q E
Records
+--- Messages ---+ S C
Number Queue
Read
Read
Written
N K
------ -------- -------- -------- -------- - 1 L1ACK
4000
1000
1000
2 L1AI0
4000
1000
1000
3 L1DE0
4000
1000
1000
4 L1VE0
4000
1000
1000
5 L2ACK
4000
1000
1000
6 L2DE0
4000
1000
1000
DSLSDLR_025I : No.
No.
No.
No.
of
of
of
of
input records processed

queue names processed
messages read .........
messages written ......
O
T
H
E
R
-
: 24026 (incl. comment lines ...

:
6
: 6000 (incl. invalid / ...
: 6000
DSLSDLR_022I : DSLSDLR ended with return code 0 - successful.

DSLSDLR_026I : DSLSDLR ended at 1. Apr. 1999 15:20:29
Figure 80. DSLSDLR (Sequential Data Set Load) Sample Printout (Part 2 of 2)
Listing Fields
The Overview statistical data of the listing contains the following information:
ERROR
> indicates an error with the queue, for example, input records
are invalid or a QSN already exists.
Number
Running queue number.
Queue
Queue name.
Records Read Number of records read from the input data set. The data set is
read with EXECIO from the DD name DSLSDSL.
Messages Read
Number of messages read from the input data set.
Messages Written
Number of messages written to MERVA ESA queues.
236
Operations Guide
QSN
X indicates that one or more QSNs of the queue already exist or

that a higher QSN exists on that queue.
CHECK
X indicates that one or more messages of the queue have

checking errors (MSGFORMAT = S and W only).
OTHER
X indicates that one or more messages of the queue have other

errors.
First QSN
First loaded QSN. Only printed with log level 3.
Last QSN
Last loaded QSN. Only printed with log level 3.
Messages and Codes

DSLSDLR ends with the usual return code:
0
Successful
Warning
Error
12
Severe error.

DSLSDLR_nnnl Message text
Where:
DSLSDLR
Identifies the message as a message of the DSLSDLR utility.
Underscore.
nnn

I
Information message
Warning message
Error message
Severe error message.
subject to change at any time.
237
238
Operations Guide
Chapter 16. Sequential Data Set Output in REXX (DSLSDOR)

DSLSDOR reads as DSLSDO a batch of messages from a MERVA ESA queue and
writes them to a sequential data set.
You can invoke DSLSDOR:
v By the front-end exec DSLSDORF, which displays an ISPF panel where you can
enter the runtime parameters and data set names (z/OS only)
v By creating and submitting a batch job yourself.
Invoke DSLSDOR via ISPF Panel (z/OS only)

Menu
To invoke DSLSDOR via an ISPF panel, enter on an ISPF command line TSO
%DSLSDORF, or on ISPF option 6 %DSLSDORF. The following panel is
displayed:
---------------------------- MERVA ESA V4.1 DSLSDOR --------------------------COMMAND
===>
Action
===>
Function
===>
Queue Name ===>
Fr/To QSN
KEY1 -orFr/To KEY1
KEY2 -orFr/To KEY2
Field Name
Incor. Msg
Log Level
Segmented
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
( C = create JCL, D = DD statements, H = print Help )

( J = Jobcard, L = edit List, S = create and Submit )
_
( C = CHECK, D = DELETE, K = KEEP )
________ Message Format ===> _ ( Q = queue fmt, S = SWIFT I ,
W = SWIFT II )
__________ / __________ ( leave blank for all queue elements )
________________________
________________________ / ________________________
________________________
________________________ / ________________________
_
( 1=MSGDST, 2=MSGNET, 3=SWBHLT ) Value ===> ____________
___ ( ACC,ALT,CAN,DRO,INC,PUT,ROU ) Queue ===> ________
_
( 1 = basic .. 4 = all )
Perf. Info ===> _ ( No/Yes )
_
( N = output not segmented, Y = output segmented )
Output DS ===> ____________________________________________

Altout DS ===> ____________________________________________
List DS
===> ____________________________________________
JCL DS
===> ____________________________________________
PF1 = HELP
(Output data set)

(Alternate Output)
(Listing data set)
(JCL data set)
(C) IBM Corp. 1999
Figure 81. DSLSDOR (Sequential Data Set Output) Menu
To exit press PF 3.
Note: The installation of the ISPF panel is described in the MERVA for ESA
Installation Guide.
239
Runtime Parameters
The following parameters can be specified:
No.
1
Field
Action
Description
C
Create JCL in data set JCL DS, member DSLSDOR
Open pop-up window to enter DD statements
Print help information to data set List DS
Open pop-up window to enter JCL cards
Edit listing data set List DS
Create JCL in data set JCL DS, member DSLSDOR, and

submit it.

2
Function
Only check the messages of the queue Queue
Write the messages to the sequential data set Output DS (and

optionally to the alternate sequential data set Altout DS) and
delete them from the queue Queue
Write the messages to the sequential data set Output DS (and

optionally to the alternate sequential data set Altout DS), but
do not delete them from the queue Queue (keep them).

3
Queue
The messages of this queue will be processed.

Message
Format
Message format
Q
S.W.I.F.T. I
S.W.I.F.T. II.
240
Operations Guide
Fr(om) QSN
Only messages in the range From .. To QSN will be processed.
To QSN
See From QSN.
KEY1
Only messages with a key 1 matching the specified value will be

processed. The specified string may contain the wildcards % and *.
Note: You can specify either KEY1 or Fr(om)/To KEY1, not both.
Fr(om) KEY1
Only messages with a key 1 greater than or equal to the specified

value will be processed. The specified string must not contain the
wildcards % and *. See also To KEY1 and the note at KEY1.
To KEY1
Only messages with a key 1 less than or equal to the specified value
will be processed. The specified string must not contain the wildcards
% and *. See also Fr(om) KEY1 and the note at KEY1.
10
KEY2
Only messages with a key 2 matching the specified value will be

Note: You can specify either KEY2 or Fr(om)/To KEY2, not both.
11
Fr(om) KEY2
Only messages with a key 2 greater than or equal to the specified

value will be processed. The specified string must not contain the
wildcards % and *. See also To KEY2 and the note at KEY2.
No.
Field
Description
12
To KEY2
Only messages with a key 2 less than or equal to the specified value
will be processed. The specified string must not contain the wildcards
% and *. See also Fr(om) KEY2 and the note at KEY2.
13
Field Name
The identifier for a MERVA field.

1
Only messages with the SWIFT master destination

(MSGDST) specified in (Field) Value will be processed.
Only messages with the message type (MSGNET) specified

in (Field) Value will be processed.
Only messages with the SWIFT basic header logical terminal

address (SWBHLT) specified in (Field) Value will be
processed.
This parameter is optional. It can be specified only with Function

Check or Keep, but not with Function Delete.
14
(Field) Value
Value that must be matched for the field specified in Field Name:
v If Field Name is 1, an up to 9 character SWIFT master destination,
for example, VNDEBET2A.
v If Field Name is 2, an up to 8 character MERVA message type.
Should start with the letter S, for example, S100.
v If Field Name is 3, an up to 12 character SWIFT basic header logical
terminal address, for example, VNDEBET2AXXX.
The wildcard * can be specified as last (or only) character.
This parameter is required when Field Name is 1, 2, or 3.
15
Incor. Msg
Specifies what happens when an incorrect message is encountered:

ACC
ALT
Incorrect messages are accepted, but written to the alternate

output data set Altout DS
CAN
DSLSDOR is terminated
DRO
INC
Only incorrect messages are processed, the correct messages

are dropped.
PUT
Incorrect messages are put to the error queue (Error) Queue
ROU
Incorrect messages are routed according to the routing (table)

of the queue (Error) Queue.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is ACC.

You can specify PUT and ROU only with Function Delete. With
Message Format Q you can specify only ACCept.
16
(Error) Queue
Error queue.
This parameter is required with Incor. Msg PUT and ROU.
241
No.
17
Field
Description
Log Level
Only overview data is shown in the listing
Detailed data for each message is shown
Checking errors are more detailed. Key 1, key 2, and

MSGDST are shown even if not specified as selection
criterion.

18
Perf. Info
No MERVA ESA API performance information is gathered.
The time spent in the MERVA ESA API functions GET,

MSGG, PUTB, ROUB, and DELE is gathered.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value used is N.

19
Segmented
Indicates whether the output data sets Output DS and Altout DS

should contain segmented messages.
N
The messages in the output data sets are not segmented
The messages in the output data sets are segmented.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value used is N.

20
Output DS
Output data set

This parameter is required when:
v Action is C or S
v Function is D or K.
21
Altout DS
Alternate output data set

This parameter is required when:
v Action is C or S
v Function is D or K
v Incor. Msg is ALT.
22
List DS
Listing data set

This parameter is required with Action C, H, L, and S.
23
JCL DS
JCL data set. The created (and submitted) JCL will be written as
member DSLSDOR to this data set.
This parameter is required with Action C, H, and S.
z/OS DD Statements
DSLSDOR requires the following DD statements to be defined:
242
Operations Guide
STEPLIB
The load library containing the MERVA ESA programs.
DWSCUR
The currency code file, which is required only when you specify
runtime parameter Message Format S or W and CURCODE=FILE is
specified in your DSLPRM.
SYSEXEC
The library containing the program DSLSDOR.
DSLSDSA
The alternate output data set. DSLSDSA is required only if

parameter Incor. Msg is ALT.
DSLSDSO
The output data set.
SYSTSIN
The specified DSLSDOR runtime parameters.
The listing data set. Must be preallocated, record format VB, logical
record length 136 is recommended, or SYSOUT=*.
v Enter STEPLIB, DWSCUR, and SYSEXEC with Action D.
v DSLSDSA, the alternate output data set, DSLSDO, the output data set, and
SYSTSPRT, the listing data set, can be specified on the panel.
v SYSTSIN, the DSLSDOR runtime parameters, is generated by DSLSDORF.
SYSTSPRT
First-Time Users
If you are a first-time user, you must allocate three or four data sets in TSO,
provide with Action D the required DD statements for DWSCUR, STEPLIB, and
SYSEXEC, and with Action J the required job statement information.
Allocate three or four data sets in TSO:
v The output data set Output DS. If you prefer unsegmented messages in the
output data set, the LRECL of the output data set must be large enough to hold
the largest input message.
v If you plan to use Incor. Msg ALT, allocate also the alternate output data set
Altout DS.
v The data set to which DSLSDORF writes the generated JCL. Should be PO, FB80.
Name, for example, uid.MERVA.JCL
v The data set to which DSLSDOR writes its listing: Should be PS, VB136. Name,
for example, uid.MERVA.LIST or use SYSOUT=*.
Note: You can also use existing data sets.
The job statement information could look like this:
Edit Jobcards in the window below, PF3 to end

//HEGSDOR JOB (DE05020),S. HEGENAUER,MSGLEVEL=(1,1),MSGCLASS=X,
//
CLASS=A,NOTIFY=HEG,USER=HEG
//*
//*
Figure 82. DSLSDOR (Sequential Data Set Output) Job Statement Window
The DD statements could look like this:
243
Edit DD Statements in the window below, PF3 to end

//*
//*
//STEPLIB DD DSN=MERVA.SDSLLODB,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=MERVA.SDSLLODC,DISP=SHR
//*
//*
//DWSCUR
DD DSN=MERVA.SCUR,DISP=SHR
//*
//*
.. ON THIS PDS: DSLSDOR
//SYSEXEC DD DSN=MERVA.SDSLSAM0,DISP=SHR
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Figure 83. DSLSDOR (Sequential Data Set Output) DD Statements Window
All entered values with the exception of the values entered for KEY fields are
remembered in ISPF profile variables.
244
Operations Guide
Invoke DSLSDOR via JCL

You can invoke DSLSDOR also via JCL. If you are running MERVA ESA under
VSE, you have to do so.

The following figure shows the z/OS JCL to run DSLSDOR.
//....... JOB ............
//REXXB
EXEC PGM=DSLAREXX,REGION=0K,PARM=DSLSDOR
//*
//*
.. RUNTIME PARAMETERS
//SYSTSIN DD *
* HELP
* -- Required parameters -FUNCTION = cccccc
MSGFORMAT = c
QUEUE
= cccccccc
; Queue name
* -- Optional parameters -FROMQSN
= nnnnnnnnnn
; From QSN
TOQSN
= nnnnnnnnnn
; To QSN
KEY1
= ccccccccc.. ; Key 1 -orFROMKEY1 = ccccccccc.. ; From Key 1
TOKEY1
= ccccccccc.. ; To Key 1
KEY2
= ccccccccc.. ; Key 2 -orFROMKEY2 = ccccccccc.. ; From Key 2
TOKEY2
FLDNAME1 = cccccc
; MERVA field name
FLDVALUE1 = ccccccccc.. ; MERVA field value
ERRQUEUE = cccccccc
; Error queue name
LOGLEVEL = n
; Log level 1 .. 4
PERFORM
= ccc
SEGMENT
= ccc
; Output messages segmented?
/*
//*
//*
//*
//*
//DWSCUR
//*
//*
.. OUTPUT DATASET
//DSLSDSO DD DSN=outputds,DISP=OLD
//*
//*
.. ALTERNATE OUTPUT DATASET
//DSLSDSA DD DSN=altoutds,DISP=OLD
//*
//*
.. ON THIS PDS: DSLSDOR
//*
//*
.. LISTING DATASET
//
//
Figure 84. DSLSDOR (Sequential Data Set Output) Sample JCL (z/OS)
Data Set Names

245
loadlib

programs.
curds
outputds
The name of the output data set. Must be DISP=OLD or

DISP=NEW.
altoutds
The name of the alternate output data set. Must be DISP=OLD or

DISP=NEW.
samplib
The name of the library containing the program DSLSDOR.
listds


The following figure shows the VSE JCL to run DSLSDOR.
// JOB DSLSDOR ...
// DLBL DSLSDSO,outfile,0,SD
// DLBL DSLSDSA,altout,0,SD
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION NODUMP
// EXEC DSLAREXX,SIZE=300K,PARM=DSLSDOR
* HELP
* -- Required parameters -FUNCTION = cccccc
MSGFORMAT = c
QUEUE
= cccccccc
; Queue name
* -- Optional parameters -FROMQSN
= nnnnnnnnnn
; From QSN
... (see MVS JCL)
/*
/&
Figure 85. DSLSDOR (Sequential Data Set Output) Sample JCL (VSE)
Data Set Names

volid
The volume identification of the volume containing the output files

outfile
altout
The data set name of the alternate output file.
extent information
The extent information of the output files.
program library
246
Operations Guide
Runtime Parameters
The runtime parameters are passed to DSLSDOR via SYSTSIN under z/OS and via
coded on a separate line. The input is folded to uppercase with the exception of
the entered KEY value and leading and trailing blanks are stripped off from the
specified keyword value. Lines starting with an asterisk (*) are treated as
comments, a semicolon (;) starts a line comment.
Notes:
1. HELP as the only parameter prints a description of the runtime parameters.
2. The entered values for the following keywords are not translated to uppercase:
KEY1, FROMKEY1, TOKEY1, KEY2, FROMKEY2, and TOKEY2.
Required Parameters
FUNCTION
Queue Management Function:
CHECK
Only check the messages in the MERVA ESA queue QUEUE.
DELete
Write the messages to the sequential data set DSLSDSO (and

optionally to the alternate sequential data set DSLSDSA), and
delete them from the MERVA ESA queue QUEUE
KEEP
Write the messages to the sequential data set DSLSDSO (and

optionally to the alternate sequential data set DSLSDSA), but
do not delete them from the MERVA ESA queue QUEUE (keep
them).

MSGFORMAT
Q
S.W.I.F.T. I
S.W.I.F.T. II.

QUEUE
Queue name. The messages of this queue will be processed.
Optional Parameters
With the following parameters you can select the queue elements to be processed.
If not specified, all are processed.
FROMQSN
From QSN. Only messages with a QSN greater than or equal to this QSN will
be processed.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is FROMQSN = 0. See also
TOQSN.
TOQSN
To QSN. Only messages with a QSN less than or equal to this QSN will be
processed.
247
This parameter is optional, the default value used is that all messages are
processed. See also FROMQSN.
KEY1
Key 1. Only messages with a key 1 matching the specified value will be
Note: You can specify either KEY1 or FROMKEY1 .. TOKEY1, not both.
FROMKEY1
From key 1. Only messages with a key 1 greater than or equal to the specified
value will be processed. The specified string must not contain the wildcards
% and *. See also To KEY1 and the note at KEY1.
TOKEY1
To key 1. Only messages with a key 1 less than or equal to the specified value
will be processed. The specified string must not contain the wildcards % and
*. See also FROMKEY1 and the note at KEY1.
KEY2
FROMKEY2
% and *. See also To KEY2 and the note at KEY2.
TOKEY2
FLDNAME1
MERVA field name:
MSGDST

destination specified in parm FLDVALUE1 should be
processed.
MSGNET

parm FLDVALUE1 should be processed.
SWBHLT

logical terminal address specified in parm FLDVALUE1 should
be processed.
This parameter is optional. It can be specified only with FUNCTION = CHECK

or KEEP, but not with FUNCTION = DELETE.
FLDVALUE1
MERVA field value:
destination
248
Operations Guide

SWBHLT.
Other Parameters
With the following parameters you can specify what is to happen with incorrect
messages, how detailed the information given is, and the output format:
INCORRECT
Incorrect message disposition. Specifies what happens when an incorrect
message is encountered. If specified, the keyword value must be one of the
following:
ACCept
Incorrect messages are accepted.
acceptALT
Incorrect messages are accepted, but written to the alternate

output data set DSLSDSA.
CANcel
DSLSDOR is terminated.
DROp
Incorrect messages are dropped.
INCorronly
Only incorrect messages are processed, correct messages are

dropped.
PUT
Incorrect messages are put to the error queue ERRQUEUE.
ROUte
Incorrect messages are routed according to the routing (table)

of the queue ERRQUEUE.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is INCORRECT = ACCEPT.

Notes:
1. You can specify PUT and ROUTE only with FUNCTION = DELETE, but
not with FUNCTION = CHECK or KEEP. This is because CHECK and
KEEP should not change the MERVA ESA queue data set in any way.
2. With MSGFORMAT = Q you cannot specify an INCORRECT message
disposition other than ACCEPT. This is because messages in the queue
format are not checked for correctness.
3. If the parameters FLDNAME1 and FLDVALUE1 are specified so that only
selected messages should be processed, the parameter INCORRECT applies
only to messages that passed this filter. If, for example, the following
parameters are specified:
a. FLDNAME1 = MSGNET
b. FLDVALUE = S1*
c. INCORRECT = CANCEL.
Now an erroneous S200 message will not cancel DSLSDOR, as only S1*
messages are processed.
ERRQUEUE
Error queue. The name of the error queue. Can be checked in a user exit of
DSLSDOR.
This parameter is required with INCORRECT = PUT and ROUTE.
LOGLEVEL
Log level:
1
249
Checking errors are more detailed. Key 1, key 2, and MSGDST are
shown even if not specified as selection criterion.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is LOGLEVEL = 2.

PERFORM
API commands GET, MSGG, PUTB, ROUB, and DELE is to be gathered. If
specified, the keyword value must be Yes or No.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is PERFORM = NO.
SEGMENT
Segmented output messages. Indicates whether the output data sets DSLSDSO
and DSLSDSA are to contain segmented messages:
No
The messages in the output data sets are not segmented.
Yes
The messages in the output data sets are segmented.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is SEGMENT = NO.

With the following parameter you can pass a user-specific parameter to DSLSDOR:
USERPARM
User-specific parameter. The specified data is accepted by DSLSDOR and

VSEBLKSIZE
DSLSDSO BLKSIZE. BLKSIZE of output SAM file DSLSDSO, maximum 32761.
VSERECFORM
DSLSDSO RECFORM. RECFORM of output SAM file DSLSDSO: FIXUNB,
VSERECSIZE
DSLSDSO RECSIZE. RECSIZE of output SAM file DSLSDSO, maximum 32761.
This parameter is required under VSE, when VSERECFORM = FIXUNB or
FIXBLK.
EDIFACT FINPAY Conversion

DSLSDOR supports basic convertion of SWIFT MT121 messages to EDIFACT
FINPAY messages. Only the bank message part of MT121 messages between {4:
and //-} is written then to the data set (// = X'0D25' (crlf), carriage return/line
feed).
Runtime Parameters
Specify the runtime parameter USERPARM = XFINPAY. Additionally, other
parameters must be specified as follows:
1. MSGFORMAT = W
2. FLDNAME1 = MSGNET
250
Operations Guide
3. FLDVALUE1 = S121
Customization
The following DSLPRM parameters affect DSLSDOR:
PRTNAME

SDDB2

You can use the following routines in DSLSDOR to reject entered runtime
parameters:
QUEUE1, input queue.
QUEUE2, error queue.
251
Sample Printout
MERVA ESA V4.1 DSLSDOR
9. Apr. 1999
18:38:09
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
|
S A M P L E B A N K
B o e b l i n g e n
|
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLLLLL
LLLLLL
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
OOOO
OOOOOO
OO OO
OO OO
OO OO
OO OO
OO OO
OO OO
OOOOOO
OOOO
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
REXX version of DSLSDO - Sequential Data Set Output.

DSLSDOR_001I : DSLSDOR started by user HEG at 9. Apr. 1999 18:38:09
DSLSDOR_003I : Runtime parameters:
1. FUNCTION
2. MSGFORMAT - Message format ....
3. QUEUE
- Queue name ........
4. ERRQUEUE
- Error queue name ..
5. FLDNAME1
- MERVA field name ..
6. FLDVALUE1 - MERVA field value
7. FROMKEY1
- From KEY1 .........
8. FROMKEY2
- From KEY2 .........
9. FROMQSN
- From QSN ..........
10. INCORRECT - Incorrect msg disp.
11. KEY1
- KEY1 ..............
12. KEY2
- KEY2 ..............
13. LOGLEVEL
- Log level .........
14. PERFORM
- Performance info ..
15. SEGMENT
- Segmentation ind.
16. TOKEY1
- To KEY1 ...........
17. TOKEY2
- To KEY2 ...........
18. TOQSN
- To QSN ............
19. USERPARM
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
KEEP
W
L3DE0
ACCEPT
2
NO
NOSEGMENT
MYDATA
DSLSDOR_006I : MERVA ID is MHEG, MERVA name is MERVAESA.

DSLSDOR_007I : Queue management module ..... : DSLQMCNV
DSLSDOR_011I : The output dataset used is HEG.DSLSDO.FILE.
blocks.
DSLSDOR_012I : The record length of output data set DSLSDSO is 32752.
DSLSDOR_115W : Message no. 4 with QSN 4:
MERVA API command MSGG ended with INTRC 00.
MFS has detected checking errors.
Figure 86. DSLSDOR (Sequential Data Set Output) Sample Printout (Part 1 of 2)
252
Operations Guide
DSLSDOR_025I : Detailed statistical data for stage 1

(Input queue L3DE0 to output dataset)
E
R
R
O
R
-
M
A
T
C
H
-
>
Number
-----1
2
3
4
5
Input QSN
---------0000000001
0000000002
0000000003
0000000004
0000000005
MT
----S100
S100
S100
S100
S100
GET
rc
-ok
ok
ok
ok
ok
MSGG
rc
-ok
ok
ok
00
ok
Output
-------DSLSDSO
DSLSDSO
DSLSDSO
DSLSDSO
DSLSDSO
Length
rc Output QSN
-- ---------ok
170 char.
ok
130 char.
ok
134 char.
ok
138 char.
ok
134 char.
DSLSDOR_029I : Overview statistical data

DELE
GET
MSGG
PUTB
ROUB
=
=
=
=
=
Delete a message from a MERVA queue

Read a message from a MERVA queue
Map a message from internal buffer to external format
Move a message to another MERVA queue
Route a message to a MERVA queue with automatic delete
---
Stage 1
---
No. of elements matching QSN and KEY .. : 5

No. of messages GET ok ................ : 5
No. of messages GET failed ............ : 0
No. of messages MSGG ok ............... : 4
No. of messages MSGG intrc 00 (checking): 1
No. of messages MSGG failed ........... : 0
No. of messages written to dataset .... : 5
No. of records written to dataset ..... : 5
No. of messages write to dataset failed : 0
DSLSDOR_030I : Number
Number
Number
Number
of
of
of
of
(matching) input messages read ..

messages ok .....................
messages in error ...............
messages written to DSLSDSO .....
:
:
:
:
5
4
1
5
DSLSDOR_023I : DSLSDOR ended with return code 4 - Warning.

DSLSDOR_031I : DSLSDOR ended at 9. Apr. 1999 18:38:11
Figure 86. DSLSDOR (Sequential Data Set Output) Sample Printout (Part 2 of 2)
Listing Fields
For stage 1:
ERROR
> indicates an error with the message, for example, a

checking error, or the PUT to the intermediate queue failed.
MATCH

MSGDST, MSGNET, or SWBHLT value.
Number
Running number.
Input QSN
QSN of the message in the input queue.
MT
Message type (MSGNET).

253
GET rc
Return code of API function GET - ok indicates that the

message was successfully read from the input queue.
MSGG rc
Return code of API function MSGG - ok indicates that the

message was successfully translated from the internal
MERVA ESA format to the external format.
Output
Output medium.
DSLSDSO
The normal sequential output data set.
DSLSDSA
The alternate sequential output data set.
queue name
The error queue name.
rc
Return code of the Output operation, either EXECIO to a

sequential data set, or PUT or ROUTE of erroneous
messages to an error queue.
Length
Length of external format of the message in characters.
Output QSN
QSN of the erroneous message in the error queue.
Key 1
Key-1 value. Is printed in the second line, but only if

specified as selection criterion or log level 3.
Key 2
Key-2 value. Is printed in the second line, but only if

specified as selection criterion or log level 3.
MSGDST
SWIFT master destination. Is printed in the second line,

but only if specified as selection criterion or log level 3.
SWBHLT
SWIFT basic header logical terminal address. Is printed in

the second line, but only if specified as selection criterion
or log level 3.
For performance information of stage 1:
254
Operations Guide
Number
Running number.
Input QSN
MT
Message type (MSGNET).
Length
Length of external format of the message in characters.
GET rc
Return code of API function GET ok indicates that the

message was successfully read from the input queue.
GET time
Time in seconds spent in API function GET.
MSGG rc
Return code of API function MSGG ok indicates that the

message was successfully translated from the internal
MERVA ESA format to the external format.
MSGG time
Time in seconds spent in API function MSGG.
PUTB rc
Return code of API function PUTB, move an erroneous

message from the input queue to the error queue. Is
printed only with Incorrect message disposition PUT.
PUTB time
Time in seconds spent in API function PUTB.
ROUB rc
Return code of API function ROUB, route an erroneous

message from the input queue to the error queue. Is
printed only with Incorrect message disposition ROUTE.
ROUB time
Time in seconds spent in API function ROUB.
For stage 2:
Err
> indicates an error with the message, for example, the

DELETE from the input queue failed.
Number
Running number.
Input QSN
DELE rc
Return code of API function DELE, delete a message from

the input queue.
DELE time
Time in seconds spent in API function DELE.
Notes:
1. With functions CHECK and KEEP there is no stage-2 processing.
2. rc <= -2 indicates an error in DSLSDOR or the REXX host command
environment, refer to the MERVA for ESA Application Programming Interface
Guide for a description of the return codes.
Messages and Codes

DSLSDOR ends with the return code:
0
Successful
Warning
Error
12
Severe error.

DSLSDOR_nnnl Message text
Where:
DSLSDOR
Identifies the message as a message of the DSLSDOR utility.
Underscore.
nnn

I
Iinformation message.
Warning message.
Error message.
Comparison of DSLSDOR with DSLSDO

v Capabilities provided by both, DSLSDO and DSLSDOR
DSLSDO and DSLSDOR both provide the following:
1. Restart capable (same mechanism as DSLSDO).
2. The messages in the output data sets can be segmented or unsegmented.
255
3. Write WTO messages about processing.

Note: WTO messages are also written to the journal.
v Advantages of DSLSDOR
DSLSDOR has the following advantages over DSLSDO:
1. The messages of the input queue can be:
Written to a sequential data set and then be deleted from the queue (this
does DSLSDO)
Written to a sequential data set but kept in the queue
Checked only.
2. A FROM and TO QSN can be specified.
3. A KEY1 or a FROM and TO KEY1 can be specified.
4. A KEY2 or a FROM and TO KEY2 can be specified.
5. You specify that only messages are processed that match a specified:
MSGDST (SWIFT master destination)
MSGNET (message type)
SWBHLT (SWIFT basic header logical terminal address).
6. Additional incorrect message dispositions:
ACCEPTALT
Write incorrect messages to an alternate output data set.
DROP
Drop incorrect messages.
INCORRONLY
Only incorrect messages are processed.
PUT
Incorrect messages are put to an error queue.
7. Detailed error message for each message.
8. Overview and detailed statistical data.
9. The message type and key values of each message can be shown.
10. Performance information can be gathered.
11. User exits to check the queue names.
12. Tells name of output data sets (by using internal control blocks, z/OS only).
13. ISPF front-end panel DSLSDORP (z/OS only).
v Restrictions of DSLSDOR
DSLSDOR has the following restrictions compared to DSLSDO:
1. For the output data sets only DISP=OLD and DISP=NEW are possible,
DISP=MOD is not supported.
2. The output data sets must be on disk (not on tape).
3. Does not support VBS records.
4. Supports only message format Q, S, and W.
5. UMR is also written for the restart message.
6. User exit DSLMU022 is not supported.
256
Operations Guide
Chapter 17. Sequential Data Set Unload in REXX (DSLSDUR)

DSLSDUR unloads the messages from all or specified MERVA ESA queues and
writes them together with the following information to a sequential data set:
v Queue name
v QSN
v Key 1 and key 2
v Write back indicator
v Date and time of unload
v Length of the message in the unloaded format.
The messages are kept in their queues, that is, they are not deleted. You can use
DSLSDLR to load the messages back to their MERVA ESA queues, preserving the
queue name, QSN, key values, and the write back indicator.
With enhanced DB2 queue management the DB2 commit frequency is reduced as
specified in DSLPRM.
Unload/Reload Data Set Layout

DSLSDUR writes the messages in the same segmented format as DSLSDO and
DSLSDOR with a record length of 1024. The queue name, QSN, .. are written in an
extra line ahead the message lines. This extra line is identified by the character A
in column 1.
The layout of A lines is as follows:
No.
Field
Line identifier
2
3
Queue name
4
5
QSN
Date
8
9
Time
10
11
Message length
12
13
14
Write back ind.
Len Description
1 Character A
1 One blank
8 Queue name
10
6
7
Offset
11
1 One blank
10 QSN
21
1 One blank
22
8 Unload date YYYYMMDD
30
1 One blank
31
6 Unload time HHMMSS
37
1 One blank
38
8 Length of the message in the unloaded

format as written to the data set
46
1 One blank
47
1 Write back indicator: X = set, blank = not

set
48
1 One blank
257
No.
Field
Offset
Len Description
15
Key 1
49
24 Key 1 value
73
1 One blank
74
24 Key 2 value
16
17
Key 2
For example:
*** Queue L1DE0
A L1DE0
0000002831 19990916 111258 00000136
MYKEY1A
0{1:F01VNDEBET2AXXX0000000000}{2:I100VNDOBET2AXXXN}{4: :20:001
A L1DE0
0000002832 19990916 111258 00000128
MYKEY1B
0{1:F01VNDEBET2AXXX0000000000}{2:I100VNDOBET2AXXXN}{4: :20:002
:32A:980101DEM..
:32A:980101USD..
Figure 87. DSLSDUR (Sequential Data Set Unload) Sample Unload Data Set
The output data set must have record format FB and logical record length 1024.
Under VSE, the data set is written with BLKSIZE 6144, RECFORM FIXBLK, and
RECSIZE 1024.

The following figure shows the z/OS JCL to unload MERVA ESA queues in batch.
//....... JOB ............
//REXXB
EXEC PGM=DSLAREXX,REGION=8M,PARM=DSLSDUR
//*
//SYSTSIN DD *
* HELP
= c
QUEUE
= cccccccc
QUEUE
= cccccccc
QUEUE
= cccccccc
LOGLEVEL
= n
; Log level 1 .. 4
/*
//*
//*
//*
//*
.. IF MSGFORMAT=S/W AND CURCODE=FILE SPEC. IN DSLPRM
//DWSCUR
//*
//*
.. OUTPUT DATA SET (FB1024)
//DSLSDSU DD DSN=outputds,DISP=OLD
//*
//*
.. ON THIS PDS: DSLSDUR
//*
//*
//
Figure 88. DSLSDUR (Sequential Data Set Unload) Sample JCL (z/OS)
258
Operations Guide
Data Set Names

loadlib

programs.
curds
CURCODE=FILE is specified in your DSLPRM. Must be record
format FB, logical record length 1024, and have DISP=OLD or
DISP=NEW.
outputds
The name of the output data set.
samplib
The name of the library containing the program DSLSDUR.
listds
The name of the listing data set. The data set must be preallocated,
record format VB, logical record length 136 recommended.

The following figure shows the VSE JCL to run DSLSDUR.
// JOB DSLSDUR ...
// DLBL DSLSDSU,outfile,0,SD
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION NODUMP
// EXEC DSLAREXX,SIZE=300K,PARM=DSLSDUR
* HELP
= c
QUEUE
= cccccccc
QUEUE
= cccccccc
QUEUE
= cccccccc
LOGLEVEL
= n
; Log level 1 .. 4
/*
/&
Figure 89. DSLSDUR (Sequential Data Set Unload) Sample JCL (VSE)
Data Set Names

volid

outfile
extent information
The extent information of the output file.
program library
259
Runtime Parameters
The runtime parameters are passed to DSLSDUR via SYSTSIN under z/OS and via
coded on a separate line. The input is folded to uppercase, and leading and trailing
blanks are stripped off from the specified keyword value. Lines starting with * are
treated as comments, a ; starts a line comment.
Required Parameters
MSGFORMAT
Q
MERVA ESA queue format (recommended)
S.W.I.F.T. I
S.W.I.F.T. II.

QUEUE
Queue name or queue name pattern. The messages of these queues will be
processed. The entered queue name can be checked in a user exit of DSLSDUR.
This parameter can be specified multiple times. It must be specified at least
once. To unload, for example, all queues which names start with L1, and the
queues L2DE0 and L3DE0, you would specify:
QUEUE = L1*
QUEUE = L2DE0
QUEUE = L3DE0
Optional Parameters
ACTIVEUSERS
Indicates whether active users are allowed:
CMDONLY
Active users in function CMD, FLM, MSC, and USRx are

allowed.
NO
Active users are not allowed.
YES
Active users are allowed.

LOGLEVEL
Log level:
1
Detailed statistical data of the API calls GETU and MSGG is shown.
A WTO message Unloading .. is issued for each queue. The first and
last unloaded QSN are printed in the listing. When a checking error is
found, the MERVA messages are printed.
260
Operations Guide
Customization
The following DSLPRM parameters affect DSLSDUR:
DB2COMMIT
If QIO=(DSLQMDIO,2) is specified the commit frequency is the
first subparameter of the DB2COMMIT=(n,m) parameter.
PRTNAME

QIO
If this parameter is set to QIO=(DSLQMDIO,2) then the DB2

commit frequency depends on the DB2COMMIT parameter.
SDDB2

You can use the following routines in DSLSDUR to reject entered runtime
parameters:
USEREXIT_Q1 can be used to reject the entered value for runtime parameter
QUEUE, queue pattern.
Sample Printout
DSLSDUR program.
MERVA ESA V4.1 DSLSDUR
1. Apr. 1999
15:08:40
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
|
S A M P L E
B A N K
B o e b l i n g e n
|
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLLLLL
LLLLLL
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
UU UU
UU UU
UU UU
UU UU
UU UU
UU UU
UU UU
UU UU
UUUUUU
UUUUUU
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
Unload the messages from all or specified MERVA ESA queues and
write them with their queue name, QSN, .. to a sequential data set.
Use utility DSLSDLR to load the messages back to MERVA queues.
DSLSDUR_001I : DSLSDUR started by user HEG at 1. Apr. 1999 15:08:40
DSLSDUR_003I : Runtime parameters:
1. MSGFORMAT
- Message format ..... : Q
2. QUEUE
- Queue pattern ...... : L1*
L2*
3. ACTIVEUSERS - Active users allowed : CMDONLY
4. LOGLEVEL
- Log level .......... : 1
Figure 90. DSLSDUR (Sequential Data Set Unload) Sample Printout (Part 1 of 2)
261
DSLSDUR_005I : MERVA ID is MHEG, MERVA name is MERVAESA.

DSLSDUR_011I : The output dataset used is HEG.DSLSDU.FILE.
blocks.
DSLSDUR_020I : Number of queues to unload: 6
Number of queues unloaded : 6
DSLSDUR_021I : Overview statistical data of the unload.
E
R
R
O
R
-
B
U
+--- Messages ---+ Records
S
Number Queue
Read
Written
Written
Y
------ -------- -------- -------- -------- 1 L1ACK
1000
1000
4000
2 L1AI0
1000
1000
4000
3 L1DE0
1000
1000
4000
4 L1VE0
1000
1000
4000
5 L2ACK
1000
1000
4000
6 L2DE0
1000
1000
4000
C
H
E
C
K
-
O
T
H
E
R
-
DSLSDUR_022I : Total number of

- messages unloaded
: 6.000
- msg records written : 24.000
- msg bytes written
: 8.250.345
DSLSDUR_018I : DSLSDUR ended with return code 0 - successful.
DSLSDUR_023I : DSLSDUR ended at 1. Apr. 1999 15:10:36
Figure 90. DSLSDUR (Sequential Data Set Unload) Sample Printout (Part 2 of 2)
Listing Fields
The Overview statistical data of the listing contains the following information:
ERROR
> indicates an error with the queue, for example, messages could
not be read or messages are BUSY.
Number
Running queue number.
Queue
Queue name.
Messages Read
Number of messages read from the queue. The messages are read
with the API function GETU.
Messages Written
Number of messages written to the output data set.
Records Written
Number of records written to the output data set. The records are
written with EXECIO to the DD-name DSLSDSU. As an additional
A line is needed, and one record can hold only 1024 characters,
the number of records is always larger than the number of
messages.
262
Operations Guide
BUSY
'X' indicates that one or more messages of the queue are BUSY.
CHECK
'X' indicates that one or more messages of the queue have checking
errors (MSGFORMAT = S or W only).
OTHER
'X' indicates that one or more messages of the queue have other
errors.
First QSN
First unloaded QSN. Only printed with log level 3.
Last QSN
Last unloaded QSN. Only printed with log level 3.
Messages and Codes

DSLSDUR ends with the usual return code:
0
Successful
Warning
Error
12
Severe error.

DSLSDUR_nnnl Message text
Where:
DSLSDUR
Identifies the message as a message of the DSLSDUR utility.
Underscore.
nnn

I
Information message
Warning message
Error message
263
264
Operations Guide
Chapter 18. Sequential Data Set Print in REXX (DSLSDYR)

DSLSDYR reads as DSLSDY a batch of messages from a MERVA ESA queue and
prints them on a line (SYSOUT) printer or to a file.

The following figure shows the JCL to run the batch print program DSLSDYR
under z/OS.
//....... JOB ............
//REXXB
EXEC PGM=DSLAREXX,REGION=8M,PARM=DSLSDYR
//*
//SYSTSIN DD *
* HELP
* -- Required parameters -FUNCTION
= cccccc
; Queue Management Function
MSGFORMAT
= c
; Format ID to be used, e.g., E
QUEUE
= cccccccc
; Queue
* -- Optional parameters -BOTTOMFRAME = cccccccc
; Bottom frame MCB, e.g. 0BOT
CASE
= ccccc
; ASIS or UPPER
COMPRESSION = n
; Compression format 0 .. 4
FLDNAME1
= cccccc
; MERVA field name
FLDVALUE1
= ccccccccc.. ; MERVA field value
FROMKEY1
= ccccccccc.. ; From Key 1
FROMKEY2
= ccccccccc.. ; From Key 2
FROMQSN
= nnnnnnnnnn
; From QSN
FROMUMR
= nnnnnnnn
; From UMR
KEY1
= ccccccccc.. ; Key 1
KEY2
= ccccccccc.. ; Key 2
LINESPP
= nnnnn
; Lines per page
LOGLEVEL
= n
; Log level 1 .. 4
MCB
= cccccccc
; MCB name for print
PERFORM
= ccc
; Performance info, YES or NO
SEPARATOR
= ccc
; Separator page, YES or NO
SEPLINESPP = nnn
; Lines per separator page
TOKEY1
TOKEY2
TOPFRAME
= cccccccc
; Top frame MCB, e.g. 0TOP
TOQSN
= nnnnnnnnnn
; To QSN
TOUMR
= nnnnnnnn
; To UMR
USERPARM
= ccccccccc.. ; User specific parameter
/*
Figure 91. DSLSDYR (Sequential Data Set Print) Sample JCL (z/OS) (Part 1 of 2)
265
//*
//*
//STEPLIB
//*
//*
//DWSCUR
//*
//*
//DSLSDSY
//*
//*
//SYSEXEC
//*
//*
//SYSTSPRT
//

.. OUTPUT DATA SET (FBA133) OR SYSTEM PRINTER
DD DSN=outputds,DISP=OLD
.. ON THIS PDS: DSLSDYR
DD DSN=samplib,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=listds,DISP=OLD
Figure 91. DSLSDYR (Sequential Data Set Print) Sample JCL (z/OS) (Part 2 of 2)
Data Set Names

266
Operations Guide
loadlib

programs.
curds
The name of the currency code file. This is required only when
outputds
The name of the output data set. Should be record format FBA,
logical record length 133.
samplib
The name of the library containing the program DSLSDYR.
listds


The following figure shows the VSE JCL to run DSLSDYR.
// JOB DSLSDYR ...
// DLBL DSLSDSY,outfile,0,SD
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION NODUMP
// EXEC DSLAREXX,SIZE=300K,PARM=DSLSDYR
* HELP
* -- Required parameters -FUNCTION
= cccccc
; Queue Management Function
MSGFORMAT
= c
; Format ID to be used, e.g., E
QUEUE
= cccccccc
; Queue
* -- Optional parameters -BOTTOMFRAME = cccccccc
; Bottom frame MCB, e.g. 0BOT
CASE
= ccccc
; ASIS or UPPER
... (see MVS JCL)
/*
/&
Figure 92. DSLSDYR (Sequential Data Set Print) Sample JCL (VSE)
Data Set Names

volid

outfile
extent information
The extent information of the output file.
program library
To print the generated sequential output file to SYSLST, you may use the VSE
DITTO utility with parameter SFD.
Runtime Parameters
The runtime parameters are passed to DSLSDYR via SYSTSIN under z/OS and via
coded on a separate line. The input is folded to uppercase with the exception of
the entered KEY values and leading and trailing blanks are stripped off from the
specified keyword value. Lines starting with * are treated as comments, ; starts a
line comment.
Notes:
1. HELP as the only parameter prints a description of the runtime parameters.
2. The entered values for the following keywords are not translated to uppercase:
KEY1, FROMKEY1, TOKEY1, KEY2, FROMKEY2, and TOKEY2.
267
Required Parameters
FUNCTION
Queue Management Function:
DELete
Create a listing of the messages in the queue specified for the

QUEUE parameter, print the content of these messages to the
sequential data set DSLSDSY, and delete them from the queue.
KEEP
Print the messages to the sequential data set DSLSDSY, and do

not delete them from the queue.
LIST
Create a listing of the messages in the queue specified for the

QUEUE parameter, and do not delete them from the queue.

MSGFORMAT
Message format. Specifies the format code used to format the messages.
With COMPRESSION 0 .. 3 (PROMPT):
_
Underscore. The first system printer device format in the MCB is used.
English.
With COMPRESSION 4 (NOPROMPT):

P
Telex (new format)
S.W.I.F.T. I
S.W.I.F.T. II
S.W.I.F.T. I with address expansion
S.W.I.F.T. II with address expansion
MERVA base format.
This parameter is required when FUNCTION = DELETE or KEEP. With

FUNCTION = LIST this parameter is not required (and not used).
QUEUE
Queue name. The messages of this queue will be processed.
Optional Parameters
With the following parameters you can select the queue elements to be processed.
If not specified, all are processed:
FROMQSN
From QSN. Only messages with a QSN greater than or equal to this QSN will
be processed.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is FROMQSN = 0. See also
TOQSN.
TOQSN
To QSN. Only messages with a QSN less than or equal to this QSN will be
processed.
processed. See also FROMQSN.
268
Operations Guide
KEY1
FROMKEY1
% and *. See also TOKEY1 and the note at KEY1.
TOKEY1
KEY2
FROMKEY2
% and *. See also TOKEY2 and the note at KEY2.
TOKEY2
FROMUMR
From UMR. Only messages with an UMR greater than or equal to this UMR
will be processed.
This parameter is optional, the default value used is FROMUMR = 0. See also
TOUMR.
TOUMR
To UMR. Only messages with an UMR less than or equal to this UMR will be
processed.
processed. See also FROMUMR.
FLDNAME1
MERVA field name:
MSGDST

destination specified in parm FLDVALUE1 should be
processed.
MSGNET

parm FLDVALUE1 should be processed.
SWBHLT

logical terminal address specified in parm FLDVALUE1 should
be processed.
269
FLDVALUE1
MERVA field value:
destination.
SWBHLT.
Other Parameters
With the following parameters you can specify how detailed the information given
is and the print format:
BOTTOMFRAME
MCB name. Specifies the bottom frame MCB printed on each page
(TUCFRAMB):
NONE
No bottom frame is used.
0BOT
The standard MERVA bottom frame is used: 2 empty lines at

the bottom of each page.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, no bottom frame is used.

CASE
Print asis or uppercase:
ASIS
Print the messages as they are.
UPPER
Convert lowercase characters to uppercase (a .. z A .. Z).
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value used is ASIS.

COMPRESSION
Compression format. The compression format used for printing (TUCBCOMP):
0
No compression. Empty fields and blank lines are printed.
Field compression. Only fields with data are printed (PROMPT UNIT).
Line compression. Empty data areas are not printed (PROMPT LINE).
Field and line compression. Only fields with data are printed
(PROMPT UNIT LINE).
The message is printed in NOPROMPT format.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value used is 0. Refer to the
MERVA for ESA Macro Reference for a detailed description of the PRFORM
parameter of the DSLFNT macro.
LINESPP
Lines per page. Specifies the number of lines printed on one page
(TUCBROWN).
LOGLEVEL
Log level:
270
Operations Guide
UMR, Key 2, MSGDST, and SWBHLT are shown even if not specified
as selection criterion.

MCB
MCB name. The MCB name used for printing the message. Usually it contains
the message identification or the name of the cover MCB (TUCMSGID).
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the cover MCB 0COV is used. It is
recommended to use this parameter only in very special cases.
PERFORM
API commands DELE, GET, PRTI, PRTL, and PRTT and the z/OS or VSE
EXECIO command should be gathered. If specified, the keyword value must
be Yes or No.
SEPARATOR
Separator page. Indicates whether a separator page with a running number, the
queue name, QSN, date and time of print should be printed ahead of each
message.
SEPLINESPP
Lines per page. Specifies the number of lines printed on separator pages.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, the separator page is printed with
LINESPP lines per page.
TOPFRAME
MCB name. Specifies the top frame MCB printed on each page (TUCFRAMT):
NONE
No top frame is used.
0TOP The standard MERVA top frame is used.
This parameter is optional. If omitted, no top frame is used.
With the following parameter you can pass a user-specific parameter to DSLSDYR:
USERPARM
User-specific parameter. The specified data is accepted by DSLSDYR and

VSEBLKSIZE
DSLSDSY BLKSIZE. BLKSIZE of output SAM file DSLSDSY, maximum 32761.
271
VSERECFORM
DSLSDSY RECFORM. RECFORM of output SAM file DSLSDSY: FIXUNB,
VSERECSIZE
DSLSDSY RECSIZE. RECSIZE of output SAM file DSLSDSY, maximum 32761.
This parameter is required under VSE, when VSERECFORM = FIXUNB or
FIXBLK.
Customization
The following DSLPRM parameters affect DSLSDYR:
PRTNAME

SDDB2

In the customization section of DSLSDYR you can set the following

installation-specific variable:
valid_msgformat
With FUNCTION DELETE and KEEP the entered

value for the runtime parameter MSGFORMAT is
checked against the variable valid_msgformat.
You can use the following routine in DSLSDYR to reject entered runtime
parameters:
v USEREXIT_Q1 can be used to reject the entered value for runtime parameter
QUEUE, queue to be printed.
272
Operations Guide
Sample Printout
DSLSDYR program.
MERVA ESA V4.1 DSLSDYR
13. Jan. 1999
16:59:43
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
|
S A M P L E
B A N K
B o e b l i n g e n
|
+ ----------------------------------------------------------- +
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLL
LLLLLL
LLLLLL
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
SS
SS
SSSSSS
SSSSSS
DDDDD
DDDDDD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DD DD
DDDDDD
DDDDD
YY YY
YY YY
YY YY
YY YY
YYYY
YYYY
YY
YY
YY
YY
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RRRRR
RRRRRR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
RR RR
REXX version of DSLSDY - Sequential Data Set Print.

DSLSDYR_001I : DSLSDYR started by user HEG at 13. Jan. 1999 16:59:43
DSLSDYR_003I : Runtime parameters:
1. FUNCTION
2. MSGFORMAT
- Message format ID
3. QUEUE
- Queue name ........
4. BOTTOMFRAME - Bottom frame MCB ..
5. CASE
- ASIS or UPPER .....
6. COMPRESSION - Compression format
7. FLDNAME1
- MERVA field name ..
8. FLDVALUE1
- MERVA field value
9. FROMKEY1
- From KEY1 .........
10. FROMKEY2
- From KEY2 .........
11. FROMQSN
- From QSN ..........
12. FROMUMR
- From UMR ..........
13. KEY1
- KEY1 ..............
14. KEY2
- KEY2 ..............
15. LINESPP
- Lines per page ....
16. LOGLEVEL
- Log level .........
17. MCB
- MCB name for print
18. PERFORM
- Performance info ..
19. SEPARATOR
- Separator page ...
20. SEPLINESPP - Lines per sep. page
21. TOKEY1
- To KEY1 ...........
22. TOKEY2
- To KEY2 ...........
23. TOPFRAME
- Top frame MCB .....
24. TOQSN
- To QSN ............
25. TOUMR
- To UMR ............
26. USERPARM
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
KEEP
_ (blank)
L2DE0
0BOT
ASIS
1
60
3
YES
YES
20
0TOP
MYDATA
Figure 93. DSLSDYR (Sequential Data Set Print) Sample Printout (Part 1 of 3)
273
DSLSDYR_005I : MERVA ID is MHEG, MERVA name is MERVAESA.

DSLSDYR_006I : Queue management module ..... : DSLQMCNV
DSLSDYR_008I : There are 14 queue elements matching the specified
From/To QSN, (From/To) KEY1, and (From/To) KEY2.
DSLSDYR_010I : The output data set used is HEG.DSLSDY.FILE.
blocks.
DSLSDYR_021I : Detailed statistical data
Note: Running no. 2, UMR, Key 2, MSGDST, SWBHLT, and no.
of lines printed are shown in the second line, when
specified as selection criterion, or log level >= 3,
or running no. 1 and 2 are different.
E
R
R
O
R
-
M
A
T
C
H Number
- -----Number
-----1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Input QSN
---------UMR no.
--------
B
U
S GET PRTL SDY DELE
Key 1
MSGNET
Y
rc
rc
rc
rc
------------------------ -------- ----Key 2
MSGDST
SWBHLT
Lines
------------------------ --------- ------------ -------
0000000904
00002559
100
0000000905
00002560
105
0000000906
00002561
106
0000000907
00002562
110
0000000908
00002563
111
0000000909
00002564
112
0000000910
00002565
190
0000000911
00002566
191
0000000912
00002567
192
0000000913
00002568
195
0000000914
00002569
196
S100
VNDEBET2A
ok
S105
VNDEBET2A
ok
S106
VNDEBET2A
ok
S110
VNDEBET2A
ok
S111
VNDEBET2A
ok
S112
VNDEBET2A
ok
S190
VNDEBET2A
ok
S191
VNDEBET2A
ok
S192
VNDEBET2A
ok
S195
VNDEBET2A
ok
S196
VNDEBET2A
ok
..
.
274
Operations Guide
ok
ok
96
ok
ok
70
ok
ok
70
ok
ok
85
ok
ok
54
ok
ok
54
ok
ok
54
ok
ok
57
ok
ok
94
ok
ok
111
ok
ok
111
DSLSDYR_022I : Performance information

PRTI time: 0.00263
PRTT time: 0.00120
Number
-----1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
QSN
---------0000000904
0000000905
0000000906
0000000907
0000000908
0000000909
0000000910
0000000911
0000000912
0000000913
0000000914
0000000915
0000000916
0000000917
Sum:
GET
time
-----0.0468
0.0077
0.0390
0.0436
0.0115
0.0127
0.0186
0.0127
0.0049
0.0132
0.0088
0.0560
0.0136
0.0172
PRTL
time
-------1.2974
0.1657
0.1896
0.2157
0.1435
0.2192
0.1548
0.1440
0.2779
0.2736
0.3186
2.6242
0.1847
0.4822
EXECIO
time
-----0.0949
0.0130
0.0116
0.0242
0.0100
0.0106
0.0108
0.0107
0.0143
0.0186
0.0174
0.2115
0.0154
0.0108
0.3063
6.6911
0.4738
DELE
time
------
DSLSDYR_023I : Overview statistical data

No. of elements matching QSN and KEY : 14
No.
No.
No.
No.
of
of
of
of
GETs
GETs
GETs
GETs
with
with
with
with
intrc
intrc
intrc
rc <=
.........
01 ..........
02 ..........
-2 ..........
PRTI ended with intrc /

No. of PRTLs with intrc
No. of PRTLs with intrc
No. of PRTLs with rc <=
PRTT ended with intrc /
rc .........
........
01 .........
-2 .........
rc .........
:
:
:
:
14
0
0
0
:
:
:
:
:
ok
2172
0
0
ok
No. of messages written to data set : 14

No. of records written to data set
: 2452
No. of msgs write to data set failed: 0
DSLSDYR_024I : Number of (matching) input messages ....... : 14
Number of messages written to DSLSDSY ..... : 14
Number of records written to DSLSDSY ..... : 2452
DSLSDYR_019I : DSLSDYR ended with return code 0 - successful.
DSLSDYR_025I : DSLSDYR ended at 13. Jan. 1999 16:59:57
275
Listing Fields
Processing information for each message
First line:
ERROR
> indicates an error with the message, for example, the

message could not be printed to the output data set, or
could not be deleted.
MATCH

FROMUMR, TOUMR, MSGDST, MSGNET, or SWBHLT
value.
Number
Running number 1, all messages matching a specified QSN

and KEY.
Input QSN
Key 1
Key-1 value.
MSGNET
Message type.
BUSY
X indicates that this message is currently BUSY.
GET rc
Return code of API function GET, read a message from the

input queue.
PRTL rc
Return code of API function PRTL, print a message line.
SDY rc
Return code of write with EXECIO to DSLSDSY file.
DELE rc
Return code of API function DELE, delete a message from

the input queue.
Second line:
Number
Running number 2, actually printed messages. May be

different from running number 1, when runtime parameter
UMR and/or FLDNAME1 are specified.
UMR no.
UMR sequence number of the message in the input queue.
Key 2
Key-2 value.
MSGDST
SWIFT master destination.
SWBHLT
SWIFT basic header logical terminal address.
Lines
Number of printed lines.
Performance information:
PRTI time
Time in seconds spent in API function PRTI.
PRTT time
Time in seconds spent in API function PRTT.
Number
Running number 1, all messages matching a specified QSN

and KEY.
Input QSN
GET time
Time in seconds spent in API function GET.
PRTL time
Time in seconds spent in API function PRTL.
EXECIO time Time in seconds spent in TSO or VSE EXECIO.
276
Operations Guide
DELE time
Time in seconds spent in API function DELE.
Notes:
1. Running no. 2, UMR, Key 2, MSGDST, SWBHLT, and no. of lines printed are
shown in the second line, when specified as selection criterion, or log level 3,
or running no. 1 and 2 are different.
2. rc <= -2 indicates an error in DSLSDYR or the REXX host command
environment. Refer to the MERVA for ESA Application Programming Interface
Guide for a description of the return codes.
The Number of records written to DSLSDSY includes the separator pages.
Messages and Codes

DSLSDYR ends with the return code:
0
Successful
Warning
Error
12
Severe error.

DSLSDYR_nnnl Message text
Where:
DSLSDYR
Identifies the message as a message of the DSLSDYR utility.
Underscore.
nnn

I
Information message
Warning message
Error message
277
278
Operations Guide
Part 3. Maintaining MERVA ESA

This part describes the maintenance of the MERVA ESA files and data sets using
utility programs.
For information on online maintenance of the MERVA ESA files, refer to the
MERVA for ESA Users Guide.
279
280
Operations Guide
Chapter 19. Using the Queue Data Set Utility DSLQDSUT

The MERVA ESA queue data set and the large message cluster contain the
messages of the message-processing-function queues. The queue data set utility
DSLQDSUT processes the queue data set and the large message cluster. It provides
the following functions:
1. FORMAT (to format the queue data set)
v To format the space reserved for the queue data set during MERVA ESA
generation and on other occasions
v To set the last unique message reference (UMR).
Before you format the queue data set, you should ensure that it does not
contain messages that the users want to keep, as all messages are deleted when
the queue data set is formatted.
2. FORMATL (to format the queue data set and reset the large message cluster)
In addition to the functions of FORMAT, FORMATL resets the large message
cluster, so that it can be reused with the formatted queue data set.
3. COPY (to copy a queue data set)
v To create a second queue data set for the duplicate queue data set feature of
MERVA ESA
v To create a backup copy.
The output queue data set must have the same space reservation as the input
data set. If the output queue data set is smaller, the COPY function cannot be
performed successfully. If the output queue data set is larger, only as much
space is used as in the input queue data set, and the rest of the space cannot be
accessed.
4. MODIFY (to modify a queue data set)
Use the MODIFY function:
v When the old queue data set is full and you want to allocate a larger one,
keeping the messages contained in the old queue data set
v When the old queue data set is too big and you want to allocate a smaller
one, keeping the messages contained in the old queue data set, and reducing
the number of empty blocks.
Use the MODIFY function with the EXCLUDE FNT control statement:
v When you have removed functions from the MERVA ESA function table that
still contain messages, and you do not want to copy these messages from the
old queue data set to the new queue data set.
Use the MODIFY function with the EXCLUDE LMC control statement:
v When the old queue data set contains references to large messages which are
not in the large message cluster anymore.
Use the MODIFY function with the EXCLUDE rbn control statement(s):
v When the old queue data set has one or more corrupted blocks, and you
want to keep as many messages as possible.
Use the MODIFY function with the REPAIR control statement:
v When the old queue data set has one or more corrupted queue element
prefixes.
Use the MODIFY function with the LASTUMR control statement:
v To adjust the last unique message reference (UMR)
281
The MODIFY function copies messages from the old queue data set (input) to
the new queue data set (output). Messages in corrupted blocks are copied if
possible. Messages can be excluded if the function they belong to is not in the
MERVA ESA function table anymore or if large messages are referenced in the
QDS, but their data is not in the LMC. Corrupted blocks can be excluded
completely if the automatic recovery of DSLQDSUT cannot handle them. When
the input queue data set has been processed completely, the rest of the output
queue data set is formatted as in the FORMAT function.
The output queue data set can have a space reservation different from the input
data set.
If the output queue data set is smaller than the input queue data set, the
MODIFY function can be performed successfully only if all messages (except
the ones excluded by EXCLUDE control statements) can be copied into the
output queue data set.
When MERVA ESA is started with a queue data set created by the MODIFY
function, a DSLQMGT restart is performed to create a new Queue Key Table.
This restart can be shorter than a usual restart as DSLQDSUT indicates to
DSLQMGT which queue data set blocks contain messages.
The MERVA ESA administrator at your installation will inform you when the
queue data set utility should be run.
DSLQDSUT must not be used when MERVA ESA is running. Under CICS, the
queue data set utility can be executed while CICS is running, but MERVA ESA
must be stopped before the queue data set utility is started.
If your installation uses the unique message reference (UMR) option, you can use
the LASTUMR control statement to set or adjust the last assigned UMR.
LASTUMR is valid only with the FORMAT and MODIFY functions, and it must be
the first of the control statements.
When LASTUMR is used, the MERVA ESA identifier is taken from the module
DSLPRM. The UMR number is taken from the control statement, and the date and
time from the current system date and time.
When LASTUMR is not used, the UMR is set to zero for FORMAT, and is taken
from the input data set for MODIFY.
REPAIR is valid only with the MODIFY function. It must be the first of the control
statements or, if the LASTUMR control statement is also used, the second one.
If your installation uses the duplicate queue data set feature, each queue data set
must be formatted in a separate job step, or you must get an exact copy of the first
queue data set using the COPY function of DSLQDSUT. This function can also be
performed using the REPRO function of the VSAM Access Method Services
(IDCAMS).
Job Control Statements for DSLQDSUT under z/OS

FORMAT
Figure 94 on page 283 shows the JCL to format the queue data set with
DSLQDSUT under z/OS.
282
Operations Guide
//.......
//JOBCAT
//QFMT
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DSLSNAP
//DSLQDSO
//DSLIN
LASTUMR
JOB ........
DD DSN=ucat,DISP=SHR
VSAM USER CAT
EXEC PGM=DSLQDSUT,PARM=FORMAT
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DSN=qdsfile,DISP=SHR
OUTPUT QUEUE DATA SET
DD *
CONTROL STATEMENT DATA SET
100
Figure 94. Formatting a Queue Data Set in z/OS

ucat
The VSAM user catalog where the queue data set is cataloged. In
some z/OS installations, this statement may not be required.
loadlib

programs.
qdsfile
The name of the queue data set.
During execution of the DSLQDSUT program in z/OS, the following message

appears on the operating system console:
IEC070I 104-203 ....
This message is caused by the formatting technique of DSLQDSUT, which uses all
available blocks defined in the VSAM cluster definition for the queue data set. The
message can be ignored. The MERVA ESA operator messages DSL601I and
DSL602I show a successful queue data set formatting action. If the UMR option is
on, or LASTUMR was specified, the message DSL621I shows the UMR status of
the output queue data set.
FORMATL
Figure 95 shows the JCL to format the QDS and to reset the LMC with DSLQDSUT
under z/OS.
//.......
//JOBCAT
//QFMT
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DSLSNAP
//DSLQDSO
//DSLQX01
//DSLIN
LASTUMR
JOB ........
VSAM USER CAT
EXEC PGM=DSLQDSUT,PARM=FORMATL
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DSN=lmcfile,DISP=SHR
LARGE MESSAGE CLUSTER
DD *
CONTROL STATEMENT DATA SET
100
Figure 95. Formatting a Queue Data Set in z/OS

ucat
loadlib

programs.
qdsfile
lmcfile
The name of the large message cluster.
283

IEC070I 104-203 ....
This message is caused by the formatting technique of DSLQDSUT, which uses all
message can be ignored. The MERVA ESA operator messages DSL601I, DSL602I,
and DSL627I show a successful queue data set formatting action. If the UMR
option is on, or LASTUMR was specified, the message DSL621I shows the UMR
status of the output queue data set.
COPY
Figure 96 shows the JCL to copy a queue data set with DSLQDSUT under z/OS.
//.......
//JOBCAT
//QFMT
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DSLSNAP
//DSLQDSI
//DSLQDSO
JOB ........
VSAM USER CAT
EXEC PGM=DSLQDSUT,PARM=COPY
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
INPUT QUEUE DATA SET
Figure 96. Copying a Queue Data Set in z/OS

ucat
loadlib

programs.
qdsfile
The name of the queue data set. For the DSLQDSI DD statement,
this is the name of the input queue data set. For the DSLQDSO DD
statement, this is the name of the output queue data set.
The MERVA ESA operator messages DSL601I and DSL602I show that a queue data
set has been successfully copied. If the data sets contain a UMR, it is displayed in
message DSL621I.
MODIFY
Figure 97 on page 285 shows the JCL to modify a queue data set with DSLQDSUT
under z/OS.
284
Operations Guide
//.......
//JOBCAT
//QFMT
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DSLSNAP
//DSLQDSI
//DSLQDSO
//DSLQX01
//DSLIN
LASTUMR
REPAIR
EXCLUDE
EXCLUDE
EXCLUDE
//
JOB ........
VSAM USER CAT
EXEC PGM=DSLQDSUT,PARM=MODIFY
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DSN=lmcfile,DISP=SHR
DD *
CONTROL STATEMENTS
0
FNT
LMC
50
Figure 97. Modifying a Queue Data Set in z/OS

ucat
loadlib

programs.
qdsfile
The name of the queue data set. For the DSLQDSI DD statement,
this is the name of the input queue data set, for the DSLQDSO DD
statement, this is the name of the output queue data set.
lmcfile
The control statement data set DSLIN can be omitted or empty. If used and not
empty, it must contain fixed length records of 80 bytes with the following contents:
v The keyword LASTUMR starting in the first byte or after any number of blanks,
and followed by at least one blank.
v A number indicating the last UMR to be used. At least one blank must follow.
v Any character following the blank after the UMR is treated as comment.
v The keyword REPAIR starting in the first byte or after any number of blanks,
v The keyword EXCLUDE starting in the first byte or after any number of blanks,
The characters FNT to indicate to exclude messages that belong to functions
that are not contained in the MERVA ESA function table anymore.
The characters LMC to indicate to exclude message references to large
messages from the queue data set which are not in the large message cluster.
A number indicating the relative block number (rbn) of the input queue data
set (the relative record number in the VSAM RRDS) to be excluded when
copying blocks from the input queue data set to the output queue data set.
The relative block number must be followed by at least one blank, unless it
ends in byte 80 of the control statement.
EXCLUDE rbn control statements are only needed if the automatic recovery of
corrupted blocks failed, that is, if DSLQMGT has indicated a corrupted block,
DSLQDSUT should first be run without EXCLUDE rbn control statements.
v Any character following the blank after the characters FNT or LMC or the
relative block number is treated as comment.
285
The following rules apply to the processing of the LASTUMR control statement:
v LASTUMR must be the first control statement.
v LASTUMR statements are ignored if the number is invalid or the control
statement is out of sequence.
The following rules apply to the processing of the REPAIR control statement:
v REPAIR must be the first or, if LASTUMR is also used, the second control
statement.
v REPAIR statements are ignored if they are out of sequence.
The following rules apply to the processing of the EXCLUDE control statements:
v The EXCLUDE FNT control statement must be before the first EXCLUDE rbn
control statement.
v The EXCLUDE LMC control statement must be before the first EXCLUDE rbn
control statement.
v The EXCLUDE rbn control statements must be in ascending order of the relative
block number in DSLIN. Control statements out of sequence cannot be
processed.
v Control statements that contain only blanks are ignored.
v Control statements referring to a system block of the input queue data set are
ignored.
v EXCLUDE control statements are ignored if the relative block number is not
contained in the input queue data set.
v You are informed by a message when a control statement excludes a block that
contains data.
v You are not informed when a control statement excludes an empty block.
IEC070I 104-203 ....
This message is caused by the formatting technique of DSLQDSUT that uses all
message can be ignored. The MERVA ESA operator messages DSL601I and
DSL602I show that a queue data set has been successfully modified. If LASTUMR
was specified, or the input data set contained a UMR, the message DSL621I shows
the UMR status of the output queue data set. The messages DSL622I, DSL623I, and
DSL625I give information about the number of messages copied and excluded.
Job Control Statements for DSLQDSUT under VSE

FORMAT
Figure 98 on page 287 shows the JCL to format the queue data set with
DSLQDSUT under VSE.
286
Operations Guide
// JOB ...
// DLBL IJSYSUC,ucat,,VSAM
VSAM USER CAT
// DLBL DSLQDSO,qdsfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC DSLQDSUT,SIZE=300K,PARM=FORMAT
LASTUMR 123
CONTROL STATEMENT
/*
/&
Figure 98. Formatting a Queue Data Set in VSE

ucat
The name of the VSAM user catalog.
qdsfile
program library
library.sublib The name of the sublibrary containing the MERVA ESA programs
and JCL procedures. You can code a list of sublibrary names.
set has been successfully formatted. If the UMR option is on, or LASTUMR was
specified, the message DSL621I shows the UMR status of the output queue data
set.
FORMATL
Figure 99 shows the JCL to format the QDS and to reset the LMC with DSLQDSUT
under VSE.
// JOB ...
VSAM USER CAT
// DLBL DSLQX01,lmcfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC DSLQDSUT,SIZE=300K,PARM=FORMATL
LASTUMR 123
CONTROL STATEMENT
/*
/&
Figure 99. Formatting a Queue Data Set in VSE

ucat
qdsfile
lmcfile
program library
287
The MERVA ESA operator messages DSL601I, DSL602I, and DSL627I show a
successful queue data set formatting action. If the UMR option is on, or LASTUMR
was specified, the message DSL621I shows the UMR status of the output queue
data set.
COPY
Figure 100 shows the JCL to copy a queue data set with DSLQDSUT under VSE.
// JOB ...
// DLBL DSLQDSI,qdsfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC DSLQDSUT,SIZE=300K,PARM=COPY
/*
/&
VSAM USER CAT

Figure 100. Copying a Queue Data Set in VSE

ucat
qdsfile
The name of the queue data set. For the DSLQDSI DLBL statement,
this is the name of the input queue data set; for the DSLQDSO
DLBL statement, this is the name of the output queue data set.
program library
set has been successfully copied. If the data sets contain a UMR, it is displayed in
the message DSL621I.
MODIFY
Figure 101 on page 289 shows the JCL to modify a queue data set with DSLQDSUT
under VSE.
288
Operations Guide
// JOB ...
// DLBL DSLQDSI,qdsfile,,VSAM
// DLBL DSLQX01,lmcfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC DSLQDSUT,SIZE=300K,PARM=MODIFY
LASTUMR
123
REPAIR
EXCLUDE
FNT
EXCLUDE
LMC
EXCLUDE
50
/*
/&
VSAM USER CAT

CONTROL STATEMENT
CONTROL STATEMENT
CONTROL STATEMENT
CONTROL STATEMENT
Figure 101. Modifying a Queue Data Set in VSE

ucat
qdsfile
The name of the queue data set. For the DSLQDSI DLBL statement,
this is the name of the input queue data set. For the DSLQDSO
DLBL statement, this is the name of the output queue data set.
lmcfile
program library
The control statement data set SYSIPT can be empty. If used and not empty, it
must contain fixed length records of 80 bytes with the following contents:
v The keyword LASTUMR starting in the first byte or after any number of blanks,
v A number indicating the last UMR to be used. At least one blank must follow.
v Any character following the blank after the UMR is treated as comment.
v The keyword REPAIR starting in the first byte or after any number of blanks,
v The keyword EXCLUDE starting in the first byte or after any number of blanks,
The characters FNT to indicate to exclude messages that belong to functions
that are not contained in the MERVA ESA function table anymore.
The characters LMC to indicate to exclude message references to large
messages from the queue data set which are not in the large message cluster.
A number indicating the relative block number (rbn) of the input queue data
set (the relative record number in the VSAM RRDS) to be excluded when
copying blocks from the input queue data set to the output queue data set.
The relative block number must be followed by at least one blank, unless it
ends in byte 80 of the control statement.
EXCLUDE rbn control statements are only needed if the automatic recovery of
corrupted blocks failed, that is, if DSLQMGT has indicated a corrupted block,
DSLQDSUT should first be run without EXCLUDE rbn control statements.
289
v Any character following the blank after the characters FNT or the relative block
number is treated as comment.
The following rules apply to the processing of the LASTUMR control statement:
v LASTUMR must be the first control statement.
v LASTUMR statements are ignored if the number is invalid or the control
statement is out of sequence.
The following rules apply to the processing of the REPAIR control statement:
v REPAIR must be the first or, if LASTUMR is also used, the second control
statement.
v REPAIR statements are ignored if they are out of sequence.
The following rules apply to the processing of the EXCLUDE control statements:
v The EXCLUDE FNT control statement must be before the first EXCLUDE rbn
control statement.
v The EXCLUDE LMC control statement must be before the first EXCLUDE rbn
control statement.
v The EXCLUDE rbn control statements must be in ascending order of the relative
block number in SYSIPT. Control statements out of sequence cannot be
processed.
v Control statements containing only blanks are ignored.
v Control statements referring to a system block of the input queue data set are
ignored.
v EXCLUDE control statements are ignored if the relative block number is not
contained in the input queue data set.
v You are informed by a message when a control statement excludes a block that
contains data.
v You are not informed when a control statement excludes an empty block.
set has been successfully modified. If LASTUMR was specified, or the input data
set contained a UMR, the message DSL621I shows the UMR status of the output
queue data set. The messages DSL622I, DSL623I, and DSL625I give information
about the number of messages copied and excluded.
290
Operations Guide
Chapter 20. Using the Large Message Cluster Maintenance

Utility DSLQMNT
The large message cluster maintenance utility DSLQMNT is used for reorganizing
the large message cluster (LMC). All records referenced by the MERVA ESA queue
data set (QDS) are copied from the old LMC into the new LMC in ascending key
sequence. LMC reorganization is necessary to:
v Free unused space in the LMC. After the next startup of MERVA ESA, the
processing of the LMC is set to VSAM load mode for optimum performance.
v Synchronize the LMC with the QDS, that is, do not copy large message data that
is not referenced in the QDS. This makes the online information provided by the
commands dlmc and dlmct more accurate.
v Get status and statistics information from the LMC.
v Get an overview of messages in QDS but not in LMC.
There are two ways to reorganize the LMC:
v Define a new LMC, run DSLQMNT, and start MERVA ESA with the new LMC.
In order to do this you must terminate MERVA ESA, terminate CICS, run
DSLQMNT, start CICS, and start MERVA ESA. This method is recommended as
the old LMC is still available in case of errors.
v Define a new LMC, run DSLQMNT, copy the new LMC into the old one, and
start MERVA ESA with the old LMC. To do this, you must terminate
MERVA ESA (CICS need not be terminated), run DSLQMNT, and start
MERVA ESA.
Note: This is only applicable for CICS, there is no need to terminate IMS.
Job Control Statements under z/OS

The job control statements described here are used to reorganize and copy the
large message cluster under z/OS.

Figure 102 shows the JCL to run the DSLQMNT utility under z/OS. The new
reorganized LMC is then used in the next startup of MERVA ESA. CICS must be
restarted to use the new LMC.
//........
//LMCREORG
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DSLSNAP
//DSLPRINT
//DSLQDS
//DSLQX01
//DSLQX11
JOB ........
EXEC PGM=DSLQMNT,REGION=4096K
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=qdsfile
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=oldlmc
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=newlmc
Figure 102. Reorganization of the Large Message Cluster under z/OS

loadlib

programs.
291
qdsfile
The queue data set belonging with the old LMC.
oldlmc
The old large message cluster with possibly the following types of
large message data:
v Referenced and complete
v Unreferenced and complete
v Unreferenced and incomplete.
newlmc
The new large message cluster receiving referenced and complete

large messages during reorganization.
Copying the New LMC into the Old LMC

Figure 103 shows the JCL to run the VSAM Access Method Services for copying
the new LMC to the old LMC under z/OS. MERVA ESA is restarted with the old
LMC. The REUSE parameter must have been specified in the VSAM cluster
definition of the old LMC.
Note: CICS may remain running during the reorganization and the copying. The
old LMC remains allocated to the CICS region, and will be used in the
reorganized form when MERVA ESA is restarted.
//........
//LMCCOPY
//SYSPRINT
//NEW
//OLD
//SYSIN
JOB ........
EXEC PGM=IDCAMS
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=newlmc
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=oldlmc
DD *
REPRO INFILE(NEW) REUSE
OUTFILE(OLD)
Figure 103. Copying the New LMC into the Old LMC under z/OS

newlmc
The new reorganized large message cluster.
oldlmc
The old large message cluster now receiving the reorganized LMC.
Job Control Statements under VSE

This section describes the job control statements required to reorganize and copy
the large message cluster under VSE.

Figure 104 on page 293 shows the JCL to run the DSLQMNT utility under VSE.
The new reorganized LMC is then used in the next startup of MERVA ESA. CICS
must be restarted to use the new LMC.
292
Operations Guide
// JOB ........
// DLBL DSLQDS,qdsfile,,VSAM
// DLBL DSLQX01,oldlmc,,VSAM
// DLBL DSLQX11,newlmc,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
LIBDEF *,SEARCH=(library.sublib, ...)
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC DSLQMNT,SIZE=300K
/*
/&
Figure 104. Reorganization of the Large Message Cluster under VSE

ucat
The name of the VSAM user catalog for the large message cluster
and the queue data set.
qdsfile
The queue data set belonging with the old LMC.
oldlmc
The old large message cluster with possibly the following types of
large message data:
v Referenced and complete
v Unreferenced and complete
v Unreferenced and incomplete.
newlmc
The new large message cluster receiving referenced and complete

large messages during reorganization.
program library
volid
The volume identification of the program library.
Copying the New LMC into the Old LMC

Figure 105 shows the JCL to run the VSAM Access Method Services for copying
the new LMC to the old LMC under VSE. MERVA ESA is restarted with the old
LMC. The REUSE parameter must have been specified in the VSAM cluster
definition of the old LMC.
Note: CICS may remain running during the reorganization and the copying. The
old LMC remains allocated to the CICS region, and will be used in the
reorganized form when MERVA ESA is restarted.
//
//
//
//
//
JOB ........
DLBL IJSYSUC,ucat,,VSAM
DLBL NEW,newlmc,,VSAM
DLBL OLD,oldlmc,,VSAM
EXEC IDCAMS,SIZE=300K
REPRO INFILE(NEW) REUSE
OUTFILE(OLD)
/*
/&
Figure 105. Copying the New LMC into the Old LMC under VSE

Chapter 20. Using the Large Message Cluster Maintenance Utility DSLQMNT
293
ucat
The name of the VSAM user catalog for the large message cluster
newlmc
The new reorganized large message cluster
oldlmc
The old large message cluster now receiving the reorganized LMC.
Statistics Report from DSLQMNT

To enable you to understand the statistics report provided by DSLQMNT, a
description of the processing status and the possible contents of a large message
cluster follows.
The LMC processing mode is either load or insert.
Reorganization is recommended to regain optimum performance when the LMC is
in insert mode.
The contents of a large message cluster, which belongs to a queue data set, consist
of sets of records representing large messages.
A set consists of one record if the large message is not segmented or multiple
records if the large message is segmented. A large message is segmented if there
are more LMC records than large messages. In Figure 106 on page 295, for
example, the number of LMC Records is 196, and the Number of Large Messages
is 132. The message is therefore segmented. MERVA for ESA Installation Guide
describes how you can minimize segmentation when processing large messages
and how to optimize space usage with segmentation.
The following possible sets of records, representing large messages, can exist in a
large message cluster:
v Referenced by QDS and complete
Sets of records representing complete messages that are referenced in the QDS.
Only these sets of records are used in the reorganization process, that is, the
records are copied in ascending key sequence from the old LMC to the new
LMC.
v Unreferenced by QDS and complete
Sets of records representing complete messages that are not referenced in the
QDS. This can result from:
Abnormal end in DSLQMGT while storing a message, as the data is first
written to the LMC and then to the QDS.
Abnormal end in DSLQMGT while deleting a message, as the data is first
deleted in the QDS and then in the LMC.
The LMC does not belong to the QDS.
v Unreferenced by QDS and incomplete
Sets of records representing incomplete messages. These are never referenced in
the QDS as they result from an incomplete store or delete operation in the LMC,
for example, because of an abnormal termination of MERVA ESA.
These records are always discarded, because the associated large messages
cannot be reassembled.
294
Operations Guide
Sample Statistics Report for Old and New Large Message

Cluster
Figure 106 shows the information printed after the execution of the DSLQMNT
utility.
Statistics for Large Message Cluster
-----------------------------------Status of LMCs
-------------------Date/Time from LMC
MERVA Termination
LMC closed
Processing Mode
no
Old LMC
------------
New LMC
------------
19990320/114949
normal
since 19990319/174333
insert
19990320/130352
normal
yes
load
7.372.800
1.474.560
10
114.000
12.288
7.372.800
737.280
2
114.000
12.288
545.247
523.178
20.676
1.393
523.178
523.178
0
0
204
196
7
1
196
196
0
0
LMC Statistics
-------------------Allocated Disk Space
Used Disk Space
Number of Extents
Maximum Rec Length
CI Size
Stored Bytes
Total
Referenced
Unref - complete
Unref - incomplete
Number of LMC Records
Total
Referenced
Unref - complete
Unref - incomplete
Figure 106. Printout of the DSLQMNT Statistics Report (Part 1 of 2)
295
Large Message Statistics

-------------------Limit from DSLPRM
1.000
1.000
12.101
1.676
13.394
12.101
1.676
13.394
Length of Large Messages

Average
Minimum
Maximum
Number of Large Messages
Total found in LMC
139
132
Referenced
132
132
Unref - Complete
7
0
Unref - Incomplete
1
0
In QDS-not in LMC
2.493
2.493
------------------------------------------------------------------------OVERVIEW -- Messages in QDS, but not in LMC
------------------------------------------------------------------------Function
QSN Queue-Key1
Queue-Key2
L2AI2
4 00304
UMR
Length
23.910
# of Segments
1
Key of 1st seg
453.049
------------------------------------------------------------------------Figure 106. Printout of the DSLQMNT Statistics Report (Part 2 of 2)
The following statistical data is provided for the old and the new cluster.
Status of LMCs
Date/Time from LMC
old LMC: the date/time value from the Initial Load Record (ILR). It
is different from the date/time value of the QDS if MERVA ESA
terminated abnormally and the LMC was reused without
reorganization.
new LMC: the date/time value of the QDS put into the ILR after
reorganization.
MERVA Termination
normal: the LMC was closed normally, that is, MERVA ESA was
normally terminated the last time the LMC was used.
abnormal: the LMC was not closed, that is, MERVA ESA terminated
abnormally the last time the LMC was used.
LMC closed
yes: the LMC was always closed at normal MERVA ESA

terminations without any abnormal termination in between.
no since date/time: the LMC was not closed due to an abnormal
termination of MERVA ESA at the indicated date/time of the
corresponding MERVA ESA startup.
After reorganization no always applies for the new LMC.
Processing Mode
Either load or insert for the old LMC depending on the
reorganization status.
load always applies for the new LMC after reorganization.
296
Operations Guide
LMC Statistics
Allocated Disk Space
The amount of space allocated (high-allocated RBA) in bytes.
Used Disk Space
The amount of space within the allocated space up to the RBA of
the last byte used in the LMC.
Number of Extents
The number of extents allocated to the LMC.
Maximum Rec Length
The maximum logical record length defined for the LMC.
CI Size
The control interval size defined (or default value) for the LMC.
Stored Bytes
The amount of space used within allocated space by stored records

including the key area of the record. VSAM overhead bytes are not
included. The following details are supplied:
v total
Stored bytes of all records belonging to messages that are:
Referenced and complete
Unreferenced and complete
Unreferenced and incomplete.
v referenced
Stored bytes of all records belonging to messages that are
referenced in the QDS.
v unref - complete
complete, but not referenced in the QDS.
v unref - incomplete
incomplete.
Number of LMC Records

The following statistics about LMC records are supplied:
v referenced
Number of records belonging to messages that are referenced in
the QDS.
v unref - complete
Number of records belonging to messages that are complete, but
not referenced in the QDS.
Number of records belonging to messages that are incomplete.
Large Message Statistics
Limit from DSLPRM
The value entered in the DSLPARM macro is the second
subparameter of the large message parameter. The default value is
31900 bytes, which is the maximum size of a message that can be
stored in the queue data set.
Length of Large Messages
The following information is supplied:
297
v average
Accumulated length without key area divided by the number of
large messages in the LMC.
v minimum
The minimum length of a message in the LMC.
v maximum
The maximum length of a message in the LMC.
Number of Large Messages
The following information is supplied:
v total found in LMC
The number of complete messages referenced and unreferenced in
the QDS.
v referenced
The number of complete messages referenced in the QDS.
v unref - complete
The number of complete messages not referenced in the QDS.
The number of segmented messages where one or more
segments were found but not all segments.
v in QDS-not in LMC
The number of large messages found in the QDS having no data
in the large message cluster.
The QDS has been used previously in conjunction with a
different LMC or the QDS does not belong to the LMC at all.
OVERVIEWMessages in QDS, but not in LMC
The following information is supplied for each message that is
referenced in the QDS but has no data in the LMC:
v Function
v QSN
v Queue-Key1 and Queue-Key2
v UMR
v Length of message
v Number of segments in LMC
v VSAM key of first segment of message data.
298
Operations Guide
Chapter 21. Maintaining the Journal Data Sets

The journal data sets contain a record of system activity. MERVA ESA has two
journal data sets identified by the letters A and B. If one journal data set becomes
full or inoperable, MERVA ESA switches to the other data set. By using the
operator command jswitch you can initiate the switch at any convenient time. It is
possible to reset the new data set to an empty state at the same time. This works
only when the journal data sets have been defined with the REUSE option in the
cluster definition. For details about the jswitch command, refer to Switch the
Journal Data Sets (JSWITCH) on page 56.
This concepts allows the implementation of an automatic backup and archiving
procedure for MERVA ESA journal data sets without interrupting the MERVA ESA
processing.
The following steps should be executed in sequence:
Step1
Set the journal switch status to manual (operator or REXX API).
Step2
Switch journal data set to B with reset (operator or REXX API).
Step3
Archive journal data set A to a sequential file (IDCAMS REPRO utility).
Step4
Switch journal data set to A with reset (operator or REXX API).
Step5
Archive journal data set B to a sequential file (IDCAMS REPRO utility).
Step6
Reset journal data set B (MERVA ESA utility program DSLJRNR).
Step7
Set the journal switch status to the value once to allow emergency
switching in case of errors (operator or REXX API).
The sample jobs DSLBJJ02 (for z/OS) and DSLBVJ02 (for VSE) provided in the
MERVA ESA sample library can be used as an example of how to implement the
concept outlined above.
For users of the DB2 journal a batch utility is provided to unload, delete, and/or
print records from the DB2 table.
Printing the Journal Data Sets

This chapter contains an example of the z/OS or VSE job-control language (JCL)
you need to print the journal data sets. The installation library contains the JCL
you need to delete the journal data sets and to allocate new space. The name of the
JCL member is DSLAJOR. Depending on your installation, this job should be
executed only if the old journal data sets are successfully printed or saved.

The job control statements described here are used to print a journal data set under
z/OS.
Figure 107 on page 300 shows the JCL to print the journal data sets under z/OS.
299
//........ JOB ....

//JOBCAT
//RUN
EXEC PGM=IDCAMS
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=L
//DSLJRNA DD DSN=jrna,DISP=SHR
//DSLJRNB DD DSN=jrnb,DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
VERIFY FILE(DSLJRNA)
PRINT INFILE(DSLJRNA)
VERIFY FILE(DSLJRNB)
PRINT INFILE(DSLJRNB)
Figure 107. Printing the Journal Data Sets in z/OS

ucat
The name of the VSAM user catalog for the journal data sets.
jrna
The name of the journal A data set.
jrnb
The name of the journal B data set.

This section describes the job control statements required to print a journal data set
under VSE.
Figure 108 shows the JCL to print the journal data sets under VSE.
// JOB ......
// DLBL DSLJRNA,jrna,,VSAM
// DLBL DSLJRNB,jrnb,,VSAM
// EXEC IDCAMS,SIZE=AUTO
VERIFY FILE(DSLJRNA)
PRINT INFILE(DSLJRNA)
VERIFY FILE(DSLJRNB)
PRINT INFILE(DSLJRNB)
/*
/&
Figure 108. Printing the Journal Data Sets in VSE

ucat
The name of the VSAM user catalog for the journal data sets.
jrna
The name of the journal A data set.
jrnb
The name of the journal B data set.
DB2 Journal Batch Utility (DSLJRDUL)

For users of the DB2 journal a batch utility, DSLJRDUL, is provided to:
v unload DB2 journal records to a VSAM dataset
v delete journal records from the DB2 table
v print DB2 journal records
in any combination.
DSLJRDUL processes a range of DB2 journal records. The default range is the
whole DB2 table. Additionally a subset of journal record IDs can be selected.
300
Operations Guide
The utility runs independently of MERVA and thus does not require an active
MERVA nucleus. It is controlled by the JCL EXEC statement PARM parameter.
The batch utility can be run with JCL like the following:
//JOB JOB (acct),CLASS=..
//JRNUL
EXEC PGM=DSLJRDUL,PARM=(,
//
PRINT,DELETE,UNLOAD,
//
TO=DAY-7,
//
COMMIT=100,
//
VSAMKEY,
//
)
//STEPLIB DD DSN=user.LOADLIB,DISP=SHR DSLPRM
//
DD DSN=merva.SDSLLODB,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=DB2.SDSNLOAD,DISP=SHR
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//DSLJRNA DD DSN=merva.unload.VSAM,DISP=(NEW,CATLG),
//
RECORG=KS,
VSAM KSDS
//
KEYLEN=20,
VSAM format=20, DB2=23
//
KEYOFF=1,
//
LRECL=32760,
//
SPACE=(500,(10000,1000))
//
Figure 109. Processing DB2 journal records
In this example all journal records created more than one week ago are printed,
unloaded to a VSAM dataset in the MERVA VSAM journal format, and deleted
from the DB2 table.
The possible EXEC PARM parameters, which can be specified in any order are
described below. The default values are underlined. The parameters can be
abbreviated, the minimum abbreviation is shown in uppercase. The PARM= string
is limited to 100 characters by z/OS.
COMMit=
COMMIT defines the number of journal records (not rows) which are to be
processed by DSLJRDUL between DB2 commits. The value can be from 1 9999.
The default value is the first subparameter of the DSPLRM DB2COMMIT
parameter.
DELete/NODELete
DELETE causes all selected journal records to be deleted from the DB2
table.
FROM/TO=
FROM and/or TO can be specified to limit processing to a particular
timestamp range. Both FROM and TO can be specified either as a DB2
timestamp or as a time relative to the current minute, hour, or day:
(FROM) = (yyyymmddhhmmssuuuuuu)
(TO ) ((DAY ) -n )
(HOUR)
(MIN )
where yyyymmddhhmmssuuuuuu is a specific or, if truncated on the right, a

generic DB2 timestamp, optionally containing punctuation. The individual
parts of the date and time, dd, hh, mm, and so on, if provided, must be
complete, that is each part must contain leading zeros and may not be
truncated. However, the microseconds can be truncated on the right at any
position.
301
A truncated timestamp is padded on the right with low values if FROM, or

with high values if TO. For example:
v FROM=2003-05-23-16 is converted to FROM=20030523160000000000.
v TO=2003-05-23-16 is converted to TO=20030523165959999999.
To process just one journal record specify the precise timestamp for both
FROM and TO.
If the relative form DAY/HOUR/MIN-n is used, the FROM or TO
timestamp is set to the DSLJRDUL start time less n days, hours, or
minutes. For FROM the timestamp is rounded down to the beginning of
the resulting day, hour, or minute. For TO the timestamp is rounded up to
the end of the resulting day, hour, or minute. For example,
v FROM=DAY-1,TO=DAY-1 will process (print, unload, and/or delete) all
journal records created yesterday between 00:00 and 24:00 hours.
v PRINT,FROM=MIN-10 will print all journal records created in the last
ten minutes.
Default values are:
v FROM=0001-01-01-00.00.00.000000
v TO=9999-12-31-23.59.59.999999.
ID=
ID specifies the journal record identifiers (refer to MERVA for ESA Concepts
and Components, Appendix A) that are to be processed. You can specify
individual identifiers and/or a range, or ranges, of identifiers. If more than
one identifier is specified, they must be enclosed in parentheses, for
example ID=(04,06,40-FE). An ID is always 2 hexadecimal numbers where
the leading zero is required.
Default value: ID=(00-FE) meaning all identifiers.
PRint/NOPRint
Specify PRINT if all selected journal records are to be printed to
SYSPRINT.
Records are dumped in hexadecimal and character form.
If VSAMKEY is also specified, the records are printed in the MERVA
VSAM journal format, otherwise the full DB2 key format is used.
UNLoad/NOUNLoad
UNLOAD causes all selected journal records to be written to the VSAM
dataset with DD DSLJRNA.
If VSAMKEY is also specified, the records are written in the MERVA
VSAM journal format, which is completely compatible with the MERVA
VSAM journal datasets. The first record is a MERVA journal initialization
record, journal record ID 00. In each record the 3-digit milliseconds is
changed to a message counter within each second and the DB2
microseconds value is not preserved.
If DB2KEY is specified, the records are written with the full DB2 key
format. An initialization record is not written in this case.
The record segmentation in the DB2 table is preserved in the VSAM
dataset.
302
Operations Guide
VSAMkey/DB2Key
Determines the format of the journal records written to SYSPRINT and
DSLJRNA.
If VSAMKEY is specified, records are written in the JRN2KEY MERVA
VSAM format with a 20-character key yyyymmddhhmmsspppkkk, where
ppp
is a message counter within each second.
kkk
is the segment number or blank if the journal record is not segmented.
The first record written to DSLJRNA is a MERVA journal initialization
record with journal ID 00.
If DB2KEY is specified, the journal records are written in the JRN3KEY
format with a 23-character key containing the 6-digit microseconds value of
the DB2 timestamp yyyymmddhhmmssuuuuuukkk, where
uuuuuu
is the microseconds value from the DSLTJOURNAL TIMESTAMP
column.
kkk
is the segment number, which is never blank.
With DB2KEY a MERVA journal initialization record is not written.
For the JRN2KEY and JRN3KEY record structures refer to the following
copy-books in the indicated MERVA libraries:
v Assembler: DSLAPIJK in library SDSLMACO
v COBOL: DSLAPIJK in library SDSLMAC1
v PLI: DSLAPIJK in library SDSLMAC2
v C: DSLAPC in library SDSLMAC3.
If the EXEC PARM parameters PRINT and/or UNLOAD are specified you must
specify the following DD statements:
DD DSLJRNA
If UNLOAD is specified in the EXEC PARM, a VSAM dataset must be
defined with DD name DSLJRNA to which the journal records are to be
written.
The dataset must be defined as a VSAM key-sequenced dataset. The
datasets key length should be
v 20, if VSAMKEY format is specified in the EXEC PARM
v 23, if DB2KEY format is specified in the EXEC PARM.
The key comprises the timestamp and segment number and always starts
at byte 2. Byte 1 contains the journal record identifier.
The record length is variable. The maximum logical record length must be
large enough to contain
v the record header (50 bytes if VSAMKEY, 52 bytes if DB2KEY format),
v a fullword length factor,
v and the largest DB2 RECORD column
303
The format of the record header is defined in copybook DSLAPIJK.

DD SYSPRINT
If PRINT is specified in the EXEC PARM, each journal row selected is
printed to SYSPRINT in hex-dump format.
The logical record length is 121 where the first character is an ANSI control
character. The page length of the report is 66 lines:
v 4 heading lines, of which the last is blank
v and 62 detail lines.
304
Operations Guide
Chapter 22. Using the SPA File Initialization Program

The SPA File is used in IMS only. Its purpose is to allow a scratch-pad area (SPA)
for the MERVA ESA End-User Driver that is bigger than 32760 bytes and therefore
cannot be handled by IMS. IMS only needs to process a SPA of 320 bytes, and all
other storage is saved in the MERVA ESA SPA File. The scratch-pad area saves the
permanent storage for a user session between two conversation steps.
The SPA File initialization program (DSLEBSPA) must be run before MERVA ESA
is started the first time. It must not be run when MERVA ESA is active. The
MERVA ESA administrator at your installation will inform you when you should
run the SPA File initialization program.
The SPA file consists of three parts:
v One index record
v Three SPA file records reserved for each active end user
v SPA file extension records to store large messages.
The maximum record length is 32760. The minimum record length is 16384.
The size of the SPA File is dependent on the MERVA ESA customizing parameter
module DSLPRM that contains the DSLPARM macro.
The USER parameter defines the number of active end-users in MERVA ESA
system. The size of the SPA file must be at least 1 + 3 x USER records. When the
SPA file primary allocation is larger, the remaining records are initialized as SPA
file extension records for large message processing.
For a detailed description of how to calculate the space requirements of the
MERVA ESA SPA file refer to the MERVA for ESA Installation Guide.
Figure 110 shows the job control statements for starting the SPA File initialization
program.
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//DSLSPADD
//
//
//SYSPRINT
JOB ............
EXEC PGM=DSLEBSPA
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=loadlib
DD DSN=spafile,
DISP=(disp),SPACE=(blksize,number),
DCB=(RECFM=F,BLKSIZE=blksize),UNIT=SYSDA
DD SYSOUT=*
Figure 110. Initializing the SPA File

loadlib

programs.
spafile
The name of the MERVA ESA SPA File.
disp
The value of the z/OS job control DISP parameter. When running
the job for the first time, it must be NEW,CATLG. When running
the job subsequently, it should be OLD or SHR.
blksize
The record size (block size).
305
number
The number of records (blocks). The minimum value required is

1 + (3 x USER). The value should not be higher than
(BLKSIZE 30) 5 (3 x USER). If a higher value is specified
the remaining space is wasted, because the index record is too
small to control the additional space. The default values used in
MERVA ESA are USER=20 and BLKSIZE=32700. In this case the
minimum number of records required is 1 + (3 x 20) = 61. The
maximum number of records which can be used by MERVA ESA
is (32700 30) 5 (3 x 20) = 6474.
Note: From BLKSIZE and NUMBER, z/OS calculates the number of tracks or
cylinders required for the space allocation. When the above job is used a
second time, the SPACE and UNIT parameters can be omitted.
306
Operations Guide
Chapter 23. Using the General File Utility DSLFLUT

The General File utility program DSLFLUT can process files that are used via the
MERVA ESA general file services. These are:
v The MERVA ESA Nicknames File
v The Telex Correspondents File
v The SWIFT Correspondents File
v The SWIFT Currency Code File.
DSLFLUT has the following functions:
v To initialize a file
v To list the records of a file.
DSLFLUT reads control statements from a sequential input data set with a fixed
record length of 80 bytes. Two control statements are required in each run of
DSLFLUT. One of them specifies the function you request, the other specifies the
name of the file you want to process. Information on coding control statements
follows later in this chapter.
DSLFLUT provides for a report listing that, depending on the function executed,
shows the list of records if requested, and the final status of the DSLFLUT
processing.
On completion of DSLFLUT, register 15 contains a return code. You can see the
return code in the job listing.
There are a few exceptional events when the report data set is not written or errors
are not reported by diagnostic messages. These events are flagged by return codes
higher than 12. The return code is then the only feedback you get from DSLFLUT.
Initializing a File
Initializing a file is necessary after the definition of the file, before the file is loaded
or updated the first time: that is before MERVA ESA is started with the file. Your
MERVA ESA administrator will inform you when you should initialize a file.
Listing Records of a File

In a list, the records are shown in ascending order of their keys.
All records contain a unique key. In shared files, the unique key is preceded by an
8-byte owner prefix.
You can list all records of a file or select only some of the records by owner or
generic key. The following options are available:
v Owner listing: For a shared file, you can select only the common records or only
the private records of one specific owner.
v Generic listing: For a shared or nonshared file, you can select only the records
whose unique key starts with the specified character string.
307
v Generic listing for one owner: For a shared file, you can combine the above
options to produce a generic listing from the common records or the private
records of one specific owner.
Report Layout
The layout of the report listing is determined by a MERVA ESA Message Control
Block (MCB). A default MCB name can be specified for each file in the
MERVA ESA File Table.
You can override this default with DSLFLUT control statements, either by giving a
new MCB name or by changing specific report characteristics, such as the number
of lines per page.
Coding Control Statements

You should code your control statements in a sequential data set with records
(input records) of 80 characters fixed length and include the data set in your
DSLFLUT job. In z/OS installations, the symbolic name of the DD statement of the
data set must be DSLIN. In VSE installations, the data set must immediately follow
the EXEC control statement.
Only the columns 1-72 of an input line are interpreted; the remaining columns are
ignored. Blank input lines are allowed but ignored.
DSLFLUT treats statements as comments if the first nonblank character is an
asterisk (*).
Each input record can contain only one control statement. Continuation records are
not allowed.
Each control statement consists of a parameter, an equal-sign, and a parameter value.
These three items can be put together in one string, or they can be separated from
one another by one or more blanks.
The following list describes the parameters and their values. For each parameter,
there exists a full name and an abbreviation. The parameters can appear in any
sequence in your input data set, and each parameter can be specified only once.
COMMAND
CMD
Specifies the function you request from DSLFLUT.

The following values are allowed:
INIT
For initializing a file
LIST
For listing records of a file.
This parameter is mandatory.

DATA
DAT
Specifies the name of the file you want to process.

The file name must have been defined in the MERVA ESA File
Table by the DAT parameter of the DSLFLT TYPE=DAT and
DSLFLT TYPE=FLD macros.
This parameter is mandatory.
308
Operations Guide
GENERIC
GEN
Specifies a generic key for listing records of a file. It is only

allowed for the LIST command, and it is optional.
The maximum length of the generic key depends on the file you
want to process:
v For nonshared files, the maximum length is equal to the INFLEN
parameter of the DSLFLT TYPE=FLD macro in the MERVA ESA
File Table.
v For shared files, the above value must be reduced by 8 for the
owner prefix.
If the GENERIC parameter is used, the list shows:
v For nonshared files, all the records whose key starts with the
specified characters
v For shared files, all the records whose unique key starts with the
specified characters. The OWNER control statement can further
limit the records selected for the list.
If the GENERIC parameter is not used, the list shows all records.
For shared files, the OWNER control statement can further limit
the records selected for the list.
OWNER
OWN
For a shared file only, specifies an owner of the records you want
to list. It is only allowed for the LIST command, and it is optional.
The value can be an asterisk (*), which is the owner prefix for all
common records (common means accessible by all users), or any
user identification that is defined in the MERVA ESA user file
(indicating private ownership of records).
This parameter can be used together with the GENERIC parameter
described above.
LINES
LIN
Specifies the number of lines per report page. The value must be in
the range from 1 to 99. This parameter is optional.
When records of a file are listed, each page of the report is filled
with as many records as fit on one page, according to the number
of lines per page. Also, when a record of the file needs several
print lines, only complete records are printed on a page. For
example, when a record of the file does not fit at the end of a page,
the rest of the page is skipped and the record is printed on the
next page. Therefore a large value for LINES can reduce the total
length of the printed output.
The default number of lines is 55.
MSGID
MID
Specifies the message-ID of the MCB you want to use for

formatting the report (see Report Layout on page 308).
The value must be defined in the MERVA ESA Message Type Table
in the MTYPE parameter of the DSLMTT macro. The macro
associates the MSGID value with an MCB name.
309

The default for this parameter is the value specified in the MSGID
parameter of the DSLFLT macro in the MERVA ESA File Table.
FORMAT
FOR
Specifies the format-ID you use for formatting the report.

The value must be one alphanumeric character. The FORMAT is
the language identifier of the print section in the MCB.
One MCB can contain several print sections describing different
layouts and national languages, and the FORMAT parameter
selects one of them.
The FORMAT parameter is optional.
If it is omitted, its default depends on the COMPRESS parameter:
v E if COMPRESS = 0, 1, 2, or 3
v X if COMPRESS = 4.
COMPRESS
CPR
Specifies the compression-ID you use for formatting the report.

The value must be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4:
0
No compression
Empty fields compression
Blank lines compression
Blank lines and empty fields compression
NOPROMPT compression.

The default compression-ID is 0.
When processing the MERVA ESA Nicknames File or the SWIFT
Link Correspondents File with the MCBs supplied, COMPRESS=4
must not be used.
Note: When neither FORMAT nor COMPRESS is specified, the
defaults are COMPRESS=0 and FORMAT=E.
Environment
Running DSLFLUT requires that MERVA ESA is not started.
CICS Installations: In CICS installations, DSLFLUT runs as a batch program under
control of z/OS or VSE. When the CICS for MERVA ESA has been started,
initializing a file with DSLFLUT requires that CICS has not opened the VSAM data
set. To check the status of the data set, use the CICS transaction CEMT. This
transaction also allows you to close the data set, if this is required. After DSLFLUT
has completed, you can use CEMT to open the data set.
IMS Installations: In IMS installations, DSLFLUT runs as a DL/I batch program.
310
Operations Guide
When the IMS control region is running, and you want to use DSLFLUT to
initialize a file, the status of the DL/I DB of the file you want to process must be
set to NOTOPEN.
To check the status of the DB, enter the following IMS command at an IMS
terminal:
/DIS DB dbdname
where dbdname is the DBD-name of the DB. You can set the status to NOTOPEN by
entering:
/DBR DB dbdname NOFEOV
After processing of DSLFLUT is complete, you can start the DB by entering:

/STA DB dbdname
311
312
Operations Guide
Chapter 24. Maintaining the MERVA ESA Nicknames File

The MERVA ESA Nicknames File can be maintained in the following ways:
v By online maintenance, as described in the MERVA for ESA Users Guide
v By the General File Maintenance program, DSLFLUT.

The following describes the job control statements you can use under z/OS to
initialize and list the records in the MERVA ESA nicknames file.

The following figures show the JCL to initialize the MERVA ESA Nicknames File.
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//DSLCORN
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
EXEC DLIBATCH,MBR=DSLFLUT,PSB=DSLFLUTL,IMSID=imsid,RGN=2048K
DD DSN=imslib,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=loadlibi,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=psblib,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=dbdlib,DISP=SHR
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
DSN=namesfile,DISP=SHR
SYSOUT=L,DCB=(BLKSIZE=1370)
*
CMD=INIT
DAT=DSLCORN
/*
Figure 111. Initializing the MERVA ESA Nicknames File in IMS
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//DSLCORN
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
EXEC PGM=DSLFLUT,REGION=2048K
DD DSN=loadlibc,DISP=SHR
DD SYSOUT=L
DD DSN=namesfile,DISP=SHR
DD SYSOUT=L,DCB=(BLKSIZE=1370)
DD *
CMD=INIT
DAT=DSLCORN
/*
Figure 112. Initializing the MERVA ESA Nicknames File in CICS/MVS

imsid
The identification of the IMS control region
imslib
The name of the load library containing the IMS programs
loadlib
The name of the load library containing the base MERVA ESA
programs. This library has the low-level qualifier SDSLLODB.
loadlibi
The name of the load library containing the MERVA ESA programs
for IMS. This library has the low-level qualifier SDSLLODI.
313
loadlibc
for CICS. This library has the low-level qualifier SDSLLODC.
psblib
The name of the IMS PSB library
dbdlib
The name of the IMS DBD library
namesfile
The name of the MERVA ESA Nicknames File.
Listing Records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames File

The following figures show the JCL to list records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames
File. A control statement with the parameter OWN=YYYYYYYY causes listing of all
private records of the user YYYYYYYY.
//.......
//LIST
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//DSLCORN
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
EXEC DLIBATCH,MBR=DSLFLUT,PSB=DSLFLUTG,IMSID=imsid,RGN=2048K
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
*
CMD=LIST
DAT=DSLCORN
OWN=YYYYYYYY
/*
Figure 113. Listing Records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames File in IMS
//.......
//LIST
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//DSLCORN
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD SYSOUT=L
DD *
CMD=LIST
DAT=DSLCORN
OWN=YYYYYYYY
/*
Figure 114. Listing Records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames File in CICS/MVS
314
Operations Guide
imsid
imslib
loadlib
loadlibi
loadlibc
psblib
dbdlib
namesfile

The following describes the job control statements you can use under VSE to
initialize and list the records in the MERVA ESA Nicknames file.

Figure 115 shows the JCL to initialize the MERVA ESA Nicknames File.
// JOB ...
// DLBL DSLCORN,namesfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
// EXEC DSLFLUT,SIZE=200K
CMD=INIT
DAT=DSLCORN
/*
/&
Figure 115. Initializing the MERVA ESA Nicknames File in VSE

ucat
volid
The volume identification of the particular data set.
program library
library.sublib The names of the libraries containing the MERVA ESA programs
namesfile
Listing Records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames File

Figure 116 shows the JCL to list records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames File. A
control statement with the parameter OWN=YYYYYYYY causes listing of all
private records of the user YYYYYYYY.
// JOB ...
// DLBL DSLCORN,namesfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
CMD=LIST
DAT=DSLCORN
OWN=YYYYYYYY
/*
/&
Figure 116. Listing Records of the MERVA ESA Nicknames File in VSE
Chapter 24. Maintaining the MERVA ESA Nicknames File
315

ucat
volid
program library
programs and JCL procedures. You can code a list of sublibrary
names.
namesfile
316
Operations Guide
Chapter 25. Maintaining the Telex Correspondents File

The Telex Correspondents File can be maintained in the following ways:
v By the General File Maintenance program, DSLFLUT.

The following describes the job control statements you can use under z/OS to
initialize and list the records in the MERVA ESA Telex Correspondents File.
Initializing the Telex Correspondents File

The following figures show the JCL to initialize the Telex Correspondents File.
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//ENLCOR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
*
CMD=INIT
DAT=ENLCORDA
/*
Figure 117. Initializing the Telex Correspondents File in IMS
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//ENLCOR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD SYSOUT=L
DD *
CMD=INIT
DAT=ENLCORDA
/*
Figure 118. Initializing the Telex Correspondents File in CICS/MVS

imsid
imslib
loadlib
loadlibi
317
loadlibc
psblib
dbdlib
namesfile
The name of the Telex Correspondents File.
Listing Records of the Telex Correspondents File

The following figures show the JCL to list records of the Telex Correspondents File.
//.......
//LIST
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//ENLCOR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
*
CMD=LIST
DAT=ENLCORDA
/*
Figure 119. Listing Records of the Telex Correspondents File in IMS
//.......
//LIST
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//ENLCOR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD SYSOUT=L
DD *
CMD=LIST
DAT=ENLCORDA
/*
Figure 120. Listing Records of the Telex Correspondents File in CICS/MVS
318
Operations Guide
imsid
imslib
loadlib
loadlibi
loadlibc
psblib
dbdlib
namesfile

The following describes the job control statements you can use under VSE to
initialize and list the records in the MERVA ESA Telex Correspondents File.
Initializing the Telex Correspondents File

Figure 121 shows the JCL to initialize the Telex Correspondents File.
// JOB ...
// DLBL ENLCOR,namesfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
CMD=INIT
DAT=ENLCORDA
/*
/&
Figure 121. Initializing the Telex Correspondents File in VSE

ucat
volid
program library
namesfile
Listing Records of the Telex Correspondents File

Figure 122 shows the JCL to list records of the Telex Correspondents File.
// JOB ...
// DLBL ENLCOR,namesfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
CMD=LIST
DAT=ENLCORDA
/*
/&
Figure 122. Listing Records of the Telex Correspondents File in VSE

ucat
volid
program library
Chapter 25. Maintaining the Telex Correspondents File
319
names.
namesfile
320
Operations Guide
Chapter 26. Maintaining the SWIFT Correspondents File

The SWIFT Correspondents File can be maintained in the following ways:
v By the General File Maintenance program, DSLFLUT
v By the SWIFT Correspondents File utility, DWSCORUT.
This chapter also describes the BIC Tape Conversion utility, DWSBICCV.

The General File Maintenance program, DSLFLUT, allows you to initialize the
SWIFT Correspondents File, and to list the records of it.
Initializing the SWIFT Correspondents File

The following figures show the JCL to initialize the SWIFT Correspondents File.
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCOR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
DSN=corrfile,DISP=SHR
*
CMD=INIT
DAT=DWSCORDA
/*
Figure 123. Initializing the SWIFT Correspondents File in IMS
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCOR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD SYSOUT=L
DD DSN=corrfile,DISP=SHR
DD *
CMD=INIT
DAT=DWSCORDA
/*
Figure 124. Initializing the SWIFT Correspondents File in CICS/MVS

imsid
imslib
321
loadlib
loadlibi
loadlibc
psblib
dbdlib
corrfile
The name of the SWIFT Correspondents File.
Listing Records of the SWIFT Correspondents File

The following figures show the JCL to list records of the SWIFT Correspondents
File. A control statement with the parameter GEN=XXXX causes listing of all
SWIFT correspondents with the bank code XXXX.
//.......
//LIST
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCOR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
*
CMD=LIST
DAT=DWSCORDA
GEN=XXXX
/*
Figure 125. Listing Records of the SWIFT Correspondents File in IMS
//.......
//LIST
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCOR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD SYSOUT=L
DD *
CMD=LIST
DAT=DWSCORDA
GEN=XXXX
/*
Figure 126. Listing Records of the SWIFT Correspondents File in CICS/MVS
322
Operations Guide
imsid
imslib
loadlib
loadlibi
loadlibc
psblib
dbdlib
corrfile

The General File Maintenance utility allows you to initialize the SWIFT
Correspondents File, and to list the records in it.
Initializing the SWIFT Correspondents File

Figure 127 shows the JCL to initialize the SWIFT Correspondents File.
// JOB ...
// DLBL DWSCOR,corrfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
CMD=INIT
DAT=DWSCORDA
/*
/&
Figure 127. Initializing the SWIFT Correspondents File in VSE

ucat
volid
program library
and the JCL procedures. You can code a list of sublibrary names.
corrfile
Listing Records of the SWIFT Correspondents File

Figure 128 on page 324 shows the JCL to list records of the SWIFT Correspondents
File. A control statement with the parameter GEN=XXXX causes listing of all
SWIFT correspondents with the bank code XXXX.
323
// JOB ...
// EXTENT ,volid
CMD=LIST
DAT=DWSCORDA
GEN=XXXX
/*
/&
Figure 128. Listing Records of the SWIFT Correspondents File in VSE

ucat
volid
program library
names.
corrfile
Using the SWIFT Correspondents File Utility DWSCORUT

The SWIFT Correspondents File utility program DWSCORUT can import
correspondents data from
v the SWIFT Bank Identifier Code
from the CD-ROM must first be
TCP/IP FTP)
(BIC) Directory Update tape, or

(BIC) Database Plus tape, or
(BIC) Database Plus CD-ROM (the EBCDIC file
transferred to MERVA ESA using, for example,
into the SWIFT Correspondents File. The SWIFT BIC tapes are created, maintained,
and distributed by S.W.I.F.T.
If you do not receive these tapes from S.W.I.F.T., but instead receive the SWIFT BIC
Bankfile tape, you must use the SWIFT Link utility DWSBICCV to convert the
SWIFT BIC Bankfile tape into a format that can be used as input to the
DWSCORUT utility. The utility DWSBICCV is described in Using the Tape
Conversion Utility DWSBICCV on page 332.
DWSCORUT replaces existing records, adds new ones, and deletes records that are
no longer on the tape received from SWIFT.
DWSCORUT provides a report listing that shows the updates made to the file: for
example, the expansion data of records that have been added or deleted, and the
old and new expansion data of records that have been changed.
The report also shows any records that were entered via online maintenance or by
another program. These records remain unchanged in the SWIFT correspondents
file.
324
Operations Guide
The report includes feedback information such as the return code and messages for
confirmation, warning, or error diagnosis.
On completion of DWSCORUT, register 15 contains a return code. You can see the
higher than 12. The return code is then the only feedback you get from
DWSCORUT.
DWSCORUT reads control statements from a sequential input data set with a fixed
record length of 80 bytes. All control statements are optional. Details on coding
control statements follow later in this chapter.
Copying the BIC Database Plus CD-ROM to MERVA ESA

running under z/OS
TCP/IP FTP should be used to transfer the file from a workstation environment to
z/OS. The file on the CD is very large, therefore it is recommended to allocate the
target dataset under TSO before starting the transfer. The dataset should be
allocated as a sequential dataset (PS) with the following specifications:
record format FB,
record length of 1248,
block size of 14976.
Start the FTP session to the host (z/OS system) and login with a userid that is
allowed to write to the allocated dataset. Use the BINARY command to set the
transfer mode to binary. Use the CD (change directory) command to switch to the
required dataset name on MVS. Use the PUT command to transfer the file from
the CD to the host.
Run the job DWSCORUT to load the SWIFT Link correspondent file from the
dataset. The dataset should be specified with the DD name DWSTAPE.
Example:
//DWSTAPE
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=MERVA.UPLOAD.BICPLUS
DWSCURUT can be run to load the currency code file, if it is used in your
installation.
Copying the BIC Database Plus CD-ROM to MERVA ESA

running under VSE
The CICSICCF Host Transfer File (HTF) can be used to transfer the file from a
workstation environment to VSE. The file on the CD is very large, therefore it is
necessary to allocate enough VSAM SPACE which can include the HTF, the
DWSBICP cluster (input for MERVA DWSCORUT utility), and the DWSCOR
cluster used during MERVA processing.
1. Allocate the Host Transfer File (HTF). Use the SKIWSTF skeleton to create the
HTF (VSE/ICCF library 59).
2. Define the HTF to CICS. Modify the DFHFCTSP table (VSE/ICCF library 59)
by removing the asterisk (*) in column 1 for the following entry:
Example:
COPY IESWFCT
3.
Define the DWSBICP Cluster
325
Example:
*
// EXEC IDCAMS,SIZE=300K
DELETE BICPLUS.CD
DEFINE CLUSTER
(NAME
(BICPLUS.CD)
VOLUMES
(VOLXXX)
NONINDEXED
RECORDFORMAT(F)
TRK
(10000 0)
RECSZ
(1248 1248))
/*
4. Define the DWSBICP Cluster to CICS

Add the following entry to the currently used DWSFCT21:
DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET,
DATASET=DWSBICP,
ACCMETH=VSAM,
RECFORM=FIXED,
FILSTAT=OPENED,
SERVREQ=(ADD,BROWSE,DELETE,UPDATE),
STRNO=10
+
+
+
+
+
+
5. Rebuild the DFHFCTSP. Assemble and link-edit the File Control Table
6. Bring down CICS
7. Define the new Cluster in the CICS Start-up Job
v DWSBICP - Output file of HTF to VSAM transfer (ICCF)
8. Bring up CICS (COLD Start)
9. Send the BICxxxxx.EBC file from PC to HTF (ICCF)
v VSE/ESA FUNCTION SELECTION Panel: 386
v Please switch to PC Mode
v Send the file to the Host (for example by using PCOM)
Transfer Mode:
Example:
CICS
Transfer Type:
Example:
BINARY
Transfer Opt.:
Example:
CRLF=OFF
ASCI=OFF
RECL=1248
10. Receive the HTF into the DWSBICP (CICS)

v VSE/ESA Function Selection Panel: 381
Select the file with 7 (Move to VSAM)
Target filename: DWSBICP
11. Load the SWIFT Link correspondent file from BICDISK (=DWSBICP)
Example:
// DLBL MERVA,MERVA.PRODUCT.LIBRARY,99/365,SD
// EXTENT ,MERV41
LIBDEF *,SEARCH=(MERVA.MBASE)
*
// DLBL BICDISK,BICPLUS.CD,,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC
// DLBL DWSCOR,SW41.COR,,VSAM,CAT=IJSYSUC
326
Operations Guide
(input)
(output)
*
// OPTION NODUMP
// EXEC DWSCORUT,SIZE=200K
UPDATE=UNCOND
TAPE=BIC+DISK
LIST=ALL
/*
Using the BIC Update CD-ROM

The BIC Update file on tape 3480 will no longer be delivered by SWIFT and is
replaced by a BIC Directory CD-ROM. The same procedure as above for BIC
Database Plus can be used for the BIC Directory CD-ROM to transfer the file from
a workstation environment to z/OS.
For file allocation in z/OS the following specifications should be used:
record format FB,
record length of 855,
block size of 10260
The size of the file should allow for future growth.
Report Layout
The layout of the report listing is determined by MERVA ESA Message Control
Blocks (MCBs). You can specify in a control statement which MCB to use, or the
MCB specified in the MERVA ESA File Table is taken. There are also control
statements to change the report layout for a given MCB, for example, to specify the
number of lines per report page.
Note: The SWIFT Link supplies the MCB DWSSCOR for formatting the report.

For the control statements of DWSCORUT, the same rules apply as for the
MERVA ESA general file utility DSLFLUT as described in section Coding Control
Statements on page 308, except that for z/OS the symbolic name of the DD
statement of the input data set must be DWSIN.
DWSCORUT uses the following control statements in the same way as DSLFLUT:
v LINES
v MSGID
v FORMAT
v COMPRESS.
In addition, DWSCORUT supports the following control statements:
UPDATE
UPD
Specifies if the import will be conditional or unconditional.
UNCOND
The correspondents data is imported from the BIC

input tape regardless of the applicability date.
The applicability date is shown in the report.
If the applicability date has not yet been reached,
the return code is 4, and a warning message is
shown in the report.
327
UNCOND is the default.

COND
The correspondents data is imported from the BIC

input tape with the following conditions:
v If the applicability date has not yet been reached,
no data is processed. A return code of 8 and an
error message are shown in the report.
v If the applicability date has been reached, the
correspondents data is imported from the BIC
input tape. A return code of 0 is shown in the
report.
LIST
LIS
With this parameter you can select the parts of the report listing to
be produced. The report always includes:
v A list of the duplicate BIC codes that were ignored, and any
records where user modifications were replaced
v A summary page which shows any error messages and gives
statistical information about the file updates.
Further details can be selected with the following parameter
values:
ALL
All additional details are printed. The report lists

all records of the SWIFT correspondents file that
were added or where the expansion data was
changed, all records of the BIC input tape that had
no BIC code, all records of the SWIFT
correspondents file that were deleted, and all
records of the file that were added via online
maintenance or by another program.
LIST=ALL is the default.
TAPE
TAP
NONE
No additional details are shown in the report

listing.
CHANGES
Lists all records of the SWIFT correspondents file

that were added or deleted, and all records where
the expansion data was changed.
USER
Lists only the records of the SWIFT correspondents

file that were added via online maintenance or by
another program. These records were kept
unchanged.
NOBIC
Lists only the records of the BIC Database Plus

tape that contained no BIC code. These records
were ignored by DWSCORUT.
This parameter is allowed only in VSE, and it specifies the

attributes of the device from which you import the correspondents
data.
328
Operations Guide
NOLABEL
The device is a nonlabeled tape (855 bytes/record).
LABEL
The device is a labeled tape (855 bytes/record).
DISK
The device is a disk (855 bytes/record).
BIC+NO
The device is a nonlabeled tape (1248

bytes/record).
BIC+LAB
BIC+DISK
The BIC Directory Update tape is a nonlabeled tape with 855

bytes/record. Use TAPE=NOLABEL.
The BIC Database Plus tape is a nonlabeled tape with 1248
bytes/record. Use TAPE=BIC+NO.
The default for this parameter is TAPE=NOLABEL.
VOLUMES
VOL
This parameter is used only in VSE for nonlabeled tapes. It

specifies the number of physical tapes to be processed. You may
give a number from 1 to 9.
The default is VOLUMES=1 for a BIC Directory Update tape and
VOLUMES=2 for a BIC Database Plus file.
Environment
Running DWSCORUT requires that MERVA ESA has not been started.
CICS Installations
In CICS installations, DWSCORUT runs as a batch program under control of z/OS
or VSE. When the CICS for MERVA ESA has been started, running DWSCORUT
requires that CICS has not opened the VSAM data set of the SWIFT
Correspondents File. To check the status of the data set, use the CICS transaction
CEMT, which also allows you to close the data set if necessary.
After completion of DWSCORUT, you can use CEMT to open the data set.
IMS Installations
In IMS installations, DWSCORUT runs as a DL/I batch program. When the IMS
control region is running, and you want to use DWSCORUT, the status of the DL/I
DB of the SWIFT Correspondents File must be NOTOPEN.
To check the status of the DB, enter the following IMS command from an IMS
terminal:
/DIS DB DWSCOR
where DWSCOR is the DBD-name of the DB. You can set the status to NOTOPEN
by entering:
/DBR DB DWSCOR NOFEOV
After processing of DWSCORUT is complete, you can start the DB by entering:

/STA DB DWSCOR

The following figures show sample jobs for running DWSCORUT.
329
In these examples, the data is imported only if the applicability date of the BIC
tape has already been reached.
//.......
//IMPORT
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCOR
//DWSPRINT
//DWSTAPE
//
//DWSIN
JOB ............
EXEC DLIBATCH,MBR=DWSCORUT,PSB=DWSCORUT,IMSID=imsid,RGN=2048K
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
VOL=SER=volume,UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,NL),DISP=SHR,
DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=lrecl,BLKSIZE=blksize)
DD *
UPDATE=COND
/*
Figure 129. Import Correspondents Data from BIC Tape in IMS
//.......
//IMPORT
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCOR
//DWSPRINT
//DWSTAPE
//
//DWSIN
JOB ............
EXEC PGM=DWSCORUT,REGION=2048K
DD SYSOUT=L
DD VOL=SER=volume,UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,NL),DISP=SHR,
DD *
UPDATE=COND
/*
Figure 130. Import Correspondents Data from BIC Tape in CICS/MVS

imsid
The identification of the IMS control region.
imslib
The name of the load library containing the IMS programs.
loadlib
loadlibi
loadlibc
psblib
The name of the IMS PSB library.
dbdlib
The name of the IMS DBD library.
corrfile
volume
The volume identification of the BIC tape. If the BIC tape requires
two volumes, specify
//DWSTAPE DD VOL=SER=(volume1,volume2),...
lrecl
330
Operations Guide
The record length on the BIC tape.
blksize
The block size on the BIC tape.

The following figure shows the JCL for running DWSCORUT.
// JOB ...
// EXTENT ,volid
// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
// EXEC DWSCORUT,SIZE=200K
UPDATE=COND
/*
/&
Figure 131. Import Correspondents Data from BIC Tape in VSE

ucat
volid
program library
The name of the library containing the MERVA ESA and SWIFT
Link programs.
and SWIFT Link programs and JCL procedures. You can code a list
of sublibraries.
corrfile
nnn
The unit number of the tape unit with the BIC tape. If the tape has
two volumes, you can improve the performance by using two tape
units. Specify the units as follows:
// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
// ASSGN SYS025,mmm,ALT
If you have only one tape unit, after unloading the first volume
and mounting the second, you must enter the response NEWTAP
to continue processing.
Note: When a disk device is used instead of the magnetic tape, the
statement:
// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
must be replaced by the statements:

// ASSGN SYS025,DISK,...
// DLBL DWSDBIC,...
// EXTENT SYS025,...
using appropriate parameters. You must then also use a

DWSCORUT control statement:
TAPE=DISK
331
Using the Tape Conversion Utility DWSBICCV

The SWIFT Link tape conversion utility program DWSBICCV converts a SWIFT
BIC Bankfile tape into a tape that can be used as input to the SWIFT
Correspondents File utility DWSCORUT. DWSBICCV creates a sequential file that
has the same record layout as the BIC Directory Update tape (855 bytes per
record). In z/OS, the sequential file can be on a tape or disk. In VSE, the sequential
file must be on a nonlabeled tape.

The following figure shows the JCL for running DWSBICCV in z/OS.
//.......
//STEP
//STEPLIB
//SYSPRINT
//SYSUDUMP
//DWSBANKF
//
//
//DWSBIC
//
//
//DWSPRINT
JOB ............
EXEC PGM=DWSBICCV
DD SYSOUT=L
DD SYSOUT=L
DD VOL=SER=bankfile,
UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,NL),
DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=221,BLKSIZE=2652)
DD VOL=SER=bic,
UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,NL),
DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=855,BLKSIZE=10260)
DD SYSOUT=L,DCB=(RECFM=VBA,LRECL=133,BLKSIZE=137)
Figure 132. JCL to Convert the BIC Tape in z/OS
In this job, lowercase letters have the following meanings:

loadlib
The name of the load library containing the MERVA ESA and
SWIFT Link programs.
bankfile
The volume identification of the SWIFT BIC Bankfile tape.
bic
The volume identification of the converted SWIFT BIC Directory

Update tape. The example shows a tape, but you can also use a
sequential file on disk, using the same symbolic name of the DD
statement DWSBIC. This file will be input to DWSCORUT.

The following figure shows the JCL for running DWSBICCV in VSE.
// JOB ...
// EXTENT ,volid
// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
// ASSGN SYS026,mmm
// EXEC DWSBICCV,SIZE=200K
/*
/&
Figure 133. JCL to Convert the BIC Tape in VSE
In this JCL, lowercase letters have the following meanings:

program library
The name of the program library containing the MERVA ESA and
volid
332
Operations Guide
The volume identification of the program library.
and SWIFT Link programs for execution.
nnn
The number of the tape unit for the SWIFT BIC Bankfile tape.
mmm
The number of the tape unit for the converted SWIFT BIC
Directory Update tape. This tape must be a nonlabeled tape that
will be input to DWSCORUT.
333
334
Operations Guide
Chapter 27. Maintaining the SWIFT Currency Code File

The SWIFT Currency Code File can be maintained in the following ways:
v By the General File Maintenance program, DSLFLUT
v By the SWIFT Currency Code File utility, DWSCURUT.

The General File Maintenance program, DSLFLUT, allows you to initialize the
SWIFT Currency Code File, and to list the records of it.
Initializing the SWIFT Currency Code File

The following figures show the JCL to initialize the SWIFT Currency Code File.
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCUR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
DSN=curfile,DISP=SHR
*
CMD=INIT
DAT=DWSCURDA
/*
Figure 134. Initializing the SWIFT Currency Code File in IMS
//.......
//INIT
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCUR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD SYSOUT=L
DD DSN=curfile,DISP=SHR
DD *
CMD=INIT
DAT=DWSCURDA
/*
Figure 135. Initializing the SWIFT Currency Code File in CICS/MVS

imsid
imslib
loadlib
335
loadlibi
loadlibc
psblib
dbdlib
curfile
The name of the SWIFT Currency Code File.
Listing Records of the SWIFT Currency Code File

The following figures show the JCL to list records of the SWIFT Currency Code
File.
//.......
//LIST
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCUR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
*
CMD=LIST
DAT=DWSCURDA
/*
Figure 136. Listing Records of the SWIFT Currency Code File in IMS
//.......
//LIST
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCUR
//DSLPRINT
//DSLIN
JOB ............
DD SYSOUT=L
DD *
CMD=LIST
DAT=DWSCURDA
/*
Figure 137. Listing Records of the SWIFT Currency Code File in CICS/MVS
336
Operations Guide
imsid
imslib
loadlib
loadlibi
loadlibc
psblib
dbdlib
curfile

The General File Maintenance utility allows you to initialize the SWIFT Currency
Code File, and to list the records in it.
Initializing the SWIFT Currency Code File

Figure 138 shows the JCL to initialize the SWIFT Currency Code File.
// JOB ...
// DLBL DWSCUR,curfile,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
CMD=INIT
DAT=DWSCURDA
/*
/&
Figure 138. Initializing the SWIFT Currency Code File in VSE

ucat
curfile
program library
volid
and the JCL procedures. You can code a list of sublibrary names.
Listing Records of the SWIFT Currency Code File

Figure 139 shows the JCL to list records of the SWIFT Currency Code File.
// JOB ...
// EXTENT ,volid
CMD=LIST
DAT=DWSCURDA
/*
/&
Figure 139. Listing Records of the SWIFT Currency Code File in VSE

ucat
curfile

337
program library
volid
names.
Using the SWIFT Currency Code File Utility DWSCURUT

The SWIFT Currency Code File utility program DWSCURUT can import currency
codes from:
v The SWIFT Bank Identifier Code (BIC) Directory Update tape, or
v The SWIFT Bank Identifier Code (BIC) Database Plus tape
into the SWIFT Currency Code File. The SWIFT BIC tapes are created, maintained,
and distributed by S.W.I.F.T.
DWSCURUT replaces existing records, adds new ones, or deletes records that are
no longer on the tape received from S.W.I.F.T.
DWSCURUT provides a report listing that shows the updates made to the file: for
example, the contents of records that have been added, the contents of records that
have been deleted, and the old and new contents of records that have been
changed.
The report also includes feedback information such as the return code and
messages for confirmation, warning, or error diagnosis.
On completion of DWSCURUT, register 15 contains a return code. You can see the
higher than 12. The return code is then the only feedback you get from
DWSCURUT.
DWSCURUT reads control statements from a sequential input data set with a fixed
record length of 80 bytes. All control statements are optional. Details on coding
control statements follow later in this chapter.
Report Layout
The layout of the report listing is determined by MERVA ESA Message Control
Blocks (MCBs). You can specify in a control statement which MCB to use, or the
MCB specified in the MERVA ESA File Table is taken. There are also control
statements to change the report layout for a given MCB, for example, to specify the
number of lines per report page.
Note: The SWIFT Link supplies the MCB DWSSCUR for formatting the report
listing.

For the control statements of DWSCURUT, the same rules apply as for the
MERVA ESA general file utility DSLFLUT as described in Coding Control
338
Operations Guide
Statements on page 308, except that for z/OS the symbolic name of the DD
statement of the input data set must be DWSIN.
DWSCURUT supports the following control statements in the same way as
DSLFLUT:
v LINES
v MSGID
v FORMAT
v COMPRESS.
DWSCURUT also supports the following control statements:
UPDATE
UPD
Specifies if the import will be conditional or unconditional.

UNCOND
The currency codes are imported from the BIC tape

regardless of the applicability date.
If the applicability date has not yet been reached,
the return code is 4, and a warning message is
shown in the report.
UNCOND is the default.
COND
The currency codes are imported from the BIC tape

with the following conditions:
v If the applicability date has not yet been reached,
no data is processed. A return code of 8 and an
error message are shown in the report.
v If the applicability date has been reached, the
currency codes are imported from the BIC tape.
A return code of 0 is shown in the report.
TAPE
TAP
This parameter is only allowed in VSE, and it specifies the

attributes of the device from which you import the currency codes.
NOLABEL
The device is a nonlabeled tape (855 bytes/record).
LABEL
DISK
BIC+NO
The device is a nonlabeled tape (1248

bytes/record).
BIC+LAB
BIC+DISK
The BIC Directory Update tape is a nonlabeled tape with 855

bytes/record. Use TAPE=NOLABEL.
339
The BIC Database Plus tape is a nonlabeled tape with 1248

bytes/record. Use TAPE=BIC+NO.
The default for this parameter is TAPE=NOLABEL.
VOLUMES
VOL
This parameter is used only in VSE for nonlabeled tapes. It

specifies the number of physical tapes to be processed. You may
give a number from 1 to 9.
The default is VOLUMES=1 for a BIC Directory Update tape and
VOLUMES=2 for a BIC Database Plus file.
Environment
Running DWSCURUT requires that MERVA ESA has not been started.
CICS Installations
In CICS installations, DWSCURUT runs as a batch program under control of z/OS
or VSE. When the CICS for MERVA ESA has been started, running DWSCURUT
requires that CICS has not opened the VSAM data set of the SWIFT Currency
Code File. To check the status of the data set, use the CICS transaction CEMT,
which also allows you to close the data set if necessary.
After completion of DWSCURUT, you can use CEMT to open the data set.
IMS Installations
In IMS installations, DWSCURUT runs as a DL/I batch program. When the IMS
control region is running, and you want to use DWSCURUT, the status of the DL/I
DB of the SWIFT Currency Code File must be NOTOPEN. To check the status of
the DB, enter the following IMS command from an IMS terminal:
/DIS DB DWSCUR
where DWSCUR is the DBD-name of the DB. You can set the status to NOTOPEN
by entering:
/DBR DB DWSCUR NOFEOV
After processing of DWSCURUT is complete, you can start the DB by entering:

/STA DB DWSCUR

The following figures show sample jobs for running DWSCURUT.
340
Operations Guide
//.......
//IMPORT
//STEPLIB
//
//
//IMS
//
//IEFRDER
//DFSVSAMP
4096,15
/*
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCUR
//DWSPRINT
//DWSTAPE
//
//DWSIN
JOB ............
EXEC DLIBATCH,MBR=DWSCURUT,PSB=DWSCURUT,IMSID=imsid,RGN=2048K
DD DUMMY
DD *
DD
DD
DD
DD
SYSOUT=L
VOL=SER=volume,UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,NL),DISP=SHR,
DD *
UPDATE=COND
/*
Figure 140. Import Currency Codes from BIC Tape in IMS
//.......
//IMPORT
//STEPLIB
//
//SYSPRINT
//DWSCUR
//DWSPRINT
//DWSTAPE
//
//DWSIN
JOB ............
EXEC PGM=DWSCURUT,REGION=2048K
DD SYSOUT=L
DD VOL=SER=volume,UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,NL),DISP=SHR,
DD *
UPDATE=COND
/*
Figure 141. Import Currency Codes from BIC Tape in CICS/MVS

imsid
imslib
loadlib
loadlibi
loadlibc
psblib
dbdlib
curfile
The name of the SWIFT Currency Code File
volume
The volume identification of the BIC tape. If the tape requires two
volumes, specify
//DWSTAPE DD VOL=SER=(volume1,volume2),...
lrecl
The record length on the BIC tape
blksize
The block size on the BIC tape.
341

The following figure shows the JCL for running DWSCURUT.
// JOB ...
// EXTENT ,volid
// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
// EXEC DWSCURUT,SIZE=200K
UPDATE=COND
/*
/&
Figure 142. Import Currency Codes from BIC Tape in VSE

ucat
curfile
program library
The name of the library containing the MERVA ESA and SWIFT
Link programs.
volid
and SWIFT Link programs and JCL procedures. You can code a list
of sublibraries.
nnn
The unit number of the tape unit with the BIC tape. If the tape has
two volumes, you can improve the performance by using two tape
units. Specify the units as follows:
// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
// ASSGN SYS025,mmm,ALT
If you have only one tape unit, after unloading the first volume
and mounting the second, you must enter the response NEWTAP
to continue processing.
Note: When a disk device is used instead of the magnetic tape, the
statement:
// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
must be replaced by the statements:

// DLBL DWSDBIC,...
using appropriate parameters. You must then also use a

DWSCURUT control statement:
TAPE=DISK
342
Operations Guide
Chapter 28. Maintaining the Authenticator-Key File

The Authenticator-Key File contains the authenticator keys that the SWIFT Link
uses to authenticate the SWIFT messages.
You use the Authenticator-Key File Load program DWSAUTLD for:
v Formatting the Authenticator-Key File before it is used for the first time.
v Maintaining the Authenticator-Key File by:
Adding records to the Authenticator-Key File
Replacing existing records of the Authenticator-Key File
Listing the contents of the Authenticator-Key File
Deleting records from the Authenticator-Key File
Exchanging the authenticator keys in one record or a set of records,
depending on the change date in the records.
v Generate a report file for input to the WebSphere BI for FN RMA utility
program.
Note: Using DWSAUTLD for maintenance of the Authenticator-Key File always
creates authorized records in the file. It is not possible to create
unauthorized records, as it is during online maintenance, described in the
MERVA for ESA Users Guide.
v Unloading all or part of the Authenticator-Key File to a sequential data set. You
do this when you want to save the file or change the size of the file.
v Reloading the complete Authenticator-Key File, or a part of it, from a sequential
data set previously created by a DWSAUTLD unload operation.
When you use DWSAUTLD, you must specify the function to be carried out in the
JCL.
Calling the DWSAUTLD Program

When you call the DWSAUTLD program, you must specify what it has to do by
using one of the following function keywords in the call:
LOAD
The Authenticator-Key File is initialized or updated, or both, on a DASD. You
update the file with the DWSAUTLD input records.
You use this function keyword to initialize and load the Authenticator-Key File,
and to maintain the records in the file.
UNLOAD
Unload all or part of the Authenticator-Key File from direct-access storage to a
sequential data set.
You use this keyword to unload the Authenticator-Key File.
RELOAD
Load a sequential data set, created by the UNLOAD function, to the
Authenticator-Key File.
You use this keyword to reload the Authenticator-Key File.
343
z/OS Calls: You specify the function keyword in the PARM parameter of the JCL
EXEC statement for DWSAUTLD as shown in the following:
PARM='function [,KEYS]'
Where:
function
Is one of the function keywords described here (LOAD, UNLOAD, RELOAD).
KEYS
Specifies that the reports from DWSAUTLD are to contain the keys. Otherwise,
the keys are suppressed. A comma separates KEYS from the function parameter.
Note: Only paper-based keys are displayed. Keys exchanged by USE
workstation (BKE) are not displayed.
VSE Calls: You specify the function keyword, and the device for unloading or
reloading, in the PARM parameter of the JCL EXEC statement for DWSAUTLD. An
example of the format of this statement is shown in the following:
PARM='function,[device][,KEYS]'
Where:
function
Is one of the function keywords described here (LOAD, UNLOAD,
RELOAD).
You need not specify device if the function is LOAD.
device

DISK The unload or reload function uses a DASD for the sequential data
set.
TAPN The unload or reload function uses an unlabeled tape for the
sequential data set.
TAPL
The unload or reload function uses a labeled tape as the sequential

data set.
KEYS Specifies that the reports from DWSAUTLD are to contain the keys.
Otherwise, the keys are suppressed. If you specify KEYS but no device,
you must indicate the omission by two commas: 'function,,KEYS'.
Types of Input Record Used by DWSAUTLD

DWSAUTLD uses an input data set with records of 80 bytes fixed length. This
section describes the types of input record summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. DWSAUTLD Summary
Type of Input
Record
344
Operations Guide
Function
LOAD
FORMATx
ADDxx
REPxx
LIS0
UNLOAD
RELOAD
X
Table 1. DWSAUTLD Summary (continued)

Type of Input
Record
Function
LOAD
DEL0
EXC0
UNLOAD
UNL0
RELOAD
CHG0
Note: The home and correspondent LTs in the input records can be for a group
and can contain two or four asterisks. For example:
v All financial institutions with the same bank code, but different country and
location codes, can share a record with the address BANK****.
v All financial institutions with the same bank code and country code, but with a
different location code, can share a record with the address BANKCC**.
The two forms of group address, and the form of address with a specific country
and location code can be used in any combination.
FORMATx Records
The FORMATx input records cause DWSAUTLD to create a Version Record in the
Authenticator-Key File with a scrambled STK value. This STK is used to scramble
the bilateral keys.
The STK comes in two parts, and is generated by the User Key Management
Officer on the USE workstation. A FORMAT1 input record is used for the first STK
part, and a FORMAT2 input record for the second STK part.
If you are running MERVA ESA without a USE workstation, a dummy STK can be
generated using the FORMAT input record.
Note: The FORMAT1 and FORMAT2 operations can be run in separate
DWSAUTLD jobs, if you have two User Key Management Officers.
The layout of the records in the group is as follows:
FORMAT Record, for non-USE workstation users

Byte
Content
1-6
FORMAT keyword
Blank separator.
FORMAT1-FORMAT2 Records, for USE workstation users

Byte
Content
1-7
Keyword: FORMAT1 or FORMAT2
Leave blank
9-40
STK part (STK1 or STK2)
41
Blank or comma separator
42-45
STK part check value (STK1-KCV or STK2-KCV)
345
46
Blank separator.
ADDxx Records
Use the ADDxx records to add a record to the Authenticator-Key File. The ADD0
record must be followed by at least one key record (ADD1S-ADD3R). The
ADD1S-ADD3R records must be in the order ADD1S, ADD2S, ADD3S, ADD1R,
ADD2R, and ADD3R.
The layout of the records in the group is as follows:
ADD0 Record
Byte
Content
1-4
ADD0 keyword
Leave blank
6-13
Home LT
14-16
Blanks
17
18-25
Correspondent LT
26-28
Blanks
29
30-35
Start date
36
37-42
End date
43
44-49
Suspension date
50
51
Correspondent status
52
Blank.
ADD1S-ADD3R Record
346
Operations Guide
Byte
Content
1-5
Keyword: ADD1S, ADD2S, ADD3S, ADD1R, ADD2R or ADD3R.
Leave blank
7-38
Authenticator key
39
40-45
From date
46
47-50
From time
51
52-57
To date
58
59-62
To time
63
Blank separator.
An example of ADDxx records is shown in Figure 143.

ADD0 HOMEBANK
CORRBANK
<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
ADD1S 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF,980101,0001,980701,0001 <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
ADD1R 0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF,980101,0001,980701,0001 <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8
Figure 143. Example of ADDxx Records
Note: The < character is used in this figure to indicate characters in the input
records that are ignored.
REPxx Records
Use the REPxx records to replace a record in the Authenticator-Key File. The REP0
record must be followed by at least one key record (REP1S-REP3R). The REP1S REP3R records must be in the order REP1S, REP2S, REP3S, REP1R, REP2R, and
REP3R.
If the key record (REP1S-REP3R) is omitted, the key for that record remains
unaltered in the Authenticator-Key File record. If a key record (REP1S-REP3R) is
supplied without a key, the key for that record is deleted from the
Authenticator-Key File record.
The layout of the REPxx records is the same as the ADDxx records, except that
bytes 1 to 3 contain the keyword REP.
Note: If the old record is not found because all the records in the
Authenticator-Key File have been deleted, using a DEL0 without any
parameters (or by a FORMAT record), DWSAUTLD carries out an ADD.
LIS0 Record
The LIS0 record prepares a list of Authenticator-Key File records depending on the
specification of the home and correspondent LTs. The authenticator keys are
printed only if the KEYS parameter is used in the JCL EXEC PARM (see Calling
the DWSAUTLD Program on page 343).
The layout of the LIS0 record is as follows:
Byte
Content
1-4
LIS0 keyword
Blank separator
6-13
Home LT
14-16
Blanks
17
18-25
Correspondent LT
26-28
Blanks
347
29
Blank separator
30-36
Status selector
37
38-43
Date
44
45-46
Relationship
47
48-54
Type
55
Blank separator.
You can specify the home LT in one of the following ways:

v Enter blanks.
All Authenticator-Key File records that match the specified correspondent LT
and record selectors are listed.
v Specify the first 4 characters of the LT (the bank code) followed by four blanks.
The list shows all the Authenticator-Key File records with the specified bank
code that match the specified correspondent LT and record selectors.
v Specify a full home LT.
The list shows all the Authenticator-Key File records for the specified home LT
that match the specified correspondent LT and record selectors.
You can specify the correspondent LT in one of the following ways:
v Enter blanks.
The list shows all Authenticator-Key File records that match the specified home
LT and record selectors.
v Specify the first 4 characters of an LT (the bank code) followed by four blanks.
The list shows all Authenticator-Key File records with the specified bank code
that match the specified home LT and record selectors.
v Specify a full correspondent LT.
The list shows all Authenticator-Key File records for the specified correspondent
LT that match the specified home LT and record selectors.
If both home and correspondent LTs are specified as blanks, the list shows all
records of the Authenticator-Key File that match the specified record selectors.
The record status selector is a keyword used to limit the list to records with a
particular status. It has the following values:
348
Operations Guide
ADD
Limits the list to records that are ADD PENDING
DELETE
Limits the list to records that are DELETE PENDING
REPLACE
Limits the list to records that are REPLACE PENDING
AUTH
Limits the list to records that contain authorized data
UNAUTH
Limits the list to records that contain unauthorized data
PENDING
Limits the list to records that are ADD, DELETE or REPLACE

PENDING
The list shows all records matching the home and correspondents
LTs specified. This is the default parameter.
ALL
The exchange date selector keywords (date, rel, type) are used to limit the list to
records with particular exchange dates (3rd FROM dates):
date
This is the date for the selection test (YYMMDD).
rel
This specifies a relationship between the records to be listed and the date
given in this record selector:
type
EQ
Limits the list to records whose change dates match the date
specified.
LT
Limits the list to records whose change dates are earlier than the
date specified (excluding records with change dates of zero).
LE
Limits the list to records whose change dates are earlier than or the
same as the date specified (excluding records with change dates of
zero).
GT
Limits the list to records whose change dates are later than the
date specified.
GE
Limits the list to records whose change dates are later than or the
same as the date specified.
Indicates which change date(s) on a record should be examined when

compiling the list to be printed. The default value is BOTH:
BOTH
Causes a record to be included in the list if either the new

sending key, or the new receiving key, has a change date
that matches the rel specified.
SEND
Causes a record to be included in the list if the new

sending key has a change date that matches the rel
specified.
RECEIVE
Causes a record to be included in the list if the new

receiving key has a change date that matches the rel
specified.
Note: The dates are compared with the FROM date of the third keys in the
authorized area, unless the list command also has a status selector of
REPLACE or UNAUTH. In that case, the dates are compared with the
unauthorized area.
DEL0 Record
The DEL0 record deletes one or more records of the Authenticator-Key File,
depending on the specification of the home and correspondent LTs.
The layout of the DEL0 record is as follows:
Byte
Content
1-4
DEL0 keyword
Blank separator
6-13
Home LT
14-16
Blanks
17

349
18-25
Correspondent LT
26-28
Blanks
29
Blank separator.
The home and correspondent LTs are specified in the same way as for the LIS0
record.
EXC0 Record
The EXC0 record replaces the first keys with the second keys, the second keys with
the third keys, and erases the third keys in one or more records of the
Authenticator-Key File, depending on the specification of the home and
correspondent LTs and the date of the EXC0 record.
The layout of the EXC0 record is as follows:
Byte
Content
1-4
EXC0 keyword
Blank separator
6-13
Home LT
14-16
Blanks
17
18-25
Correspondent LT
26-28
Blanks
29
30-35
Date in the format YYMMDD (year, month, day)
36
Blank separator
37-43
Type of exchange
44
Blank separator.
The home and correspondent LTs are specified in the same way as for the LIS0
record.
You must specify a date. DWSAUTLD carries out the exchange on an
Authenticator-Key File record if the third FROM date in the record is earlier than
or equal to the date specified in the EXC0 record.
You can specify a type of exchange that has the same values as the type in the LIS0
record, and indicates if both sending and receiving keys should be exchanged
(BOTH), or only sending (SEND) or receiving (RECEIVE) keys. The default value is
BOTH.
UNL0 Record
You use the UNL0 record to select, for the UNLOAD function, which
Authenticator-Key File records you want to unload to the sequential file. The
selection depends on the home LT specification.
The layout of the UNL0 record is as follows:
Byte
350
Operations Guide
Content
1-4
UNL0 keyword
Blank separator
6-13
Home LT
14-16
Blanks
17
Blank separator.
You specify the home LT as described for the LIS0 record. For each home LT you
want to unload, you must provide a UNL0 record. If no UNL0 record is found, or
if the home LT in the UNL0 record is blank, DWSAUTLD unloads all
Authenticator-Key File records.
CHG0 Record
You use the CHG0 record to change the Home LT during the RELOAD function.
The layout of the CHG0 record is as follows:
Byte
Content
1-4
CHG0 keyword
Blank separator
6-13
Old Home LT
14-16
Blanks
17
18-25
New Home LT
26-28
Blanks
29
Blank separator.
The old and new home LTs must be a full LT (8 characters).

Only one CHG0 card is allowed.
Functions from Previous Versions

The ADD, ADD1-ADD4, DEL, EXC, FORMAT, KEY, LIS, REP, REP1-REP4, and
UNL records from previous versions are still supported for compatibility reasons.
Changing the STK Key

The following jobs must be run to change the STK key in the authenticator-key file:
1. Run DWSAUTLD UNLOAD.
2. Run DWSAUTLD RELOAD, with input cards FORMAT1 and FORMAT2.

The job-control statements you use to load, unload, and reload the
Authenticator-Key File using z/OS, are described here. Samples of printer reports
that result from loading, unloading, and reloading the Authenticator-Key File can
be found in Figure 150 on page 358.
351
Loading the Authenticator-Key File

Figure 144 shows the job-control statements you use to load the Authenticator-Key
File from DWSAUTLD input data records.
//.......
//JOBCAT
//LOAD
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DWSAUTP
//DWSAUTD
//DWSAUTR
ADD0 ...
ADD1S ...
ADD2S ...
ADD3S ...
REP0 ...
REP2R ...
REP3R ...
LIS0 ...
.
.
/*
JOB
...........
VSAM USER CAT
EXEC PGM=DWSAUTLD,PARM=LOAD,KEYS
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DSN=authfile,DISP=SHR
DD *
(refer to section
Types of Input Record Used by DWSAUTLD on page 344)
Figure 144. Loading the Authenticator-Key File in z/OS
In the JCL, the lowercase parameters have the following meaning:

ucat
The VSAM user catalog where the Authenticator-Key File is

cataloged. In some z/OS installations, this statement may not be
required.
loadlib
authfile
The name of the Authenticator-Key File.

You use the job-control statements shown in Figure 145 to unload the
Authenticator-Key File to a sequential data set.
The unload data set has a block size of 6504 bytes.
//.......
//JOBCAT
//UNLOAD
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DWSAUTP
//DWSAUTD
//DWSAUTUR
//
//DWSAUTR
UNL0 ...
UNL0 ...
/*
JOB
...........
VSAM USER CAT
EXEC PGM=DWSAUTLD,PARM=UNLOAD
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DSN=unloadfile,DCB=BLKSIZE=6504,VOL=SER=volume,
DISP=OLD,UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,SL)
DD *
(refer to section
Figure 145. JCL to Unload the Authenticator-Key File in z/OS
352
Operations Guide
ucat

required.
loadlib
authfile
unloadfile
The name of the unloaded Authenticator-Key File. The example

shows the DD statement parameters for an unload file on a
magnetic standard label tape. For unlabeled tape or a disk file, the
parameters are different. However, you must specify the
DCB=BLKSIZE=6504 parameter as shown.
volume
The volume identification of the tape that is to contain the

unloaded Authenticator-Key File.

Figure 146 shows the job-control statements you use to reload the
Authenticator-Key File from the sequential data set.
//.......
//JOBCAT
//RELOAD
//STEPLIB
//SYSUDUMP
//DWSAUTP
//DWSAUTD
//DWSAUTUR
//
//DWSAUTR
CHG0 ...
/*
JOB
...........
VSAM USER CAT
EXEC PGM=DWSAUTLD,PARM=RELOAD
DD SYSOUT=A
DD SYSOUT=A
DD DSN=reloadfile,DCB=BLKSIZE=6504,VOL=SER=volume,
DISP=OLD,UNIT=TAPE,LABEL=(1,SL),
DD *
(refer to section
Figure 146. JCL to Reload the Authenticator-Key File in z/OS

ucat

required.
loadlib
authfile
reloadfile

shows the DD statement parameters for an unload file on a
magnetic standard label tape. For unlabeled tape or a disk file, the
parameters are different. However, the DCB=BLKSIZE=6504
parameter must be specified as shown, except when migrating
from VSE to z/OS. Then the parameter DCB=BLKSIZE=6500 must
be specified.
volume
The volume identification of the tape that contains the unloaded

Authenticator-Key File.
353

The job-control statements you use to load, unload, and reload the
Authenticator-Key File using VSE are described here. Samples of printer reports
that result from loading, unloading, and reloading the Authenticator-Key File can
be found in Figure 150 on page 358.
Loading the Authenticator-Key File

Figure 147 shows the job-control statements you use to load the Authenticator-Key
File from DWSAUTLD input data records.
// JOB
...
// DLBL USERCAT,ucat,,VSAM
VSAM USER CAT
// DLBL DWSAUTD,authfile,,VSAM
AUTHENTICATOR-KEY FILE
// EXTENT SYS005,volid
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC DWSAUTLD,SIZE=300K,PARM=LOAD,,KEYS
ADD0 ...
(refer to section
ADD1S ...
ADD2S ...
ADD3S ...
REP0 ...
REP2R ...
REP3R ...
LIS0 ...
.
.
/*
/&
Figure 147. JCL to Load the Authenticator-Key File in VSE

ucat
authfile
volid
program library
The name of the library containing the MERVA ESAproduct.
executable programs and JCL procedures. You can code a list of
sublibraries.

You use the job-control statements shown in Figure 148 on page 355 to unload the
Authenticator-Key File to a sequential data set.
The unload data set has a block size of 6500 bytes.
354
Operations Guide
// JOB
...
VSAM USER CAT
// DLBL DWSATUD,unloadfile,99/365,SD
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC DWSAUTLD,SIZE=300K,PARM=UNLOAD,DISK
UNL0 ...
(refer to section
UNL0 ...
/*
/&
Figure 148. JCL to Unload the Authenticator-Key File in VSE

ucat
authfile
volid
unloadfile

shows the DLBL parameters for an unload file on a disk device.
Accordingly, the EXEC PARM specifies DISK as second parameter.
extent information
The extent information necessary for the unloaded
Authenticator-Key File on disk.
Note: When a magnetic tape is used instead of the disk device, the
following statements
// DLBL DWSATUD,...
must be replaced by the statements

// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
// TLBL DWSAUTL,...
when a standard label tape is used, and the EXEC PARM

must then be PARM='UNLOAD,TAPL'; nnn is the address of
the tape unit you use. For a nonlabeled tape, no TLBL
statement is required, and the EXEC PARM must then be
PARM='UNLOAD,TAPN'.
The /* statement must then be followed by the following
statements:
// MTC WTM,SYS025,2
// MTC RUN,SYS025
program library
The name of the library containing the MERVA ESAproduct.
executable programs and JCL procedures. You can code a list of
sublibraries.
355

You use the job-control statements shown in Figure 149 to reload the
Authenticator-Key File from the sequential data set.
// JOB
...
VSAM USER CAT
// DLBL DWSATSD,reloadfile,99/365,SD
// EXTENT ,volid
// OPTION DUMP
// EXEC
DWSAUTLD,SIZE=300K,PARM=RELOAD,DISK
CHG0
(refer to section
/*
/&
Figure 149. JCL to Reload the Authenticator-Key File in VSE

ucat
authfile
volid
reloadfile
The name of the unloaded Authenticator-Key File that is to be

reloaded. The example shows the DLBL parameters for a reload
file on a disk device. Accordingly, the EXEC PARM specifies DISK
as second parameter.
extent information
The extent information necessary for the unloaded
Authenticator-Key File on disk.
Note: When a magnetic tape is used instead of the disk device, the
following statements
// DLBL DWSATSD,...
// EXTENT SYS025...
must be replaced by the statements

// ASSGN SYS025,nnn
// TLBL DWSASTL,...
when a standard label tape is used, and the EXEC PARM must
then be PARM='RELOAD,TAPL'; nnn is the address of the tape
unit you use. For a nonlabeled tape, no TLBL statement is required,
and the EXEC PARM must then be PARM='UNLOAD,TAPN'.
The /* statement should then be followed by the following
statement:
// MTC RUN,SYS025
program library
356
Operations Guide
executable programs and JCL procedure. You can code a list of
sublibraries.
Unloading the Authenticator-Key File to MERVA USE

Workstation programs
You perform the following steps to unload the Authenticator-Key File to MERVA
USE Workstation Programs:
1. Unload the Authenticator-Key File to a VSAM ESDS (Entry Sequenced Data
Set).
If there is a DEFAULT.MODEL.ESDS.SAM file defined in the catalog (default
for standard VSE/ESAinstallation), you can let define the file automatically in
VSAM managed space. Replace the statement
// DLBL DWSATUD,...
in the job shown in Figure 148 on page 355 by the statement

// DLBL DWSATUD,unloadfile,0,VSAM,RECSIZE=6500,RECORDS=200
and run the job.

2. Use the ICCF IUI (Interactive User Interface) to move the VSAM ESDS to the
HTF (Host Transfer File).
A CICS file control table definition of the VSAM ESDS is required. You can find
a sample FCT entry in the copy book DWSFCT21:
DFHFCT TYPE=DATASET,
DATASET=DWSATUD,
ACCMETH=(VSAM,ADR),
RECFORM=(FIXED,BLOCKED),
SERVREQ=BROWSE,
STRNO=10
+
+
+
+
+
Add the following statement to your ICCF CICS startup job:

// DLBL DWSATUD,unloadfile,0,VSAM
3. Receive the file from the HTF on the USE workstation. For example, enter the
following command on the PS/2:
RECEIVE x:AUTHKEY.DAT DWSATUD (BINARY
where x is the drive where the file is to be installed.

Note: The BINARY option is mandatory.
4. Restore the Authenticator-Key File on the USE workstation via BK
Backup/Restore.
For detailed information refer to the MERVA USE Administration Guide.
You need the password for scrambling authenticator keys before they were
unloaded to the VSAM ESDS. The password is specified in parameter
AUTHUP of macro DWSPARM. The default password is UNLOADbb (bb
represents padding blanks).
You find a description of DWSPARM in the MERVA for ESA Macro Reference.
357
Examples of Reports
A U T H E N T I C A T O R
K E Y
PROGRAM FUNCTION = L O A D
LIST OF THE READ UPDATE RECORDS :
F I L E
BATCH PROGRAM - DATE 07 JUN 1999 TIME 18:11:01
ADD0 VNDEBET2
BARCGB22
ADD1S 980101 0001 980701 0001
ADD1R 980101 0001 980701 0001
ADD0 VNDEBET2
COBADEFF
ADD1S 980101 0001 980701 0001
ADD2S 980701 0001 980101 0001
ADD3S 990101 0001 990701 0001
ADD1R 980101 0001 980701 0001
ADD2R 980701 0001 980101 0001
ADD3R 990101 0001 990701 0001
DWS847I Update causes record to contain a non-recommended key
REP0 VNDEBET2
COBADEFF
REP3S 991201 0001 990701 0001
REP3R 990101 0001 990701 0001
DWS738I FROM date/time must equal previous keys EXPIRE date/time
EXC0 VNDEBET2
COBADEFF
HOME LT CORR LT
VNDEBET2 COBADEFF
** WARNING **
** ERROR **
980301
PENDING
STATUS
<------------ DISPLAY OF AUTHORIZED AREA ------------------>

BILATERAL KEY ID FROM
TO
1ST SENDING
19980101 0001 19980701 0001
2ND SENDING
19980701 0001 19990101 0001
3RD SENDING
19990101 0001 19990701 0001
1ST RECEIVING
19980101 0001 19980701 0001
2ND RECEIVING
19980701 0001 19990101 0001
3RD RECEIVING
19990101 0001 19990701 0001
PENDING
STATUS
<------------ DISPLAY OF AUTHORIZED AREA ----------------->

TO
1ST SENDING
19980101 0001 19980701 0001
1ST RECEIVING
19980101 0001 19980701 0001
1ST SENDING
19980701 0001 19990101 0001
2ND SENDING
19990101 0001 19990701 0001
1ST RECEIVING
19980701 0001 19990101 0001
2ND RECEIVING
19990101 0001 19990701 0001
LIS0 VNDEBET2
HOME LT CORR LT
VNDEBET2 BARCGB22
VNDEBET2 COBADEFF
ADD0 VNDEBET2
-DEUTDEFF
DWS810I Incorrect separator after Home LT
ADD1S 980101 0001
DWS845I TO date specification missing
DWS853I TO time specification missing
Figure 150. Example of a LOAD Report (Part 1 of 2)
358
Operations Guide
** ERROR **
** ERROR **
** ERROR **
S T A T I S T I C S
NUMBER OF FUNCTIONS
TOTAL
ADD
EXCHANGE
LIST
REPLACE
6
3
1
1
1
NUMBER OF WRONG UPDATE FUNCTIONS
NUMBER OF RECORDS PROCESSED
5
2
1
2
TOTAL
ADDED
EXCHANGED
LISTED
Figure 150. Example of a LOAD Report (Part 2 of 2)
K E Y
PROGRAM FUNCTION = U N L O A D
F I L E
UNL0
HOME LT CORR LT
VNDEBET2 BARCGB22
PENDING
STATUS
VNDEBET2 COBADEFF
<------------ DISPLAY OF AUTHORIZED AREA ------------------>

TO
1ST SENDING
19980101 0001 19980701 0001
1ST RECEIVING
19980101 0001 19980701 0001
CORR STATUS : VALID
START DATE :
19980301
END DATE
:
20000301
1ST SENDING
19980701 0001 19990101 0001
2ND SENDING
19990101 0001 19990701 0001
1ST RECEIVING
19980701 0001 19990101 0001
2ND RECEIVING
19990101 0001 19990701 0001
S T A T I S T I C S
NUMBER OF FUNCTIONS
- TOTAL
- UNLOAD
1
1

- TOTAL
NUMBER OF USED SEQ. DATA BLOCKS
2
1
Figure 151. Example of an UNLOAD Report
359
K E Y
PROGRAM FUNCTION = R E L O A D
CHG0 VNDEBET2
F I L E
VNDOSYN2
LIST OF THE PROCESSED RECORDS :

PENDING <------------ DISPLAY OF AUTHORIZED AREA ------------------>
HOME LT CORR LT
STATUS
TO
VNDEBET2 BARCGB22
1ST SENDING
19980101 0001 19980701 0001
1ST RECEIVING
19980101 0001 19980701 0001
DWS803I Home SWIFT LT changed to VNDOSYN2
** WARNING **
VNDEBET2 COBADEFF
1ST SENDING
19980701 0001 19990101 0001
2ND SENDING
19990101 0001 19990701 0001
1ST RECEIVING
19980701 0001 19990101 0001
2ND RECEIVING
19990101 0001 19990701 0001
DWS803I Home SWIFT LT changed to VNDOSYN2
** WARNING **
S T A T I S T I C S
NUMBER OF FUNCTIONS
- TOTAL
- CHANGE
1
1

- TOTAL
NUMBER OF USED SEQ. DATA BLOCKS
2
1
Figure 152. Example of a RELOAD Report
Using the REPORT function

A new function, REPORT, is introduced for the DWSAUTLD utility program to
generate a report file for input to the WebSphere BI for FN RMA utility program.
For each valid or suspended record in the authenticator key file a record is written
to the report file. For each record written to the report file an information message,
DWS866I, is written to the listing file (DD DWSAUTP).
The authenticator key file support in MERVA ESA must be stopped before running
the DWSAUTLD utility. Use the P SWIFTAUT MERVA ESA operator command to
stop the program. After the DWSAUTLD utility has completed, you should start
the program again using the command S SWIFTAUT. Alternatively, MERVA ESA
can be stopped and re-started.
DD statement DWSAUTW defines the report file. An example of the JCL for z/OS
is as follows:
//LOAD
EXEC
//STEPLIB DD
//SYSUDUMP DD
//SYSPRINT DD
//DWSAUTP DD
//DWSAUTW DD
//
//
//
//DWSAUTD DD
//DWSAUTR DD
LIS0
/*
360
Operations Guide
PGM=DWSAUTLD,PARM=REPORT,,KEYS
DISP=SHR,DSN=merva.SDSLLODB
SYSOUT=*
SYSOUT=*
SYSOUT=*
DSN=reportfile,UNIT=SYSALLDA,
SPACE=(CYL,(1,1),RLSE,CONTIG),
DCB=(DSORG=PS,RECFM=FB,LRECL=48,BLKSIZE=48),
DISP=(NEW,CATLG,DELETE)
DISP=SHR,DSN=authfile
*
You may wish to create the output report file in the HFS for direct use by the
WebSphere BI for FN RMA utility program. To do this modify the DWSAUTW DD
statement according to the following example:
//DWSAUTW DD PATH=/var/dni_02_01/run/dwsautw,
//
PATHOPTS=(OWRONLY,OCREAT,OTRUNC),PATHMODE=SIRWXU
If the report file does not exist, or is not writable, error message DWS826I is
issued. You must use the LIS0 input control record to create the output report file;
all selected records are also written to the listing file, DWSAUTP. Other input
records are rejected.
Example of the output listing:
LIS0
<------------------------------- DISPLAY OF
1ST SENDING
B2060515E3B8F0C1 20060515 0001
2ND SENDING
B2061119A9B531EE 20061119 0001
1ST RECEIVING B3060515C78DC074 20060515 0001
2ND RECEIVING B306111927D26CA8 20061119 0001
CORR STATUS : VALID
DWS866I Record written to report file
HOME LT CORR LT
PTSADEJA PTSADEJJ
PENDING
STATUS
AUTHORIZED AREA ----------------------------->

TO
PAPER BASED KEY
20061119 0001
20070520 0001
20061119 0001
20070520 0001
** INFO **
361
362
Operations Guide
Chapter 29. Using the Message Counter Log Report Utility

DSLCNTUT
The message counter log report utility DSLCNTUT shows the current status of the
MERVA ESA message counter log data set. The status of all individual counters for
the last 12 months is printed. In addition, the status for the current month is
shown. The output is equivalent to that which is created with the MERVA ESA
operator commands dclog detail and dclog last.
MERVA ESA startup is not required to run the report utility.
The output is printed in the form of MERVA ESA operator messages. The operator
messages are explained in MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
DSLCNTUT runs as a batch program under control of z/OS or VSE.

Figure 153 shows the JCL to create a message counter log report under z/OS.
//........
//REPORT
//STEPLIB
//DSLCNTA
//SYSPRINT
/*
//
JOB ....
EXEC PGM=DSLCNTUT,REGION=2048K
DD DSN=merva.SDSLLOD0,DISP=SHR
DD DSN=merva.DSLCNTA,DISP=SHR
DD SYSOUT=*
Figure 153. Creating a Message Counter Log Report in z/OS

merva
The prefix of the MERVA ESA installation library.
merva.DSLCNTA
The name of the MERVA ESA message counter log data set.

Figure 154 shows the JCL to create a message counter log report under VSE.
// JOB ...
// DLBL DSLCNTA,merva.DSLCNTA,,VSAM
// EXTENT ,volid
// EXEC DSLCNTUT,SIZE=200K
/*
//
Figure 154. Creating a Message Counter Log Report in VSE

ucat
363
merva.DSLCNTA
The name of the MERVA ESA message counter log data set.
program library
volid
names.
364
Operations Guide
Chapter 30. Using Queue Batch Utility (DSLSQB)

This chapter describes how to use the z/OS Queue Batch Utility. This utility is not
available in VSE.
The purpose of the Queue Batch Utility is to provide MERVA ESA queue
operations via a batch program.
If enhanced DB2 queue management is in use, that is if QIO=(DSLQMDIO,2) is
specified in DSLPRM, DSLSQB will use direct DB2 queue management access if
DIRDB2 is specified in the jobs parameter.
The following commands are available:
DELETE
Delete messages from a MERVA ESA queue
MOVE
Move messages from one MERVA ESA queue to another
ROUTE
Route messages within MERVA ESA.
Message selection criteria can be specified for each command to process only
selected messages.
Processing is controlled via control information in the SYSIN data set.
Starting the Queue Batch Utility

The Batch Utility is started as an z/OS batch job. Figure 155 shows the JCL to run
the program.
If the program is using direct DB2 queue management the DB2 SDSNLOAD library must be
made available.
//......
JOB ......
//SQB
EXEC PGM=DSLSQB,PARM=
//SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSABEND DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSIN
DD *
CONSTANTS
...
...
VARIABLES
...
...
SELECTION-SEL001
...
...
SELECTION-SEL002
...
...
OPERATION
...
...
/*
MERVA ESA Loadlib
Figure 155. Running the Queue Batch Utility
365
SYSIN must be a sequential, fixed block 80 data set (PS, FB, LRECL=80) containing
the control information.
Controlling the Utility Program

The Queue Batch Utility is controlled via data in the SYSIN data set with records
of length 80, where the columns 73-80 are ignored.
Records starting with an asterisk (*) in column 1 are treated as comment records.
The control data set is separated into sections with no predefined order:
CONSTANTS
Defines constants that are used in SELECTION expressions. Several
CONSTANTS sections are allowed. The section is optional.
VARIABLES
Defines variables that are used in SELECTION expressions. Several
VARIABLES sections are allowed. The section is optional.
SELECTION
Defines a SELECTION expression. Each SELECTION must have a unique
name. Only messages fulfilling the selection criteria are processed. The
section is optional.
OPERATION
Defines operations to be done. Several OPERATION sections are allowed.
This section is mandatory.
Figure 156 on page 367 illustrates the structure of the control data set.
366
Operations Guide
*
CONSTANTS
CHRCON1 CHR
NUMBER1 NUM
TODAY
TIM
YESTRDAY TIM
LASTHOUR TIM
*
VARIABLES
CONSTANT
-1234,5671
#DAY
#DAY -1DAY
#HOUR-1HOUR
SWAHMT
NUM FLD=(SWAHMT,,,,,VFISRT),LEN=(3)
SW20
CHR FLD=(SW20,,,,,VFIRST)
SW57DA1 CHR FLD=(SW57,,,,,VFIRST,FIRSTDA)
CREATED TIM FLD=(MSGTRACE,,,,,VFIRST,FIRSTDA),LEN=(6,20)
*
SELECTION-SEL001
(SWAHMT = 100) AND (SW32AMNT>99)
*
SELECTION-SEL002
(SWAHMT = 100) AND
(SW32AMNT>12) AND
NOT(SW57DA1 =* *PAT?ERN*)
*
SELECTION-SEL003
(CREATED < YESTRDAY)
*
OPERATION
IMRSRVI
IMRSRVO
IMRSRVO
CMD DELETE,SEL001,,,,1,1
CMD MOVE,SEL002,IMRSRVE
CMD ROUTE,SEL001
Figure 156. Control Statements Example
The CONSTANTS Section

A CONSTANTS section defines constants that are used in SELECTION expressions.
It starts with a record containing only the word CONSTANTS in columns 1-9. A
record in a CONSTANTS section defines a constant by specifying:
v The constant name in columns 1-8
v The constant type in columns 10-12, either character (CHR), numeric (NUM), or
timestamp (TIM)
v The constant value in columns 14-72:
Character data must be enclosed in quotes, and hexadecimal character data
must be preceded by a X additionally.
Numeric values can be signed. A comma or a point are treated as decimal
point. The numbers are represented internally as floating point numbers.
Timestamps consist of a reference timestamp and a duration expression. The
reference timestamp is either explicit or relative to the current timestamp.
Explicit definition uses a 14-digit timestamp:
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS
Is a 14-digit timestamp to specifying the year, month, day, hour,
minute, and second.
Relative definition of reference timestamps is done by specifying one of the
following keywords:
#YEAR
Represents the start of the current year

367
#MONTH
Represents the start of the current month
#DAY
Represents the start of the current day
#HOUR
Represents the start of the current hour
#MIN
Represents the start of the current minute.
The reference timestamp is optional and defaults to the current timestamp if
it is not specified.
A duration is an integer followed by a unit:
DAY
Represents one day
HOUR
Represents one hour
MIN
Represents one minute.
Several durations can be added or subtracted from the reference timestamp to

form the final timestamp.
Notes:
1. Columns 9 and 13 must be blank.
2. No more than 64 constants can be defined.
3. Character and numeric constants can be defined inline in SELECTION
expressions.
4. A constant name must not start with @.
Examples:
Refer to the number in parenthesis for an explanation:
*---+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7
CHRCON1 CHR CONSTANT
(1)
HEXCON1 CHR X0102ABCDEF
(2)
NUMBER1 NUM -1234,5671
(3)
NUMBER2 NUM 0,5
(4)
TODAY
TIM #DAY
(5)
YESTRDAY TIM #DAY -1DAY
(6)
HOURAGO TIM -1HOUR
(7)
EXAMPLE TIM -1HOUR + 3DAY - 2SEC
(8)
1. Defines a character constant.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Defines
Defines
Defines
Defines
Defines
Defines
Defines
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
hexadecimal character constant.

negative numeric constant.
positive numeric constant.
timestamp of today (start of today).
timestamp of yesterday.
timestamp of one hour ago.
complex timestamp.
The VARIABLES Section

A VARIABLES section defines variables used in SELECTION expressions. It is
initiated by a record containing only the word VARIABLES in columns 1-9. A
record in the VARIABLES section defines one variable by specifying:
v The variable name in columns 1-8.
v The variable type in columns 10-12, either character (CHR), numeric (NUM), or
timestamp (TIM).
368
Operations Guide
v The TOF field reference in columns 14-72. This comprises an FLD parameter
followed optionally by a LEN parameter. The FLD parameter consists of up to
seven positional subparameters, where only the name of the TOF field is
mandatory:
1. Name of the TOF field
2. Nesting level
3. Field group
4.
5.
6.
7.
Repeatable sequence index

Data area index
First TOF MODIF parameter
Second TOF MODIF parameter.
The FLD parameter can be followed immediately by the LEN parameter, which
consists of two positional subparameters:
1. Length of data. The default is the actual length of the data in the TOF.
2. Offset into the data. Default is zero.
If the actual field data is too short for the LEN specification, the variable is
considered to be empty.
If no LEN parameter is specified, the length is determined by the actual length
of the data in the TOF.
Notes:
2. The option of a field can be accessed by specifying the keyword OPTION as a
TOF MODIF subparameter.
3. Numeric data is converted to floating point numbers for processing.
4. Timestamp data is internally expanded to a 14-digit timestamp. For example,
the following timestamp definition is allowed:
CREATED
TIM FLD=(MSGTRACE,,,,,VFIRST,FIRSTDA),LEN=(6,20)
In this case the 6-digit timestamp YYMMDD from the MSGTRACE field is
expanded into a 14-digit timestamp YYYYMMDD000000.
5. No more than 64 variables can be defined.
6. A variable name must not start with @.
Examples:
*---+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7
SWAHMT
NUM FLD=(SWAHMT,,,,,VFIRST),LEN=(3)
(1)
SW20
CHR FLD=(SW20,,,,,VFIRST)
(2)
SW32AMNT NUM FLD=(SW32AMNT,,,,,VFIRST)
(3)
SW57DA1 CHR FLD=(SW57,,,,,VFIRST,FIRSTDA)
(4)
SW57DA2 CHR FLD=(SW57,,,,,NEXTDA)
(5)
CREATED TIM FLD=(MSGTRACE,,,,,VFIRST,FIRSTDA),LEN=(6,20) (6)
SW32OPT CHR FLD=(SW32,,,,,VFIRST,OPTION)
(7)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Defines
Defines
Defines
Defines
numeric SWIFT message type.

TRN of SWIFT message.
numeric amount in field SW32.
first line of F57.
5. Defines second line of F57.

6. Defines timestamp of message creation.
369
7. Defines the option of field F32.
The SELECTION Section

A SELECTION section defines selection criteria for messages to be processed. It is
initiated by a record containing:
v The word SELECTION in columns 1-9
v A minus sign - in column 10
v The SELECTION name in columns 11-18.
The records within a SELECTION section define in free format a boolean
expression built of logical operations (OR, AND, NOT), relational expressions (for
example, =, <, >), certain predicates (EMPTY, EXIST, NOTFD), and parenthesis for
control of precedence.
Assume [B], [C] denote boolean expressions, [R] a relational expression, and [V],
[W] variables or constants. Formally, a boolean expression can be:
([R])
Relational expression in parenthesis
([B])
Boolean expression in parenthesis
[B] AND [C]
Boolean expressions combined with the AND operator
[B] OR [C]
Boolean expressions combined with the OR operator
NOT([B])
Negation of a boolean expression
EMPTY([V])
TRUE if variable [V] is empty
NOTFD([V])
TRUE if variable [V] is not in the TOF
EXIST([V])
TRUE if variable [V] is in the TOF.
A relational expression can be:

[V] = [W]
TRUE if value of [V] equals value of [W]
[V] <> [W]
TRUE if value of [V] is different from value of [W]
[V] < [W]
TRUE if value of [V] is less than value of [W]
[V] > [W]
TRUE if value of [V] is greater than value of [W]
[V] <=[W]
TRUE if value of [V] is not greater than value of [W]
[V] >= [W]
TRUE if value of [V] is not less than value of [W]
[V] =* [W]
TRUE if value of [V] matches pattern value of [W].

Both [V] and [W] must be of type CHR. [W] is treated as a pattern
where an asterisk (*) represents any string and a question mark (?)
represents any character.
Notes:
1. The types of the variables or constants in a relational expression must be the
same.
2. All variables and constants used in a SELECTION must be defined previously
in a VARIABLES or CONSTANTS section.
3. No more than 32 SELECTION sections can be defined.
4. A message is selected for processing only if the boolean expression is TRUE for
the message.
370
Operations Guide
5. Character and numeric constants can be defined inline in expressions.

Timestamps must be explicitly defined in VARIABLES or CONSTANTS
sections.
Examples:
*---+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7
SELECTION-SEL001
(1)
(SWAHMT = 100) AND (SW32AMNT>1000)
SELECTION-SEL002
(SWAHMT = 100) AND
(SW32AMNT>500000) AND
NOT(SW57DA1 =* *PAT?ERN*)
(2)
SELECTION-SEL003
(CREATED < YESTRDAY)
(3)
The examples use the constant and variable definitions above:

1. The SELECTION named SEL001 selects all MT 100 with an amount greater
than 1000.
2. The SELECTION named SEL002 selects all MT 100 with an amount greater
than 500000 and where the first line of field 57 does not match *PAT?ERN*.
3. The SELECTION named SEL003 selects all messages created before yesterday.
The OPERATION Section

An OPERATION section specifies commands for the Batch Utility. It starts with a
record containing only the word OPERATION in columns 1-9. Each record in the
OPERATION section defines an operation:
v Columns 1-8 specify a MERVA queue name or a set of queues by a queue name
pattern containing question marks (?) as the wildcard character.
v Columns 10-12 contain CMD.
v Columns 14-72 define the operation to be applied to the MERVA queues. It
comprises seven positional parameters and:
1. Defines the operation, either DELETE, MOVE, or ROUTE.
2. Names a SELECTION. If no SELECTION is specified, all messages within the
QSN range defined by subparameters 4-7 are selected.
3. Specifies a target queue for MOVE or ROUTE.
4. Specifies the low QSN of the QSN range. Default is zero.
5. Specifies the high QSN of the QSN range. Default is actual last QSN.
6. Specifies the number of messages to be skipped at the beginning of the QSN
range. Default is zero.
7. Specifies the number of messages to be inspected for selection. By default, all
messages in the QSN range are inspected for selection.
Notes:
2. Only messages with a QSN in the specified QSN range are inspected for
selection.
371
3. If a target queue is specified for a ROUTE operation, the selected messages are
routed by the routing module of the target queue. If no target queue is
specified, the routing is done via the routing module of the queue containing
the message.
4. If the command record specifies a set of MERVA ESA queues, the operation is
applied sequentially to all source queues. The sequence is defined by the
sequence of the queues in the function table.
5. No more than 32 commands can be defined.
Examples:
*---+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7
IMRSRVI CMD DELETE,SEL001,,,,,10
(1)
IMRSRVO CMD MOVE,SEL002,IMRSRVE
(2)
IMRSRVO CMD ROUTE,SEL001
(3)
IMRSRVO CMD ROUTE,SEL001,TARQUE,5,10
(4)
RTV????? CMD DELETE,SEL003
(5)
The examples use the SELECTION definitions above:

1. Delete up to 10 messages from queue IMRSRVI. Only the first ten messages are
inspected. Messages fulfilling the SELECTION criteria are deleted.
2. Move all messages selected by SELECTION SEL002 from IMRSRVO to
IMRSRVE.
3. Route all messages selected by SELECTION SEL001 from IMRSRVO using the
routing module of IMRSRVO.
4. Route all messages with QSNs in QSN range 5-10 selected by SELECTION
SEL001 from IMRSRVO using the routing module of TARQUE.
5. Delete all messages selected by SELECTION SEL003 from all queues with a
prefix RTV.
Processing Details
v If a SELECTION boolean expression is specified for a command, this expression
is evaluated for the messages in the source queue. If the expression is TRUE, the
message is processed according to the command. Otherwise, the message is
skipped and left in the source queue.
v The evaluation of the expression is done from left to right. There is no difference
in precedence between the AND and OR operators. Precedence can be controlled
by parenthesis.
v Variable data is accessed when it is needed, and it is accessed only once. For
example, in the expression
(SWAHMT > 100) AND (SWAHMT < 200)
the variable is accessed for the comparison (SWAHMT > 100). For the second
comparison (SWAHMT < 200), the previously accessed value is inspected. To
force a reaccess of a TOF field, another variable with the same definition values
must be declared:
VARMT
VARMTX
(VARMT > 100) AND (VARMTX < 200)
In this case the TOF field SWAHMT is accessed twice.
372
Operations Guide
v If the left operand of an AND operation is FALSE, the right operand is not
evaluated any more because the result must be FALSE.
If the left operand of an OR operation is TRUE, the right operand is not
evaluated any more because the result must be TRUE.
This optimization may result in skipping the access of TOF fields and therefore
may lead to unintended access of TOF fields if relative positioning is used. The
following example illustrates this:
DA1
DA2
DA3
CHR FLD=(SW57,,,,,VFIRST,FIRSTDA)
CHR FLD=(SW57,,,,,NEXTDA)
CHR FLD=(SW57,,,,,NEXTDA)
((DA1 =* *A*) AND (DA2 =* *B*)) OR (DA3 =* *C*)
The variables DA2 and DA3 use relative positioning to access data.
If DA1 matches *A*, DA2 is accessed via NEXTDA. It accesses the second data
area.
If DA1 does not match *A*, the second part is not evaluated (DA2=**B*), but
the third part (DA3=**C*). Therefore DA3 will access data area 2 of SWIFT field
SW57. This may not be the intended data area to be accessed.
JCL EXEC PARM parameters

The processing of the Queue Batch Utility can be traced using the MERVA ESA
supplied MFS and TOF traces. The trace data is written to the SYSPRINT data set.
The traces are activated by switches in the z/OS PARM data:
v The MFS trace is activated by the character T as first character of the PARM
data.
v The TOF trace is activated by the character T as second character of the PARM
data.
v The TOF access trace during evaluation of SELECTION expressions is activated
by the character T as third character of the PARM data.
Examples:
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
PGM=DSLSQB,PARM=T
PGM=DSLSQB,PARM= T
PGM=DSLSQB,PARM=TT
PGM=DSLSQB,PARM= T
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Statement (1) starts the Queue Batch Utility with MFS trace, statement (2) starts it
with TOF trace, and statement (3) with MFS and TOF trace. Statement (4) requests
tracing of TOF access during evaluation of SELECTION expressions.
The following parameters can also be specified following the trace parameters. Use
commas to separate parameters. If the trace parameters are omitted this must be
indicated by a comma in the first position.
DIRDB2
If DIRDB2 is specified in the PARM, and MERVA is using performance
enhanced DB2 queue management, that is QIO=(DSLQMDIO,2) is specified in
DSLPRM, DSLSQB will use direct DB2 access for queue management activity.
DIRDB2=YES can also be specified.
If DIRDB2 is omitted from the PARM string, or if DIRDB2=NO is specified, or
if QIO=(DSLQMDIO,2) is not specified in DSLPRM, central service queue
management is used.
373
COMMIT=n
If direct DB2 access is being used n specifies how many queue elements are
processed between DB2 commits. n can be any decimal value of 1 to 6 digits.
If 0 is specified each queue management call is committed.
If omitted the value specified in DSLPRM DB2COMMIT sub-parameter 1 is
used.
Examples:
EXEC PGM=DSLSQB,PARM=,DIRDB2=YES,COMMIT=100
EXEC PGM=DSLSQB,PARM=,DIRDB2
EXEC PGM=DSLSQB,PARM= T,DIRDB2
374
Operations Guide
Chapter 31. More Batch Utilities

A number of further batch utilities written in REXX are distributed with MERVA
ESA. Also, a utility is provided to recover message counts in the DB2 DSLTQFUN
table.
Queue Data Set Utilities

DSLBA12R
Print a specified or all queue elements of a queue.
DSLBA14R
Scanning a message TOF to display the TOF structure.
DSLBA50R
Print queue status list.
DSLBA51R
Print queue key list.
DSLBA52R
Copy or move messages from one queue to another. Optionally

sort them by key value.
DSLBA53R
Scan a queue for old messages.
Journal Utilities
DSLBA13R
Print the MERVA ESA journal.
User File Utilities

DSLBA15R
Print the MERVA ESA User file.
DSLBA16R
Print a cross-reference of function names and allowed user IDs

from the User file.
DSLBA17R
Check the User file date fields.
All these batch utilities are described in the MERVA for ESA Application
Programming Interface Guide.
Message Count Recovery Utility

The queue management batch program DSLQDUMC is provided to recover
message counts to the MSGCOUNT column of the DSLTQFUN DB2 table. This
utility is also provided to assist in the migration to an earlier level of DB2 queue
management in which message counts are maintained in the table DSLTQFUN
rather than the table DSLTQCOUNT.
The utility can also help recover message counts to the DSLTQCOUNT table. If a
discrepancy is noticed in the DSLTQCOUNT MSGCOUNT values, you can recover
the correct values in the following way:
1. Terminate MERVA ESA.
Note: It is important that there is no update activity on the queue management
DB2 tables during this process.
2. Delete all rows from the DSLTQCOUNT table. The table must be empty so that
it will be automatically populated from the DSLTQFUN table during the next
375
queue management initialization. This can occur during MERVA nucleus

startup or during the startup of a direct DB2 program or transaction.
3. Run the DSLQDUMC utility. The utility determines for each row in the
DSLTQFUN table the correct number of messages from the DSLTQUEL table
and sets the value into the DSLTQFUN MSGCOUNT column.
4. Restart MERVA ESA, or start a program or transaction that uses direct DB2
access. During queue management initialization, because the DB2 table
DSLTQCOUNT is empty, a row is inserted into the table DSLTQCOUNT for
each row in DSLTQFUN and the MSGCOUNT value is copied from
DSLTQFUN.
To run the DSLQDUMC batch utility, use JCL like this:
//DSLQDUMC JOB ..
//
EXEC PGM=DSLQDUMC
//STELPIB DD DSN=merva.SDSLLODB,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=merva.SDSLLODC,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=SYS1.SDSNLOAD,DISP=SHR
//SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT=*
DB2
DSLQDUMC uses the plan and DB2 subsystem that are named in the DSLPRM
DB2PLB and DB2SS parameters. Its DBRM must be a member in this plan. All
database changes are committed at program termination.
376
Operations Guide
Part 4. Reacting to Abnormal Events

This part provides help in dealing with abnormal events that can occur in
operating MERVA ESA and the network links.
377
378
Operations Guide
Chapter 32. How to React to MERVA ESA Problems

This chapter describes the problems that may arise during the running of
MERVA ESA.
General Problems
Whenever an abnormal situation arises, MERVA ESA displays an error message on
the operating-system console. You should refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and
Codes to see what action to take.
If a dump is available (indicated in the explanation of the error message), you
should print the dump.
Under CICS, the dump is contained in the CICS dump data set. This data set can
be printed using a job described in the appropriate CICS manual.
Under IMS, the dump is printed in the SYSOUT class; or is written to the device
specified by the DSLSNAP DD statement, or by the SYSUDUMP or SYSABEND
DD statement. These DD statements should always be present in the job stream for
the MERVA ESA MPP and BMP.
Under IMS there may be dumps with user-abend codes instead of system-abend
codes. These dumps are always taken by IMS. You can find the meanings of the
codes in IMS/ESA Messages and Codes.
You should be familiar with the data security procedures for your financial
institution.
If SWIFT messages are lost or partially destroyed, they can be retrieved from
SWIFT as described in the S.W.I.F.T. User Handbook.
Problems with Signing On to MERVA ESA

When MERVA ESA runs under IMS, a problem can arise if a user terminates a
MERVA ESA session by turning off the terminal without signing off. The next user
to use that terminal continues the interrupted MERVA ESA session.
This problem does not arise when MERVA ESA runs under IMS/RACF, because
MERVA ESA verifies all users by their IMS user identification. If one user
terminates the session without signing off, the next user to use the terminal is
rejected, and MERVA ESA signs off the previous user.
If a Transaction Is in a Wait State

If MERVA ESA stops while a transaction is running, the transaction may remain in
a wait state because intertask communication no longer functions. The transaction
must be canceled using CICS or IMS commands.
379
If a Batch Program Is in a Wait State

If MERVA ESA stops while a batch program is running, the program may remain
in a wait state because intertask communication no longer functions. The batch
program must be canceled using operating system commands.
After a restart of MERVA ESA, the batch program can be started again. No data is
lost, because the batch programs determine whether the transfer of data was
completed or not. If the transfer was not completed, the batch program
automatically carries out a restart and completes the transfer of data.
If the Queue Data Set Is Full

If a MERVA ESA batch program detects that the queue data set is full, or that all
entries in the Queue Key Table have been used, the program ends without
completing its processing. You should ask users to process the messages in the
queues; or you should start the hardcopy printer program, or start DSLSDO (if
DSLSDO did not previously detect the condition) or DSLSDY to empty queues.
When the shortage is relieved, the interrupted batch program must be started
again to complete the transfer of data.
If these conditions appear frequently, the size of the queue data set must be
increased using the MODIFY function of the MERVA ESA queue data set utility
DSLQDSUT. See Chapter 19, Using the Queue Data Set Utility DSLQDSUT, on
page 281 for information on this utility. Alternatively, the number of entries in the
Queue Key Table must be increased before the next startup of MERVA ESA.
Queue Data Set Restart

During each MERVA ESA startup, the queue management program checks
whether it has ended normally after the last run. If not, it automatically carries out
a queue-management restart. If the queue data set can be read physically, queue
management maintains the integrity of the data on the queue data set. If you use
the duplicate queue data set feature, the queue management tells you whether they
are identical, or whether you have to duplicate the best one for maintaining data
integrity.
If the Journal Data Sets Are Full

Whenever the journal data set A is full, the MERVA ESA Journal program switches
automatically to journal data set B. The switch is indicated to you by the message:
DSL040I switched from journal A to journal B.
MERVA ESA should be stopped as soon as possible so that you can print and clear
the journal data sets before the next MERVA ESA startup. The decision to do so
must be based on the size of the journal data set B. If journal data set B becomes
full, MERVA ESA terminates.
The command jswitch is provided to switch the journal data sets under operator
control. Refer to Switch the Journal Data Sets (JSWITCH) on page 56 for details.
MERVA ESA Restart in a Multisystem Environment

If a restart of MERVA ESA in a multisystem environment is required after a
previous failure, it is possible that MERVA ESA terminates the startup because it
380
Operations Guide
was not able to resolve the message sequence left on an MQI queue. In this case,
the MQI receive and reply-to queues of this MERVA ESA instance have to be
emptied by redefining them.
Chapter 32. How to React to MERVA ESA Problems
381
382
Operations Guide
Chapter 33. How to React to Problems with the SWIFT Link

Whenever an abnormal situation arises, the SWIFT Link displays an error message
on the operating system console. The MERVA ESA operator should refer to
MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes, and take the action indicated there.
In some cases, the subtask for a line to the SWIFT network may produce a dump
with a user-abend code in z/OS. You can distinguish these from the user-abend
codes of the IMS BMP region by looking at the name of the module that got
control from z/OS. If this module is:
v An IMS module, the user abend is from IMS.
v DWSNAEVV, the user abend is from the line subtask, and the user-abend codes
are described in MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes.
If the Queue Data Set Is Full

If the SWIFT Link (DWSDGPA) detects that the queue data set is full, or that all
entries in the Queue Key Table have been used, it immediately cancels the line to
SWIFT. You should either ask users to process the messages in the queues, or you
should start the hardcopy printer program, DSLSDO, or DSLSDY to empty queues.
If these conditions appear frequently, the size of the queue data set must be
increased using the MODIFY function of the MERVA ESA queue data set utility
DSLQDSUT, see Chapter 19, Using the Queue Data Set Utility DSLQDSUT, on
page 281. Alternatively, the number of entries in the Queue Key Table must be
increased before the next startup of MERVA ESA.
If You Have Problems with the Connection to SWIFT

If a problem arises with the connection to the SWIFT network, refer to the
S.W.I.F.T. User Handbook or contact your S.W.I.F.T. Support Centre to solve the
problem. Before doing this, make sure that there is no problem with the modem or
the connection to the telephone network.
383
384
Operations Guide
Chapter 34. How to React to Problems with the Telex Link

There are two ways to communicate with the public telex network:
v The Telex Link via a workstation
v The Telex Link via a fault-tolerant system using the Telex Interface Program.
Telex Link via a Workstation

This section applies to the use of Telex Link via a workstation.
Telex Link via a workstation is a MERVA Link application that connects
MERVA ESA and the Workstation Based Telex Functions. Problems in the MERVA
Link connection should be analyzed as described in Chapter 35, How to React to
Problems with MERVA Link, on page 387. Problems that are related to the
workstation should be analyzed as described in the respective MERVA Messages
and Codes manuals and Diagnosis Guides.
Telex Link via a Fault-Tolerant System

This section applies to the use of Telex Link via a fault-tolerant system.
If the response to the txdisp command shows that the Telex Link has already
waited too long for the logical acknowledgment of a telex message, you can use
the command txdisp recover to send the message to the Telex Interface Program
again.
If no logical acknowledgment is received from the Telex Interface Program for the
last telex message sent during a session, this message is sent again as the first
message after a restart, containing a reference to the first transmission (the original
session and sequence numbers).
The Telex Link Possible Duplicate Emitted queue, TXSTPPDE, contains the last sent
telex message until the Telex Link receives the logical acknowledgment for this
message from the Telex Interface Program. If sending the telex message again does
not help, you can do one or more of the following:
v Ensure that the communication line between the Telex Link and the Telex
Interface Program is active, using the appropriate CICS, IMS, or VTAM
commands.
v Ensure that the Telex Substation is working properly. Restarting the Telex
Substation is described in the Telex Interface Program: Program Description and
Operations Manual.
v Sign off the session and sign on again.
v Stop the Telex Link and start it again.
The internal status of the Telex Link can be monitored using the debugging trace
of MERVA ESA. The communication with the Telex Interface Program can be
journaled. (See the description of the JRN1 parameter of the ENLPARM macro
instruction in the MERVA for ESA Macro Reference.)
385
386
Operations Guide
Chapter 35. How to React to Problems with MERVA Link

Whenever an abnormal situation arises, MERVA Link provides error information in
the MERVA Link Partner Table and in the last confirmed control message. This
error information can be displayed using the MERVA Link Control Facility.
When a sending ASP is set to inoperable, and when a receiving process error is
found, MERVA Link displays an error message on the operating system console. A
receiving process error message is, however, not displayed on a VSE console.
When you receive an error message, refer to MERVA for ESA Messages and Codes for
an explanation, and take the action indicated.
If Messages in the Send Queue Are Not Processed

If messages in the send queue cluster of an ASP are unexpectedly not processed,
carry out the following checks:
1. Is the ASP operable?
To start transmission of messages in the send queue cluster, the ASP must have
the status ON 00 (OPEN/NOHOLD, and last message transmission confirmed).
If the ASP is in HOLD status, you can use the astart command to retry message
transmission. Otherwise, the kickoff command is sufficient to resume message
transmission.
You can ask the MERVA Link to resume message processing for an ASP in any
status. The request results in the display of the most up-to-date status
information.
Note: Duplicate messages are not generated.
2. Should the ASP start automatically?
During customization, you can define an ASP so that message processing only
starts upon operator request. This means that message processing is not
automatically started when a message is routed to a MERVA Link send queue.
To start an ASP that has been defined with the parameter START=OPERATOR,
you can enter a MERVA ESA sf (start function) command for any send queue
of that ASP. Alternatively, you can enter a MERVA Link astart or kickoff
command for that ASP.
3. Is there up-to-date status or error information?
The date/time stamp in the applicable ASP list line should be updated when
you have entered the astart or kickoff command and the sending process has
terminated. Up-to-date status information is now displayed. Refer to MERVA for
ESA Messages and Codes for an explanation of the status information, and take
the action indicated.
4. Is there a storage dump?
Problems in the initialization phase of a MERVA Link task, and program checks
within a MERVA Link task, are not reported in the last confirmed control
message and the Partner Table.
You can find information on these errors in a storage dump of a MERVA Link
task. Analyze the storage dump, and take the appropriate action.
387
If Receiving Process Errors Are Found

The main sources of receiving process error information are:
v The MERVA Link Control Facility displaying status information in the Partner
Table
v A task dump in the CICS environment
v A console operator message
v A snap dump of the MPP in the IMS environment.
Receiving process error diagnostic information is always collected in the Partner
Table. It can be displayed using the MERVA Link Control Facility using the
Display Specific Message Transfer Application as described in Displaying
Specific ASP/MTP Parameters on page 140.
In the IMS environment, however, this information may not be available when the
MERVA Link Control Facility tries to display it. Therefore, a receiving process error
in the IMS environment is always reported in a snap dump of the MPP region.
A task dump in the CICS/MVS or CICS/VSE environment is only taken in an
exceptional condition or if the error could not be reported in the Partner Table.
388
Operations Guide
Part 5. Appendixes
389
390
Operations Guide
Appendix A. MERVA ESA Operator Command Reference

This appendix contains lists of the operator commands and their parameters
available in the Base Functions and the network links. Each of the lists provides
the full and abbreviated form of the command (in alphabetical order), the
parameters that can be used, whether the command is restricted, and where in this
book you can find full information about the command.
The Base Functions Operator Commands

Command
Parameters
Restricted?
Page
cancel
c
[{DUMP | ABDUMP}]
cf
function,ltname
cfnext
function,nextfunction
21
cfrout
function,routingtable
22
copy
fromqueue,toqueue,number[,UMR]
dclog
[{ LAST | DETAIL }]
delete
queue-name,number
Refer to Note 3 on page

396
Refer to Note
6 on page
396
delx
queue-name,qsn[,number]

396
Refer to Note
6 on page
396
df
[{ FIRST | function[,FIRST]}]
24
dicb
[{ TSQ | APPC | MQT [,number]}]
Refer to Note
5 on page
396
Yes
17

396
19

396
Refer to Note
7 on page
396
23
dlmc
30
dlmct
32
dm
[{
[{
[{
[{
[{
prefix }]
date [,prefix ]}]
date ,time [,prefix ]}]
FIRST [,prefix ]}]
LAST [,prefix ]}]
dns
[{ FIRST | TASK | ALL | servername }]
37
dp
[{ FIRST | progname | pid }]
39
dq
[function],[FIRST][,FILLED]
SQLERROR
STATUS
41
dqsorted
[function],[FIRST]
45
dr
reqnum
Refer to Note
5 on page
396
34
391
Command
Parameters
Restricted?
drqa
[{
[{
[{
[{
[{
[{
drr
{[ FIRST, ] reqnum }
{ reqnum [,FIRST ]}
Refer to Note
5 on page
396
du
[{FIRST | userid[,FIRST]}]
47
force
userid
free
queue-name,number

396
Refer to Note
6 on page
396
hf
{function | ALL}

396 and to Note 2 on
page 396
51
journal
jrn
[{datetime | STATUS}]

396
Refer to Note
6 on page
396
jset
[CYCLE | MANUAL | ONCE]
srvnum }]
srvname }]
FIRST [,srvnum ]}]
FIRST [,srvname ]}]
srvnum [,FIRST ]}]
srvname [,FIRST ]}]
Refer to Note
5 on page
396
Yes
Yes
49
53
55
jstat
|
|
|
Page
jswitch
[{A | B } [ RESET ] ]
list
[start][direction][select]
move
fromqueue,toqueue,number[,UMR]
newcopy
nc
routingtable
ntrace
ntrc
{parm1,parm2,parm3,parm4}
priority
y
{ progname1,priority1, ...
,progname8,priority8 }
{ pid1,priority1, ... ,pid8,priority8 }
Yes
58
qswitch
qw
[{state
[{queue-name[,state]}]
[{[state],queue-name}]
Yes
61
Yes
64
Yes
65

396
68
Yes
70
reshut
rs
rswitch
rw
[{state}]
[{rt-name[,state]}]
[{[state],rt-name}]
sf
function
shutdown
sh
392
Operations Guide
Yes
57
Refer to Note
7 on page
396

396
Yes
Refer to Note
6 on page
396
57
Refer to Note
5 on page
396
}]
Command
Parameters
Restricted?
start
s
{ progname | pid } [,parameter]
Yes
72
stop
p
{ progname | pid }
Yes
74
terminat
t
[{DUMP
Yes
17
| ABDUMP }]
Page
The SWIFT Link Operator Commands

Command
Parameters
Restricted?
Page
abortap
aap

396
78
abortli
ali
{line|ALL}
Yes
82
abortlt
alt

396
84
close
cl
line[,{IMM|DUMP}]
Yes
88
dds
[ltname]
90
diva
line [,Buffers|States|Vtambnd]
92
dl
[ALL[,FIRST]]
FIRST
LINES
line[,FIRST]
ltname
98
dla
[ALL[,FIRST]]
FIRST
ltname
102
login
li
[ltname],[lsn],[sk1],[sk2][,window]
Yes
104
logout
lo
Yes
108
quit
q
Yes
112
select
se
[ltname],[ssn],[sk1], [sk2],[window],[state][,delivery]
Yes
116
setlt
slt
ltname[,line[,tflag[,iccparm[,usename]]]]
Yes
121
swiftii
sw
{x},{SWIFT Link command string}
124
swa
swb
swc
{SWIFT Link command string}
124
xtrace
line [,trace flag no. [,ON|OFF ]]
Refer to Note
5 on page
396
393
The MERVA Link ESA Operator Commands

Note: These commands can only be entered in the MSC function. They are not
valid in the CMD function.
Command
Parameters
Restricted?
Page
aclose
aspname
Yes
152
aopen
aspname
Yes
153
astart
sa
aspname
Yes
154
155
backward
bw
disable
{aspname | *}
display
da
Yes
156
157
158
dpth
dsa
enable
{aspname | * | SET}
159
Yes
160
explain
xpl
161
forward
fw
155
hold
ha
{aspname | *}
Yes
162
iprecov
ipmove
{mip msn | *}
Yes
163
kickoff
ka
{aspname | *}
Yes
165
lcreset
lcrs
aspname
Yes
166
lrreset
lrrs
aspname
Yes
166
lstall
la
167
lstinop
168
nextgrp
ng
169
node
ps
[partner system name | *]
Yes
170
recover
ipcopy
aspname
Yes
172
173
refresh
ra
reset
{TEST | CTRC | ACCEPT | IPRECOV | AM}
Yes
174
set
{AM | TEST | XC | CTRCF | CTRCW} |

{SNAP | PSNAP | ACCEPT | IPRECOV | WSZ}
Yes
174
394
Operations Guide
The MERVA Link USS Operator Commands

Note: These commands can only be entered in the ACC function of MERVA Link
USS. They are not valid in the CMD and MSC functions of a MERVA ESA
environment.
Command
Parameters
Restricted?
Page
No
178
[path_name]
[path_name]
[path_name]
[path_name]
Yes
179
dpa
dpc
dph
dsa
dsc
dsd
dsh
{asp_name|*}
{partner_node_name|*}
No
180
dxc
dxd
dxmm
dxmn
dxmq
dxmr
dxmt
dxra
dxrm
dxsa
dxsm
partner_node_name
diagnostic_code
dslmmfs_rc_rs
dslnicp_rc
dslqmgt_rc
dslrtnsc_rc_rs
dsltofsv_rc_rs
receiving_as_ecv
receiving_mt_ecv
sending_as_ecv
sending_mt_ecv
No
182
h
ha
hc
hcx
hd
hdx
hl
hm
hp
hr
hs
hx
No
186
l
la
laa
lc
le
lr
lra
lx
lxi
lxo
lxr
No
187
a
aih
ara
arc
asa
asp_name
partner_node_name
asp_name
cxf
cxfr
cxs
cxsr
asp_name
partner_node_name
395
Command
Parameters
Restricted?
Page
re
rta
rtc
rtd
rtp
rxi
No
189
sc
si
srt
sst
sta
stc
std
stp
stx
swa
swc
swp
No
191
Yes
192
asp_name
directory_path_name
{EKAACD|daemon}
trm
The Telex Link Operator Commands

Command
Parameters
Restricted?
Page
txdisp
[RECOVER]
Yes
131
txoff
Yes
133
txon
Yes
135
Notes:
1. The command is restricted, when entered with the ALL parameter.
2. The command is restricted, when entered for a function which is defined in the
MERVA ESA function table DSLFNTT using the parameter MQI=YES.
3. Whether the queue test commands are restricted depends on the setting of the
parameter EXQUE in the MERVA ESA parameter module DSLPRM.
4. Whether the journal command is restricted depends on the setting of the
parameter EXJRN in the MERVA ESA parameter module DSLPRM.
5. This command is for diagnostic purposes and is described in the MERVA for
ESA Diagnosis Guide.
6. This command is for installation test purposes and is described in the MERVA
for ESA Installation Guide.
7. This command is described in the MERVA ESA V4 Users Guide.
396
Operations Guide
Appendix B. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the users responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM
Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM World Trade Asia Corporation
Licensing
2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku
Tokyo 106, Japan
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose
of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the
information which has been exchanged, should contact:
IBM Deutschland GmbH
Department 0790
Pascalstrasse 100
397
70569 Stuttgart
Germany
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,
including in some cases, payment of a fee.
The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material
available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement
or any equivalent agreement between us.
The following paragraph does apply to the US only.
All IBM prices shown are IBMs suggested retail prices, are current and are subject
to change without notice. Dealer prices may vary.
This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to
change before the products described become available.
COPYRIGHT LICENSE:
This information contains sample application programs in source language, which
illustrates programming techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing application
programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating
platform for which the sample programs are written. These examples have not
been thoroughly tested under all conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or
imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these programs. You may copy,
modify, and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to
IBM for the purposes of developing, using, marketing, or distributing application
programs conforming to IBMs application programming interfaces.
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States,
other countries, or both:
v IBM
v IBM Logo
v ibm.com
v Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
v AIX
v AS/400
v C/370
v CICS
v CICS/ESA
v CICS/MVS
v CICS/VSE
v DB2
v DB2 Universal Database
v Distributed Relational Database Architecture
v DRDA
v IMS
398
Operations Guide
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
IMS/ESA
Language Environment
MQSeries
MVS
MVS/ESA
MVS/XA
Operating System/400
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
OS/2
OS/400
OS/390
RACF
VisualAge
VSE/ESA
VTAM
WebSphere
v z/OS
Workstation (AWS) and Directory Services Application (DSA) are trademarks of
S.W.I.F.T., La Hulpe in Belgium.
Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside, Intel Inside logo, Intel Centrino, Intel Centrino logo,
Celeron, Intel Xeon, Intel SpeedStep, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States
and other countries.
PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company in the United States,
other countries, or both, and is used by IBM Corporation under license.
C-bus is a trademark of Corollary, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.
Other company, product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of
others.
Appendix B. Notices
399
400
Operations Guide

This glossary defines terms as they are used in
this book. If you do not find the terms you are
looking for, refer to the IBM Dictionary of
Computing, New York: McGraw-Hill, and the
S.W.I.F.T. User Handbook.
A
ACB. Access method control block.
ACC. MERVA Link USS application control command
application. It provides a means of operating MERVA
Link USS in USS shell and z/OS batch environments.
Access method control block. A control block that
links an application program to Virtual Storage Access
Method (VSAM) or Virtual Telecommunications Access
Method (VTAM).
ACD. MERVA Link USS application control daemon.
ACT. MERVA Link USS application control table.
address. See SWIFT address.
address expansion. The process by which the full
name of a financial institution is obtained using the
SWIFT address, telex correspondents address, or a
nickname.
AMPDU. Application message protocol data unit,
which is defined in the MERVA Link P1 protocol, and
consists of an envelope and its content.
answerback. In telex, the response from the dialed
correspondent to the WHO R U signal.
answerback code. A group of up to 6 letters following
or contained in the answerback. It is used to check the
answerback.
APC. Application control.
API. Application programming interface.
APPC. Advanced Program-to-Program
Communication based on SNA LU 6.2 protocols.
APPL. A VTAM definition statement used to define a
VTAM application program.
application programming interface (API). An
interface that programs can use to exchange data.
application support filter (ASF). In MERVA Link, a
user-written program that can control and modify any
data exchanged between the Application Support Layer

and the Message Transfer Layer.
application support process (ASP). An executing
instance of an application support program. Each
application support process is associated with an ASP
entry in the partner table. An ASP that handles
outgoing messages is a sending ASP; one that handles
incoming messages is a receiving ASP.
application support program (ASP). In MERVA Link,
a program that exchanges messages and reports with a
specific remote partener ASP. These two programs must
agree on which conversation protocol they are to use.
ASCII. American Standard Code for Information
Interchange. The standard code, using a coded set
consisting of 7-bit coded characters (8 bits including
parity check), used for information interchange among
data processing systems, data communication systems,
and associated equipment. The ASCII set consists of
control characters and graphic characters.
ASF. Application support filter.
ASF. (1) Application support process. (2) Application
support program.
ASPDU. Application support protocol data unit,
which is defined in the MERVA Link P2 protocol.
authentication. The SWIFT security check used to
ensure that a message has not changed during
transmission, and that it was sent by an authorized
sender.
authenticator key. A set of alphanumeric characters
used for the authentication of a message sent via the
SWIFT network.
authenticator-key file. The file that stores the keys
used during the authentication of a message. The file
contains a record for each of your financial institutions
correspondents.
B
Back-to-Back (BTB). A MERVA Link function that
enables ASPs to exchange messages in the local MERVA
Link node without using data communication services.
bank identifier code. A 8 or 11-character code used to
identify a bank within the SWIFT network. Also called
a SWIFT address. The code consists of the following
subcodes:
v The bank code (4 characters)
v The ISO country code (2 characters)
401
v The location code (2 characters)

v Optional: the branch code (3 characters) for a SWIFT
user institution, or the letters BIC for institutions
that are not SWIFT users.
Basic Security Manager (BSM). A component of
VSE/ESA Version 2.4 that is invoked by the System
Authorization Facility, and used to ensure signon and
transaction security.
BIC. Bank identifier code.
BIC Bankfile. A tape of bank identifier codes supplied
by S.W.I.F.T.
BIC Database Plus Tape. A tape of financial
institutions and currency codes, supplied by S.W.I.F.T.
The information is compiled from various sources and
includes national, international, and cross-border
identifiers.
BIC Directory Update Tape. A tape of bank identifier
codes and currency codes, supplied by S.W.I.F.T., with
extended information as published in the printed BIC
Directory.
body. The second part of an IM-ASPDU. It contains
the actual application data or the message text that the
IM-AMPDU transfers.
BSC. Binary synchronous control.
BSM. Basic Security Manager.
BTB. Back-to-back.
buffer. A storage area used by MERVA programs to
store a message in its internal format. A buffer has an
8-byte prefix that indicates its length.
C
CBT. SWIFT computer-based terminal.
CCSID. Coded character set identifier.
CDS. Control data set.
central service. In MERVA, a service that uses
resources that either require serialization of access, or
are only available in the MERVA nucleus.
CF message. Confirmed message. When a sending
MERVA Link system is informed of the successful
delivery of a message to the receiving application, it
routes the delivered application messages as CF
messages, that is, messages of class CF, to an ACK wait
queue or to a complete message queue.
COA. Confirm on arrival.
COD. Confirm on delivery.
402
Operations Guide
coded character set identifier (CCSID). The name of a

coded set of characters and their code point
assignments.
commit. To commit operations is to make the changes
permanent on MQSeries queues and MERVA ESA
queues with queue management using DB2. After
putting one or more messages to a queue, a commit
makes them visible to other programs. After getting
one or more messages from a queue, a commit
permanently deletes them from the queue.
confirm-on-arrival (COA) report. An MQSeries report
message type created when a message is placed on that
queue. It is created by the queue manager that owns
the destination queue.
confirm-on-delivery (COD) report. An MQSeries
report message type created when an application
retrieves a message from the queue in a way that
causes the message to be deleted from the queue. It is
created by the queue manager.
control fields. In MERVA Link, fields that are part of
a MERVA message on the queue data set and of the
message in the TOF. Control fields are written to the
TOF at nesting identifier 0. Messages in SWIFT format
do not contain control fields.
correspondent. An institution to which your
institution sends and from which it receives messages.
correspondent identifier. The 11-character identifier of
the receiver of a telex message. Used as a key to
retrieve information from the Telex correspondents file.
cross-system coupling facility. See XCF.
coupling services. In a sysplex, the functions of XCF
that transfer data and status information among the
members of a group that reside in one or more of the
z/OS systems in the sysplex.
couple data set. See XCF couple data set.
CTP. MERVA Link command transfer processor.
currency code file. A file containing the currency
codes, together with the name, fraction length, country
code, and country names.
D
daemon. A long-lived process that runs unattended to
perform continuous or periodic systemwide functions.
DASD. Direct access storage device.
data area. An area of a predefined length and format
on a panel in which data can be entered or displayed.
A field can consist of one or more data areas.
data element. A unit of data that, in a certain context,

is considered indivisible. In MERVA Link, a data
element consists of a 2-byte data element length field, a
2-byte data-element identifier field, and a field of
variable length containing the data element data.
datagram. In TCP/IP, the basic unit of information
passed across the Internet environment. This type of
message does not require a reply, and is the simplest
type of message that MQSeries supports.
data terminal equipment. That part of a data station
that serves as a data source, data link, or both, and
provides for the data communication control function
according to protocols.
DB2. A family of IBM licensed programs for relational
database management.
dead-letter queue. A queue to which a queue
manager or application sends messages that it cannot
deliver. Also called undelivered-message queue.
dial-up number. A series of digits required to
establish a connection with a remote correspondent via
the public telex network.
direct service. In MERVA, a service that uses resources
that are always available and that can be used by
several requesters at the same time.
display mode. The mode (PROMPT or NOPROMPT)
in which SWIFT messages are displayed. See PROMPT
mode and NOPROMPT mode.
distributed queue management (DQM). In MQSeries
message queuing, the setup and control of message
channels to queue managers on other systems.
DQM. Distributed queue management.
DTE. Data terminal equipment.
E
EBCDIC. Extended Binary Coded Decimal
Interchange Code. A coded character set consisting of
8-bit coded characters.
ECB. Event control block.
EDIFACT. Electronic Data Interchange for
Administration, Commerce and Transport (a United
Nations standard).
ESM. External security manager.
EUD. End-user driver.
exception report. An MQSeries report message type
that is created by a message channel agent when a
message is sent to another queue manager, but that

message cannot be delivered to the specified
destination queue.
external line format (ELF) messages. Messages that
are not fully tokenized, but are stored in a single field
in the TOF. Storing messages in ELF improves
performance, because no mapping is needed, and
checking is not performed.
external security manager (ESM). A security product
that is invoked by the System Authorization Facility.
RACF is an example of an ESM.
F
FDT. Field definition table.
field. In MERVA, a portion of a message used to enter
or display a particular type of data in a predefined
format. A field is located by its position in a message
and by its tag. A field is made up of one or more data
areas. See also data area.
field definition table (FDT). The field definition table
describes the characteristics of a field; for example, its
length and number of its data areas, and whether it is
mandatory. If the characteristics of a field change
depending on its use in a particular message, the
definition of the field in the FDT can be overridden by
the MCB specifications.
field group. One or several fields that are defined as
being a group. Because a field can occur more than
once in a message, field groups are used to distinguish
them. A name can be assigned to the field group
during message definition.
field group number. In the TOF, a number is assigned
to each field group in a message in ascending order
from 1 to 255. A particular field group can be accessed
using its field group number.
field tag. A character string used by MERVA to
identify a field in a network buffer. For example, for
SWIFT field 30, the field tag is :30:.
FIN. Financial application.
FIN-Copy. The MERVA component used for SWIFT
FIN-Copy support.
finite state machine. The theoretical base describing
the rules of a service requests state and the conditions
to state transitions.
FMT/ESA. MERVA-to-MERVA Financial Message
Transfer/ESA.
form. A partially-filled message containing data that
can be copied for a new message of the same message
type.
403
G
GPA. General purpose application.
ISN acknowledgment. A collective term for the

various kinds of acknowledgments sent by the SWIFT
network.
ISO. International Organization for Standardization.
ITC. Intertask communication.
HFS. Hierarchical file system.

hierarchical file system (HFS). A system for
organizing files in a hierarchy, as in a UNIX system.
z/OS UNIX System Services files are organized in an
HFS. All files are members of a directory, and each
directory is in turn a member of a directory at a higher
level in the HFS. The highest level in the hierarchy is
the root directory.
I
IAM. Interapplication messaging (a MERVA Link
message exchange protocol).
IM-ASPDU. Interapplication messaging application
support protocol data unit. It contains an application
message and consists of a heading and a body.
incore request queue. Another name for the request
queue to emphasize that the request queue is held in
memory instead of on a DASD.
J
JCL. Job control language.
journal. A chronological list of records detailing
MERVA actions.
journal key. A key used to identify a record in the
journal.
journal service. A MERVA central service that
maintains the journal.
K
KB. Kilobyte (1024 bytes).
key. A character or set of characters used to identify
an item or group of items. For example, the user ID is
the key to identify a user file record.
InetD. Internet Daemon. It provides TCP/IP

communication services in the z/OS USS environment.
key-sequenced data set (KSDS). A VSAM data set

whose records are loaded in key sequence and
controlled by an index.
initiation queue. In MQSeries, a local queue on which

the queue manager puts trigger messages.
keyword parameter. A parameter that consists of a

keyword, followed by one or more values.
input message. A message that is input into the

SWIFT network. An input message has an input
header.
KSDS. Key-sequenced data set.
INTERCOPE TelexBox. This telex box supports

various national conventions for telex procedures and
protocols.
interservice communication. In MERVA ESA, a facility
that enables communication among services if MERVA
ESA is running in a multisystem environment.
intertask communication. A facility that enables
application programs to communicate with the MERVA
nucleus and so request a central service.
L
LAK. Login acknowledgment message. This message
informs you that you have successfully logged in to the
SWIFT network.
large message. A message that is stored in the large
message cluster (LMC). The maximum length of a
message to be stored in the VSAM QDS is 31900 bytes.
Messages up to 2MB can be stored in the LMC. For
queue management using DB2 no distinction is made
between messages and large messages.
IP. Internet Protocol.
large queue element. A queue element that is larger

than the smaller of:
IP message. In-process message. A message that is in

the process of being transferred to another application.
v The limiting value specified during the customization

of MERVA
ISC. Intersystem communication.
v 32KB
ISN. Input sequence number.
LC message. Last confirmed control message. It

contains the message-sequence number of the
application or acknowledgment message that was last
404
Operations Guide
confirmed; that is, for which the sending MERVA Link

system most recently received confirmation of a
successful delivery.
LDS. Logical data stream.
LMC. Large message cluster.
LNK. Login negative acknowledgment message. This
message indicates that the login to the SWIFT network
has failed.
local queue. In MQSeries, a queue that belongs to a
local queue manager. A local queue can contain a list of
messages waiting to be processed. Contrast with remote
queue.
local queue manager. In MQSeries, the queue
manager to which the program is connected, and that
provides message queuing services to that program.
Queue managers to which a program is not connected
are remote queue managers, even if they are running
on the same system as the program.
login. To start the connection to the SWIFT network.
LR message. Last received control message, which
contains the message-sequence number of the
application or acknowledgment message that was last
received from the partner application.
MERVA Link. A MERVA component that can be used

to interconnect several MERVA systems.
message. A string of fields in a predefined form used
to provide or request information. See also SWIFT
financial message.
message body. The part of the message that contains
the message text.
message category. A group of messages that are
logically related within an application.
message channel. In MQSeries distributed message
queuing, a mechanism for moving messages from one
queue manager to another. A message channel
comprises two message channel agents (a sender and a
receiver) and a communication link.
message channel agent (MCA). In MQSeries, a
program that transmits prepared messages from a
transmission queue to a communication link, or from a
communication link to a destination queue.
message control block (MCB). The definition of a
message, screen panel, net format, or printer layout
made during customization of MERVA.
LSN. Login sequence number.
Message Format Service (MFS). A MERVA direct

service that formats a message according to the
medium to be used, and checks it for formal
correctness.
LTERM. Logical terminal. Logical terminal names

have 4 characters in CICS and up to 8 characters in
IMS.
message header. The leading part of a message that

contains the sender and receiver of the message, the
message priority, and the type of message.
LT. Logical Terminal. The logical entity through which

users send and receive SWIFT II messages.
Message Integrity Protocol (MIP). In MERVA Link,

the protocol that controls the exchange of messages
between partner ASPs. This protocol ensures that any
loss of a message is detected and reported, and that no
message is duplicated despite system failures at any
point during the transfer process.
LTC. Logical terminal control.

LT-id. Nine character unique identifier for any LT,
consisting of
BBBB CC LL X
where X is the LT code.
LU. A VTAM logical unit.
M
maintain system history program (MSHP). A
program used for automating and controlling various
installation, tailoring, and service activities for a VSE
system.
MCA. Message channel agent.
MCB. Message control block.
MERVA ESA. The IBM licensed program Message
Entry and Routing with Interfaces to Various
Applications for ESA.
message-processing function. The various parts of

MERVA used to handle a step in the
message-processing route, together with any necessary
equipment.
message queue. See queue.
Message Queue Interface (MQI). The programming
interface provided by the MQSeries queue managers. It
provides a set of calls that let application programs
access message queuing services such as sending
messages, receiving messages, and manipulating
MQSeries objects.
Message Queue Manager (MQM). An IBM licensed
program that provides message queuing services. It is
part of the MQSeries set of products.
message reference number (MRN). A unique 16-digit
number assigned to each message for identification
405
purposes. The message reference number consists of an

8-digit domain identifier that is followed by an 8-digit
sequence number.
message sequence number (MSN). A sequence
number for messages transferred by MERVA Link.
message type (MT). A number, up to 7 digits long,
that identifies a message. SWIFT messages are
identified by a 3-digit number; for example SWIFT
message type MT S100.
MFS. Message Format Service.
MIP. Message Integrity Protocol.
MPDU. Message protocol data unit, which is defined
in P1.
MPP. In IMS, message-processing program.
MQA. MQ Attachment.
MQ Attachment (MQA). A MERVA feature that
provides message transfer between MERVA and a
user-written MQI application.
MTT. Message type table.

multisystem application. (1) An application program
that has various functions distributed across z/OS
systems in a multisystem environment. (2) In XCF, an
authorized application that uses XCF coupling services.
(3) In MERVA ESA, multiple instances of MERVA ESA
that are distributed among different z/OS systems in a
multisystem environment.
multisystem environment. An environment in which
two or more z/OS systems reside on one or more
processors, and programs on one system can
communicate with programs on the other systems.
With XCF, the environment in which XCF services are
available in a defined sysplex.
multisystem sysplex. A sysplex in which one or more
z/OS systems can be initialized as part of the sysplex.
In a multisystem sysplex, XCF provides coupling
services on all systems in the sysplex and requires an
XCF couple data set that is shared by all systems. See
also single-system sysplex.
MVS/ESA. Multiple Virtual Storage/Enterprise
Systems Architecture.
MQH. MQSeries queue handler.

MQI. Message queue interface.
MQM. Message queue manager.
MQS. MQSeries nucleus server.
MQSeries. A family of IBM licensed programs that
provides message queuing services.
MQSeries nucleus server (MQS). A MERVA
component that listens for messages on an MQI queue,
receives them, extracts a service request, and passes it
via the request queue handler to another MERVA ESA
instance for processing.
MQSeries queue handler (MQH). A MERVA
component that performs service calls to the Message
Queue Manager via the provided Message Queue
Interface.
MRN. Message reference number.
MSC. MERVA system control facility.
MSHP. Maintain system history program.
MSN. Message sequence number.
MT. Message type.
MTP. (1) Message transfer program. (2) Message
transfer process.
MTS. Message Transfer System.
MTSP. Message Transfer Service Processor.
406
Operations Guide
N
namelist. A WebSphere MQ for z/OS object that
contains a list of queue names.
nested message. A message that is composed of one
or more message types.
nested message type. A message type that is
contained in another message type. In some cases, only
part of a message type (for example, only the
mandatory fields) is nested, but this partial nested
message type is also considered to be nested. For
example, SWIFT MT 195 could be used to request
information about a SWIFT MT 100 (customer transfer).
The SWIFT MT 100 (or at least its mandatory fields) is
then nested in SWIFT MT 195.
nesting identifier. An identifier (a number from 2 to
255) that is used to access a nested message type.
network identifier. A single character that is placed
before a message type to indicate which network is to
be used to send the message; for example, S for SWIFT
network service access point (NSAP). The endpoint
of a network connection used by the SWIFT transport
layer.
NOPROMPT mode. One of two ways to display a
message panel. NOPROMPT mode is only intended for
experienced SWIFT Link users who are familiar with
the structure of SWIFT messages. With NOPROMPT
mode, only the SWIFT header, trailer, and pre-filled

fields and their tags are displayed. Contrast with
PROMPT mode.
NSAP. Network service access point.
nucleus server. A MERVA component that processes a
service request as selected by the request queue
handler. The service a nucleus server provides and the
way it provides it is defined in the nucleus server table
(DSLNSVT).
parallel processing. The simultaneous processing of

units of work by several servers. The units of work can
be either transactions or subdivisions of larger units of
work.
parallel sysplex. A sysplex that uses one or more
coupling facilities.
partner table (PT). In MERVA Link, the table that
defines how messages are processed. It consists of a
header and different entries, such as entries to specify
the message-processing parameters of an ASP or MTP.
PCT. Program Control Table (of CICS).
object. In MQSeries, objects define the properties of

queue managers, queues, process definitions, and
namelists.
PDE. Possible duplicate emission.
occurrence. See repeatable sequence.
PF key. Program-function key.
option. One or more characters added to a SWIFT

field number to distinguish among different layouts for
and meanings of the same field. For example, SWIFT
field 60 can have an option F to identify a first opening
balance, or M for an intermediate opening balance.
positional parameter. A parameter that must appear

in a specified location relative to other parameters.
origin identifier (origin ID). A 34-byte field of the

MERVA user file record. It indicates, in a MERVA and
SWIFT Link installation that is shared by several banks,
to which of these banks the user belongs. This lets the
user work for that bank only.
OSN. Output sequence number.
OSN acknowledgment. A collective term for the
various kinds of acknowledgments sent to the SWIFT
network.
output message. A message that has been received
from the SWIFT network. An output message has an
output header.
P
P1. In MERVA Link, a peer-to-peer protocol used by
cooperating message transfer processes (MTPs).
cooperating application support processes (ASPs).
cooperating command transfer processors (CTPs).
PDU. Protocol data unit.
process definition object. An MQSeries object that

contains the definition of an MQSeries application. A
queue manager uses the definitions contained in a
process definition object when it works with trigger
messages.
program-function key. A key on a display terminal
keyboard to which a function (for example, a
command) can be assigned. This lets you execute the
function (enter the command) with a single keystroke.
PROMPT mode. One of two ways to display a
message panel. PROMPT mode is intended for SWIFT
Link users who are unfamiliar with the structure of
SWIFT messages. With PROMPT mode, all the fields
and tags are displayed for the SWIFT message.
Contrast with NOPROMPT mode.
protocol data unit (PDU). In MERVA Link a PDU
consists of a structured sequence of implicit and
explicit data elements:
v Implicit data elements contain other data elements.
v Explicit data elements cannot contain any other data
elements.
PSN. Public switched network.
PSPDN. Packet switched public data network.
PSTN. Public switched telephone network.
packet switched public data network (PSPDN). A

public data network established and operated by
network common carriers or telecommunication
administrations for providing packet-switched data
transmission.
PT. Partner table.
panel. A formatted display on a display terminal.

Each page of a message is displayed on a separate
panel.
PTT. A national post and telecommunication authority

(post, telegraph, telephone).
PTF. Program Temporary Fix; a ServicePack that

contains one or more error corrections and
enhancements.
407
Q
QDS. Queue data set.
QSN. Queue sequence number.
queue. (1) In MERVA, a logical subdivision of the
MERVA queue data set used to store the messages
associated with a MERVA message-processing function.
A queue has the same name as the message-processing
function with which it is associated. (2) In MQSeries, an
object onto which message queuing applications can
put messages, and from which they can get messages.
A queue is owned and maintained by a queue
manager. See also request queue.
queue element. A message and its related control
information stored in a data record in the MERVA ESA
Queue Data Set.
queue management. A MERVA service function that
handles the storing of messages in, and the retrieval of
messages from, the queues of message-processing
functions.
queue manager. (1) An MQSeries system program that
provides queueing services to applications. It provides
an application programming interface so that programs
can access messages on the queues that the queue
manager owns. See also local queue manager and remote
queue manager. (2) The MQSeries object that defines the
attributes of a particular queue manager.
queue sequence number (QSN). A sequence number
that is assigned to the messages stored in a logical
queue by MERVA ESA queue management in
ascending order. The QSN is always unique in a queue.
It is reset to zero when the queue data set is formatted,
or when a queue management restart is carried out and
the queue is empty.
remote queue manager. In MQSeries, a queue

manager is remote to a program if it is not the queue
manager to which the program is connected.
repeatable sequence. A field or a group of fields that
is contained more than once in a message. For example,
if the SWIFT fields 20, 32, and 72 form a sequence, and
if this sequence can be repeated up to 10 times in a
message, each sequence of the fields 20, 32, and 72
would be an occurrence of the repeatable sequence.
In the TOF, the occurrences of a repeatable sequence
are numbered in ascending order from 1 to 32767 and
can be referred to using the occurrence number.
A repeatable sequence in a message may itself contain
another repeatable sequence. To identify an occurrence
within such a nested repeatable sequence, more than
one occurrence number is necessary.
reply message. In MQSeries, a type of message used
for replies to request messages.
reply-to queue. In MQSeries, the name of a queue to
which the program that issued an MQPUT call wants a
reply message or report message sent.
report message. In MQSeries, a type of message that
gives information about another message. A report
message usually indicates that the original message
cannot be processed for some reason.
request message. In MQSeries, a type of message used
for requesting a reply from another program.
request queue. The queue in which a service request
is stored. It resides in main storage and consists of a set
of request queue elements that are chained in different
queues:
v Requests waiting to be processed
v Requests currently being processed
v Requests for which processing has finished
R
RACF. Resource Access Control Facility.
RBA. Relative byte address.
RC message. Recovered message; that is, an IP
message that was copied from the control queue of an
inoperable or closed ASP via the recover command.
ready queue. A MERVA queue used by SWIFT Link to
collect SWIFT messages that are ready for sending to
the SWIFT network.
remote queue. In MQSeries, a queue that belongs to a
remote queue manager. Programs can put messages on
remote queues, but they cannot get messages from
remote queues. Contrast with local queue.
request queue handler (RQH). A MERVA ESA

component that handles the queueing and scheduling
of service requests. It controls the request processing of
a nucleus server according to rules defined in the finite
state machine.
Resource Access Control Facility (RACF). An IBM
licensed program that provides for access control by
identifying and verifying users to the system,
authorizing access to protected resources, logging
detected unauthorized attempts to enter the system,
and logging detected accesses to protected resources.
retype verification. See verification.
routing. In MERVA, the passing of messages from one
stage in a predefined processing path to the next stage.
RP. Regional processor.
RQH. Request queue handler.
408
Operations Guide
RRDS. Relative record data set.
SQL. Structured Query Language.
SR-ASPDU. The status report application support

PDU, which is used by MERVA Link for
acknowledgment messages.
SAF. System Authorization Facility.

SCS. SNA character string
SCP. System control process.
SDI. Sequential data set input. A batch utility used to
import messages from a sequential data set or a tape
into MERVA ESA queues.
SDO. Sequential data set output. A batch utility used
to export messages from a MERVA ESA queue to a
sequential data set or a tape.
SDY. Sequential data set system printer. A batch
utility used to print messages from a MERVA ESA
queue.
service request. A type of request that is created and
passed to the request queue handler whenever a
nucleus server requires a service that is not currently
available.
sequence number. A number assigned to each
message exchanged between two nodes. The number is
increased by one for each successive message. It starts
from zero each time a new session is established.
sign off. To end a session with MERVA.
sign on. To start a session with MERVA.
single-system sysplex. A sysplex in which only one
z/OS system can be initialized as part of the sysplex. In
a single-system sysplex, XCF provides XCF services on
the system, but does not provide signalling services
between z/OS systems. A single-system sysplex
requires an XCF couple data set. See also multisystem
sysplex.
small queue element. A queue element that is smaller
than the smaller of:
v The limiting value specified during the customization
of MERVA
v 32KB
SMP/E. System Modification Program Extended.
SN. Session number.
SNA. Systems network architecture.
SNA character string. In SNA, a character string
composed of EBCDIC controls, optionally mixed with
user data, that is carried within a request or response
unit.
SSN. Select sequence number.

subfield. A subdivision of a field with a specific
meaning. For example, the SWIFT field 32 has the
subfields date, currency code, and amount. A field can
have several subfield layouts depending on the way the
field is used in a particular message.
SVC. (1) Switched Virtual Circuit. (2) Supervisor call
instruction.
S.W.I.F.T. (1) Society for Worldwide Interbank
Financial Telecommunication s.c. (2) The network
provided and managed by the Society for Worldwide
Interbank Financial Telecommunication s.c.
SWIFT address. Synonym for bank identifier code.
SWIFT Correspondents File. The file containing the
bank identifier code (BIC), together with the name,
postal address, and zip code of each financial
institution in the BIC Directory.
SWIFT financial message. A message in one of the
SWIFT categories 1 to 9 that you can send or receive
via the SWIFT network. See SWIFT input message and
SWIFT output message.
SWIFT header. The leading part of a message that
contains the sender and receiver of the message, the
message priority, and the type of message.
SWIFT input message. A SWIFT message with an
input header to be sent to the SWIFT network.
SWIFT link. The MERVA ESA component used to link
to the SWIFT network.
SWIFT network. Refers to the SWIFT network of the
Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial
Telecommunication (S.W.I.F.T.).
SWIFT output message. A SWIFT message with an
output header coming from the SWIFT network.
SWIFTNet public key infrastructure (SWIFTNet
PKI). SWIFTs mandatory security software and
hardware installed with SWIFTNet Link.
SWIFT system message. A SWIFT general purpose
application (GPA) message or a financial application
(FIN) message in SWIFT category 0.
switched virtual circuit (SVC). An X.25 circuit that is
dynamically established when needed. It is the X.25
equivalent of a switched line.
SPA. Scratch pad area.
409
sysplex. One or more z/OS systems that communicate

and cooperate via special multisystem hardware
components and software services.
manually or by a test-key processing program using the

significant information in the message, such as
amounts, currency codes, and the message date.
System Authorization Facility (SAF). A z/OS or VSE

facility through which MERVA ESA communicates with
an external security manager such as RACF (for z/OS)
or the basic security manager (for VSE).
test-key processing program. A program that

automatically calculates and verifies a test key. The
Telex Link supports panels for input of test-key-related
data and an interface for a test-key processing program.
System Control Process (SCP). A MERVA Link

component that handles the transfer of MERVA ESA
commands to a partner MERVA ESA system, and the
receipt of the command response. It is associated with a
system control process entry in the partner table.
TFD. Terminal feature definitions table.
System Modification Program Extended (SMP/E). A

licensed program used to install software and software
changes on z/OS systems.
Systems Network Architecture (SNA). The
description of the logical structure, formats, protocols,
and operating sequences for transmitting information
units through, and for controlling the configuration and
operation of, networks.
T
tag. A field identifier.
TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
Protocol.
Telex Correspondents File. A file that stores data
about correspondents. When the user enters the
corresponding nickname in a Telex message, the
corresponding information in this file is automatically
retrieved and entered into the Telex header area.
telex header area. The first part of the telex message.
It contains control information for the telex network.
telex interface program (TXIP). A program that runs
on a Telex front-end computer and provides a
communication facility to connect MERVA ESA with the
Telex network.
Telex Link. The MERVA ESA component used to link
to the public telex network via a Telex substation.
Telex substation. A unit comprised of the following:
v Telex Interface Program
v A Telex front-end computer
v A Telex box
Terminal User Control Block (TUCB). A control block
containing terminal-specific and user-specific
information used for processing messages for display
devices such as screen and printers.
test key. A key added to a telex message to ensure
message integrity and authorized delivery. The test key
is an integer value of up to 16 digits, calculated
410
Operations Guide
TID. Terminal identification. The first 9 characters of a

bank identifier code (BIC).
TOF. Originally the abbreviation of tokenized form, the
TOF is a storage area where messages are stored so that
their fields can be accessed directly by their field names
and other index information.
TP. Transaction program.
transaction. A specific set of input data that triggers
the running of a specific process or job; for example, a
message destined for an application program.
transaction code. In IMS and CICS, an alphanumeric
code that calls an IMS message processing program or
a CICS transaction. Transaction codes have 4 characters
in CICS and up to 8 characters in IMS.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP). A set of communication protocols that
support peer-to-peer connectivity functions for both
local and wide area networks.
transmission queue. In MQSeries, a local queue on
which prepared messages destined for a remote queue
manager are temporarily stored.
trigger event. In MQSeries, an event (such as a
message arriving on a queue) that causes a queue
manager to create a trigger message on an initiation
queue.
trigger message. In MQSeries, a message that contains
information about the program that a trigger monitor is
to start.
trigger monitor. In MQSeries, a continuously-running
application that serves one or more initiation queues.
When a trigger message arrives on an initiation queue,
the trigger monitor retrieves the message. It uses the
information in the trigger message to start a process
that serves the queue on which a trigger event
occurred.
triggering. In MQSeries, a facility that allows a queue
manager to start an application automatically when
predetermined conditions are satisfied.
TUCB. Terminal User Control Block.
TXIP. Telex interface program.
U
UMR. Unique message reference.
unique message reference (UMR). An optional
feature of MERVA ESA that provides each message
with a unique identifier the first time it is placed in a
queue. It is composed of a MERVA ESA installation
name, a sequence number, and a date and time stamp.
UNIT. A group of related literals or fields of an MCB
definition, or both, enclosed by a DSLLUNIT and
DSLLUEND macroinstruction.
UNIX System Services (USS). A component of z/OS,
formerly called OpenEdition (OE), that creates a UNIX
environment that conforms to the XPG4 UNIX 1995
specifications, and provides two open systems
interfaces on the z/OS operating system:
v An application programming interface (API)
v An interactive shell interface
UN/EDIFACT. United Nations Standard for Electronic
Data Interchange for Administration, Commerce and
Transport.
USE. S.W.I.F.T. User Security Enhancements.
user file. A file containing information about all
MERVA ESA users; for example, which functions each
user is allowed to access. The user file is encrypted and
can only be accessed by authorized persons.
user identification and verification. The acts of
identifying and verifying a RACF-defined user to the
system during logon or batch job processing. RACF
identifies the user by the user ID and verifies the user
by the password or operator identification card
supplied during logon processing or the password
supplied on a batch JOB statement.
USS. UNIX System Services.
V
verification. Checking to ensure that the contents of a
message are correct. Two kinds of verification are:
v Visual verification: you read the message and
confirm that you have done so
v Retype verification: you reenter the data to be
verified
Virtual LU. An LU defined in MERVA Extended
Connectivity for communication between MERVA and
MERVA Extended Connectivity.
Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM). An access
method for direct or sequential processing of fixed and
variable-length records on direct access devices. The
records in a VSAM data set or file can be organized in
logical sequence by a key field (key sequence), in the
physical sequence in which they are written on the data

set or file (entry sequence), or by relative-record
number.
Virtual Telecommunications Access Method (VTAM).
An IBM licensed program that controls communication
and the flow of data in an SNA network. It provides
single-domain, multiple-domain, and interconnected
network capability.
VSAM. Virtual Storage Access Method.
VTAM. Virtual Telecommunications Access Method
(IBM licensed program).
W
WebSphere Business Integration for Financial
Networks (WebSphere BI for FN). An application
integration platform that serves as a single point
through which financial applications can gain access to
various networks. WebSphere BI for FN provides basic,
commonly used message processing services such as
access control, auditing, logging, and event handling;
these services are implemented as WebSphere MQ
Integrator message flows and subflows. Its
configuration and security models provide fine-grained
access control across organizations.
Windows service. A type of Windows application that
can run in the background of the Windows operating
system even when no user is logged on. Typically, such
a service has no user interaction and writes its output
messages to the Windows event log.
X
X.25. An ISO standard for interface to packet switched
communications services.
XCF. Abbreviation for cross-system coupling facility,
which is a special logical partition that provides
high-speed caching, list processing, and locking
functions in a sysplex. XCF provides the z/OS coupling
services that allow authorized programs on z/OS
systems in a multisystem environment to communicate
with (send data to and receive data from) authorized
programs on other z/OS systems.
XCF couple data sets. A data set that is created
through the XCF couple data set format utility and,
depending on its designated type, is shared by some or
all of the z/OS systems in a sysplex. It is accessed only
by XCF and contains XCF-related data about the
sysplex, systems, applications, groups, and members.
XCF group. The set of related members defined to
SCF by a multisystem application in which members of
the group can communicate with (send data to and
receive data from) other members of the same group.
411
All MERVA systems working together in a sysplex

must pertain to the same XCF group.
XCF member. A specific function of a multisystem
application that is defined to XCF and assigned to a
group by the multisystem application. A member
resides on one system in a sysplex and can use XCF
services to communicate with other members of the
same group.
412
Operations Guide
Bibliography
MERVA ESA Publications
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Application
Programming Interface Guide, SH12-6374
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Advanced MERVA
Link, SH12-6390
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Concepts and
Components, SH12-6381
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Customization Guide,
SH12-6380
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Diagnosis Guide,
SH12-6382
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Installation Guide,
SH12-6378
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Licensed Program
Specifications, GH12-6373
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Macro Reference,
SH12-6377
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Messages and Codes,
SH12-6379
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Operations Guide,
SH12-6375
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: System Programming
Guide, SH12-6366
v MERVA for ESA Version 4: Users Guide,
SH12-6376
MERVA ESA Components

Publications
v MERVA USE & Branch for Windows 2000:

Installation and Customization Guide, SH12-6335
Application Programming Guide, SH12-6336
Diagnosis Guide, SH12-6337
Installation and Customization Guide, SH12-6335
v MERVA Workstation Based Functions, SH12-6383
Other IBM Publications

v CICS Transaction Server for z/OS CICS Messages
and Codes, GC34-6241
v CICS Transaction Server for VSE/ESA Messages
and Codes, GC34-5561
v IMS V8 Messages and Codes Vol. 1, GC27-1301
v IMS V8 Messages and Codes Vol. 1, GC27-1302
v MQSeries for OS/390 Messages and Codes,
GC34-5375
S.W.I.F.T. Publications
The following are published by the Society for
Worldwide Interbank Financial
Telecommunication, s.c., in La Hulpe, Belgium:
v S.W.I.F.T. User Handbook
v S.W.I.F.T. Dictionary
v S.W.I.F.T. FIN Security Guide
v S.W.I.F.T. Card Readers User Guide
v MERVA Automatic Message Import/Export Facility:

Users Guide, SH12-6389
v MERVA Connection/2000, SH12-6339
v MERVA Connection/400, SH12-6340
v MERVA Directory Services, SH12-6367
v MERVA Extended Connectivity: Installation and
Users Guide, SH12-6157
v MERVA Message Processing Client for Windows
NT: Users Guide, SH12-6341
v MERVA-MQI Attachment Users Guide,
SH12-6714
v MERVA Traffic Reconciliation, SH12-6392
v MERVA USE: Administration Guide, SH12-6338
v MERVA USE & Branch for Windows 2000: Users
Guide, SH12-6334
413
414
Operations Guide
Index
Special characters
, (in command entry) 3
* (in command entry) 25
% (in command entry) 25
' (in command entry) 4
Numerics
0BOT (bottom frame MCB) 270
0COV (cover MCB) 271
0TOP (top frame MCB) 271
A
AAP (ABORTAP) command 78
abbreviation of commands 4
abnormal events 377
ABORT PENDING status 79, 80
ABORTAP command 78
ABORTLI command 82
ABORTLT command 84
AC00 (MERVA operator command
response) 6
AC01 (ASP list) 7, 137
AC02 (specific ASP/MTP) 7
AC03 (SCP list display) 7, 8
AC03 (SCP list) 147
AC04 (PT header display) 7, 148
ACLOSE command (MERVA Link) 152
ACMM (MSC Main Menu) 6
ACTIVTD status 68
ADDxx record (DWSAUTLD) 346
administration 5
authorize users 5
SPA file initialization
(DSLEBSPA) 305
transaction code 11
user type 5
AI (ASP activity indicator) 138
AI layer 78
ALI (ABORTLI) command 82
ALT (ABORTLT) command 84
Analyze commands (ACC) 178
AOPEN command 153
APC (application control) 84
APDU 03 116
APDU 05 112
APDU 06 108, 109
APDU 22 106
APDU 23 118
APDU 33 78, 79
APDU 35 84, 85
application control (APC) 84
application support filter (ASF) 141
application support process
FMT/ESA 193
application support process (ASP)
See ASP (application support process)
application support status identifier 138
AS error diagnostic type 138
ASF (application support filter) 141

ASP
FMT/ESA 193
ASP (application support process)
AC01 (ASP list) 137
AC02 (specific ASP/MTP) 140
ASP group 139, 169
ASP list subset 139
display 137
kick off 165
recover IP messages 172
reset ASP status subset 167
resynchronizing partner 166
scroll ASP list 155
start a sending ASP 154
ASP activity indicator (AI) 138
ASP Monitor
parameter display 149
astart
sending ASP 154
ASTART command (MERVA Link) 154
authenticator-key file
authorized/unauthorized
records 343
DWSAUTLD (authenticator-key file
load) 343
initializing 343
reload from sequential data set 343
report examples 358
unload to sequential data set 343
updating 343
authorized users 5
B
BACKWARD command 155
bankfile tape 324
batch message program (BMP) 13
batch programs
DSLSDI (input program) 203
DSLSDIR (input program) 213
DSLSDLR (load program) 231
DSLSDO (output program) 207
DSLSDOR (output program) 239
DSLSDUR (unload program) 257
DSLSDY (print program) 211
DSLSDYR (print program) 265
DSLSQB (queue batch utility) 365
in wait state 380
batch utilities
DSLBA12R 375
DSLBA13R 375
DSLBA14R 375
DSLBA15R 375
DSLBA16R 375
DSLBA17R 375
DSLBA50R 375
DSLBA51R 375
DSLBA52R 375
DSLBA53R 375
DSLQDUMC 375
batch utilities (continued)

journal utilities 375
queue data set utilities 375
User file utilities 375
BIC Directory
bankfile tape 324
DWSBICCV (BIC tape conversion
utility) 324, 332
DWSCORUT (SWIFT correspondents
file utility) 324
DWSCURUT (SWIFT currency code
file utility) 338
importing data under VSE 331
importing data under z/OS 329
BIC tape
importing data under VSE 342
importing data under z/OS 340
BIC tape conversion utility
(DWSBICCV) 321
JCL under VSE 332
JCL under z/OS 332
blank (in commands) 3
BMP (batch message program) 13
BW (BACKWARD) command 155
C
CANCEL command 15, 17, 18
CBT (computer based terminal) 82
CESN (transaction code) 12
CF (change LT name) command 19
CF command
MQI parameter 19
CFNEXT (change next function)
command 21
CFROUT (change routing table)
command 22
changing the STK key
(DWSAUTLD) 351
CHG0 record (DWSAUTLD) 351
CICS RDO definition 12
CICS transaction definitions 11
CL (CLOSE) command (SWIFT link) 88
CLOSE command (SWIFT link) 88
CMD (operator command function) 70
coding control statements
DSLFLUT (general file utility) 308
DWSCORUT (SWIFT correspondents
file utility) 327
DWSCURUT (SWIFT currency code
file utility) 338
comma (in commands) 3
command
abbreviation 4
format 3
privileged 151
program (DSLCMO) 3
reference 391
words 4
command help 5
compression format 270
415
computer based terminal (CBT) 82

Configuration export commands
(ACC) 179
console program (DSLNMOP) 3
control queue (MERVA Link) 141
convention 3
CSSN (transaction code) 11
customization (restriction) 6
D
DA (DISPLAY) command 157
data sets
journal 299, 380
queue 380, 383
DCLOG (display message counter log)
command 23
DDS (display delivery subset mnemonics)
command (SWIFT link) 90
DEL0 record (DWSAUTLD) 349
delivery subset mnemonics 90
DF (display function) command 24
DFHPLT entry 12
diagnostic
trace 385
diagnostic code 138
directory tape conversion utility
(DWSBICCV) 324
DISABLE command 156
DISPLAY command 157
Display explanation commands
(ACC) 182
Display parameters commands
(ACC) 180
Display resource status commands
(ACC) 180
display station (command entry) 3
display the journal data set status 55
DIVA (display X.25 interface info)
command (SWIFT Link) 92
DL (display line/link) command (SWIFT
link) 98
DLA (display active line/link) command
(SWIFT link) 102
DLMC (display status of large message
cluster) command 30
DLMCT (display statistics of large
message cluster) command 32
DM (display message) command 34
DNS (display nucleus servers)
command 37
DP (display program) command 39
DPTH command 158
DQ (display queue) command 41
DQSORTED (display queues sorted)
command 45
DSA (Display Specific ASP)
command 159
DSA command 159
DSLBA12R (queue data set utility) 375
DSLBA13R (journal set utility) 375
DSLBA15R (User file utility) 375
416
Operations Guide

DSLCAS (startup transaction) 12
DSLCMO (startup transaction/
command) 3
DSLCNTUT (message counter log report
utility)
environment 363
JCL under VSE 363
JCL under z/OS 363
DSLEBSPA (SPA file initialization) 305
DSLFLUT (general file utility) 307
coding control statements 308
combined owner and generic
listing 307
environment 310
generic listing 307
initializing a file 307
JCL for VSE (nicknames file) 315
JCL for VSE (telex correspondents
file) 319
JCL for z/OS (nicknames file) 313
JCL for z/OS (telex correspondents
file) 317
listing records 307
owner listing 307
report layout 308
running under CICS 310
running under IMS 310
SWIFT correspondents file 321
SWIFT currency code file 335
DSLFNT macro 154
PFFORM parameter 270
DSLISNCQ (ISN control queue) 193
DSLISYNP (IMS syncpoint) 72
DSLJRDUL (DB2 batch utility) 300
DSLNCU01 (user exit) 6
DSLNMOP (console program) 3
DSLNPTT (nucleus program table) 17,
72
DSLOSNCQ 193
DSLPARM macro 44, 305
DSLPRM module 5
PRTNAME parameter 223, 234, 251,
261, 272
SDDB2 parameter 223, 235, 251, 261,
272
DSLQDS 42
DSLQDSUT (queue data set utility) 281
JCL under VSE 286, 288
JCL under z/OS 282, 283, 284
DSLQDUMC (queue management
message count recovery utility) 375
DSLQMNT (large message cluster
maintenance utility) 291
JCL under VSE 204
JCL under z/OS 204
ISPF panel 213
JCL under VSE 219
JCL under z/OS 218
runtime parameters 219
input data set layout 231
JCL under VSE 232
JCL under z/OS 231
DSLSDLR (load program) (continued)

DSLSDO (output program)
EXEC parameters 209
JCL under VSE 208
JCL under z/OS 208
ISPF panel 239
JCL under VSE 246
JCL under z/OS 245
runtime parameters 240, 247
JCL under VSE 259
JCL under z/OS 258
output data set layout 257
DSLSDY (print program)
EXEC parameters 212
JCL under VSE 211
JCL under z/OS 211
JCL under VSE 267
JCL under z/OS 265
DSLSQB (Queue batch utility)
Control statements 366
JCL 365
Tracing 373
DTE (data terminal equipment)
address 96
DU (display user) command 47
dump 17
load/reload)
FORMATx record 345
load) 343, 349
ADDxx record 346
calling the program in VSE 344
calling the program in z/OS 344
changing the STK key 351
CHG0 record 351
DEL0 record 349
EXC0 record 350
function keywords 344
input records 344
JCL for VSE 354, 356, 357
JCL for z/OS 351, 352, 353
KEYS 344
LIS0 record 347
LOAD 343
loading authenticator-key file 352,
354
RELOAD 343
reload authenticator-key file 353, 356
REPxx record 347
UNL0 record 350
UNLOAD 343
unload authenticator-key file 352,
354, 357
DWSBICCV (BIC tape conversion
utility) 321, 324
DWSCORUT (SWIFT correspondents file
utility)
environment 329
general 321, 324
DWSCORUT (SWIFT correspondents file

utility) (continued)
report layout 327
DWSCURUT (SWIFT currency code file
utility) 335
environment 340
general 338
report layout 338
DWSLINx (line definition) 88, 92
DWSLOG2 (login authorization
table) 105, 117
DWSLTT (logical terminal table) 78, 92,
98, 106, 108
DWSNAEVV (user abend) 383
DWSNLNKV (network layer
program) 94
DWSVTMLC (MERVA ESA VTAM
interface program) 95
dynamic dispatching group 59
E
ECB (event control blocks) 40
EDIFACT FINPAY
convert SWIFT MT121 to 250
convert to SWIFT MT121 222
EKAISNCQ (ISN control queue) 193
EKAOSNCQ 193
EKAPT (partner table) 137
ENABLE command 160
ENLPARM macro 135
ENLPRM module 5
error recovery (Telex Link) 385
event control blocks (ECBs) 40
EXC0 record (DWSAUTLD) 350
EXPLAIN command 161
Extension for SWIFTNet
DDS command 77
DL command 77, 100
MERVA ESA considerations 77
session keys 127
SETLT command 78
F
FIN (financial application) 78
FIN applications
abort 78
quit 112
select 116
financial application (FIN) 78
Financial Message Transfer/ESA 193
FMT/ESA 193
FORCE command 49
force off MERVA ESA user 49
format of commands 3
FORMATL 281
FORMATx record (DWSAUTLD) 345
FORWARD command 155
function status 24
FW (FORWARD) command 155
G
general file utility (DSLFLUT)
335
general problems 379
group correspondent LT 345
group home LT 345
K
307, 321,
H
HA (HOLD) command 162
hardcopy printer tasks 15
help 5
help (command words) 5
Help commands (ACC) 186
HF (hold function) command 51
HF command
MQI parameter 51
HOLD command 162
holding a message-processing
function 51
I
importing data from BIC Directory
Update tape
VSE 331
z/OS 329
importing data from BIC tape
VSE 342
z/OS 340
IMS module 383
IMS syncpoint (DSLISYNP) 72
initialize
file 307
nicknames file 313
telex correspondents file 317
input
program (DSLSDI) 203
program (DSLSDIR) 213
records for DWSAUTLD 344
sequence number (ISN) 98
input sequence number 193
control queue 193
DSLISNCQ 193
EKAISNCQ 193
IPRECOV command 163
ISN 193
control queue 193
DSLISNCQ 193
EKAISNCQ 193
ISN (input sequence number) 98
deleting 196
initialization 194
italics 4
J
journal data set switch 56
journal data sets
full 380
JCL under VSE (printing)
JSET command 53
JSTAT command 55
JSWITCH command 56, 57
KA (KICKOFF) command 165

KICKOFF command 165
300
LA (LSTALL) command 167

large message cluster
statistics 32
status 30
large message cluster maintenance utility
(DSLQMNT) 291
LASTUMR 282
LC control message 387
LCRESET command 166
LCRS (LCRESET) command 166
LI (LOGIN) command (SWIFT link) 104
line definition (DWSLINx) 88, 92
line format 203, 207, 213, 231, 239, 257,
265
link layer (N-disconnect) 84
LIS0 record (DWSAUTLD) 347
List commands (ACC) 187
list subset (ASP) 139
load
program (DSLSDLR) 231
loading authenticator-key file
JCL for VSE 354
JCL for z/OS 351
logical terminal
control (LTC) 84
group correspondent 345
group home 345
name length 26
table (DWSLTT) 78, 92, 98, 106, 108
login authorization table
DWSLOG2 105, 117
LOGIN command (SWIFT link) 104
login sequence number (LSN) 98
LOGO (LOGOUT) command (SWIFT
link) 108
LOGOUT command (SWIFT link) 108
LRRESET command 166
LRRS (LRRESET) command 166
LSN (login sequence number) 98
LSTALL command 167
LSTINOP command 168
LTC (logical terminal control) 84
M
mandatory parameters 5
MAS user ID 5
master logical terminal
abort 84
set parameters 121
MERVA Link
control facility 387
error messages 387
LC control message 387
problems 387
MERVA Message Processing
Client/Server 201
MERVA-to-MERVA Financial Message
Transfer/ESA 193
Index
417
MERVA ESA
functions 129
MERVA ESA System Control (MSC) 70
message counter log 23
message counter log report utility
(DSLCNTUT) 363
message transfer process (MTP) 140
message transfer status code 138
messages
check 219, 247
input from data set 213
list 268
output to data set 239
print 265
reload 231
unload 257
messages (display command) 34
mode of queue trace 61
mode of routing trace 65
MQI parameter
CF command 19
function table DSLFNTT 5
HF command 51
SF command 68
MSC (MERVA System Control Facility)
explanation panels 161
MERVA Link control 137
MERVA System Control 6
panels 6
partner MERVA System Control 7
partner system connection 8
MSC (MERVA ESA system control) 5
MSC (MERVA ESA System Control) 70
MSGDST field 214, 220, 241, 248, 269
MSGNET field 214, 220, 241, 248, 269
MT error diagnostic type 138
MTP (message transfer process) 140
multisystem environment 13
starting MERVA ESA 13
multisystem environment, restart 380
N
N-disconnect (link layer) 84
NC (NEWCOPY) command 57
NEWCOPY (replace a routing module)
command 57
next ASP group 169
next SCP group 169
NEXTGRP command 169
NG (NEXTGRP) command 169
nicknames file 313
NODE command 170
NOPROMPT format 270
notation convention 3
Notices 397
NPTPARM field 72
NSAP (network service access point)
names
See VTAM interface info
nucleus program table (DSLNPTT) 17,
72
418
Operations Guide
operating console 3
operator command function (CMD) 70
optional parameters 4
OSN 193
control queue 193
DSLOSNCQ 193
EKAOSNCQ 193
OSN (output sequence number) 98
deleting 196
display 196
modification 196
output
program (DSLSDOR) 239
output sequence number 193
control queue 193
DSLOSNCQ 193
EKAOSNCQ 193
output sequence number (OSN) 98
receiving process error diagnostic

information types 138
RECOVER command 172
REFRESH command 173
reloading the authenticator-key file
JCL for VSE 356
JCL for z/OS 353
remove user from system 49
REPAIR 282
REPxx record (DWSAUTLD) 347
RESET command 174
Reset commands (ACC) 189
RESHUT command 15, 64
restart in a multisystem
environment 380
restrictions 5
resynchronizing partner ASP 166
REXX batch programs
DSLSDIR 213
DSLSDLR 231
DSLSDOR 239
DSLSDUR 257
DSLSDYR 265
routing trace facility 65
RP ERR (receiving process error) 138
RS (RESHUT) command 64
RSWITCH command 65
RU (request unit) sizes
RW (RSWITCH) command 65
P
P (STOP) command 74
parameters (general description) 3
partner table (PT / EKAPT) 137
PDM indicator (MERVA Link) 172
performance, measure 221, 250, 271
PF keys (program function keys) 5
PLTPI entry 12, 13
PLU (primary logical unit) name 95
preload (session keys) 126
PRFORM, DSLFNT parameter 270
print program
(DSLSDY) 211
(DSLSDYR) 265
printer tasks 15
PRIORITY command 58
program function keys (PF keys) 5
PROMPT format 270
PRTNAME, DSLPARM parameter 223,
234, 251, 261, 272
PS (NODE) command 170
PT (partner table) 137
PT header display 148, 158
Q
Q (QUIT) command 112
QSWITCH command 61
query mode of queue trace 61
query mode of routing trace 65
queue batch utility (DSLSQB) 365
queue data set utility (DSLQDSUT) 281
queue format 203, 207, 213, 231, 239, 257
queue key table 42
queue management message count
recovery utility (DSLQDUMC) 375
Queue trace facility 61
quick reference 391
QUIT command 112
quotation marks (in command entry) 4
QW (QSWITCH) command 61
S
S (START) command (Base
Functions) 72
SA (ASTART) command (MERVA
Link) 154
SCP (system control process)
AC03 (SCP list) 147
display 146
SCP group 169
scroll SCP list 155
scrolling through ASP list 155
scrolling through SCP list 155
SDDB2, DSLPARM parameter 223, 235,
251, 261, 272
SDS batch programs
DSLSDO (output program) 207
DSLSDY (print program) 211
DSLSQB (queue batch utility) 365
SE (SELECT) command 116
SELECT command 116
select sequence number (SSN) 98
session keys (preloaded) 126
session number (SN) 98
SET command 174
Set commands (ACC) 191
set the journal switch status 53
SETLT command 121
SF (start function) command 68

SF command
MQI parameter 68
SH (SHUTDOWN) command 70
SHUTDOWN command 15, 70
sign off a telex session 133
sign on to
CICS/ESA 12
CICS/MVS 12
CICS/VSE 11
IMS/ESA 13
SIT (system initialization table) 12, 13
SLT (SETLT) command 121
SLU (secondary logical unit) name 95
SN (session number) 98
snap dump 17
SPA file initialization (DSLEBSPA) 305
special characters (in command entry) 4
SSN (select sequence number) 98
start
automatic start of MERVA ESA 12
connection to SWIFT network 104
MERVA ESA 11, 13
message-processing function 68
program 72
swiftii 77
telex 129
telex session 135
transaction (DSLCAS) 12
START command (Base Functions) 72
Start commands (ACC) 190
starting
MERVA ESA in a multisystem
environment 13
startup transaction (DSLCAS) 12
startup transaction/command
(DSLCMO) 3
stop
hardcopy printer tasks 15
MERVA ESA 15, 17
swiftii 77
telex 129
user sessions 15
STOP command 74
subset 139
SW (SWIFTII) command 124
SWBHLT field 214, 220, 241, 248, 269
SWIFT connection, problems with 383
SWIFT correspondents file
DWSCORUT (utility) 321, 324
initializing under CICS/MVS 321
initializing under IMS 321
initializing under VSE 323
listing records under CICS/MVS 322
listing records under IMS 322
listing records under VSE 323
SWIFT currency code file
DWSCURUT (utility) 335, 338
SWIFT Link
line format 203
problems 383
SWIFT Link (continued)

queue data set full 383
SWIFT Link program (SWIFTAUT) 18
SWIFTAUT (SWIFT Link program) 18
SWIFTII command 124
switch the journal data sets 56
SYNPOINT (DSLISYNP) 72
SYSOUT 211, 265
system administration
See administration
system console (command entry) 3
system control (MSC) 5
system control process (SCP)
See SCP (system control process)
system initialization table (SIT) 12, 13
T
T (TERMINAT) command 17
T-disconnect (transport layer) 78
telex correspondents file
telex session status 131
TERMINAT command 15, 17, 18
Terminate commands (ACC) 192
transaction code 3, 11, 26
transport layer (T-disconnect) 78
TUCBCOMP field 270
TUCBROWN field 270
TUCFRAMB field 270
TUCFRAMT field 271
TUCMSGID field 271
TXDISP command 130, 131
TXOFF command 133
TXON command 135
V
VSAM data sets 11
VTAM bind parameters
VTAM interface info 96
VTAM logon mode name
W
wait state
batch program in 380
transaction in 379
window (SWIFT link) 106
window size (MERVA Link)
141
X
XPL (EXPLAIN) command
161
Y
Y (PRIORITY) command
58
U
UMR (unique message reference) 282
underlined parameters 5
unique message reference (UMR) 282
UNL0 record (DWSAUTLD) 350
unload
program (DSLSDUR) 257
unloading authenticator-key file
JCL under VSE 354, 357
JCL under z/OS 352
unsolicited messages 18, 34
update tape conversion utility
(DWSBICCV) 324
user
abend codes 383
commands 3
exit (DSLNCU01) 6
ID restriction 5, 6
stop session 15
type 5
User file 5
utilities, batch 375
Index
419
420
Operations Guide
MERVA Requirement Request

Use the form overleaf to send us requirement requests for the MERVA product. Fill
in the blank lines with the information that we need to evaluate and implement
your request. Provide also information about your hardware and software
environments and about the MERVA release levels used in your environment.
Provide a detailed description of your requirement. If you are requesting a new
function, describe in full what you want that function to do. If you are requesting
that a function be changed, briefly describe how the function works currently,
followed by how you are requesting that it should work.
If you are a customer, provide us with the appropriate contacts in your
organization to discuss the proposal and possible implementation alternatives.
If you are an IBM employee, include at least the name of one customer who has
this requirement. Add the name and telephone number of the appropriate contacts
in the customers organization to discuss the proposal and possible implementation
alternatives. If possible, send this requirement by e-mail to wbifnccb@de.ibm.com.
For comments on this book, use the form provided at the back of this publication.
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or
distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any
obligation to you.
Send the fax to:
To: MERVA Development, Dept. 5640
Attention: Stefan Weigeldt
IBM Deutschland Entwicklung GmbH
Schoenaicher Str. 220
D-71032 Boeblingen
Germany
Fax Number: +49-7031-16-4881

E-mail: wbifnccb@de.ibm.com
421
MERVA Requirement Request

To: MERVA Development, Dept. 5640
Attention: Stefan Weigeldt
Schoenaicher Str. 220
D-71032 Boeblingen
Germany
Fax Number: +49-7031-16-4881

E-mail: wbifnccb@de.ibm.com
Page 1 of ______
Customers Name
________________________________________________________________________________
Customers Address
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Customers
Telephone/Fax
Contact Person at
Customers Location
Telephone/Fax
MERVA
Version/Release
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Operating System
Sub-System
Version/Release
________________________________________________________________________________
Hardware
________________________________________________________________________________
Requirement
Description
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Expected Benefits
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
422
Operations Guide
Readers Comments Wed Like to Hear from You

MERVA for ESA
Operations Guide
Version 4 Release 1
Publication No. SH12-6375-08
We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy,
organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the
information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.
For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your
IBM business partner, or your authorized remarketer.
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use
the personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.
Comments:
Thank you for your support.

Submit your comments using one of these channels:
v Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.
v Send a fax to the following number: +49-7031-16-4892
v Send your comments via e-mail to: swsdid@de.ibm.com
If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:
Name
Address
Company or Organization
Phone No.
E-mail address
SH12-6375-08
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers Comments Wed Like to Hear from You
Cut or Fold
Along Line
_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ do
_ _ not
_ _ _staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______
PLACE
POSTAGE
STAMP
HERE

Information Development, Dept. 0446
Schoenaicher Strasse 220
71032 Boeblingen
Germany
________________________________________________________________________________________
Please do not staple
Fold and Tape
Fold and Tape
SH12-6375-08
Cut or Fold
Along Line

Program Number: 5648-B29
SH12-6375-08

Merva ESA Operations Guide

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationMainframe Merva ESA Operations Guide

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Merva ESA Operations Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Merva ESA Operations Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MERVA for ESA

MERVA for ESA

Part 1. MERVA ESA Operator

Chapter 2. Starting MERVA ESA . . . . 11

ESA under CICS/VSE . . . . .

Chapter 3. Stopping MERVA ESA . . . 15

Copyright IBM Corp. 1987, 2007

Displaying the Large Message Cluster Statistics

Chapter 5. Operating the SWIFT Link

Considerations when using WebSphere BI for FN

Chapter 6. Operating the Telex Link

Signing Off the Session with the Telex Interface

Reset Resource Characteristics .

Chapter 7. Operating MERVA Link

Chapter 9. Operating Financial

Overview of the MERVA Link Control within MSC

Initializing an Input Sequence Number . . .

Chapter 10. Running the MERVA

Chapter 11. Sequential Data Set Input

Chapter 8. Operating MERVA Link

Part 2. Running Batch Programs

DSLSDI - Input Program under z/OS .

Chapter 12. Sequential Data Set

Chapter 13. System Printer Output

Chapter 14. Sequential Data Set Input

Chapter 15. Sequential Data Set Load

Data Set Names . .

Chapter 16. Sequential Data Set

Part 3. Maintaining MERVA ESA

Chapter 19. Using the Queue Data Set

Chapter 20. Using the Large Message

Chapter 17. Sequential Data Set

Chapter 21. Maintaining the Journal

Unload/Reload Data Set Layout

Printing the Journal Data Sets . . . .

Chapter 18. Sequential Data Set Print

Chapter 22. Using the SPA File

Chapter 24. Maintaining the

Chapter 25. Maintaining the Telex

Chapter 26. Maintaining the SWIFT

Chapter 27. Maintaining the SWIFT

Chapter 28. Maintaining the

Chapter 29. Using the Message

Chapter 30. Using Queue Batch Utility

Chapter 31. More Batch Utilities . . . 375

Part 4. Reacting to Abnormal

Chapter 33. How to React to Problems

Chapter 34. How to React to Problems

Chapter 35. How to React to Problems

Base Functions Operator Commands .

Appendix B. Notices . . . . . . . . 397

Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations

Part 5. Appendixes . . . . . . . . 389

Appendix A. MERVA ESA Operator

MERVA Requirement Request . . . . 421

About This Book

Copyright IBM Corp. 1987, 2007

This edition reflects minor editorial changes.